Home

User's Manual

1. 7 1 TA PUNCTIONS ANG VY DCS ra EIE EIE EXER PEE 7 2 7 2 COMMUNICATION Specifications 7 16 7 3 Communication Function 1 Computer Link eere 7 20 7 4 Communication Function 2 General purpose Serial Communication 7 36 7 5 Communication Function 3 PC PLC Link eere esee 7 56 7 6 Communication Function 4 MODBUS Communication 7 75 7 7 Ethernet Communication 5 7 81 6 Application Cassellte iori eei den eter een a 8 1 8 1 Expansion of Application 8 2 3 2 Cassetes ER 8 3 6 3 d 8 5 9 High speed Counter Pulse Output PWM Output Functions For Tr TY DO p 9 1 9 1 Overview of Each Functions 1 9 2 9 3 High speed Counter FUNC ON 9 11 9 4 Pulse 9 19 9 5 PWM Output Function Pulse I O
2. 013 h E hu Pr l l tpr F103 DSHL WR 10 8104 8100 28 H Apa wl 53 RECV for Unit No 1 00 DF F Wy H MV H100 se F148 DT 10 OO 0 HK 1000 OT 100 SEND for Unit No 1 bd 01 i bF F WV H AT 10 FO MV H 1001 OT F145 SEND DT 10 DT 110 gt 1010 75 RECY for Unit Mo 2 02 GF 7 0 FO MV H1002 nd 7146 RECY ODT 10 NA HTU 1000 OT 120 SEND for Unit Mo 1 J 03 i DF IFO Wy H 1002 e di F145 SEND DT 10 DT 130 gt K 1010 P Reference For information on the F145 SEND and F146 RECV instructions 7 7 3 Communication Tool Software Configurator WD 7 97 7 7 10 Communication Function 2 General purpose Serial Communication Ethernet The supplement is described below to conduct Ethernet communication by the general purpose serial communication 3 Reference 7 4 Communication Function 2 General purpose Serial Communication Overview e Data can be sent and received between the FP X and an external device using Ethernet e Data is read from and written to an external device connected to Ethernet by means of FP X data registers and the programs are required for the FP X FP X
3. 4 4 4 5 I O Allocation of FP X Add on Cassette eee eere eere eere 4 6 5 Install ation and ssi iuo ra eo aa cea ou popu usn ausu unn eon 5 1 DT ANS TAMA zai uid conce E 5 2 5 2 Installation Using Expansion 5 5 5 3 Expansion Method of FPO Expansion Unit seessss 5 8 5 4 How to Install Add on 5 9 DO POWE SUPPI eee Tet 5 11 5 6 5 17 5 7 Wiring of terminal ico 5 20 5 8 Wiring of Add on Cassette Terminal Block serus 5 22 5 9 Handling Of ecu excess 5 25 5 10 Safety P 5 29 6 Tool Port and USB 6 1 6 1 TOO Port and USB te ceu utis en pas a 6 2 6 2 FUNCTIONS OF TOOL POLL iiio iie soc sees sees te eee Co on ti case nm 6 3 63 USB EE 6 6 7
4. 9 51 10 High speed counter Pulse Output and PWM Output functions For Ry TY DO 10 1 10 1 Overview of Each 10 2 10 3 High speed Counter Function 10 9 10 4 Pulse Output Function Pulse Cassette 10 20 10 5 PWM Output Function Pulse I O Cassette 10 51 TI Security FUNCIONS 11 1 Type 11 2 11 2 Password Protect FUNGUO ciue cote eoo ea 11 3 n Es Upload Protec 9 PEE PH EE 11 7 11 4 Setting Function for FP Memory Loader cesses 11 9 11 5 Table of Security 11 13 12 Other FunclloBS aieo Meus 12 1 12 1 Transfer Function between Memories 12 2 12 2 Function of Master Memory Cassette 12 3 123 PTS ICW NSTU OM iioii aiii va aaiae aia 12 8 12 4 Analog Potentiometer asic aise case
5. esee 1 1 1 1 Features and Functions of the 1 2 2 UnU eer 1 6 1 3 Restrictions on Unit 1 10 Programming MOONS 1 14 2 Specifications and Functions of Control Unit 2 1 2 1 Pans ANG m 2 2 2 2 Power Supply SpecifiCcatiols ieseeirie rere ave aveva cus 2 5 2 9 Input SDecifiCatlons siae ctae ua NANEN N 2 6 2 4 Outp t SpecifiCatlotis ass errori ec eua gei 2 8 2 5 Limitations on Number of Simultaneous Input Output On Points 2 11 2 6 Terminal LAV OUL ento coa sa esa o NE e Mu S xoa Co aa eo PE 2 20 3 Expansion Cassette and Expansion FPO Adapter Specifications 3 1 CMM EXDaMSIOMIMGUNOG oes 3 2 3 2 FPX Expansion UNIT e A 3 3 3 9 FP X Expansion FPO Adapter EDEN E aoa cesa cac an 3 11 AVO a E T EL 4 1 Veiis 4 2 4 2 Allocation of FP X Control Unit E GE S GR 4 3 4 3 FPO Expansion Unit 4 3 4 4 Allocation of FPO Expansion Unit 2
6. CM c ear h n d mi ir bore niii EE M GEM 345 Initial speed Max amp peed Piceleraben Time Div Deniabon counter clans output Not weed Lir oe U 48 Hr Kur Lb i Fi H SPOH DT 290 KI Pulse nutput instruction Home natum The cata tole headed by DT200 uses nib mne A eum CH Thun data tabla handed by 200 i und or m ro Mv DT 90052 Near deceleratan stan Pulse output diagram Pear home mergi Home seren A3 OW ANO ON NX ON 1000 Hz 10 37 10 4 8 Pulse Output Instruction F172 JOG operation e This instruction is used for JOG operation by obtaining a pulse from the desired output when the execution condition trigger turns on The pulse of 300 Hz is output fram Y 100 GEB TUUM Man during X3 is turned on Fi DMV K300 DT3O u When this program runs the data table and F172 DT300 the pulse output diagram will be as shown below Data table DT300 DT301 DT302 DT303 _ Pulse output diagram X3 JOG ON command OFF 300Hz Y 100 Pulse 1 Control code H constant 00000000 Fixed Li L Target value setting Mode with no target value 1 Target value match stop mode Buty on width
7. Increment input mode decrement input mode 2 phase input mode individual input mode and direction discrimination mode are supported Note Differs depending on combinations Encoder Positioning control based on pulse output supported FP X Pulse output MONT nn JHBT D 4 1 Motor Pulse output p JUUL Pulse direction and clockwise counter clockwise output are supported Heater control based on PWM output function supported The pulse output at any duty ratio can be picked up with special instruction you increase the pulse width rv ll amp Heating increases you decrease it Analog potentiometer volume dial An analog potentiometer volume dial is provided as a standard feature This can be used in applications such as analog timers without using the programming tools Heating decreases Realtime clock function can be added Optional FP X master memory cassette AFPX MRTC and backup battery enables the realtime clock function 1 5 1 2 Unit Types 1 2 1 FP X Control Units No of I O Specifications Product No points Powersupply Input Output Connection Relay type Ry type AFPX C1AR AFPX C30R 16 14 100 to 240 V AC 24 V DC AFPX C60R 32 28 Common Terminal block AFPX C14RD po arities amp common AFPX C30RD 16 14 24 V DC AFPX C60RD 32 28 Transistor type NPN Tr type AFPX C14T AFPX C30T 16 14 10
8. 2000 Hz 5 Acceleration time 150 ms Drs Devisen counter DTA Lu Nat used hore reiuzm Cuv f Pulse output instruction Home return The daia table headed by ard pakat i ane f Ci CHO 171 SPDH DI 200 balk m vrac ma oe e s X5 Mor ro Hine ro MV OH pi Hear hore Start J T u Pulse output diagram Hear home sensor Home serisor AZ X5 QN X4 ON 150 mmi 150 irr 9 36 Sample program Home return operation using CH1 Plus direction When X3 turns on a pulse is output from CW output Y2 of the specified channel CH1 and the return to home begins When X6 turns on deceleration begins and when X5 turns on home return is completed After the return to home is completed the elapsed value areas DT90352 and DT90353 are cleared to O OV 24 V DC Home return start Pulse output CW Eum m hi 5 Home input 0 E Near home input Mitar driver side Uk side Molo Home sensor XU Hear home sensor Control aod i inital speed 200 Hz DUM i pats Max speed 1000 Hr Acceleration time 150 mm 37204
9. DIN standard 4 2 rail attachment Ki i When the power of 24 V DC is supplied and the communication starts with the control unit the LED lights When the communication cannot be carried out it goes out When the communication starts with the control unit the LED lights When the communication cannot be carried out it goes out When the FPO expansion unit is not connected it flashes ERROR Red When an error occurs on the connection with the FPO expansion unit it flashes FP X expansion bus connector Connects the FP X control unit or FP X expansion unit The provided expansion cable AFPX ECO8 is used for the connection It is not necessary to specify the TERM terminal setting for the expansion FPO adapter Power supply connector 24V DC Supply the power of 24 V DC The provided power supply cable AFP0581 is used for the connection Supply the power from the service power supply for the input of the FP X control unit FPO expansion connector Connects the FPO expansion unit Expansion hook This hook is used to secure the FPO expansion unit DIN rail attachment lever This lever enables the expansion unit to attach to a DIN rail at a touch The lever is also used for installation on the mounting plate slim type AFP0803 Mem Specifications Rated voltage 24 V DC Voltage regulation 21 6 to 26 4 V DC General sp
10. o D2 gt s D1 F17 Higher lower SWAP The higher byte and lower byte of D P17 byte in 16 bit PSWAP are exchanged data exchange F18 16 bit data BXCH D1 Exchange the data between D1 and exchange Control instruction Control instruction O F19 Auxiliary jump SJP S The program jumps to the label EEE continues from there 16 bit data S D eee pe oo Jor s fefelelefele F21 32 bit data D S D 0 1 D S 1 S gt D 1 D adamon PBe E mue m eee 9000056 addition P 2 D B m addition PD 2 D eee subtraction E m o mem subtraction me Sees TO 9900900 27 subtraction S2 D supvection_ po noA OH 28 subtraction S2 D m meme uo eee multiplication Se D S1 S2 1 S2 5 quotient 0 1 F31 32 bit data S1 1 S1 X S2 1 S2 gt D 3 D 2 P31 multiplication x D a D 16 bit data 1 82 5quotient D division x D 079015 D 32 bit data D96 division PD96 16 bit data multiplication Pu S2 D unda DT9016 DT9015 S1 X S2 5 D 2 result in 16 bits r NEN increment P 1 32 bit data D 1 F37 16 bit data P37 F38 32 bit data 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 gt 0 1 D D 1 gt D 0 1 D 1 gt D 1 D 51 1 1 2 1 S2 gt D 1 D 32 bit data multiplication D resul
11. poi gx LAL A ld side B000 pulses a ne Positioning data table H1100 Dr1 00 7 BT100 Contelcode 1100 F1 1000 orio 7 speed 1000 Hz 01104 K6000 7 EAT speed 8000 Ha 01108 Acceleration time 300 ms DOT id F K 300 DT 106 TS Target value 3000 pulses 109 Movement amoung SUNN Purses Fi K 8000 DTi Pulse stop Fi DTi Consol code Hil utu 3 4 AB KHz i n Fim SPDH DT 100 KO T Pulse output instruction table shaped contrat The data table headed by DT 100 is used The data table headed by DT100 is used and pulses output from CHO Pulses are output from CHO Tei SE icai ib i sion ioa acum if Re11C R20 TO R22 m EE OUO UD ee S K 10 oe HX Selting and using it as a 1 5 mer be ee _ ee 22 TMX 0 Pulse output diagram 6000 Hz 1000 Hz 9 31 Absolute position control operation When X1 is turned on pulses are output from CW output YO or CCW output Y1 of the specified channel CHO If the current value at that point is larger than 22000 the pulses are output from Y 1 and if the value is smaller than 22000 the pulses
12. T e 0 N Q LL 32 bit data band A l T lean rand DWIN 1 2 S141 S1 S341 3 gt 900 on PDWIN S3 S241 S2 1 1 S1 or S3 1 m 53 589008 on 51 1 S1 S241 S2 R900C on F64 Block data BCMP 1 S2 Compares the two blocks beginning with 7 P64 compare PBCMP S3 S2 and S3 to see if they are equal Logic operation instructions AND PWAN S Sem ER ser sonam 1449 66 OR PWOR 16 bit data XOR 1 2 D Tea PXOR D S1 AND S2 OR S1 AND 2 gt 0 a lt lt XNR 1 2 D PXNR p S1 AND S2 OR S1 AND S2 D 16 bit data exclusive NOR F69 16 bit data WUNI 1 S2 S1 AND S3 OR S2 AND 153 gt 0 P69 unite PWUNI S3 D When S3 is S2 D When S3 is HFFFF 81 D Data conversion instructions Block check BCC 1 S2 Creates the code for checking the data code PBCC S3 D specified by S2 and S3 and stores it in calculation The calculation method is specified by 51 1 2 D Converts the hexadecimal data specified PHEXA by S1 and S2 to ASCII code and stores itin D 7 Example gt H 42 41 44 43 51 52 D Converts the ASCII code specified by S1 PAHEX and S2 to hexadecimal data and stores itin D 7 Example 44 43 42 41 HCDAB DC BA B
13. Pulse ouput ecw side 10000 pulses ROTC Hiz Hid mo E CONUM UNT D um Ario n rino pi 10 SIS onl cod ri 102 initial speed OT EET DAV DT 104 Drap Mer spond BOW Ht tios Aennleration time XX ms Fi K300 DT 106 Orts Target reuri 0999 puies OMY 10000 108 Pulsa stop Fi orno somiem HELBO Ray tS La AB Hr Roo KH nerd n CM a LLAS mM F171 DT 100 KO eset Pulse out ft instruction Sai I 5 data table headed by DT 00 is wiad L anc pulses ane outpul irom dota Table headed by is used Pulses are output re H10 TO Az HJH del ak Salting K1 0 and using it asa d 0 Pulse output diagram 5000 Hz 10000 pulses 500 Hz 0 Hz re DD eng Incremental Position Control Operation Minus Direction When X1 turns on the pulse is output from CCW output Y 1 of the specified channel CHO Note In that case the memory Y1 does not turn on off according to the pulse output 0 V 24 V DC Lue 3 T s x1 Start input
14. ress value iden of link relays used for inim of link data registers used for MEE DENIS PLC Starting number for link relay m d 65 link transmission W0 0 43 Link relay transmission size 0 Oto64 words Sei Starting number for link data register EN ting transmission 45 Link data register transmission size 0 Oto 127 words 46 PC PLC link switch flag Maximum unit number setting for 1 to 16 MEWNET WO PC PLC link ben of link relays used for of link data registers used for Staring number for link relay transmission WO 1 53 Link relay transmission size 0 Oto64 words 1 Starting number for link data register 128 to 255 transmission 55 Link data register transmission size 0 Oto 127 words Maximum unit number setting for at MEWNET WO PC PLC link 17 5 FP X Irtype ress Cont roller input settings 1 HSC Cont roller input settings 2 HSC PLS 17 6 High speed counter settings X0 to X3 High speed counter pulse output settings X4 to X7 CHO Do not set input X0 as high speed counter CH1 Do not set input X1 as high speed counter CH2 Do not set input X2 as high speed counter CH3 Do not set input X3 as high speed counter CH4 Do not set input X4 as high speed counter X4 Normal input CH5 Do not set input X5 as high speed counter CH6 Do not set input X6 as high speed counter X6
15. c 1 2 4 8 r4 Analog input range Table of A D converted values When exceeding the rated range Input voltage V Converted value 0 V or less Negative value 4000 8 14 DC input 0 V to 5 V Conversion characteristics graph i F m uy LE a a zx 0 2 3 4 HV Analog input range 39 Table of A D converted values Input voltage V A D converted value When exceeding the rated range Input voltage V Converted value 0 V or less Negative value OO 4000 Each channel data is allocated as I O data as shown below Installed slot No Analog input cassette E ut Cassette mounting part 1 Cassette mounting part 2 i Slot 0 Slot 1 WX10 X21 WX11 Note e Use double core twisted pair shielded wires It is recommended to ground them However depending on the conditions of the external noise it may be better not to ground the shielding e Do not have the analog input wiring close to AC wires power wires or load 8 15 0 mA to 20 mA output Conversion characteristics graph gt i Output signal range 1000 2000 3000 AOOO K F Digital input value 9 Table of D A converted values When exceeding the rated range Digital input value Analog output value Negative value Unchanged Value preceding the input of a negative value Unchanged Valu
16. FPX Receiving data Data received from the COM port is stored in the receive buffer specified in the system register and the reception done flag goes on Data can be received whenever the reception done flag is off Data register OT Ue 1 Data receiving e When data is being received the reception done flag is controlled by the F159 MTRN instruction e No terminator is included in the stored data e The maximum volume of data that can be received is 4096 bytes Device with RE232C pon Setting communication parameters in the general purpose serial communication mode By default the COM port is set to Computer link System register settings should be entered for the following items The settings for baud rate and communication format are made using the FPWIN GR programming tool Select Options in the menu bar and then select PLC Configuration Click COM Port There are separate tabs for setting the COM1 and COM2 Dialog box of PLC system register setting POD Girt mural nin He4lB Ura ho i Ma 42 Lomnurmcaler Fora Hail Comm Mode Cha git Genen cain Bi Lage elira m E emicat a Header STH not exist duas im ul DFU Hafi 9600 PU npud Nadig TUE NE A ROO D ory Neat Buffet ca
17. HO wRO 3 Note1 It is H2001 for COM2 port Note2 It is R904A for COM2 port rc Note Available for the transistor type and relay type Ver 1 21 or later version only 7 34 Flow chart Data initialization R9044 Note OFF DT50 and DT50 is equivalent to DT60 and 61 Increments DT50 and 0751 Sends a data Execute F145 write command sends a data Execute F146 SEND instruction read command RECV instruction Completion Turns RO of Note It is R904A for port The above program executes the operation 1 to 3 repeatedly 1 Updates the write data if the write data DT50 and DT51 and the read data DT60 and DT61 are matched 2 Writes the DT50 and DT51 of the local unit into the data DTO and DT1 in the unit number 1 from the port Reads the data and dT1 in the unit number 1 into the data DT60 and DT61 of the local unit from the COM 1 port Note The above COM 1 port will be COM2 port for the COM2 port 7 35 7 4 Communication Function 2 General purpose Serial Communication 7 4 1 General purpose Serial Communication Overview e n general purpose serial communication data is sent and received over the COM ports to and from an external device such as an image processing device or a bar code reader e Data is read from and written to an external device connected to the COM port by means of an FP X prog
18. cification dedi e Control codes written with an MV BEN instruction are stored by channel in special data registers DT90360 to 00 fixed DT90373 Clear high speed counter instruction 5 0 Continue 1 Clear _ Note In the reset input setting the reset Reset input sating o input X102 or X202 allocated in the 0 Available 1 Not available high speed counter setting of the Coun system registers are defined to O Permit 1 Prohibit E enable disable adware Q No 1 Yes High speed counter control code monitor area High speed counter Channel No cB 0790368 3 __ c9 DT9039 ss cA DTO0 cB DTO Elapsed value write and read instruction F1 e his instruction changes or reads the elapsed value of the high speed counter e Specify this instruction together with the special data register DT90300 e he elapsed value is stored as 32 bit data in the combined area of special data registers DT90300 and DT90301 e Use this F1 DMV instruction to set the elapsed value Example 1 Writing the elapsed value Set the initial value of K3000 in the high speed DF F1 DMV K3000 DT90300 counter Example 2 Reading the elapsed value XT Read the elapsed value of the high speed DF J dF1 DMV DTe0s00 DT100 counter and copies it to DT100 and DT101 10 12 Target value match ON instruction F166 Example 1
19. 9010 H HF DMV 1200 DT400 Control onde x When the execution condition R10 goes F1 DMV 1000 DT4Oz Frequency 1 1000 Hz on pulses are output from Y 100 of the Fi DMV 1000 DT4O4 Targevalus 1 1000 pulses pulse VO cassette at a frequency of 3 eee Sp 1000 Hz and positioning begins F1 2500 DT406 Frequency At the point when 1000 pulses have Fi DMV 2000 DT4O8 Target value 2000 pulses been counted the frequency switches to 2500 Hz Posit is th rued 0 z Positioning is then carr F DMV 5000 DT410 Frequency 3 5000 Hz out sequentially in accordance with the F1 K 5000 DT412 Target value 3 6000 pulses values of tha data table until it stops at Fi 1000 DT414 Frequency 1000 Hz im the pulse F1 DMV 2000 DT416 Target 4 2000 pulses When the program runs the data table Fi DMV K 0 DT418 Pulse stop output diagram as shown 10 i EN J HOF 74 SPOH 0T400 K0 Pulse output start Positioning dala table Conirol code H 1200 Frequency 1 1000Hz Target value 1 7 1000 pulses Frequency 2 2000 Hz 87408 _ value 2 2000 pulses Frequency 3 000 Hz 12 Target value 3 5000 pulses 4 RE Frequency 4 1000 Hz 41 DI A Target value 4 2000 pulses DT418 Pulse o aput m DT418 stop setti output diagram Fraquancy speed Hz 5000 2900
20. Dheri Uer brat P Adhar Derinin Porn Na Sacs Port He Tusci Th Ho a Rate E Beaten Eia Communication protocol TCP Action mode Client mode Baud rate COM1 115200 bps 9600 bps Note Communication mode Destination IP No Destination IP address Destination port No 1025 to 32767 Source port No 0 1025 to 32767 Time out 0 to 1800 s Retry time 0 to 1800 s Note Specify the same baud rate as the communication environment setting of the COM1 port of the FP X When Communication cassette AFPX COMB is in the TCP server mode Dialog box of communication setting Setting of AFPX COM5 Fd T HL wil Serine Mose tm un Qammunacal ern cazzate Sati Bud rate di Pari tp E r F Diba Mose Tiri Seri Port 0 pese Claes Tiitii rina Port Bo Part Tic 0 Teac cR Petry Tre Mo Hara 1 100 itane _ mur za ltem Setting value Communication protocol Client mode Baud rate COM1 115200 bps 9600 bps Destination port No 1025 to 32767 0 to 1800 s Note Specify the same baud rate as the communication environment setting of the COM 1 port of the FP X When Communication cassette AFPX COM5 is in the UDP mode Dialog box of communication setting Setting o
21. 1 1 1 1 OA FP X A Available N A Not available Description NN the state of installation of an FP X add on cassette has changed since the power was turned on the bit corresponding to the unit No will turn on Monitor using binary display 15 11 7 3 2 1 O Bit No 2 1 Expansion No on 1 error off D normal One shift out hexadecimal digit is stored in bit positions O to 3 when the data shift instruction F105 BSR or F106 BSL is executed The value can be read and written by executing FO MV instruction The divided remainder 16 bit is stored in DT90015 when the division instruction F32 or F52 B instruction is executed The divided remainder 32 bit is stored in DT90015 and DT90016 when the division instruction F33 D or F53 DB is executed The value can be read and written by executing FO MV instruction After commencing operation the address where the first operation error occurred is stored Monitor the address using decimal display The address where an operation error occurred is stored Each time an error occurs the new address overwrites the previous address At the beginning of a scan the address is O Monitor the address using decimal display The data stored here is increased by one every 2 5 ms HO to HFFFF Difference between the values of the two points absolute value x 2 5 ms Elapsed time between the two points The data stored here is increased by one
22. DT504 Composite spend Saiting area _DT505 Max speed J i 200 ms a usur program Deceleration speed 1 Target value A axis Target value 5009 5 amp ott rois _ X axis CHO cor Initial sp r 54171 DT514 X axis CHO component speed Operation 1 Control code lt H constant 0000000 DT515 Max speed result 5 Firad 11 i DT518 Y axis CH1 component speed Ti saraga DT517 Initial speed Pararmeriern ter Duty om width 01518 CH1 m ach amp a ony DT519 A componant 1 Duty 1 4 2855 lo Fixed mes gt B Operation made aed papuli E AX S CHO number af stored hens ma toele n DO 2 eee He erenn pulis aru direction ornari Generi un DEI Increase pal pulse and deecbon Honing off 10 12 and dinpcbon Tonacaed OF ever tad on 13 Aad pulse and ett 2 Composite speed Initial speed Max speed Hz lt K constant 1 5 Hz to 100 kHz K1 to K 100000 However 1 5 His for an angie ol D deg or 90 deg only Also speci KV when specifying 15 Hr If ihe speed drops lower than the minimum speed for each range iken the speed will become lhe caorrec
23. FP X Loan mid HT mis j 5 als ralio a mastar unt Unit No 99 units Baud rate 115 2 kbps Transmission distance 1200 m lt S MEM 0 168985 5 a _ iE eB ail E PLC Temperature Inverter FP X conirol Lzan ho uc equipment ns Sige uni MEWTOCOL communication It can be used as a master unit slave units F145 and F146 instructions It can be easily communicated with a PLC image processor temperature control device message runner or eco power meter It is possible to communicate with up to 99 units Can be used 4 master unit Unit No 99 units Baud rate 115 2 kbps Transmission distance 1200 m Dn pex amp A a Temperature PLC control Can ha used equipment 53 amp slave 1 4 Positioning control supported through high speed counter and pulse output With the FP X Tr type a high speed counter function can be used by using the CPU With the FP X Ry type a high speed counter and pulse output functions can be used by using the pulse I O cassette The pulse output function supports frequencies of up to 100kHz enabling positioning control using a stepping motor or servo motor Note The pulse I O cassette cannot be used for the FP X Tr type Measurement using high speed counter supported Encoder Pulse FP X mx LLL e d Pulse inpul g
24. Mid oe Lei pend UWICAST outa hart Di He Tecan Seite Ciemi ant ig Address nitrate Poet nips 377471 Source lori RS Tea ecu communication environment setting of the COM port of the FP X Note2 When selecting BROADCAST the setting of the destination IP address is not required ir irm O Tome q 1803 ic After the AFPX COM5 is powered on it will take about 5 seconds for initializing the Ethernet Until the Ethernet is initialized data cannot be transmitted or received For the Ethernet communication programming is necessary to start the communication after 5 seconds since the power turned on Generally as a router does not transmit a broadcast packet communication over the router cannot be achieved Using the broadcast processing load is applied on all equipment on the network Confirm that the broadcast does not affect other equipment before using it 7 93 7 7 9 MEWTOCOL Master Ethernet Sample Program Ver 1 10 or Later Overview MEWTOCOL communication can be performed with the FP X using the F145 and F146 instructions The following sample program executes 4 MEWTOCOL commands in sequence for 2 slave units using the F145 and F146 instructions Note It is available for the transistor type and relay type of Ver 1 21 or later FP X No 2 g Master unit d slave unil 1 IP address 102 188
25. CW pulse input and CCW pulse input method e Two output contacts are used as a pulse output for CW CCW e The I O allocation of pulse output terminal and home input is determined by the channel used e Set the control code for F171 SPDH instruction to CW CCW When using gt FP X Tr type Rome input Mear nome s c xd Driver CW output YD La CCV output Input that is not used for other applications is specified for the near home input Note If the deviation counter clear output function is performed when the home return is done Y4 is used for the C14 Tr type and Y8 is used for the C30 C60 Tr type When using CH2 gt FP X Tr type Rome input vg Near home T Apt HOO Driver output L CCV output Input that is not used for other applications is specified for the near home input When using CH1 gt FP X Tr type Home input Mear home XS input X200 Driver CW output E CCW output Input that is not used for other applications is specified for the near home input Note If the deviation counter clear output function is performed when the home return is done Y5 is used for the C14 Tr type and Y9 is used for the C30 C60 Tr type When using CH3 gt C30 C60 Tr type only FP X Tr type Fome input 7 Near home i Ap Driver ve output CCV output Input
26. 48 Hz te 100 Incremantal counting CAN F172 PLSH DT 300 The data table headed by DT300 is used Pulses are out X3 OF Fo MV H108 DT 90052 L Fo MV H100 DT 90052 m The data table headed by OT300 is used andpulses are output from CHO process Pulse output diagram TE TUR X6 JOG ON side side command OFF 00Hz YO Pulse ole 9 40 JOG operation Minus direction While X7 is in the ON state a pulse is output from the CCW output Y1 of the specified channel CHO Program i Data table H MF om oH 1121 Dr310 7 07910 H12 1312 1 0 312 raia Frequency speed 300 Hz Control code H 1121 Duty 1 4 2275 Hr ______ Decremental counsing CCW x7 I F172 DT 310 The data table headed by DT310 is used F Pulse output instruction JOG operation The data table headed by DT310 is used and pulses are output from CHO Pulses are output fr mC HO X3 oF Fo mv H108 DT 90052 r 1 Overrun process 1 Hi otoo Pulse output diagram X7 JOG ON sid T side ea Pen OFF A LJL 300Hz Y 1 Pulse md OH Reference The pulse output control instruction FO is used for the pulse output stop 9 4 4 Pulse output control i
27. AA AG Loe M ON for terminal unit Fra Change the switch at the back of the cassette depending on the state of the communication Trl communication 1 N communication Computer link Available General purpose serial communication Available Note PC PLC link Available MODBUS RTU NENNEN Available Note When using this cassette the data is always transmitted by the STOP bit2 regardless the setting of stop bit The data can be received by either STOP bit 1 or 2 regardless the setting of stop bit 7 9 1 channel RS485 and 1 channel RS232C Combination Type Product No AFPX COMA This communication cassette is a 1 channel unit with an isolated two wire RS485 port and 1 channel unit with an isolated three wire RS232C port LED indication Terminal layout 9405 ASE line E IH AAL Transmission ds line SD SendData gt External device RS232C RD Receive Data FP X External device COM2 SG Signal Grond Terminal layout D e 2 c SD HD 3d For tenminal station set SW i355 to ON side Sw rf communication 1 N communication Computer link DOE Available General purpose serial communication Available PC PLC link Available MODBUS RTU Pm Available Note1 Only the RS485 can be used COM 1 port Note2 The RS232C of the COM2 port is not avai
28. Bi Note It is necessary to set the system register of the communication port to the computer link for using this function 1 Only the slave function is available for the FP X relay type Ver 1 20 or former version 2 Both the master and slave functions are available for the FP X transistor type and relay type Ver 1 21 or later version however the master function is not available for the TOOL port MEWTOCOL master function Transistor type relay type Ver 1 21 or later version e his function is to carry out the communication on the master side side Othat issues commands of the computer link It is executed with the PLC s instruction F145 SEND or F146 RECV It is not necessary to write the response process as a ladder so the program is easier than the general purpose communication function The 1 1 or 1 N communication is available between our devices equipped with the computer link function and the MEWTOCOL COM Our devices e g PLC IPD temperature control unit eco power meter slave slave Slave Slave slave eer um uu b b a FP a KT tamparatura KT temperature conira umi eonitral unit MEWTOCOL slave function e his function is to receive commands from the computer link execute the process and send back the results Any special ladder program is not necessary to use this function Set the communication conditions in the sy
29. Ry hon 43210 Channel setting PLS 0 1 CHO PLS 1 PLS Near home input 0 Disable 1 Enable PLS Pulse output 0 Continue 1 Clear PLS Count 0 Enable 1 Disable PLS Software reset 0 No 1 Yes FP X Tr 210 Channel setting PLS 0 to 3 CHO to CH3 PLS 1 PLS Near home input 0 Disable 1 Enable PLS Pulse output 0 Continue 1 Clear PLS Count 0 Enable Disable PLS Software reset 0 1 Yes Available N A Not available Address Name Deep in ing Ing Ing Hour and minute data of the Real Time Clock are stored here This data is read only data It cannot be overwritten DT90053 Realtime Clock Higher byte Lower byte monitor hour minute Hour dats i Minute date HOO to H23 HOO to H59 The year month day hour minute second Clock and day of the week data for the Real Time DT90054 setting Clock is stored The built in Real Time Clock minute second will operate correctly through the year 2099 and supports leap years The Real Time Clock can be set by writing a value using DT90055 NME LOCK programming tool software or a program that setting day hour uses the FO MV instruction see example for DT90058 Clock Higher byte Lower byte eal Time Cloc v r DT j ee setting year month Minute data Second data DT90054 to H59 HOO to 59 0790058 to Haa to
30. Uu Me RAGS alls cad Rae al E Ed a o ee n 1 fos mes eximit E SO T2RDDOQOQQ 00001 5 rananmssion 12 9 H Transmission done fog nm Data regieter value of PLE ener end 6 faceted z If nomat 6 54 Reception dona flag ROSE on i amp rtor accurs 01 DCODIDI g 3 Ej code Empty data transmission with F159 MTRM 73039 alf and Rania adf HO c il gt Receive butler writing g point 7 51 Sample program In the following example the FP series PLC is connected to COM1 port RO Ri Hoe i R10 Bremer e gama gm Mr I Lr95 M 01 DT101 P 4 Data conversion SDISRDDODOOTT is to ASCH code and wilen ia OT to 5 Fes ASC M 00001 DT107 00001 is converted to ASCII code E sand written ta DT107 to DT112 Fivesoecesinsemed 159 100 fT Data Fananie T i l Tha data in the sand buffer sent from cM o o oen R3038 et tmar wen O Reception done detection Rit BKMV The received dala in Ihe recava buffer 4 s amp read from the area in which a stored 07201 and sent to Lo R1
31. xa xc xe jor ys ve s 4 Left Power supply fer YO to Y7 Dacis oed Output terrm Hot used supply Fax ing putat AFPX C30P AC power sunny a input berrninad ES ys vo iem Power supply foc Yo to v7 ve va ve ve vn ey BBHBEBSP Wie LJ poer Chaipi ternal usad supply for input 2 23 DG power suppir itety Power supply for YO to Y ne vo Power supply for YS to YD Ld A used Output terminal Hot used AFPX C30PD DO power supple va ve v7 ca eL EL Left Power supply for YO to we Two ve ve ve vel val Right Power supply for Y8 to YD LI Mat used Output terminal Kot used AFPX C60T AT pir apy FEAA repay input 8 vn vas v47 v10 vaa vaa vae rie aa berminal used Gubpul d ured menm nat Lei Power supply for YD in YT supply for i10 io 17 Power supply for to YD Rg Power supply for Y 1829 710 2 24 AFPX C60P
32. 7 6 ka M n af uris E stations M 700 1000 1200 Teenie n When using a baud rate of 300 bps to 38400 bps you can set up to a maximum of 99 units stations and maximum transmission distance of 1200 m Note3 Only 9600 bps or 19200 bps can be specified when the C NET adapter is connected with the RS485 interface Note4 The start code and end code can be used only in the general purpose serial communication mode Note5 The converter SI 35 manufactured by Lineeye Co Ltd is recommendable for the RS485 at the computer side Adjust the response time for the FP X by the SYS1 instruction if necessary Note6 Unit numbers should be registered by the system register Note7 The termination resistance of the RS485 RS422 in the COM3 COM4 and COM6 is specified by the dip switch in the communication cassette There is no termination resistance at the RS232C port Note8 The baud rates of 300 600 and 1200 bps can be specified by the SYS instruction only Ver 2 0 or later Communication specifications 2 Interface Ethernet lem Specifications Connector shape RJ45 Transmission specifications Max segment length MDI MDI X Auto crossover function Note1 The length between a HUB and the module 7 18 7 2 1 Precaution When Using RS485 Port AFPX COMS3 AFPX COMA SYS1 instruction is available for FP X which enables to change the time after receiving a command until
33. E a 1 15 MODBUS RTU command message frame START ADDRESS FUNCTION DATA 3 5 character time 16 bits 3 5 character time ADDRESS Unit No 8 bits 0 to 99 decimal Note1 0 Broadcast address Note2 Slave unit No is 1 to 99 decimal Note3 For MODBUS 0 to 247 decimal FUNCTION 8 bits DATA Varies depending on commands CRC 16 bits END 3 5 character time Differs depending on baud rate Refer to reception judgement time Response in normal status The same message as a command is returned for single write command A part of a command message 6 bytes from the beginning is returned for multiple write command Response in abnormal status In case a parameter disabled to be processed is found in a command except transmission error Slave address unit number Function code 80H One of either 1 2 or 3 Error code CRC Error code contents 1 Function code error 2 Device number error out of range 3 Device quantity error out of range Reception done judgment time The process for receiving a message completes when the time that is exceeding the time mentioned below has passed after the final data was received Approx 6 7 ms Approx 3 3 ms Approx 0 3 ms Note The reception done judgment time is an approx 32 bit time 7 76 Supported commands MODBUS Remarks instructions for e Name for FP X decimal original Reference
34. No 6 Hold type area starting address For hmer caunter 1 008 70 1024 Ma f Hold type area starting word address 10 256 for internal relay Note When Battery Error Alarm is not set the ERR LED will not flash even if a battery error is detected Note that data may be lost as the result of the battery shutoff The setting of the system registers Nos 6 to 14 is effective only when the backup battery is mounted Without the battery use at the default settings If changing the settings the Hold Non hold operation becomes unstable 5 26 5 9 3 Replacement of Backup Battery The procedure for replacing the backup battery is as follows Procedure 1 Supply power to the control unit for more than five minutes Charge the built in capacitor to retain the contents of the memory during the replacement of the battery 2 Turn off the power supply 3 Remove the battery cover using a tool such as a screwdriver 4 Remove the used battery 5 Install a new battery within two minutes after turning off the power Place the battery to fit into the guide section of the control unit and connect the connector 6 Install the battery cover and expansion cover M Note f the power is not sufficiently supplied or it takes too much time to replace the battery retained memory data may be lost 5 27 5 9 4 Lifetime and Time for Replacement of Backup Battery Battery lifetime when the master memory c
35. System registers Range of link relays used Starting No of word for link relay transmission 0 20 30 Link relay transmission size Invalid allocations The allocations shown below are not possible neither for link relays nor for link registers Send area is split Send area Receive area Send area Send and receive areas are split into multiple segments Receive geg Send Receive area Reccive arca Sand areas 7 65 Setting the largest unit number for a PC PLC link The largest unit number can be set using system register no 47 using system register no 57 for PC PLC link 1 Sample setting No of units linked Setting contents 1st unit Unit no 1 is set 2nd unit Unit no 2 is set A largest unit no of 2 is set for each 1st unit Unit no 1 is set 2nd unit Unit no 2 is set ard unit Unit no 3 is set 4th unit Unit no 4 is set A largest unit no of 4 is set for each Nth unit Unit no n is set A largest unit no of n is set for each Note e Unit numbers should be set sequentially and consecutively starting from 1 with no breaks between them If there is a missing unit number the transmission time will be longer e f fewer than 16 units are linked the transmission time can be shortened by setting the largest unit number in system register no 47 in system register no 57 for PC PLC link 1 e For all PLCs which are linked the same value should be set
36. 0 8 kHz Initial speed Set 30 kHz or less 3 Aceleration deceleration time ms K constant With 30 steps K30 to K32760 Specify by 30 steps 5 With 60 steps K60 to K32760 Specify by 60 steps 5 4 Target value K constant K 2147483648 to K2147483647 5 When the time is not specified in 30 ms units nor 60 ms units it will be automatically corrected to the multiple value larger value of 30 ms or 60 ms 10 29 Sample program Incremental Position Control Operation Plus Direction When XO turns the pulse is output from CW output Y 100 of the specified channel CHO Note In that case the memory Y 100 does not turn on off according to the pulse output and also the monitoring is not possible OV 24 V X3 stem input 38 Pulag onipin pa O ALTE T i ee gt oo ps Positioning op operation running oj Positioning operation start coda 1100 DM Initial 500 Hz E Accaleration tima DTi Target 77 T RETR EON DMV 1100 DT 100 Fi K500 102 Fi DT 104 Fi K300 DT 106 F1 10000 DT 108 DT 110 DTH y 10000 poses Pulse Xem aw Hiioe Pulse cutpu instruction flable shaped co
37. Ao NT 2 1 Expansion No on 1 error off normal DT9008 Notused Je 0 DT90000 Notused f o DT90005 Not used J 0 0 0 0 lt gt Z lt gt lt gt lt gt lt gt lt gt lt gt When an error occurs at the intelligent board for the application cassette the bit Position of abnormal corresponding to the board will be set on DT90006 ositio abnorma application cassette 15 11 7 3 2 1 O Bit No 2 1 Expansion No on 1 error off 0 normal DT90007 Notused DT90008 Notused Communication error Stores the error contents when using COM2 DT90009 flag for COM2 port When the state of installation of FP X expansion I O unit has changed since the power was turned on the bit corresponding to i 7 the unit No will turn on Monitor using binary DT90010 Extension I O verify pua error unit pray 15 765432 1 0 BitNo 7654392 1 0 Unit No on 1 error off D normal lt gt lt gt Ziz 17 27 DT90011 Add on cassette verify error unit Operation auxiliary DT90014 register for data shift instruction DT90015 Operation auxiliary register for division instruction DT90016 Operation error address hold type Operation error DT90018 address non hold type DT90019 8 ring counter 10 us ring counter DT90020 0790021 Notused
38. P1 Work area DT12 to DT23 Operation result Parameters calculated due to instruction storage area execution are stored 9 47 g M 61 fl r 112 121 14 171 R3010 DTO 3 FoMv K2X0 DT2 074 ors X1 RSIID RF R20 820 FI DTE 4 71 Fi omv Fi75 SPSH DTO KO REIC R20 RF R21 EA RIND 35 R21 I Y FI 8 J Fi omy F175 SPSH DT ai R22 Fi DMV Ki0000 Fi DMV 7 SPSH KD d L ic R22 RIF 23 oe HH R23 R23 DF Fi KO FX OF FL 1 Fi R2 F175 SPSH DTO R23 4 1 079052 Fo mv Fo Hio prsxe2 to 9 48 Home return operation Minus direction When XO turns on the pulse is output from CCW output Y1 of the specified channel CHO and CCW output Y3 of the specified channel CH1 and the return to home begins In CHO when X6 turns on deceleration begins and when X4 turns on home return is completed After the return to home is completed the elapsed value areas DT90348 and DT9034
39. Power supply for FPO Power supplies for I O devices Grounding In situations of excess noise Under normal conditions the inherent noise resistance is sufficient However in situations of excess noise ground the instrument to increase noise suppression Exclusive grounding e The grounding connection should have a resistance of less than 1000 e he point of grounding should be as close to the PLC unit as possible The ground wire should be as short as possible e f two devices share a single ground point it may produce an adverse effect Always use an exclusive ground for each device C CORRECT X INCORRECT Other device quee PLC Inverter etc imeerter etc i Note Depending on the surroundings in which the equipment is used grounding may cause problems Example Since the power supply line of the expansion FPO adapter power supply connector is connected to the function earth through a varistor if there is an irregular potential between the power supply line and earth the varistor may be shorted 24 V DC a MWaristor B2 v Funeton earth Expansion FPO adapler power supply line 5 16 5 6 Wiring of Input and Output Do not apply the voltage that exceeds the rated input voltage to the input terminal 5 6 1 Input Wiring Connection of photoelectric sensor and proximity sensor Relay output type 4 ferma
40. al UFU npul A i Pasar dH nct tet Taser coin zo DEL gud Hou 9500 ies Ls Tr ont n ned Aw ctr Inferior poa S OFT mad lio 116 adic Cheha mee Di n vi veri Glad ibi Corpora afr recede lt He apeze baing lor dera ni Mj Ri ST A COC Fa ree 34 COM port setting 5 Setting 1 Parity check lOdd No 413 Communication format Note1 Set the baud rate to match the baud rate COM 1 port of the AFPX COM5 Setting Ethernet communication environment of Communication cassette AFPX COM5 The Configurator WD is used to set Ethernet communication environment of the 5 Reference 7 7 3 Communication Tool Software Configurator WD Start the Configurator WD Search the AFPX COM5 Select the AFPX COM5 from the search result and set an IP address to connect with a computer After that search again Select the AFPX COM5 and select Edit Communication Setting in the menu or right click to select Communication Setting 1 99 When Communication cassette AFPX COM5 is in the TCP client mode Dialog box of communication setting Setting of AFPX COM5 Setting value 3 Ae lee Messa oem Mode Cont un Corea caer tite irs od COM wt bps Lamm nir ers Myk Teram Dating baria Fiat ic Tamen 01 6 Tete
41. ane smua neoushy on m Z850 55 Ambien bemperaturne LT C30R Number olye per cumin which gm S on 45 55 Alien Number af points par cime which sxriulta on if Et temperalure UC C14RD Number of ponis ahit me 50 55 Ainbeent temperatuna C Humber ol ponts par Born ati me ETiulla neough 13 5 55 Ainbeent temperatuna C Humber of ponts par ecammen which ase simta neou eee Ameen temperatuna C Number of 7 pamita per common simita neoushy TESTE Amien lermperature CC C30R Humber of 14 pronis utri common 4 which me Exiulba neoushy en Ane Lermperatume CT C amp OR Number of 28 paints common which me 13 Eniulla neoushy on Amieen C14RD Mum of ponis 6 common which arp 4 nene on E 55 temperalune E CORO kumine af pueris print common which are 43 50 55 Aiten temperalune LC Murnber 01 4 points p r common 21 whei nm 18 necu an A ED 55 Amtient lamperatura C Configuration 1 Stand alone 2 5 2 5 2 Relay Type With AFPX DA2 and AFPX A21 Current Output Keep the number of
42. bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 1 gt S2 1 52 or S1 1 1 2 1 52 pc 152 _ Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 51 lt 52 1 52 Begins logic operation by comparing two 32 lios em bit data in the comparative condition S 1 1 1 lt S2 1 2 or S1 1 1 2 1 52 32 bit Connects a Form A normally open contact D 51 52 5 serially by comparing two 32 bit data in the data comparative condition S1 1 S1 S2 1 52 compare AND lt gt Connects a Form A normally open contact serially by comparing two 32 bit data in the AND EP 28582 comparative condition S1 1 1 lt 2 1 2 or S1 1 S1 S241 52 AND Connects a Form A normally open contact P 1 52 4 serially by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 S1 S2 1 52 AND gt Connects a Form A normally open contact D 81 62 serially by comparing two 32 bit data in the L L comparative condition S1 1 1 gt S2 1 52 r S141 1 2 1 52 AND ae nects a Form A normally open contact _ 05 1 52 4 serially by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 51 lt 52 1 52 lt Connects a Form normally open contact serially by comparing two 32 bit data in the D 51 57 aL comparative condition 1 1 1 lt 2 1
43. o a Comparison match i5 output E RO TO YD _ oF p Appointed time output pulse 1 second B H K105 TTD 1 second type timer ee ee ee cun The hour data is stored in the upper 8 bits of DT90053 and the minute data in the lower 8 bits in the BCD format This hour and minute data is compared with the appointed time BCD and the R900B flag special internal relay is used to detect whether or not it matches the appointed time 30 second compensation The compensation for 30 seconds is performed in the DT90058 12 4 12 2 2 Master Memory Function Overview This function enables to transfer the data in the control unit internal memory such as programs to the master memory cassette and to copy them into another control unit internal memory by installing the master memory cassette on it e Following data can be transferred to the master memory cassette 1 Ladder programs 2 System registers 3 Comments 4 F ROM data area 5 Security information Password or uploading disabled information When there is no security information no security information exists Change the switch on the back of the master memory cassette The changeover switch is located at the back of the FP X master memory cassette AFPX MRTC The default setting is Clock calendar only Transfer from the master memory to the control unit Ther
44. 0 Duty 1 2 50 1 Duty 1 4 25 lFrequency range 0 1 5Hzlo 9 8 kHz 1 48 Hz to 100 kHz e 191 Hz to 100 kHz _ la Output method 00 No counting CW 01 No counting COW 10 Incremental counting CW 12 Incremental counting Direction output OFF 13 Incremental counting Direction output ON 21 Decremental counting CCW 22 Decremental counting Direction output OFF 23 Decremental counting Direction output 10 38 2 Frequency Hz lt constant gt Frequency range D 15Hztn 9 8 K1 to K8800 unit Hz Max error near 9 8 kHz approx 0 9 kHz Sel K1 to specify 1 5 Hz 1 48 Hzto 100 kHz E48 to K100000 unit Hz Max error near 100 kHz approx 3 kHz 2 191 Hz to 100 kHz K191 to K100000 unit Hz Max error near 100 kHz approx 0 8 kHz In case of count mode set the frequency to 30 kHz nr less for executing instructions at the first time 3 Target value Absolute value This is used when setting Ihe target value match stop mode Absolute only Designate the target value setting in the range indicated below If an out of range value is designated the number of pulses output will ba diferent than the designated value The target value setting is ignored in the no count mode Output method Range of target values which can be designated Incremental counting Designate a value larger than the current value Decremental counting Designate a value smaller than the
45. 1 Send data oe External Receive data device Outline of operation e Connection with an external device is established using the general purpose serial communication Ethernet Number of connection is one e Select either the client mode or server mode e In case of the client mode connection is established by the AFPX COMS5 for a predetermined IP address after turning on the power supply of the FP X e There are Send data and Receive data for the data transfer with an external device 7 98 Setting for using the general purpose serial communication Ethernet The following two settings for the FP X and communication cassette AFPX COM5 should be set Communication environment of FP X Communication environment of Communication cassette AFPX COM5 Setting communication environment of FP X The programming tool FPWIN GR is used to set the baud rate or communication format of the COM1 port Select Option PLC Configuration in the menu bar and click COM1 Port tab Dialog box of PLC system register setting FLG inpr bei Hoitaa ie eie 7 LF Ha 1 bin Pomme ation Promod Ettore on 4 Tess 41 7 rmm Mode Che B4 E r1 Geral oc an hon J 0533 cate pettingr NATL i Pei ie pulze Gab wether Teer Le sce IBS i Tees ccrta
46. 40 mA C14 External power supply or less and terminals Current C30 60 mA 35 mA or less or less C60 60 mA 35 mA 45 mA 35 mA or less or less or less or less Surge absorber Operating mode indicator EU Spy OFF gt ON Response time at 25 C ON OFF Circuit diagram NPN output XO to X3 From X4 Output indicator LETI Ch m indicator LEG M termina M p berminal 1 h 1 I DRADE Dasmminad utc borning i 2p Erena power 7 External prom 1 T supply E se Lod W uppi 5 oM LX Ell c x za LE I k mo F y T er mu pipes k Ww cl load he ad i St 24 V CX i te 24 V CX l E 5 termirini 4 0 E o oe LZ Limitations on number of simultaneous input on points Reference 2 5 Limitations on Number of Simultaneous Input Output On Points 2 9 2 4 3 Transistor Tr Type PNP Output specifications C14 Allowable load voltage 21 6 to 26 4 V DC range Input points per common 2 us or less YO to Y3 Load current at 15 mA or more OFF SON 20 us or less C14 Y4 to Y5 C30 C60 Y4 to Y7 Load current at 15 mA or more Response 1 ms or less C14 None C30 C60 from Y8 time 8 us or less YO to Y3 Load current at 15 mA or more ONOFF 30 us or less C14 Y4 to Y5 C30 C60 Y4 to Y7 Load current at 15 mA or m
47. 5 Writes the DT50 and DT51 of the local unit into the data DTO and DT1 in the unit number 1 from the COM port 6 Reads the data and dT1 in the unit number 1 into the data DT60 and DT61 of the local unit from the port Note The above COM 1 port will be COM2 port for the COM2 port 7 80 7 7 Ethernet Communication AFPX COM5 7 7 1 AFPX COMS5 Overview The communication cassette AFPX COM5 has an Ethernet interface at the COM 1 port and a 3 wire RS232C interface at the COM2 port The Ethernet at the COM1 port supports the computer link and general purpose serial communication and the RS232C at the COM2 port supports the computer link general purpose serial communication and MODBUS RTU The use of the COM2 port is the same as other cassettes such as the AFPX COM2 and it is selectable from the COM2 port or the FP X USB communication Although the Ethernet interface is connected to other device via Ethernet the AFPX COM5 communicates with the FP X via RS232C and it functions as a converter between Ethernet and RS232C 7 7 2 Functions of APFX COM5 Ethernet COM1 port Computer link Max 1 connection Client Max 3 connections Server General purpose serial communication Max 1 connection Computer link General purpose serial communication MODBUS RTU 1 1 Note1 For Ver1 10 or later the PC PLC link function of the FP X is available via Ethernet RS232C COM2 port 7 7 3 Add
48. 8 digit password V2 40 Download protection to old ver and Download permission only for V2 50 ae models with same password or later and Upload protection Download possible Download possible only for models with same password Download impossible No target model Note1 Program downloading is not possible for FP memory loader Ver 1 Note2 Upload protection cannot be set for FP memory loader Ver 1 Note3 When downloading programs with 8 digit password FP memory loader Ver 1 will not enter protection state after downloading finishes To enter protection state turn off the power and then turn it on again Note4 The state that the setting has been made not to disable downloading to the old version on the FP X Ver 2 50 or later Note5 When transferring data from FP memory loader to PLC program data cannot be transferred by Ver 2 or later however only the Upload protection setting is effective Status of PLC that program has been downloaded downloading a program to the PLC from the FP memory loader the password that has been already set on the unit may be changed Note the followings 8 digit password setting Limited distribution setting Off The password will be overwritten with a new 8 digit password 8 digit password setting The password will not change Limited distribution setting On The program itself will not be downloaded 11 11 11 4 5 Setting using FPWIN GR
49. AFPX COMS 5 External device The command is not notified to the FP X main unit es igs 7 107 How to transmit a command message to each unit FP A IP address A uni No 2 Server amp FP X address B Unit No 3 Server a FF X IP address C f Unit No 4 FP X 1 2 IP address X g A Unit No 1 Server Target IP address for unit number If Destination unit number and IP address is specified is checked a command can be sent to the IP address corresponding to each unit number Settable conditions When selecting the client and computer link When selecting the UDP and general purpose communication When selecting the broadcast IP address takes priority and a command is transmitted via unicast Setting method r Target IP address for unit number Destination unit number and IP address is specified Unit Number IP Address 1921881100 1971581100 1821681100 larget IP address for unit number Unit Number 2 Target IP 192 168 1 100 192 168 1 100 v evt 1 Check Destination unit number and IP address is specified in the Option dialog box 2 Check the destination unit number you want to set and double click the IP address Unit numbers 1 to 99 3 Specify the destination IP address that is corresponding to the unit number Note When connecting to the IP corresponding t
50. CR Header STX not exist No 415 Baud rate setting for COM1 port 115200 bps Note1 The terminal units of AFPX COM3 and AFPX COM4 are specified by the dip switch located in the communication cassette 7 58 Setting of unit numbers By default the unit number for the communication port is set to 1 in the system registers In a PC PLC link that connects multiple PLCs on the same transmission line the unit number must be set in order to identify the different PLCs The unit number is specified either by using the SYS1 instruction or the system register Note1 The priority order for unit number settings is as follows 1 SYS1 instruction 2 System registers Note2 Unit numbers should be set sequentially and consecutively starting from 1 with no breaks between them If there is a missing unit number the transmission time will be longer Note3 If fewer than 16 units are linked the transmission time can be shortened by setting the largest unit number in system register no 47 Unit no 2 3 4 Lat eae Max Buts 7 Unit numbers are the numbers to identify the different PLCs on the same network The same number must not be used for more than one PLC on the same network CA note When using the PC PLC link with the RS232C RS422 the number of units is 2 7 59 Setting with the system register Set the unit numbers using the FPWIN GR programming tool Select PLC Configurat
51. For the period T 1 frequency a minimum input pulse width of T 2 single phase input or T 4 two phase input is required Single phase lt Two phase gt T T re P T T 2 2 Ht 4 a TTTT 4 4 4 4 9 12 9 3 4 Allocation e As shown in the table of specifications the inputs and outputs used will differ depending on the channel number being used e The output turned on and off can be specified with instructions F166 HC1S and F167 HC1R for desired output Yn n 300 When using CHO of the high speed counter When using CHO of the high speed counter with incremental input and reset input with two phase input and reset input FP X Tr type FP A Ir type Count input DE A phase input phase input _ x1 Reset input Reset input X6 x ON and OFF output x ON and OFF output The output turned on and off when the target The output turned on and off when the target value is reached can be specified as arbitrary value is reached can be specified as arbitrary output of the main unit or add on cassette output of the main unit or add on cassette P Reference 9 2 1 Table of Specifications 9 2 2 Functions Used and Restrictions 9 3 5 Instructions used with High speed Counter Function High speed counter control instruction F0 e This instruction is u
52. If the elapsed value 0790300 and 0790301 LDF F166 HC1S K10000 Y7 for channel 0 matches K10000 output Y7 turns On Example 2 XB If the elapsed value DT90308 and DT90309 DF r166 HC15 K2 K20000 Y amp for channel 2 matches K20000 output Y6 turns Target value match OFF instruction F167 Example 1 XC If the elapsed value DT90304 and DT90305 167 HC1R K1 K30000 Y4 for channel 1 matches K30000 output Y4 turns off Example 2 XD If the elapsed value DT90312 and DT90313 I DF F167 HCIR K40000 Y5 for channel 3 matches K40000 output Y5 turns off Ry type Elapsed value and target value areas of high speed counter ch0 to chB High speed counter Control flag Elapsed value area Target value area cho ch ch2 ch3 ch4 ch ch ch cha ch9 chA chB 10 13 10 3 6 Sample program Control Unit and Main Unit I O Positioning operations with a single speed inverter Wiring example FP X Ry type Convery oe Encoder AD aa m p I s s Ciperation start X5 p _ i s E i mag COM Encoder Oulpul ternmnal j Inverter operation YO Operation 3top T a COM Operation chart allocation Jj No Speed Main Encoder input unit X5 Operationstartsignal N vO son _ R10
53. Light on Light System watchdog timer has been Stop or off or off on activated Status indicator LEDs on expansion FPO adapter L3 ERROR status indicator LEDs Panasonic AFPE EFPj TED Status Description POWER ERROR P Normal l Light on Light on Normal operation Light on expansion unit is not connected The FPO expansion unit that had been connected when the power supply for the FP X control unit turned on came away ee An error has occurred the communication of data between the expansion FPO adapter and FPO expansion unit due to noise etc The expansion adapter turned on later than the 90 FP X control unit 13 2 13 1 2 Operation Mode When an Error Occurs e Normally when an error occurs the operation stops e For some errors the user may select whether operation is to be continued or stopped by setting the system registers You can set the error which operation is to be continued or stopped using the programming tool software as shown below PLC System Register setting menu on programming tool software To specify the steps to be taken by the FPWIN GR if a PLC error occurs select PLC System Register setting under Option on the menu bar and click on the Action on Error tab The screen shown below is displayed FLG GConfiguratmn Untitlel Hald Han hold 1 Hold Man hald 2 hw No 2 Disable settings for duplicated outp
54. R300 0 ro Mv Mv oT Fo Mv KO ore R9IIC RF R20 x pet R20 31 PX F Fi K0 DTIO 125 SPSH DTO KO ROC R20 2 SL LIL 6 E Fi DT amp KIDOO DT 10 res SPSH DTO KO d 1 R2F d Y R22 81 I 4 FN oF FI DTE Fi kioo orio Fi75 SPSH DTO KO T R311C R22 Rar R23 2 pr 1 4 e 1 R23 1 i21 PX oF FI DMV Kl DTS Fl DMV 7 2178 SPSH DTO KO RII R23 2 2 Hor JH x2 150 Mv oTe Mv 002 Fo Mv HH08 DT 90082 J DT 90052 J D 171 a 10 48 Home return operation Minus direction When XO turns on the pulse is output from CCW output Y 101 of the specified channel CHO and CCW output Y201 of the specified channel CH1 and the return to home begins In CHO when X100 turns on deceleration begins and when X102 turns on home return is completed After the return to home is completed the elapsed value areas DT90348 and DT90349 are cleared to O In CH1 when X200 turns on deceleration begins and when X202 turns on home return is completed After the return to home is completed the elapsed value areas DT90352 and DT90353 are c
55. vioo output Y101 Direction output Input such as X100 or X101 on the pulse I O cassette can be specified for the near home input FS Reference lt 10 2 1 Table of Specifications gt 10 24 When using CH1 gt FP A Ry type AFPX PLS second Home input EM aS Sere URDU le ze Near home nt Anput o Driver Pulse output vono a Y201 hrection ou put Input such as X200 or X201 on the pulse I O cassette can be specified for the near home input 10 4 4 Pulse output control instructions FO F1 Pulse output control instruction FO e This instruction is used for resetting the built in high speed counter stopping the pulse output and setting and resetting the near home input e Specify this FO MV instruction together with special data register DT90052 e Once this instruction is executed the settings will remain until this instruction is executed again Example 1 Enable the near home input during home return operations and begin deceleration In case of CHO X3 HDF H Fo MV 110 FO MV H 100 In case of CH1 br H FO MV H1110 FO MV H1100 Example 2 Performing a forced stop of the pulse output In case of CHO DF JH FO MV H108 FO MV H100 In case of CH1 DF JH FO MV H1108 FO MV H1100 pro002 2190052 6190052 T 2190052 Z 0790052 0790052 0790052 0790052 In these programs the near
56. 0 1 type timer Setting KS and using it as 0 5 timar 9 18 9 4 Pulse Output Function 9 4 1 Overview of Pulse Output Function Instructions used and controls Together with a commercially available pulse string input type motor driver the pulse output function can be used for positioning control Exclusive T f control D ription ype of contro BCIFUCIIOT escriptio Provides trapezoidal table shaped control for automatically Trapezoidal F171 obtaining pulse outputs by specifying the initial speed maximum 1 speed acceleration deceleration time and target value Enables automatic home return operation Causes pulses to be output as long as the execution condition is F172 JOG operation on A target value can also be set so that pulse output stops at PLSH i the point when the target value is matched Data table F174 gis ae control SPOH Enables positioning control in accordance with the data table Enables pulses to be output using linear interpolation control by specifying the composite speed the acceleration deceleration interpolation SPSH Nd diis time and the target value Note e With the Tr type the CPU output is used to perform the pulse output function The pulse I O cassette AFPX PLS cannot be used Setting the system register When using the pulse output function it is necessary to set the system register No 402 When performing the home return by F174
57. AC power supply terminals e Er p pp ps psp amp cow xo x2 X4 ovf vo vi v2 vd vr va YA ye _ 24v 5 _ 2 ve ve en v8 Aree supply terminais for input output AFPX E30RD Pot used AFPX E30T AC power supply terminal input lI 1 COM XT xs xs gt com xo Input terminals TT PIS TS ubpul termina arana A2 Hilo cu Au Cra eee De pep ps bs ps p com xo x2 xa xo xa XA XC XE 2915 YO CU Y1 Ci Y2 to 75 YE to OD L1 Y210 Y5 YE to Y9 Cu YA lo Y L CA Left Power supply for YO 1o Right Power supply for YA to YD XF E Relation between output terminals and COM terminals _ 6 X8 XA XC XE Relstion between cutput terminals and COM terminals AC power supply semanal Inpur terminal p Ud neret MLIEPESVLA we yn Sr WV rae ca aes 1 1 T gt 0 n M EM CLINT cw pspspepsperepe _ coM xo s 38 3 v5 YD Lef Powar supply for YO to Y7 du ast rela ete pela 7 Righi Power Supply for to YO b d il 4 4 11 5 iLi lenin Nol uded iapply fo
58. B P Reference 6 3 7 Confirming COM Ports 2 Double click Ports COM amp LPT As the table of allocation of COM ports confirm the COM port No CP210x USB to UART Bridge Controller COM n is the allocated COM port CONS is allocated in the following display C Devirg Manag Fle Econ Yew rie 7 1 J Cine i ub ovepiy adapters reme risk controlienr M floppy disk drives ch amp EAJATAP ue Er bira and orbes pima deme adagio Pats COM amp LPT P rt F Comune sors bert CORT EA Bak Jy CCP Printer Port LPT1 Scud odes gare controles i 0 Serial Bus corners A v Hec g Key Point COM port No is necessary for the connection with the FPWIN GR etc C2 Note When CP210x USB to UART Bridge Controller in Other devices or Unknown device is indicated the installation has been failed Reinstall the USB driver ah Reference lt 6 3 9 Reinstallation of USB Driver gt 6 3 8 Communication with FPWIN GR 1 Boot up the FPWIN GR 2 When the FPWIN GR activates the download select window will open Select Cancel here RP in Upload liom PLE Caneel 3 Select Communication setting in Option menu fil FPWIN GR File View Opti
59. C14 C16 Probably a hardware abnormality gt Please contact your dealer FP X When the master memory cassette is mounted the master memory cassette may be damaged Remove the master memory and check whether the ERROR turns off When the ERROR turned off rewrite the master memory as its contents are damaged and use it again When the ERROR does not turn off please E Pr Stops contact your dealer AlAIATALAIAIAIA FP1C24 C40 C56 C72 and FP M Probably an abnormality in the memory unit Program the memory unit again and try to operate If the same error is detected try to operate with another memory unit FP2 FP2SH FP10SH and FP3 There may be a problem with the installed ROM ROM is not installed ROM contents are damaged Program size stored on the ROM is larger than the capacity of the ROM Check the contents of the ROM Unit Units installed exceed the limitations i e 4 or E27 installation Stops Te link units error Turn off the power and re configure units referring to the hardware manual System an abnormality in the system 9 Checkthe system register setting or error MOSS initialize the system registers 1 This error occurs on FP X Ver2 0 or later A Available P X 17 80 tion Description and steps to take status Am IL LL Configu ration A parameter error was detected in the MEWNET W2 configuration area Se
60. CCW Direction output OFF Direction output CW and deviation counter clear COW and deviation counter clear Type home retum Direction output ON and deviation counter clear Speed Frequency Hz K constant Frequency range 1 5 Hz toS 8 kHz K1 to K8800 unit Hz Max error near 9 8 kHZ approx 0 9 kHz Sel KT to specify 1 5 Hz 1 48Hzto 100 kHz K48 to K100000 unit Hz Max error near 100 approx 3 KHz Duty 1 4 is recommended for this range 2 191 Hz to 100 kHz K131 to K100000 unit Hz Max error near 100 approx 0 8 kHz Duty 1 4 is recommended for this range Initial speed Set 30 kHz or less Acceleration deceleration time ms lt constant gt With 30 steps to 2760 Specify in 30 steps 5 With 60 stapes KGO to K32760 Specify in 60 steps 5 3 4 Deviation counter clear signal ms lt constant gt Output lime of deviation counter dear signal rs specified 0 5 ms lo 100 ms to K100 Set value and error 0 5 ms or less Specify KO when not using or when specifying 0 5 ms Deviation counter clear signal is allocated in Y 102 for CHO and in Y202 for CH1 5 When the time is not specified in 30 ms units nor 60 ms units it will be automatically corrected to the multiple value larger value of 30 ms or 80 ms 10 34 Home return operation modes There are two operation modes for a home ret
61. HOS HOO H64 j K200 K100 CIT ime value of OT the PLC on the other end PLC on tha oer end If an error occurs 9601 O OL TL IC is returned as the response OO is the error code and OLI is the BCC ae Note The MEWTOCOL master function of computer link is recommended as it is easy to communicate 7 53 The values of DT50 and DT51 are written and 1 of PLC R1 R20 arc _ _ _ _ 1 oF F95 ASC M X O1 WDDOOOO DT ibi FOS ASC M Q000004XXXXXX DT 457 D Fas ASC M XX DT 163 8 spaces F71 HEXA DT 160 F112 WBSR DT151 DT 184 _ 2112 WESR DT151 DT 164 159 MTRN DT150 K27 Ki RO038 21 R21 DT202 H2431 R22 lt a R21 e 159 MTRN DT150 KO K1 T Shifted for 1 byte to execute the conversion instruction F71 easily DT151 DT152 DT153 D 3 DT154 F112 instruction Shift to right for 2 P 55 digits DT156 DT158 0 01159 X ASCII code is inserted DT180 for the value of 50 X ASCII code is inserted DT162 Tor the value of DT51 HS DT184 When K100 H0064 is in 50 and K200 HOQCB is in 0151 Normal response amp O1SWDLILI R BCC Abnormal response 01 OOOD r L gcc Error code 7 54 7 4 4 1 N Communication General purpose Serial Communication Overview The
62. Home rebin sait EL Home mut F 100 Near home input driver side Near hare sanga A cmm um NES COS CODD xs AX t Positioning eg operation running Lors Conimicnde H1121 PE initial speed 200 He corm Max speed 2000 Hz PT Acceleration Cree 150 BERE Orna jen nulpa dig Hil Pulseeutputinstucion Home reatum The man headed by DIAR E used 8 and pasos aem oulput fram iA LL ooo a GL er Hro Mv 30052 re Mv HIC 30952 p o A Mearhome deceleration start J m C eee Pulse output diagram Mew horae sermo Hamne 2 CN QNM ZODO HE 200 Hr O Hz 9 ms 15 ms 10 36 Sample program Home return operation using CH1 Plus direction When X3 turns on a pulse is output from CW output Y200 of the specified channel CH1 and the return to home begins When X200 turns on deceleration begins and when X202 turns on home return is completed After the return to home is completed the elapsed value areas DT90352 and DT90353 are cleared to O OV 24 V DI FP X 1 dad X3 Home return stant
63. Teisi i j COM FP xX Power supply for sensor Power supply for input Voltage output type Sensor Intemal mes o Power supply for Input Precaution when using LED equipped lead switch Input berminal LED p FE X equipped or more reed switch 1 2 CO 24 V Precaution when using two wire type sensor Eee er rene Tiwi type sensor mama eraud 7 t c Ls Seneor s leakage currant mA Bleeder kL The off voltage of the input is 2 4 V therefore select the value af bleeder resistor R so that the voltage between the COM terminal and tha input terminal will be lass than 2 4 V The input impedance is 5 6 k4 Ix Eus 524 Therefore SEHR 1 24d uo 5 6 2 4 The wattage W of the resistor i5 Power supply volage In the aclual selecbon use a value thal rs 3 5 tenes lhe value of WW NPN open collector output type censor Power supply for inpal Two wire output type zensor Internal g Power supply for impul When a LED is connected in series to an input contact such as LED equipped lead switch make sure that the on voltage applied to the PLC input terminal is greater than 21 6V DC In particular take care when connecting a number of switches in series If the input of PLC does not turn off because of leakage current from the two wire type sensor photoelec
64. The baud rates of 300 600 and 1200 bps can be specified by the SYS1 instruction However the setting value of the system register cannot be changed Programming e For a computer link a program should be created that allows command messages to be sent and response messages to be received on the computer side No communication program is required on the PLC side Specify the communication format only by the system register e Create the program on the PC side using Basic language or C language according to the MEWTOCOL COM Commands to monitor and control the operation of the PLC are provided in the MEWTOCOL COM 7 28 Connection to the computer 1 1 communication Overview For a 1 1 computer link between the FP X and a computer an RS232C cable is needed Communication is performed via commands from the computer and responses from the PLC Using AFPX COM1 gt 1 channel RS232C type Cormier pide FP x xidn DESUB Seen Sacer lier Send RE Loar In band Using AFPX COM2 gt 2channel RS232C type Computer siin EP X miju iD Foe 31 Sed 1 Frohe 1 2 Sard Cin 2 i R3 Receive Dana 7 Ta athar iae Using AFPX COM3 RS422 setting 1 channel RS485 RS422 type dem 4 FB num t ap rmm Note There are several names for the sig
65. clegr center Hot used Dur 0554 T AR He fo BO bhir MW Home The dla dnbie hendad iy DTZOO used 13 Labi hacc Lie ihe da n adeo by UTZU0 ar and output tom cH an frem CHI a GEM a de GENE Gm S Gu MEME t 10 and using as a 1 6 timer gm ee Near home deceleration start xB ee wv Fo MV 90052 Pulse output diagram hear haee Homme sear X34H OH XA GH 1000 Hz 9 37 9 4 8 Pulse Output Instruction F172 JOG operation e This instruction is used for JOG operation by obtaining a pulse from the desired output when the execution condition trigger turns on X6 The pulse of 300 Hz is output from YO during Fi DMV H1110 DT300 J XB is turned on Fi K300 01302 When this program runs the data table and F172 DT300 dn pulse output diagram will be as shown Data table DT300 A 1 DT304 Control code H 1110 eee t ee Pulse output diagram AB JOG ON command OFF Pulse DHZ 1 Control code lt H constant H LIL LILILICILIEI ill arget value setting D Mode with no target value 1 Target valu match stop mode BDuty on width 0 Dut
66. speed 20 _ gp ajajajaj Hl 5 i MEE ACA NES HE RUNG AJ 0 J s ERO qo dq A Pip 5 i Note The maximum counting speed may be lower than the above mentioned values when the HSC target value match ON OFF instruction and other interrupt programs are executed simultaneously 9 6 Max counting speed Frequency kHz c 3 Q mI 3 0 Q lt sm gt c pm a E O Pulse output 2 CH Pulse output 4 CH 1 axis interpolation PUSE Output 2 axis interpolation Pulse output 1 CH Note The maximum counting speed may be lower than the above mentioned values when the HSC target value match ON OFF instruction and other interrupt programs are executed simultaneously 9 7 Pulse input output performance Independent control Le Available 100 Available Available 1 Available Available Available 100 2 Note Even if all channels are used they can be used within the ranges above Interpolation control Maximum output frequency kHz High speed Medium speed Composite speed High speed CH Medium speed CH Available 100 Available Available Note Even if all channels
67. 1 Ma 413 Communication Farmat Time 0412 Mode Char Bit BBtis v Link wo housa E lUssge setts 2 for CPU inpu ordei A Stop Bit Usage settings For CPU output PC Link Special MODBUS RTU Special inputz Software filter settings 1 of CPU input 415 Baudrate S600 bps Software filter settings 2 of CPU input Software filter settings 3 of CPL input Software filter settings 4 of CPU input Tool Port Cancel Initialize Help W Reference MODBUS RTU Specifications It can be downloaded from our website http panasonic denko co jp ac e dl manual list plc jsp 7 78 7 6 2 MEWTOCOL Master Sample Program Use the F145 SEND Data send or F146 RECV Data receive instruction to use the MEWTOCOL master function Note Available for the transistor type and relay type Ver 1 21 or later version only Sample program Sets the communication port to COM1 the remote unit No ta 01 and No of processing words to 2 in the DT100 and DT101 Clear the WRO to send the write command first Clear the write data DT50 and DT51 Set the read data DT60 and DT61 R9013 H Fo mv H2 Dr100 FO H1004 DTi 1 FOMV WRO 3 FIDMV HO DTs0 F1 HFFFFFFFF DT60 R1 is the transmission condilion of
68. 1 Register the bit word device to be monitored by the time chart monitor function of FPWIN GR 2 Specify the sampling configurations Set the mode of the sampling configurations to Trace Set the sampling rate time to O Cond gue abies Mode TRACE Sampling Time Ties 100 10001 Fate Dew mer 100 men 1499 3 Read data by trigger 1 Stop sampling by stopping monitoring the trace that has been started in the above procedure 1 or 2 on the time chart display of FPWIN GR The data will be indicated in the time chart Stop monitoring Stop with the Mil button stop by the Trigger Break in the menu or stop by the F156 instruction Ti Teed Finca date Sample Trace window Paadueg sampa tace wad iore hile IUE ES Th 3750 j Reference lt FPWIN GR Help 12 12 12 6 Time Constant Processing The input time constants for 32 points of the CPU input XO to X1F can be set by the system registers 430 to 437 If this setting is specified an operation like the equivalent circuit below will be performed By the setting the noises or chattering of input will be removed CXn 7 Input signal of Xn contact Xn Image memory of input Xn Timer processing Timer processing Xn Setting value System c e um register setting value Timer processing isos 7 Xn Setting value System 1 R regis
69. 1 channel RS232C cassette AFPX COM4 Ethernet 1 channel RS232C cassette 5 2 channel type RS485 cassette AFPX COM6 Procedure 1 Check if the receive data terminal of a connected device is connected to the SD and the send data terminal is connected to the RD Check if the SG is connected Procedure 2 1 Check if the CS signal is on 2 When the CS of the communication cassette LED does not light the CS signal is not on 3 If the three wire type is used connect the RS signal and the CS signal of the communication cassette and turn the CS signal on Note For 1 only Procedure 3 Check that link areas do not overlap Procedure 4 When the RS232C is either one of the followings check if COM cassette is selected for Port selection 1 When controlling the 1 channel type RS232C with 5 wire type 2 When using the COM2 port with the 2 channel type RS232C 3 When using the COM2 port with the 1 channel RS485 and 1 channel RS232C 4 When using the COM2 port with the Ethernet and 1 channel RS232C Procedure 5 Check that the baud rate is set to 9600 bps 19200 bps or 115200 bps for the COM2 port of the 2 channel type RS485 The settings of the system register and the cassette backside switch should be the same P Example Chapter 7 Communication Cassette 13 9 13 2 9 A Communication Error has Occurred through RS422 Condition No communication with 1 channel type RS232C RS422 cassette AF
70. 5 Acceleralion deceleration time t ms Na of steps x 1000 Initial speed 0 Hz Pulses are output from Y 1 and a return to the here positian is carmed oul at anm milia speed of 200 Hz a maximum speed of 2000 Hz and an acceleration decelerabon mme of When this program runs the positioning data table and the pulse output diagram will be as shown belcw 9 33 1 Control code H constant 0 Fixed BNumber of accelerabon deceleraton steps 30 steps 1 60 staps 00000000 llDuty on width Duty 1 2 50 1 Duty 1 4 25 Bi Frequency range 1 5 Hz to 9 8 kHz 1 48 Hz lo 100 kHz 2 191 Hz to 100 kHz Optional mode and output type 20 21 22 26 home return home return home return 23 24 Type home return Type home return Type home return Type home return Type home return home retum 11 home return Type home retum 11 home return Type Il home return Type Il home retum Type 11 Rome return Type Il home retum CW COW Direction output OFF Direction output ON CVV and deviation counter clear CCW and deviation counter clear Dhrection output OFF and devebon counter clear and deviation counter clear CCW Direction output OFF Direction output ON CW and deviation counter clear CCW and devaton counter clear Direction output OFF and
71. 50 60 Hz 47 to 63 Hz Leakage current 0 75 mA or less between input and protective earth terminals Internal power supply part 20 000 hours at 55 Guaranteed life Built in Cannot be replaced Insulation system Transformer insulation Terminal screw Service Power Supply for Input Output Used for AC power supply type only Specifications C30 C60 E30 Rated output voltage 24 V DC Voltage regulation range 21 6 to 26 4 V DC Rated output current 0 15 A Overcurrent protection Available function 9 atabe Terminal screw Note This is a function to protect overcurrent temporarily If a current load that is out of the specifications is connected it may lead to damages 15 3 DC power supply Rated voltage 24 V DC Voltage regulation range 20 4 to 28 8 V DC nrush current 12 A or less at 25 C Momentary power off time 10 ms Internal power supply part Guaranteed life Fuse Built in Cannot be replaced Insulation system Transformer insulation Terminal screw M3 20 000 h at 55 Weight Unit Mode No Weight Unt ModelNo Weight Approx 209 Communi cation ArPxcows APP cassette 55 Approx 20 g Control unit Analog output Thermocouple n cassette AFPxX TC2 Approx 25 g Sapiens Master memory AEPXMRTO Approx cassette penes AS Pads Expansion FPO AFPX EFPO Approx 65 g adapter 15 4 Unit s current consumption table Current consum
72. 7150 MTAA External d vice Data table for transmission send buffer When transmission begins KB When transmission ends KO Reduces at avery transmission HAXB HATCA pr102 HAD T Data is transmitted in arder DTi03 HASE from the low order byte Binary data can be transmitted DTIH HANG Data table before transmission Sample program for sending data The following program transmits the characters ABCDEFGH Hex to an external device using 1 port RO Rid DR EU et oF Data Transmission command Tha intemal relay R10 is turned on when the Qo Manamba conde on PLI ans on RIO E I 255 ABCDEFGH 0 101 drain Data conversion The characters ABCDEFGH are converted to Q an PGA and venen io DT 101 in DTTM 4spaces are inserted Lrisswerm KI Staring from D T100 the oonbents of B bytes ds Data transmission The data in the send buffer is sent from are sant from COMI port K1 The program described above is executed in the following sequence 1 ABCDEFGH is converted to an ASCII code and stored in a data register 2 The data is sent from port using the F159 MTRN instruction Explanatory diagram 1 The characters are converted to code Pala register DT an
73. Af 5000 500 60 steps 75 Hz 2300 ms 60 steps 5 ms Regarding the specification of acceleration deceleration time For specifying acceleration deceleration time No of steps and initial speed set the value to be calculated by the formula below Specify acceleration deceleration time in the 30 ms unit with 30 steps and in the 60 ms unit with 60 steps 5 Acceleration deceleration lime mis gt of steps x 1000 Inilial speed Hz 10 28 1 Control code lt H constant 00000000 0 Fixed Il Number of acceleration deceleration steps 30 steps 1 60 staps Duty on width D Duty 1 2 50 1 Duty 1 4 25 Frequency range 0 1 5 Hz to 9 8 kHz 1 48 Hz to 100 kHz 2 191 Hz to 100 kHz Operation mode and output method 00 Incremental CVWICCW 02 Incremental pulse and direction forward off reverse 03 Incremental pulse and direction forward oni reverse off 10 Absolute CW CCVV 12 Absolute pulse and direction forward off reverse on 13 Absolute pulse and direction forward on reverse off 2 Speed Frequency Hz K constant Frequency range 1 5 Hz 10 9 8 kHz K1 to K8BO0 unit Hz Max error near 9 8 KHZ approx 0 9 kHz Set K1 to specify 1 5 Hz 1 48Hzto 100 kHz K48 to K100000 unit Hz Max error naar 100 kHz approx 3 kHz 2 191 Hz to 100 kHz K191 to K100000 unit Hz Max error near 100 kHz approx
74. Destination IP address 2 _ When the v ersion of A FPX COMBis DT10006 0x00 reserve Destination IP address 3 1 10 H1100 is notified confirmed DT10007 0x00 reserve Destination IP address 4 Note T he de stination P a ddress and DT10008 Destination port No Spore notified confirmed only when selecting DT10009 Version of AFPX COMS the computer link and client setting Note1 Error code 0 Normal 1 DHCP acquisition error 2 IP address duplicate error Connection information confirmation area No Higher bytes Lower bytes Destination IP address 1 Destination IP address 3 Destination IP address 4 Own IP address 17 DT10017 Own IP address 4 DT10018 0x0000 reserve DT10019 Version of AFPX COM5 7 105 Network information notification If the network information notification setting is enabled the AFPX COM5 notifies the network information to the FP X on completion of the initialization of Ethernet Ethernet is initialized after the power turns on and when the unit is restarted after the change in settings The information is notified by the data area write command WD of 10 words from the information area first number with MEWTOCOL For the memory area is fixed For the unit number is fixed Using this notification enables the completion of the initialization of Ethernet to be confirmed in a ladder program and to
75. H100 F76 P76 ASCII code gt 16 bit binary data F77 32 bit binary data gt ASCII code F78 ASCII code gt DABI P78 32 bit binary PDABI data 16 bit binary data 4 digit BCD data PBCD Og Og F81 4 digit BCD BIN S D Converts the four digits of BCD data P81 data 16 bit PBIN specified by S to 16 bits of binary data adus 5 binary data and stores it in D Example H100 K100 F82 32 bit binary DBCD S D Converts the 32 bits of binary data P82 data 8 digit PDBCD specified by S 1 S to eight digits of 7 BCD data BCD data and stores it in 0 1 D F83 8 digit BCD DBIN Converts the eight digits of BCD data lt lt lt P83 data gt 32 bit PDBIN specified by S 1 S to 32 bits of binary 7 binary data data and stores it in D 1 D F84 16 bit data INV Inverts each bit of data of D plement of 1 F85 16 bit data P85 complement of 2 F86 32 bit data P86 complement of 2 P87 absolute PABS P88 absolute PDABS F89 16 bit data EXT P89 sign extension PEXT F90 Decode DECO P90 PDECO Inverts each bit of data of D and adds 1 inverts the sign 3 Inverts each bit of data of D 1 D and adds 1 inverts the sign 3 Gives the absolute value of the data of D Gives the absolute value of the data of 3 D 1 D Extends the 16 bits of data in D to 32 bits in 0 1 D 3 S n D Decodes part of the data
76. Initial value DTO na COM port No 417 Receive buffer capacity for COM1 port 0 to 2048 words Initial value 2048 words Settings for COM2 port AFPX COM2 AFPX COM4 AFPX COM5 AFPX COM6 Nam Set Value No 412 Selection of communication mode for General purpose serial communication COM2 port Communication format for COM2 port Data length 7 bits 8 bits Parity check None Odd Even otop bit 1 bit 2 bits Terminator CR CR LF None ETX Header No STX STX No 415 No 418 Starting address for receive buffer for DTO to 0732764 Initial value DT2048 2 port No 419 Receive buffer capacity for COM2 port 0 to 2048 words Initial value 2048 words Note1 When using the C14 the values are DTO to DT12285 Note2 The baud rates of 300 600 and 1200 bps can be specified by the SYS1 instruction Ver 2 0 or more However the setting value of the system register cannot be changed Note3 The setting values for the COM2 port of AFPX COM6 are 9600 bps 19200 bps and 115200 bps only The same baud rate should be specified by the cassette backside switch and the system register 7 48 1 1 communication with FP Series PLC Overview Connect the FP X and another FP series PLC using the RS232C interface and the MEWTOCOL COM communication protocol Note The MEWTOCOL master function of computer link is recommended as it is easy to communi
77. Link Overview e The PLC link is an economic way of linking PLCs of the FP X and FP2 MCU using a twisted pair cable e Data is shared between the PLCs using link relays L and link registers LD e The statuses of the link relays and link registers of one PLC are automatically fed back to the other PLCs on the same network e PC PLC link is not the default setting Therefore the setting of system register COM1 Port setting communication mode no 412 must be changed to PC Link in order to use this function e Unit numbers and link areas are allocated using the system registers e t is available with the COM1 port only FP X FP 2 FP2IFP2SH FP X no 1 Urt no Unit no 3 Unit no amp Hercajya area The link relays and link registers of Ihe PLCs contain areas for sending and areas for receiving data These areas are used lo share dala among the PLES 7 56 Operation of PLC link e Turning on a link relay contact in one PLC turns on the same link relay in all other PLCs on the same network e Likewise if the contents of a link register in one PLC are changed the values of the same link register are changed in all PLCs on the same network B Link relay Link relay LO far unit na 1 16 med on The status change is fed back to the programs of the other unds and YO of the other unils i amp set to TRUE o 4 Link neque e iw a ink register constant af 100 is
78. SPDH instruction the home input should be specified in the system register No 401 9 19 9 4 2 Types of Pulse Output Method and Operation Modes Clockwise counter clockwise output method onward s f f f FI f ive ee norermenieu Go uring Reverse pulse COW pulsa va ve yy Pulse direction output method forward OFF reverse ON ala Forward Reverse El Fs Ls use FUR ii va Ye OFF Incremental counting Dec emental counting Pulse direction output method forward ON reverse OFF Forward ma Reversa m weve vey FULLU OFF Rotation Lii res ors 220 Incremental Diremeni Control is carried out using two pulses a forward rotation pulse and a reverse rotation pulse Control is carried out using one pulse output to specify the speed and another to specify the direction of rotation with on off signals In this mode forward rotation is carried out when the rotation direction signal is OFF Control is carried out using one pulse output to specify the speed and another to specify the direction of rotation with on off signals In this mode forward rotation is carried out when the rotation direction signal is ON The output signals are the number of the built in output of the main unit When the pulse output has been set only the pulse is output and the values
79. Stop bit length 1 bit Note The unit numbers station numbers of the tool port should be specified using the system register Tool port setting Power supply and input terminal block This is the power supply and input wiring terminal A solderless terminal for M3 can be used Service power supply for input and output terminal block This is the service power supply for input and output wiring terminal A solderless terminal for M3 can be used 9 Expansion cover It is used after the expansion cable and the battery has been installed 09 Add on cassette connector Connector For connecting expansion unit and expansion FPO adapter An exclusive expansion cable is inserted Battery cover This battery cover is removed when the optional backup battery is installed Installing the backup battery enables the backup of the realtime clock or data registers 03 DIN rail attachment lever This lever enables the units to attach to a DIN rail at a touch 2 4 2 2 Power Supply Specifications 2 2 1 AC Power Supply C14 C30R C60 Rated voltage 100 to 240 V AC Voltage regulation range 85 to 264 V AC Inrush current 40 A or less at 240 V AC 25 C 45 A or less at 240 V AC 25 C Momentary power off time 10 ms when using 100 V AC Frequency 50 60 Hz 47 to 63 Hz Leakage current 0 75 mA or less between input and protective earth terminals pierna edid SHREY 20 000 hours at 55 C Guaranteed life Fu
80. TE Tem Hira m m 1 1 7 1 Setting and changing using program 1 The values written to the special data registers DT90054 to DT90057 which are allocated as the clock calendar setting area are sent 2 A value of H8000 is written to DT90058 Note The value can be sent using the differential instruction DF or by changing H8000 to H0000 Do not always write H8000 Example showing the date and time being written Set the time to 12 00 00 on the 5th day when the XO turns on X0 AXE EXEC VEL JL e c F FO DT Ls i 5 pi aibi IC NOE ET oe Lo IE Mv H512 Drs0055 Inputs 12th hour 5th day ae eee eee e a a a Fo Mv Haoo0 DT 90058 Set the time o o ee oe we oe Note No values have been set in the default settings so the programming tool or another means must be used to specify the values Example showing the clock calendar being used Sample program for fixed schedule and automatic start In the example shown here the clock calendar function is used to output YO signal for one second at 8 30 a m every day Here the Hour minute data stored in the special data register DT90053 is used to output the signal at the appointed time H83010 Feo cme Haso F Data comparison instruction The value of the special data register DT90053 Hour 1 minute dala compared with the value cf HB30 8 Rn R2006
81. Text The content differs depending on the command The content should be noted in all upper case characters following the fixed formula for the particular command 17 4 R amp X O 1 1 C s opecification and Command name data to be written Command code T amp ASCH code H23 4 Check code BCC block check code for error detection using horizontal parity The BCC should be created so that it targets all of the text data from the header to the last text character The BCC starts from the header and checks each character in sequence using the exclusive OR operation and replaces the final result with character text It is normally part of the calculation program and is created automatically The parity check can be skipped by entering ASCII code H2A2A instead of the BCC 5 Terminator end code Messages must always end with a Cp ASCII code HOD 7 23 Note When writing e The method for writing text segments in the message varies depending on the type of command e f there is a large number of characters to be written they may be divided and sent as several commands If there is a large number of characters in the value that was loaded they may be divided and several responses sent b Key Point e With the FP X an expansion header lt is supported to send single frames of up to 2048 characters as well as general 96 Type of header No of characters that can be sent in 1 fr
82. a response is returned With the converter SI 35 manufactured by Lineeye Co Ltd in the RS485 communication adjust the response time by this instruction if necessary SYS1 instruction This is to delay a response for n scan time to be specified H HI SYS1 COMI 0 999 3 RO 10 H oF H 1 M COMI WAIT2 First second F keyword keyword input all 12 letters after M including comma aligning to the right Exmapel WATIT2 123456 1789101112 When RO turns the response of COM1 port RS485 port delays for two scans If the scan time is 500ys it delays for 1 ms gd Reference FP series Programming manual ARCT1F313E gt 1 19 7 3 Communication Function 1 Computer Link 7 3 1 Computer Link Overview Compulei FP X 7 Command message Response message Computer link e The computer link function is to communicate between a computer and PLCs or between PLC and external devices connected A proprietary MEWNET protocol called MEWTOCOL COM is used for communicating with the computer link MEWTOCOL COM is also used for the communication between the tool software such as FPWIN GR and the PLC e There are a MEWTOCOL master function and a MEWTOCOL slave function for the computer link The side that issues commands is called master and the side that receives the commands executes the process and sends back responses is called slave
83. and the instruction is executed only if the previous condition was off and the current condition is on In any other case the instruction is not executed Precautions when using an instruction which performs leading edge detection e When RUN begins for example when the system is powered on the off on change of the execution condition trigger is not detected The instruction is not executed Execution of the instruction will take place as explained on the next page e When used with one of the instructions indicated in instructions 1 to 6 below which change the order of execution of instructions the operation of the instruction may change depending on input timing Take care regarding this point Be careful when using leading edge detection type instructions with control instructions such as 1 MC and MCE instructions 2 JP and LBL instructions 3 LOOP and LBL instructions 4 CNDE instruction 5 Step ladder instructions 6 Subroutine instructions 14 5 2 Operation and Precautions When RUN Starts Operation of first scan after RUN begins e The leading edge detection instruction is not executed when the mode has been switched to the RUN mode or when the power supply is booted in the RUN mode if the trigger execution condition is already on RUN Power on Trigger Operation of Instruction Not executed Executed e f you need to execute an instruction when the trigger execution condition is on prior
84. bit data in the comparative condition S1 lt S2 or S1 gt S2 ST Lr gt 51 52 d Begins a logic operation by comparing two 16 5 bit data in the comparative condition S1 gt S2 Begins a logic operation by comparing two 16 ST lt gt bit data in the comparative condition S1 gt S2 or S1 S2 ST 81 82 zx Begins a logic operation by comparing two 16 5 bit data in the comparative condition S1 S2 ST Begins a logic operation by comparing two 16 bit data in the comparative condition S1 lt S2 or 51 82 16 bit ants comparative condition S1 S2 compare B Connects a Form A normally open contact AND 2 4 81 52 serially by comparing two 16 bit data in the 5 comparative condition S1 lt S2 S1 gt S2 Connects a Form A normally open contact fF 8 8 4 serially by comparing two 16 bit data in the comparative condition S1 gt S2 Connects a Form A normally open contact _ gt 8 824 serially by comparing two 16 bit data in the comparative condition S1 gt S2 or S1 S2 Connects a Form A normally open contact 553 8 4 serially by comparing two 16 bit data in the 5 comparative condition S1 lt S2 Connects a Form A normally open contact _ lt 81 52 serially by comparing two 16 bit data in the comparative condition S1 lt S2 or S1 S2 Connects a Form A normally open contact in dat
85. cable power supply cable 1 7 1 2 4 Add on Cassettes Communication cassettes Application cassettes Name Specifications Product No Communication cassette Application cassette 1 8 FP X Communication cassette FP X Communication cassette FP X Communication cassette FP X Communication cassette FP X Communication cassette FP X Communication cassette FP X Analog input cassette FP X Analog output cassette FP X Analog I O cassette FP X Thermocouple cassette FP X RTD cassette FP X Input cassette FP X Output cassette FP X I O cassette FP X Pulse I O cassette FP X Master memory cassette 5 wire 1 channel RS232C AFPX COM1 3 wire 2 channel RS232C AFPX COM2 T channel RS485 RS422 AFPX COM3 insulated 1 channel RS485 insulated AEPX COM4 3 wire 1 channel RS232C 2 channel RS485 insulated non insulated between AFPX COM6 channels Ethernet 3 wire 1 channel RS232C AFPX COMS 2 channel analog input non insulated 2 channel analog output insulated insulated between channels 2 channel analog input insulated 1 channel analog output insulated 2 channel thermocouple input insulated insulated between channels 2 ch RTD input insulated insulated between channels 8 point DC input AFPX IN8 8 point transistor output TR NPN AFPX TR8 6 point transistor output TR6P PNP AFPX TR6 4 point DC input 3 point AFPX IN4T transistor outp
86. flag R9039 R9049 turns on When you do not wish to add the terminator end code during transmissions e Specify the number of bytes to be transmitted using a negative number e f you also do not wish to add a terminator to received data set system register 413 or 414 to Terminator None Programming example The following program transmits 8 bytes of data without adding the terminator RJ HDF di 159 K amp E 1 i Beth Key Point e Do not include the terminator end code in the transmission data The terminator is added automatically e When STX exist is specified for the header start code in system register 413 or 414 do not add the header to the transmission data The header is added automatically e When using the AFPX COMT1 transmission does not take place until CS Clear to Send turns on If you are not going to connect to the other device connect to RS Request to Send e he maximum number of transmission bytes n is 2048 e The contact numbers in parentheses refer to COM2 port 1 40 Receiving data from external devices aor d Data input from the COM port is stored in the receive buffer specified by the system register and the reception done flag goes on If the reception done flag is off data can be received OMA reise alid Exlerna at any time e dr Hecoplion Gong lag on Data table for reception receive buffer This
87. for error detection using horizontal parity The BCC starts from the header and checks each character in sequence using the exclusive OR operation and replaces the final result with character text 5 Terminator end code There is always a Cp ASCII code HOD at the end of the message Note When reading e f no response is returned the communication format may not be correct or the command may not have arrived at the PLC or the PLC may not be functioning Check to make sure all of the communication specifications e g baud rate data length and parity match between the computer and the PLC e f the response contains an instead of a the command was not processed successfully The response will contain a communication error code Check the meaning of the error code e Unit number and command name are always identical in a command and its corresponding response see below This makes the correspondence between a command and a response clear E Same lt Same 4 Hesponse 7 25 Commands to be used Reads the on and off status of contacts Specifies only one point Specifies multiple contacts Specifies a range in word units Turns contacts on and off Specifies only one point Specifies multiple contacts Specifies a range in word units Read data area RD Reads the contents of a data area Write timer counter set value area Read contact area Write co
88. level instruction such as data transfer it is not regarded as duplicated output e f you enter RUN mode while the duplicated output condition exists it will be normally flagged as an error The ERROR ALARM LED will flash and the self diagnostic error flag R9000 will go on How to check for duplicated use You can check for duplicated outputs in the program using the programming tool by the following method Using the tool software Select the Debug Totally Check Program in the menu bar and click Execute If there are any duplicated outputs an error message and the address will be displayed Enabling duplicated output e f you need to use output repeatedly due to the content of the program duplicated output can be enabled e n this case change the setting of system register 20 to enable e When this is done an error will not occur when the program is executed 14 1 2 When Output is Repeated with an OT KP SET or RST Instruction Condition of internal and output relays during operation e When instructions are repeatedly used which output to internal and output relays such as transfer instructions and OT KP SET and RST instructions the contents are rewritten at each step during operation Example Processing when SET RST and OT instructions are used X0 to X2 are all on I his section of the program is processed as if RO are an This section of the program is processed as if RO are off Th
89. number of the FP X Van he Mra tel E Fils Ete View Heb xm Ll lhaj t m h Send Time Mery Wh Meexry Card Pert oe Talis rii Na 2 Enabled bristly bead Wr J 102 153 1E a S 12184114 unu i Set the IP address and port number corresponding to the unit number of the connected FP X nmi 4 Hucl Hama TP Address 79188114 Send 15 tunc Port Na PAH Select Feri m j BASE T AU Memory Protect Memory Memory Card Memory Delault Griy pii M Sub Mack Reference For the details of the settings for the GV GV42 GV52 GV62 Terminal GVWIN Additional Specifications GV series Communication Unit Manual Ethernet 1 112 Setting of FP X 1 FP X System register setting No 412 Computer link mode 2 Setting of AFPX COM5 Setting value Communication protocol TCP Computer link Source port No 9094 Timeout JO UDP IP can be used for the communication method In that case change the setting for PLC Type Setting of the GV to FP series Ethernet UDP IP Set the communication protocol of the AFP COM5 to UDP and set the send type to UNICAST Note For the Ethernet communication with the GV the computer link is used The GV is the master and the FP X is the slave It cannot be used if se
90. output Y6 turns On Target value match OFF instruction F167 Example 1 XC If the elapsed value DT90304 and DT90305 F167 HC1R K1 K30000 Y4 for channel 1 matches K30000 output Y4 turns off Example 2 XD If the elapsed value DT90312 and DT90313 167 HC1R K40000 Y5 for channel 3 matches K40000 output Y5 turns off FP X Tr type Elapsed value and target value areas of high speed counter to ch7 High speed counter a No Control flag Elapsed value area Target value area R9110 DT90300 to DT90301 DT90302 to DT90303 R9111 DT90304 to DT90305 DT90304 to DT90307 R9112 DT90308 to DT90309 DT90310 to DT90311 9 15 9 3 6 Sample program Control Unit and Main Unit I O Positioning operations with a single speed inverter Wiring example Tr type input terminal Conveyor Encoder input xo ZA L T E 7 Operation start X5 Fa y la COM o Un F Motor Encoder terminal TOY iwariri Mena operation Operahan Skip Operation chart I O allocation Speed Main X0 Encoderinput o unit X5 Operationstatsignal N aa __ 100_ Positioning operation running _ Number of puise Ri01 Positioning operation start R102 Positioning done pulse wd o L R9110 High speed counter CHO control flag Progr
91. output _ 7 70 7 5 5 PC PLC Link Response Time The maximum value for the transmission time T of one cycle can be calculated using the following formula max Tsi Ts2 T7sn Tit Tsot Nk aD T IK link addition processing ime UTS transmission time per station 3 8O master station scan time 2 T It link table sending time The various items in the formula are calculated as described below lt Ts transmission time per station Ts scan time Tpc PC PLC link sending time Tpc Ttx sending time per byte x Pcm PLC link sending size Ttx 1 baud rate x 1000 x 11 ms Approx 0 096 ms at 115 2 kbps Pcm 23 number of relay words number of register words x 4 T Tit link table sending time Tit Ttx sending time per byte x Ltm link table sending size Ttx 1 baud rate x 1000 x 11 ms Approx 0 096 ms at 115 2 kbps 13 2 x n n number of stations being added Tso master station scan time This should be confirmed using the programming tool V link addition processing time If no stations are being added 0 link addition command sending time Twt addition waiting time Tls sending time for command to stop transmission if link error occurs Tso master station scan time Tic 10 x Ttx sending time per byte Ttx 1 baud rate x 1000 x 11 ms Approx 0 096 ms at 115 2 kbps Twt 7 Initial val
92. re F Lae he Pa Hn le a hn ge e 4 La General purpose serial communication e With general purpose serial communication data can be sent back and forth between an image processing device connected to the COM port and an external device such as a bar code reader e Reading and writing of data is done using a ladder program in the FP X while reading and writing of data from an external is handled through the data registers Image cheoker FP X Dala register DT Data lrangmissloan using F159 _ Data received in recaia buffer Data j t amd received ham extberraldeyices Het deli registers PC PLC link The FP X supports the link system that connects the PC PLC link corresponding to the MEWNET WO max 16 units with the twisted pair cables e n a PC PLC link data is shared with all PLCs connected via MEWNET using dedicated internal relays called link relays L and data registers called link registers LD e f the link relay contact for one PLC goes on the same link relay also goes on in each of the other PLCs connected to the network Likewise if the contents of a link register are rewritten in one PLC the change is made in the same link register of each of the other PLCs connected to the network e he status of the link relays and link registers in any one PLC is fed back to all of the other PLCs connected to the network so contr
93. up battery error IC memory card back up battery error Incompati ble IC memory card error No unit for the configu ration Self diagnostic error set by F148 ERR P148 PERR instruction Opera tion status Conti nues Conti nues Conti nues Conti nues Cont inues Cont inues Conti nues Conti nues Description and steps to take Terminal station setting was not properly performed Check stations at both ends of the communication path and set them in the terminal station using the dip switches Set the INITIALIZE TEST selecto1inmjvbgycfrde892 r to the INITIALIZE position while keeping the mode selector in the RUN position If the same error occurs after this please contact your dealer Abnormality was detected when the multi CPU system was used Please contact your dealer The voltage of the backup battery for the IC memory card lowered The BATT LED does not turn on Charge or replace the backup battery of IC memory card The contents of the IC memory card cannot be guaranteed The voltage of the backup battery for IC memory card lowers The BATT LED does not turn on Charge or replace the backup battery of IC memory card The contents of the IC memory card cannot be guaranteed The IC memory card installed is not compatible Replace the IC memory card compatible with FP2SH FP10SH MEWNET W2 MCU The MEWNET W2 link unit or MCU Multi communicatio
94. 0 1 D cosine PBCOS operation BCD type BTAN TAN S1 1 1 gt 0 1 D tangent PBTAN operation BCD type BASIN SIN S141 S1 gt D 1 D arcsine PBASIN x E operation F304 BCD type BACOS COS 1 1 1 gt 0 1 D P304 arccosine PBACOS operation BCD type BATAN TAN 1 1 S1 gt D 1 D arctangent PBATAN x operation P309 type data PFMV move F310 Floating point F 52 1 1 1 2 1 S2 5 D 1 D P310 type data addition Floating point 1 S2 S141 1 2 1 S2 5 D 1 D type data D 14 subtraction Floating point F 1 S2 S141 51 52 1 2 gt 0 1 D type data PF D 14 multiplication F313 Floating point F96 1 S2 S141 S 1 S2 1 2 gt 0 1 D P313 type data D 14 2 division Available Not available Not available partially 1 This instruction is only available for FP e Ver 1 2 or later 2 This instruction is available for FP e Ver 1 21 or later and FPO V2 1 or later 17 71 FP2SH FP10SH Ope Description lean rand P314 data sine Soper len A F315 Floating point type mW COS S 1 S 5 D 1 D P315 data cosine PCOS 10 4 operation P316 data tangent PTAN operation F317 Floating point type SIN 5 1 S gt D 1 D P317 data arcsine 10 4 operation F318 Floating point type ACOS S D COS 5 1 gt 0 1 D P318 data arccosine PACOS 10 1 operation Floati
95. 1 Select Online Edit Mode under the Online on the menu bar or press the CTRL and F2 keys at the same time to switch to the Online screen 2 Select or Set PLC Password under Tool on the menu bar The following display will be shown Set FLE Password PLE Home settings Current status to Passwordis not set Close Available retry counts gt counts eared Cancel digit number Hel Help C 3 digts Hes Match case Operation Mode C Access Protect Unprotect digits password Enter in alphanumeric Setting for FP memory loader aptian i Allow the download to older than Version 2 5 11 12 1 Select 8 digits for Digit number 2 Uncheck Allow the download to older than Version 2 5 in Setting for F P m emory loader option 3 Check the functions to be used of Options for FP memory loader Limited distribution function Allow t he download i n c ase of same password Enable the upload protection setting Set that PLC cannot be uploaded 4 After setting the above check box input a 8 digit password and then click Setting The setting has completed Note This function is available only when the version of FP X is Ver2 5 orlater anda 8 digit password has been set 11 5 Table of Security Settings Cancel When setting the security on FP X con
96. 1 5 IP idm 192 168 1 11 Unit 1 7 Slave unit2 IP address 182 168 1 12 Description R100 Stores the data for 10 words from DT1000 of the slave unit 1 into the area from DT100 of the master unit R101 Writes the data for 10 words from DT100 of the master unit to the area form DT1010 of the slave unit 1 R102 Stores the data for 10 words from DT1000 of the slave unit 2 into the area from DT120 of the master unit R103 Writes the data for 10 words from DT130 of the master unit to the area form DT1010 of the slave unit 2 Set the system registers for each units by a tool software such as FPWIN GR Systemregistersetting Master unit Computer link mode 115200 bps 8 bits Odd 1 bit Slave unit 1 Unit No 1 Computer link mode 115200 bps 8 bits Odd 1 bit Slave unit 2 Unit No 2 Computer link mode 115200 bps 8 bits Odd 1 bit 7 94 1 When using the MEWTOCOL master function in TCP oet as follows for each unit using Configurator WD IP address setting Communication setting Option setting Master unit IP address 192 168 1 5 Communication protocol TCP Destination unit No Netmask 255 255 255 0 Action mode Client connection and IP address is Gateway 192 168 1 1 Baud rate 115200 bps specified On Communication mode Computer link Target IP address Destination IP address for unit No 192 168 1 11 No 1 192 168 1 11 Destination port No 9094 No 2 192 168 1 12 Source
97. 1 channel Ethernet and 1 channel 3 wire RS232C To other device Destination device AFPX COM6 2 channel RS485 COMG Destination device 1 COMT Transmission re Eo Transmission line Transmission line Transmission line COM2 Transmission line To other device Destination device 2 Tran amp missn line Trazmrmession line To other device Note Non insulated between the COM1 and COM2 1 14 7 1 5 Names and Principle Applications of the Ports Port type ST f Port name USB is used USB is not used Communication function Fitted with the main unit as a standard Computer link General purpose serial communication Mini DIN 5 pin connector purp Computer link Communication cassette General purpose serial communication PONE DOME PC PLC link Communication MODBUS RTU Fitted with the main unitas cassette a standard equipment Computer COM2 port a General purpose serial communication MODBUS RTU For C30 C60 only Note There are restrictions of use on the communication cassette when using the USB port refer to the next page The PC PLC link cannot be used with the AFPX COM5 7 1 6 About USB Port For C30 C60 Only The USB port is allocated to the COM2 port and the functions of the communication cassette are restricted as below when the USB port is used e he USB port is available in the default
98. 2 Receives the data from the slave station E BREE F145 Data send 1 2 Sends the data to the slave station as ia hall E cs E port F146 Data receive RECV W S 2 Receives the data from the slave station P146 as the MEWTOCOL master via COM port F147 Converts the ASCII code data i in the outputs it to the word external output relay WY specified by D F148 Self FERR feno Stores the self diagnostic error number Is lt lt lt P148 diagnostic PERR n Kk 100 in DT9000 turns R9000 on and 3 LJ error set to K299 turns on the alamo a l 5 49 display the connected programming tool Available 3X Not available Not available partially 1 The instruction is available for FPO T32 V2 3 or later and FP e 2 This instruction is available for FPO V1 20 or later and FP e A 3 This instruction is available for FP X V1 20 or later and FPX 32k type 4 This instruction is available for FP X V2 50 or later and V3 20 or later FPO FP e FPX 17 63 FP2SH FP10SH Ope 0 A Boolean Description Piso itellgentunr PREAD nb 9 sx P150 intelligentunit PREAD n D intelligent unit T pg F151 Data write into WRT S1 S2 Writes the data into the intelligent 152 Data read from RMRD 1 S2 Reads the data from the slave station remote I O slave station F153 Data wr
99. 4 V DC 0 3A 1 5 8 points common 1u A orless 1 5 V DC or less off gt on 0 1 ms less on off 0 8 ms or less Zener diode YO Y2 Y4 YO YT Limitations on number of simultaneous on points Keep the number of points which are simultaneously on within the following range as determined by the ambient temperature Load current 0 27A Load currant 0 3A of pania Der common which simulianacu cn BO 55 Ambient temperature C Circuit diagram rer A tr A A Yn Load 21 6 26 4V DC m fa gt COM E e ON OV ema circu 8 23 Product No AFPX TR6P Description Surge absorber LED indication Terminal layout C Y YI Y2 Y4 Y5 NC Limitations on number of simultaneous on points Keep the number of points which are simultaneously on within the following range as determined by the ambient temperature With 0 5A load With 0 34 load NC B N No of points No common 4 eean par common which simultaneou on gimullameou on 43 55 50 55 Ambient temperature C Ambient temperature C Circuit diagram AA niemal circu 8 24 8 3 8 FP X I O Ca
100. 52 or S11 51 52 1 2 39 bit Connects a Form A normally open contact in pP 1 82 parallel by comparing two 32 bit data in the data comparative condition 1 1 1 S2 1 S2 compare Connects a Form A normally open contact in ORD gt pb 5 52 parallel by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 S1 S2 1 S2 ORD lt Start L or S1 1 51 gt 52 1 52 Connects a Form A normally open contact in parallel by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 51 gt 52 1 52 Connects a Form A normally open contact in parallel by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 S1 gt S2 1 52 or S1 1 51 52 1 52 Connects a Form A normally open contact in parallel by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 S1 lt S2 1 52 Connects a Form A normally open contact in parallel by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition 1 1 1 lt S2 1 52 or 1 1 1 2 1 2 Available 2 Not available Not available partially 17 54 Floating point type real number data compare Start Floating point type real number data compare AND ewe ay parallel by comparing two 32 bit data in the point comparative condition S1 1 51 52 1 52 type real lt gt Connects a Form A
101. 80 kHz Related instructions FO MV high speed counter control F1 DMV Read write of elapsed value of high speed counter F171 SPDH trapezoidal control home return F172 PLSH JOG operation F174 SPOH Data table control F175 SPSH Linear interpolation control Note1 The home return operation of the interpolation axes should be performed for every channel Note2 Reference For DT90052 see 10 4 4 Pulse Output Control Instruction FO F1 gt Note3 When using the AFPX PLS only PWM output function PWM output when using pulse I O cassette AFPX PLS e Speed Output used P Output frequency counter contact No duty Related instructions channel used Control flag When resolution 1000 FO MV High speed counter CHO Y 100 R911C 1 5 Hz to 12 5 kHz control 0 0 to 99 995 F1 DMV Read write of When resolution 100 elapsed value of high speed 15 6 kHz to 41 7 kHz counter 0 to 9996 F173 PWMH PWM output 10 6 10 2 2 Functions Used and Restrictions High speed counter built in the control unit No of channels 5 kHz 5 kHz 5 kHz 5 kHz 5 kHz 5 kHz 5 kHz 5 kHz 5 kHz 5 kHz 5 kHz 5 kHz 5 kHz 5 kHz 5 kHz Max frequency 10 kHz 10 kHz 10 kHz 10 kHz 10 kHz 10 kHz 10 kHz 10 kHz 10 kHz 10 kHz 10 kHz 10 kHz 10 kHz 10 kHz 10 kHz 10 kHz 10 kHz 10 kHz 10 kHz 10 kHz 10 kHz 10 kHz 10 kHz 2 Lo __ o Nc xo qno cox Pulse I O set AFPX PLS high
102. 9 Petes relay cunis J cour Tp pores deers i 8 H eg pedir eee Aer Pria Linge Ag pmd rim n La chr M ic Dean leon 2 BH J Click Yes N Al programa comeseniz ed cata wall De arad epo DET e thu Bet PLC Pameward lintitie If the current status is Password is not set this Put Hee eem procedure has completed renim cit Cow All programs and security information were ecquis Count Tenri Foren Lael Solna Creates deleted elo mph batch Mera inpatient B dala pi E rites s sl ar gms poe Eugen aphan Get ohm fari races 25 T About the password data of the master memory cassette AFPX MRTC The data on the password setting can be transferred to the master memory cassette together with the programs from the FP X The password information stored in the master memory cassette will be automatically transferred to another control unit when it is installed and the control unit will be protected The procedure of the transfer to the master memory is as below 1 Turn off the power supply of the PLC and set the RUN PROG mode switch to the PROG mode Install the master memory cassette to transfer the program on the control unit 2 2 Turn on
103. 99 No 412__ Communicationmode Computer link Character bit Paritycheck Odd No 413 Communication format Note1 Set the baud rate to match the baud rate COM 1 port of the AFPX COM5 7 87 Setting Ethernet communication environment of Communication cassette 5 The Configurator WD is used to set Ethernet communication environment of the 5 Start the Configurator WD Search the AFPX COM5 Select the AFPX COMS5 from the search result and set an IP address to connect with a computer After that search again Select the AFPX COM5 and select Edit Communication Setting in the menu or right click to select Communication Setting ae ge Fs ccm Dialog box of communication setting 2 LT Gammunsabwn Computer Link Adin Made Hogs Conte uni Cammunestion tarsata Riad 51 CONI ities Serr eee Sb xj Fari ntosi 32 7671 Time Oui B amp 18005 8 Ting C hand Settee E Desirat kii Fest Me M25 33231807 Source Port h deese Cia 10 1 Na Time feat Tini T T ata ic If the is selected for the communication protocol up to three connections are established using the computer link Ethernet however when using the programming tool FPWIN GR for connection using registration monit
104. AC puris EPA pra inped iprrr rad 1 4 b i ve ye Yn Y11 Y13 Y15 Y17 vs YA vo Y12 LL LLLI LILIILIl M Q D nM 1 Hos used ternal 2 Het my Power supply for YD in 17 Lai Power supply for i10 ia 17 Fought Power supply for to YD Power supply for Y 18 to YD AFPX C60TD ib eh inne leer 9 Nol bearer 2 Ll 0 EH TET T X13 X15 3 rr X10 COM x10 ji x12 amp 14 X18 J xic uaaa 1 ured terminal 2 Hot vedi Let Power supply doc YD to Y7 lofi Power supply for 10 Y 17 Poveit amp upply YE te YD Rsgnl Povear supply for Y T8 0 AFPX C60PD DE unies ings ierra 5 Nol terminal 7 J ET Li EE LI 12511 i peter dliil haa usd Cugat sanminal 1 Piei ured Tipu imrrinad 4 Hot used Let Power supply doc YD bo Y7 lofi Power supply for 10 to Y 17 Fighil Poveat supply YE te YD Povear supply for Y T8 S0 Key Point Input terminal Each COM terminal in the same terminal block is connected within the unit However the COM terminals of the i
105. ANS xo xt YO H DF 1 2 e When X1 was on prior to YO will not be on even if XO becomes on Example 2 gt ANS 0 X1 TMX 5 K 30 YU HoH H Ae e TMX will activate if X1 becomes on whether is on or off lt Example 3 gt PSHS AQ X 1 YU x Y1 Kp por P Ros X D POPS e When X2 was on prior to XO Y1 will not be on even if XO becomes on When a combination of contacts are set as the trigger execution condition of a differential instruction DF or timer instruction do not use an AND stack ANS instruction read stack RDS instruction or pop stack POPS instruction Examples in which the above programs are rewritten Program in which the example 1 is rewritten XO X1 YO A HOF 4 2 lt Program in which the example 2 is rewritten gt XU un MX 5 304 T XU xg H lt Program in which the example 3 is rewritten gt x1 YO E 1 E X0 X2 Y1 H HF H X0 X3 1 14 13 14 7 Rewrite Function During RUN 14 7 1 Operation of Rewrite During RUN How operation of rewrite during RUN Rewriting programs can be executed even in RUN mode When a rewrite is attempted during RUN the tool service time is temporarily extended program rewriting is performed and operation is resumed without the need to change the mode For this reason the time of the scan during the RUN rewrite extends from several ms to several hundreds of ms Operation during rewrite 1 External outp
106. Area used for measurement of sending interval MEWNET WO DT90160 PC PLC link 0 unit No Stores the unit No of PC PLC link 0 A MEWNET WO DT90161 PC PLC link 0 error Stores the error contents of PC PLC link A flag DT90162 to DT90169 DT90170 Duplicated destination for PC PLC inter link address DT90171 Counts how many times a token is lost DT90172 Counts how many times two or more tokens are detected DT90173 Counts how many times a signal is lost DT90174 m undefined commands have been MEWNET WO DT90175 PC PLO link 0 status DT90176 No of times format errors have occurred in received data DT90177 No of times transmission errors have occurred DT90178 No of times procedural errors have occurred DT90179 No of times overlapping parent units have occurred DT90180 to DT90189 DT90194 to DT90218 N A 17 39 FP X A Available N A Not available ing ing Unit No Station No E DT90219 selection for DT90220to 2 Unit No Station No 1 to 8 A N A DT90251 1 Unit No Station No 9 to 16 POPES System regis ter 42 and 43 Unit DT90222 station The contents of the system register settings No torg 29 pertaining to the PLC inter link function for DT90223 the various unit numbers are stored as ter 46 and 47 shown below PC PLC Example tat When DT90219 is 0 ter 42 and 43 Unit DT90226 station System regis Higher byte
107. CCW e he I O allocation of pulse output terminal and home input is determined by the channel used e Set the control code for F171 SPDH instruction to CW CCW When using gt FP X Ay type AFPA PLS first Rome input Hear nome AM pips xi00 Driver GWW output 100 pu 101 CCV output Input such as X100 or X101 on the pulse I O cassette can be specified for the near home input When using CH1 gt FP X Ry type AFPX PLS Second Horne input j in dear home mpu nn L X200 Driver CW output 200 _ YEO A e CoV output Input such as X200 or X201 on the pulse I O cassette can be specified for the near home input Note If there is no input remained on the pulse I O cassette the input of the main unit can be used Single pulse input driver pulse input and directional switching input method e One output point is used as a pulse output and the other output is used as a direction output e he I O allocation of pulse output terminal direction output terminal and home input is determined by the channel used e Near home input is substituted by allocating the desired contact and turning on and off the lt bit4 gt of special data register DT90052 e Up to two driver systems can be connected When using CH0 FP X Ry type AFPX PLS first Home Near home K102 100 Driver
108. Communication protocol UDP Not necessary Netmask 255 255 255 0 Action mode Server connection Gateway 192 168 1 1 Baud rate 115200 bps Communication mode Computer link Send type UNICAST Source port No 9094 7 95 3 When using the MEWTOCOL master function in UDP BROADCAST communication Set as follows for each unit using Configurator WD IP address setting Communication setting Option setting Master unit IP address 192 168 1 5 Communication protocol UDP Not necessary Netmask 255 255 255 0 Action mode Client connection Gateway 192 168 1 1 Baud rate 115200 bps Communication mode Computer link Send type BROADCAST Destination IP address 192 168 1 11 Destination port No 9094 Source port No 0 Slave unit 1 IP address 192 168 1 11 Communication protocol UDP Not necessary Netmask 255 255 255 0 Action mode Server connection Gateway 192 168 1 1 Baud rate 115200 bps Communication mode Computer link Send type BROADCAST Source port No 9094 Slave unit2 IP address 192 168 1 2 Communication protocol UDP Not necessary Netmask 255 255 255 0 Action mode Server connection Gateway 192 168 1 1 Baud rate 115200 bps Communication mode Computer link Send type BROADCAST Source port No 9094 7 96 Master unit sample program Wait for 5 seconds until communication is enabled after the power turned on R30 10 M Du h TU RI B be
109. D aoe tei 3 gt 0 5 0 4 Logic operation instructions 32 bit data DAND 2 52 S S1 AND S2 1 AND PDAND d FT STORET BOT sr P216 OR PDOR DO F217 32 bit data DXOR S1 S2 S1 1 1 AND S2 1 2 gt 0 1 D F218 32 bit data DXNR S1 S2 S1 1 51 AND M 2 OR er _ l D 1 D mus m 7 P219 32 bit data S3 D nue S2 AND S3 1 unites gt D 1 D Data conversion instructions Time data gt TMSEC The specified time data a date m second and time is changed to the second conversion data EJ Second The specified second data is data time PSECTM changed into time data a date and conversion time Available Not available Not available partially 1 This instruction is available for FP e only 2 This instruction is available for FP Ver 3 10 or later 3 This instruction is only available for FP X Ver 2 0 or later 4 This instruction is available for FP10SH Ver 3 10 or later FPO FP e 5 This instruction is available for FP 32k type 6 This instruction is available for FP X Ver 1 13 or later T This instruction is available for FP2 FP2SH Ver 1 5 or later FP10SH cannot be used 17 68 FPX 16 bit binary GRY data gt Gray PGRY code conversion 32 bit binary data gt Gray Spe Description rand S D Converts the 16 bit binary data of S to gray codes and the converted result is s
110. F98 Data table shift out CMPR D1 Transfer D2 to D3 Any parts of P98 and compress PCMPR D2 the data between D1 and D2 that D3 are 0 are compressed and shifted in order toward D2 F99 Data table shift in CMPW 9 D1 Transfer S to D1 Any parts of the P99 and compress PCMP D2 data between D1 and D2 that are 0 are compressed and shifted in order toward D2 F100 Right shift of D n mme me kr in a 16 bit data Left shift of multiple Shifts the bits of D to the left lt lt P101 bits n bits in a 16 PSHL 5 bit data F102 Right shift of n bits DSHR D n Shifts the n bits of the 32 bit data P102 ina 32 bit data PDSHR area specified by D 1 D to the 5 right P103 a 32 bit data PDSHL area specified by D 1 D to the left F105 Right shift of one BSR Shifts the one digit of data of D to P105 hexadecimal digit 4 PBSR the right 3 bit F106 Left shift of one BSL Shifts the one digit of data of D to hexadecimal digit the left sfelefefefefe 4 bit Dirand ozrwengt C C C C P108 multiple bits n bits PBITR D2 n D1 and D2 to the right P109 bits n bits PBITL D2 n D1 and 02 to the left WSHR Shifts the one word of the areas by 5 lt lt P110 word 16 bit PWSHR D2 D1 and D2 to the right Left shift of one Shifts the one word of the areas by lt word 16 bit PWSH
111. FP X and the external units are connected using an RS485 cable Using the protocol that matches the external units the F159 MTRN instruction is used to send and receive data FP X Data register DT Data transmission using F159 MTRN 95485 E Dala is received into receive buffer Data is sent and received through data regieters P Reference 7 2 1 Precaution When Using RS485 Port System register settings e In the default settings the COM1 port is set to computer link mode Settings for COM1 port No Set Value No 412 Selection of communication mode General purpose serial communication COM port No 413 Communication format for COM1 port Data length 7 bits 8 bits Parity check None Odd Even Stop bit 1 bit 2 bits Terminator CR CR LF None ETX Header No STX STX No 415 Baud rate setting for COM1port 2400 to 115200 bps COM port for COM1 port Note1 The communication format and baud rate should be set to match the connected devices Note2 The terminal units of AFPX COM3 AFPX COM4 and AFPX COM6 are specified by the dip switch located in the communication cassette Note3 The baud rates of 300 600 and 1200 bps can be specified by the SYS1 instruction However the setting value of the system register cannot be changed 7 55 7 5 Communication Function 3 PC PLC Link 7 5 1 PC PLC
112. Genera purpose MODBUS RTU communication 1 N 1 N PAPES 1 N 1 1 j 1 1 link 1 1 commu Cris commu NUT commu communication communication ae communication eni nication nication nication 5232 tia RS232C RS422 RS485 RS232C RS422 RS485 RS422 RS232C RS422 RS485 RS485 TOOL port Target AFPX AFPX items COM3 COM3 Two wire Two wire Two wire Token DIU dedecus Half duplex nalr bus Half duplex NAN nication duplex duplex duplex ET communication communication Floating communication method communi communi communi master ca ion ca ion cation Note1 Although it has adequate tolerance to noise it is recommendable to make the user program to execute retransmission in order to improve reliability of the communication when a communication error occurs due to excessive noises or when a receiver equipment cannot receive data temporarily Communication port Ethernet Computer link General purpose serial communication IEEE802 3u 10BASE T 100BASE TX Client Server Client Server AFPX COM5 15 10 No of connections Max 1 connection Client Max 1 connection Max 3 connections Server Communication E Interface RS232C RS422 RS485 Specifications MEE NIE Communication mode 1 1 communication 1 N communication Communication method Half duplex communication Two wire half duplex communication Synchronous m
113. Incremental counting Designate a value larger than the current value Decremental counting Designate value smaller than the current value b Key Point The FP X supports two operation modes for JOG operation one in which no target value is specified and one in which feed stops when the target value is reached Normal jogging operation feed no target value specified Pulses are output in accordance with the conditions set in the data table as long as execution condition Is on Data table Pulse output diagram DT300 AB JOG ON LT Brant Control code 7 1110 T3 Frequency 300 Hz 00H YO Pulse OHz Output stops when target value is reached A target value at which pulse output stops can be specified for jogging operation As shown below this mode is selected in the control code and the target value an absolute value is specified in the data table Data table B Pulse output diagram DT300 dicro a X6 JOG ON Control code H 11110 command OFF 300Hz Frequency 300 Hz arget value 1000 YO Pulse Target value matching Pulse stopping 9 39 Sample program JOG operation Plus direction While X6 is in the ON state a pulse is output from the CW output YO of the specified channel CHO Program AD z Data table vee Frequency speed 300 Hz Control opde H1111 F1 K300 302
114. Normal input CH7 Do not set input X7 as high speed counter XT Normal input Description Do not set input X0 as high speed counter Incremental input X0 Decremental input X0 Two phase input X0 X1 Individual input X0 X1 Incremental decremental control input X1 Do not set input X1 as high speed counter Incremental input X1 Decremental input X1 Do not set input X2 as high speed counter Incremental input X2 Decremental input X2 Two phase input X2 X3 Individual input X2 X3 Incremental decremental control input X2 X3 Do not set input X3 as high speed counter Incremental input X3 Decremental input X3 Do not set input X4 as high speed counter Incremental input X4 Decremental input X4 Two phase input X4 X5 Individual input X4 X5 Incremental decremental control input X4 X5 Normal input Home input of pulse output CHO Do not set input X5 as high speed counter Incremental input X5 Decremental input X5 X5 Normal input Normal input Home input of pulse output CH1 Do not set input X6 as high speed counter Incremental input X6 Decremental input X6 Two phase input X6 X7 Individual input X6 X7 Incremental decremental control input X6 XT Normal input Home input of pulse output CH2 Reset input of high speed counter CHO Do not set input X7 as high speed counter Incremental input X7 Decremental input X7 Norm
115. Odd Usage settings 1 for CPU input Erste Ston Bit 1 Usage settings 2 for CPU input Usage settings for output Terminator ER Special input Head STX nat exist Special inpute eader not exist Software filter settings 1 of CPU input Baudrate 9600 bps lt lt Software filter settings 2 of CPU input Software filter settings 3 of input starting address for data received of oT 4096 0 32764 Software filter settings 4 of CPU input serial data communication mode Bulfer capacity setting for data received of 2048 0 2049 I EDIT Fart serial data communication made COM Port 3 Cancel eal Initialize Help No 412 Communication Mode Select the tool port operation mode Click on and select General Communication No 413 Communication Format setting Default setting Char Bit 8 bits P arity ee Odd otop Bit 1 bit Terminator CR Header STX not exist To change the communication format to match an external device connected to the tool port enter the settings for the various items No 415 Baud rate setting The default setting for the baud rate is 9600 bps Change the value to match the external device connected to the tool port Click on ivl and select one of the values from 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 and 115200 bps No 420 Starting address for data rece
116. Pole terminal with a compatible insulation sleeve If a pole terminal is being used the following models manufactured by Phoenix Contact Co should be used ross ional po O prose se clone With Without area mm insulating sleeve insulating sleeve AWG 24 AlO 25 6BU AWG 22 A 0 34 6 Phoenix AWG 20 5 6 AWG 18 AWG 20 for 2 pHs Contact Co AWG 18 MEN NENNEN Pressure welding tool for pole terminals Product No Phoenix Contact Co CRIMPFOX UD6 1204436 For tightening the terminal block When tightening the terminals of the terminal block use a screwdriver Product No 1205037 with a blade size of 0 4 x 2 5 Part No SZS 0 4x2 5 The tightening torque should be 0 22 to 0 25 m Wiring method 1 Remove a portion of the wire s insulation m 7 2 Insert the wire into the terminal block until it contacts the back of the block socket and then tighten the screw clockwise to fix the wire in place Tightening torque 0 22 to 0 25 Name Precautions on wiring e When removing the wire s insulation be careful not to scratch the core wire e Do not twist the wires to connect them e Do not solder the wires to connect them The solder may break due to vibration e After wiring make sure stress is not applied to the wire e n the terminal block socket construction if the wire closes upon counter clockwise rotation the connection is faulty Di
117. RO BCD DT1 DT101 In this case if DT1 contains a negative value or a value greater than K9999 an operation error will occur 3 Check if the divisor of a division instruction is 0 Example RO I F32 96 DT100 DT200 In this case if the content of DT100 is 0 an operation error will occur 14 8 14 5 Instruction of Leading Edge Detection Method 14 5 1 Instructions of Leading Edge Detection Method Instructions using the leading edge detection operation DF leading edge differential instructions Count input for CT counter instructions Count input for F118 UDC up down counter instructions Shift input for SR shift register instructions Shift input for F119 LRSR left right shift register instructions NSTP next step instructions Differential execution type high level instruction P13 NOOR WD gt Leading edge detection method e An instruction with a leading edge detection method operates only in the scan where its trigger execution condition is detected switching from off to on 1 Standard operation Trigger __ M mas Operation of fi UU UU a instruction T SD Executed every scan 2 Leading edge detection operation Trigge i UU OFF Operation of instruction OFF Executed only one time How to perform leading edge detection The condition of the previous execution and the condition of the current execution are compared
118. S4 of a temperature controller Compare instructions F373 16 bit data DTR S D If the data in the 16 bit area P373 revision PDTR specified by S has changed detection since the previous execution internal relay R9009 carry flag will turn on D is used to store the data of the previous execution F374 32 bit data DDTR S D If the data in the 32 bit area P374 revision PDDTR specified by S 1 S has changed detection since the previous execution internal relay R9009 carry flag will turn on D 1 D is used to store the data of the previous execution Index register bank processing instructions F410 Setting the SETB n Index register 10 to ID bank P410 index register PSETB number change over bank number Changing the CHGB n Index register IO to ID bank index register PCHGB number change over with bank number remembering preceding bank number F412 Restoring the POPB Changes index register IO to ID P412 index register PPOPB bank number back to the bank bank number I before F411 CHGB P41 1 PCHGB instruction File register bank processing instructions F414 Setting the file SBFL n File register bank number change register bank over number Changing the File register bank number change file register PCBFL over with remembering preceding bank number bank number F416 Restoring the PBFL Changes file register bank P416 file register PPBFL number back to the bank before ba
119. TOO it usad b a ud pulses ane oi ici fram CHD 4 Puls vutgul Irem CHO imer EIER id aoe ns elg Red ag Eu T s Pulse output diagram 4000 Hz ZU Ez D Hz E SUC rr DD m 10 32 10 4 7 Positioning Control Instruction F171 Home Return Common to Transistor type e This function performs home return according to the specified data table The elapsed value area CHO DT90348 DT90349 and CH1 DT90352 DT90353 is cleared to zero after the completion of home return x2 HOF Fi DMV 125 DT200 Fi DMV K200 01202 F1 K2000 DT204 Fi DMV K150 01206 F1 DMV K10 DT208 F171 SPDH DT200 i Positioning data table Control code DT203 DT204 Initial speed Max Speed DT205 DT206 Acceleration 3 DT207 deceleration time DT208 Deviation counter 4 DT209 clear signal output ime i Pulse output diagram Pulses are output from Y101 and a return to the home position is carried out at an initial speed of 200 Hz a maximum speed of 2000 Hz and an accaleration deceleratian time of 150 ms When this program runs the positioning data table and the pulse output diagram will be as shown below when home position proximity input is not used X2 ON Home sensor ON 2000 Hz 200 Hz 150 m amp Pulse output when home position proximit
120. Turns on during execution of pulse output instructions and then maintains that state during pulse output from CHO This flag is the same for instructions F166 to F175 Turns on during execution of pulse output instructions and then maintains that state during pulse output from CH2 This flag is the same for instructions F166 to F175 Turns on during execution of pulse output instructions and then maintains that state during pulse output from CH3 This flag is the same for instructions F166 to F175 e he above flags vary during scanning Example If the above flags are used for more than one time as input conditions there may be the different states in the same scan Replace with internal relays at the beginning of the program as a measure 9 22 Use this to prohibit the simultaneous execution of other high speed counter instructions and pulse output instructions and to verify completion of an action Use this to prohibit the simultaneous execution of other high speed counter instructions and pulse output instructions and to verify completion of an action Use this to prohibit the simultaneous execution of other high speed counter instructions and pulse output instructions and to verify completion of an action Use this to prohibit the simultaneous execution of other high speed counter instructions and pulse output instructions and to verify completion of an action 9 4 3 V O Allocation Double pulse input driver
121. are output from YO Note In that case the memory YO or Y1 does not turn on off according to the pulse output and also the monitoring is not possible OV ay Dc Freee Xi Stet ey ni Puma apc Ri ar JUUL Le GS i po MES Kotor crits m me c mo eo 110 000 22 000 30 000 Regardless of tna currant value it movament 16 towards position 22 000 Prog ram RID 116 R3e Positioning operation start 31 Positioning data talla OMY H1110 DT 100 RTO Gada H1 E F DMV ka DT 102 CIUS intial speed 3000 Hz CTUM Fi 4009 7 Max speed 4500 4 DMV K300 DT 16 Erie Acceleration tine 30m x n Giwa Tanal value E DT10 Mmvemnni amar 59 pulses Fi DMv 7 OTH sop pr o eres Fi duty LE quU 48 He k _ Apes que n ws mad GE F171 DT 100 Ko T Puis i table shaped control m headed I 1 The chats table headed by OTRO m used The data tabla by i and pi Hara are pc aput fram gt Pulses output from CHO R9110 TO HoA E Haz Fuss i E Oolrl 2 10 ax using it ges ae 1 5 Pulse output diagram 4000 Hz 200 Hz 2 E E E 300 nn
122. are used for the interpolation function they can be used within the ranges above 9 8 Restrictions on I O allocations e Various functions listed in the table of specifications cannot be allocated to one I O at the same time Allocations of input X and restrictions when using the high speed counter function When using the high speed counter it is necessary to set how to use the input by system registers C14 C30 C60 Tr type Pulse Medium speed Single phase input X0 X1 X2 X3 x4 5 x6 X 2 phaseinput X0 X1 X2x3 X4x5 J X6 xvz Reset input 00 00 3 5 e 3 j Note The X4 X5 X6 and X7 are also used for the home input of the pulse output Use them only for either one signal Allocations of output Y and restrictions when using the pulse output function When using the pulse output function it is necessary to set how to use the input output by system registers C14 Tr type Signal Ccw SIN YY Deviation counter clear output Y4 YS Homeinput Ph M E Note The Y4 and Y5 of the medium speed pulse are also used for the deviation counter clear signal The X4 X5 and X6 of the home input are also used for the input of the high speed counter Use them only for either one signal Note e With the C14 if the home return is executed with the deviation counter clear for the pulse output CHO set the Y4 to the normal output by the system register e With the C1
123. area s Raecalva Ae jms Sonj arcs Recone ania ii 7 Receive sea Send area System registers Set value of various control units Range of link relays used otarting No of word for link relay transmission 0 20 40 Link relay transmission size Link register allocation FP X FPE FP2 FP25H Lini Ti Und no zh UUNIT na 4 iue T i E ru z Receive greg area p Send System registers 1 Range of link registers used 28 Starting No for link register transmission Link register transmission size Setting the largest unit number Nam Setvaue No 47 Largest unit number setting for PC PLC link Setting terminal unit The terminal unit is specified with the dip switch located in the communication cassette FP X FP X Toc d Transmission line Transmission line W Transmission line o conversion adapter w of computer connection 3 Reference 7 1 3 of Communication Cassettes AFPX COMS3 COMA COM6 Sample program Unit no 1 When X1 is input LO of the link relay goes on and when X2 is input L1 of the link relay goes on X1 Lo 2 L1 E Unit no 2 When LO of the link relay goes on YO is output LO YO ss A YO output J Unit no 3 When L1 of the link relay goes on YO is output His F Yo
124. area Higher words PLS CH1 The target value is set when Note DT90354 L A A Sven Worcs instructions F171 SPDH OA Av F172 PLSH F174 SPOH and F175 SPSH are A S executed Counting area for the pulse I O Note DT El L A A 90356 apsed Lower words CH2 Y4 Y5 Aa DT90357 Higher words PLS CH2 The target value is set when Note DT L A A usn ONCE words instructions F171 SPDH OA F172 PLSH F174 SPOH and F175 SPSH are A quA executed Counting area for the pulse I O A a DT90360 Elapsed Lower words A A p m CH3 Y6 Y7 DT90361 Higher words PLS CH3 The target value is set when Note DT 2 L A A ndi NEL WORSE instructions F171 SPDH OA Av F172 PLSH F174 SPOH and F175 SPSH are A IAS executed Note Writing in the elapsed value area is available by F1 DMV instruction only Writing in the target value area is available by F171 SPDH F172 PLSH F174 SPOH and F175 SPSH instructions only DT90351 Higher words DT90355 Higher words DT90359 Higher words DT90363 Higher words 17 45 FP X Tr type FP X A Available N A Not available LEN REC NU 103 When HSC control is executed by FO MV S DT90052 instruction the setting value for the target CH is stored in each CH Control flag monitor area MEME EAE RENE E ae Note Writing in the elapsed value area is available by F1 DMV instruction only Writing in the target value area is available by F17
125. as the one at the time of disconnection Note3 The digital value will be K20001 from the Power on to the converted data Ready approx 3 seconds or when an error occurs watchdog timer time out error on the microcomputer for the RTD cassette Take care of the use of the data during this period not to influence other programs Note4 From the disconnection to the recovery and converted data Ready approx 3 seconds the digital value will be K20001 Take care of the use of the data during this period not to influence other programs Note5 The conversion speed is 200 ms or less regardless of the number of channels to be used And it will be reflected in the internal data register after the completion of a scan Note6 The full scale F S is 200 to 850 C for the accuracy range of RTD Pt100 Note7 Each channel data is allocated as I O data as the table below RTD cassette Installed slot Input channel Expansion slot 0 Expansion slot 1 Cassette position Cassette position Channel 0 CHO WX10 WX20 Channel 1 CH1 WX11 Note8 Supply power for 15 minutes or more after the power on for performing the accurate measurement before using the cassette Terminal layout Digital conversion value _CHO CHI A B RTDinuB B RTDinuB CH1 RTDiptA B B RTD input B RTD input B Do not connect anything RTD input A B B NC Channel 0 NC A B B Channel 1 8 20 Connection met
126. be held in the on status To turn them off in the RUN mode use forced output e If an instruction written in block a is deleted in block b the condition before the rewrite will be held e Set values specified by K constants in TM CT instructions are preset in all of the corresponding SV s in the program Elapsed values EV do not change e f deleted the output memory area will be held Writing or deleting a single instruction during RUN is not possible Write or delete the instruction in FPWIN GR ladder symbol mode Write in the order RET SUB CALL Delete in the order CALL SUB RET Write in the order IRET INT Delete in the order INT IRET 14 17 FPWIN GR FPWIN GR Ladder symbol mode Boolean mode SSTP STPE Operation of each instruction JP LOOP LBL 14 18 A distance with the same number cannot be defined twice An SSTP instruction cannot be written in a subprogram Be sure to write the instruction for setting the loop number before LBL LOOP instructions Writing and deletion of a single instruction is not possible for a program with no step ladder area Write or delete both instructions simultaneously in FPWIN GR ladder symbol mode In the case of an SSTP instruction only writing and deletion of a single instruction is possible for a program with a step ladder area Write in the order JP LBL or LOOP LBL Delete in the order LBL JP or LBL LOOP 14 8 Processing During Forced I
127. by instruction ON Sampling at regular time intervals R902D Sampling trace end flag When sampling trace starts 0 stops 1 R902E Sampling trigger flag Turns on when sampling stop trigger is on R902F Sampling enable flag Turns on when sampling operation starts DT90028 Interval of sampling trace kO For sampling by instruction k1 to k3000 10ms to 30 seconds For sampling at regular time intervals 12 52 Details of Sampling Trace Function No of data collectable at one sampling 16 bits 3 data Sampling capacity No of samples accumulable 14 300 samples C30 C60 1000 samples Types of sampling timing When an instruction is executed or at regular time intervals 1 Sampling at regular time intervals From 10 ms 2 Sampling by F155 SMPL instruction Sampling for every scan can be executed by the instruction Also more than one samplings can be executed in one scan Timing for the execution of the F155 SMPL instruction can be set by the ladder sequence ic ui Note It is not possible to activate the sampling at regular time intervals and the sampling by the F155 SMPL instruction simultaneously How to stop sampling Methods of the stop trigger request Following two methods are available 1 Deactivate request by the tool software 2 Deactivate request by the F156 STRG instruction If the stop trigger activates the PLC will continue to take samplings for the specified No of delay and then stop the sampling operat
128. cable Power supply from the servicing power supply for the input of the FP X control unit e o protect the system against erroneous voltage from the power supply line use an insulated power supply with an internal protective circuit electric cable that reinforced insulation or double insulation has been made e The regulator on the unit is a non insulated type e o turn the power supplies on simultaneously supply the power for the expansion FPO adapter from the servicing power supply for the input of the FP X control unit 5 15 Measures regarding power supply sequence start up sequence e o ensure and ease the power supply sequence of the expansion FPO adapter supply the power for the expansion FPO adapter from the servicing power supply for the input of the FP X control unit e he power supply sequence should be set up so that power to the FPO expansion unit is turned on before the FP X system power supply e he power supply sequence should be set up so that power to the FP X system and FPO expansion unit is turned off before the input output power supplies If the input output power supplies are turned off before the power to the expansion FPO adapter the control unit will detect the input fluctuations and may begin an unscheduled operation When turning on Power supply for FPO Power supply for FP X Expansion FPO adapter Power supplies for I O devices When turning off Power supply for FP X Expansion FPO adapter
129. counter or pulse output reaches the target value of S 1 S 1 Positioning pulses are output from the specified channel in NENA accordance with the contents of the data table that starts with S Pulse strings are output from the specified output in accordance with the contents of the data table that starts with S PWM output is output from the specified output in accordance with the contents of the data table that starts with S 17 65 N N FP2SH FP10SH E A Boolean Operand Description c F174 Pulse output Outputs the pulses from the Selectable data specified channel according to table control operation the data table specified by S Pulses are output from channel in accordance with the designated data table so that the path to the target position forms an arc Performs the home return F176 Pulse output SPCH Circular interpolation according to the specified data F177 Pulse output Home return table F178 Input pulse PLSM 1 2 D Measures the number of pulses measurement and cycle of pulses to be input No of pulses to the high speed counter of the cycle for input specified channel pulses alu F175 Pulse output n Pulses are output from channel Linear in accordance with the interpolation designated data table so that the path to the target position forms a straight line 17 66 200 d Descript
130. current value g Key Point The FP X supports two operation modes for JOG operation one in which no target value is specified and one in which feed stops when the target value is reached Normal jogging operation feed no target value specified Pulses are output in accordance with the conditions set in the data table as long as execution condition is on Data table Pulse output diagram DT301 Control code H1110 di OFF DT302 DT303 Frequency ub 300 Hz Y 100 Pulse xz Output stops when target value is reached A target value at which pulse output stops can be specified for jogging operation As shown below this mode is selected in the control code and the target value an absolute value is specified in the data table Data table B Pulse output diagram ES X3 JOG ON Control code H 11110 command OFF i Frequency 300 Hz L 3DOHz Target value 100 Pulse larget value matching Pulse stopping 10 39 Sample program JOG operation Plus direction While is in the ON state a pulse is output from the CW output Y 100 of the specified channel CHO Program X3 Data table HFH Fi H1110 0 300 DT300 Controlcode H1110 F1 K300 Drao2 7 07302 Frequency speed 300 Hz Control coda H11120 Duty 1 4 2555 48 Hz t 100 kHz incremental counbng CW Pulse output instruction JOG operation The da
131. each device C CORRECT X INCORRECT Other device Inverter etc Other device Inverter etc PLC 5 5 2 DC Power Supply Wiring of power supply Senate jhe wenn Syssems 15 ma eentrol unit and the IA devices Insulated LK power SUPY The wire should be 2mm A14 larger and tested Dreaker ur i Power supply terminal 24 V DC Earth terminal erudi C3U CB5U Confirm that the power supply voltage is within the allowable range of the power supply Rated input voltage amplitude range 24 VDC 20 4 to 28 8 VDC Using the power supply of the outlying voltage or using inappropriate wires may cause the fault of the power supply of the PLC Reference 5 7 Wiring of Terminal Block Isolation of power supply systems Isolate the wiring systems to the FP X output devices and mechanical power apparatus Circuit breaker Mechanical pow apparatus Control ies unit Insulated DC power supply cS Note Power supply of the FP X expansion units Be sure to supply power to the FP X expansion units and the control unit from the same power supply and turn the power on and off simultaneously for both _ b Insulated DC power supply Control unit To avoid the influence of noises Use the power supply causing less noise The inherent noise resistance is sufficient for the
132. enabled memary loader Ir Program 5 Password 01234567 1 1 B Limited distribution function ON LICEZII Download is possible Password 01234567 Password abcdefgh Password None ic Note This function cannot be used when the setting to disable the download to the FP X older than V2 5 has not been made 11 4 3 Upload Protection Setting Function Set that PLC cannot be uploaded If this function is valid the PLC will be in the upload protection state by downloading a program to the PLC from the FP memory loader FP memory loader Program A Password 01234567 47 WiUpload protection function ON 4 Program A KA Password 01234567 x T Upload 15 not possible Upload is prohibited E FP mamonry loactar ic Note This function cannot be used when the setting to disable the download to the FP X older than V2 5 has not been made 11 10 11 4 4 Version Check List Version check list State of target PLC to be written PLC Password 4digits 8digits 8 digits NEHMEN Me Download prohibition to old ver Download protection to old ver and V2 50 22 Download permission only for or later 1 models with same password Bonua 0 2 lat Download protection to old ver and V2 50 Gt Ci Ci Upload protection or later Note Note Note Note2
133. following range as determined by the ambient temperature Product number Limitations on number of _ Limitations on number of simultaneous input on points simultaneous output on points AFPX C14T AFPX C30T AFPX C60T AFPX C14TD AFPX C30TD AFPX C60TD 2 16 Mumba Of Pons per Common which ace camala or Ambient temperature C307 Humber of 18 ponis pei OTT which 10 simulta nemmi on do ES Ambient blemper ture Humber al 425 pois Commer whith are 18 sicilia che ertet cai t iiriuly on d BS Ambient tempercaluze C14TD Ma restriction Humber of yal pecs Common which ar imuha on LA 65 Ambient bemper ture C Murnber of 42 ponia which gre 18 rus neously on a temperalure C147 Configuration Mumber ot panis DA2 common g 2 A21 which simulta 3 A21 A21 neously on DA24DA2 DA2 A21 51 BB Ambiant temperature 7C C30T Number af poms p r 14 COTA which are c zamin an g BS Ambi bemperalune CC Number of a commen which are 44 an 11 EA Ambient 4X C14TD Ma restriction C30TD Number of points per common 12 which mne simula Mecusi E
134. for FP X V1 10 or later and FP 32k type 17 55 17 3 Table of High level Instructions FPO FP e FP2SH FP10SH The high level instructions are expressed by the prefixes F or P with numbers For most of the high level instructions F and P types are available The differences between the two types are explained as follows Instructions with the prefix F are executed in every scan while its trigger is in the on Instructions with the prefix P are executed only when the leading edge of its trigger is detected For the FPO FPOR FP FP X the P type high level instructions are not available lean rand Totoan 7 mstructions m m FHE 8 LN inveni and PMV move 32 bit data DMV e move Reading of GETS S D The head word No of the specified slot is head word read No of the specified slot Bit data BTM The specified one bit in S is transferred to the specified one bit in D The bit is specified by data move PMV2 data move PDMV2 Do Sint 1 gt 0 1 D Hexadecimal DGT The specified one digit in S is transferred digit 4 bit PDGT to the one digit in D The digit is data move STD lt 52 1 2 gt 0 3 D 2 S D S2 D Rem emo The data between S1 and S2 is P10 PBKMV 52 0 transferred to the area starting at D DN Lud EA The data of 5 is transferred to the all a
135. for the largest unit number e f there are fewer than 16 units linked and the largest unit number has not been set default 16 or the largest unit number has been set but the unit number settings are not consecutive or the unit number settings are consecutive but there is a unit for which the power supply has not been turned on the response time for the PC PLC link the link transmission cycle will be longer Reference 7 5 5 Link Response Time Setting link switching flag PC PLC link switching flag can be set using system register no 46 If it is set to O default value the first half of the link relays and registers are used If it is set to 1 the second half of the link relays and registers are used First half VVLO to VWL63 LOU to LD 1727 is used second WLES to WL127 LD128 to LD255 is used Main Link area 1st unit 2nd unit eecond half 1 1 WL64 to WL127 LD128 to LD225 First half o WLO to WLG3 LOO to LD127 1 66 7 5 3 Monitoring When using a PC PLC link the operation status of the links can be monitored using the following relays Transmission assurance relays For PC PLC link 0 R9060 to R906F correspond to unit no 1 to 16 For PC PLC link 1 R9080 to R908F correspond to unit no 1 to 16 If the transmission data from a different unit is being used with the various PLCs check to make sure the transmission assurance relay for
136. frequency range for each component of each axis Range 0 1 5 Hz lo 8 8 kHz Range 1 48 Hz 16 100 kHz Range 2 191 Hz to 100 kHz If maximum speed 9800 Hz IF speed lt 1 5 Hz initial speed is corrected to 1 5 Hz and range it selected If initial speed 1 5 Hz range is selected b If 9600 Hz lt maximum speed 100000 Hz if initial spaed 48 Hz initial speed is corrected to 48 Hz and range is selected If 48 Hz 5 initial speed lt 181 Hz range 1 is selected If initial speed 191 Hz range 2 is selected 7 Number of acceleration deceleration steps The system automatically calculates the number of acceleration decelaration steps in the range 0 to 60 steps If the oepration result is D pulses are output for the initial speed composite speed as is with na acceleraticn deceleration The number of acceleration deceleration steps is found usang the formula acceleratian decelaration time m amp x component initial speed Hz Example With incremental initial speed 300 Hz max speed 5 kHz acceleration deceleration time 0 5 CHO target value 1000 CH1 target value 50 CHO componet _ 300 1000 _ initial sped Jr Sy 393626 H componet 00x50 _ initial 6 peed 508 CHO number of acceleratiaon deceleration steps 500x 107 x 288 6265 147 8 c 60 steps CH1 number of accaleration daceleration steps 500 x 1073 x 14 981 7 4 gt 7 steps Note Precaution for tha sp
137. from there relay Auxiliary F19 jump SJP Label The program jumps to the label instruction and continues from there the number of jumps is set in S Stops program execution when the Master LOOP L predetermined trigger turns on in the control LBL Loo n S m TEST RUN mode only relay end B Q Available Not available Not available partially 1 In the FP2 FP2SH FP10SH when internal relay WR240 or higher is used the number of steps is the number in parentheses Also in the FP2 FP2SH FP10SH when the specified internal relay number word address has an index modifier the number of steps is the number in parentheses 2 In the FP2 FP2SH FP10SH when the number n in a jump instruction has an index modifier the number of steps isthenumber in parentheses 3 In the FP2 FP2SH FP10SH when the number a loop instruction has an index modifier the number of steps is the number in parentheses 17 50 FP2SH FP10SH eel ml Emme pepper Indicates the end of a main program e aseena i the trigger turns on e pee E _Step ladder instructions S OO Step ladder instructions edi adii The start of program n for process 3 control NSTL Starts the specified process n and clears the process currently started Scan execution type NSTP u Starts the specified process n and clears the process currentl
138. function for which setting are to be entered is selected in the PLC Configuration dialog box the value and setting status for the selected system register are displayed To change the value and setting status write in the new value and or select the setting status 4 To register these settings choose OK Precautions for system register setting System register settings are effective from the time they are set However input settings tool port COM port and modem connection settings become effective when the mode is changed from PROG to RUN With regard to the modem connection setting when the power is turned off and on or when the mode is changed from PROG to RUN the controller sends a command to the modem which enables it for reception When the initialized operation is performed all set system register values parameters will be initialized 17 3 17 1 1 Table of System Registers for FP X ress value ES Starting number setting for 1008 0 to 1024 These settings counter are effective if the Hold type area starting number 0 to 1024 optional backu 1008 p p setting for timer and counter battery is 7 Hold type area starting number 248 0 to 256 installed setting for internal relays e If no backup Hold type area starting number C14 12230 p ui C30 C60 0 32765 setting for data registers 39710 Hold or non hold setting for step Non hold Hold ladder process Non hold battery is used do not change the default s
139. high speed DT9044 Transfers value in high speed D counter and Pulse output elapsed value area to D 1 D counter and High speed HC1S n S Turns output Yn on when the counter output elapsed value of the built in high set with speed counter reaches the target channel value of 8 1 S specification Pulse output Available Not available A Not available partially 1 The instruction is available for FPO T32 V2 3 or later and FP e 2 The instruction is available for FP2 FP2SH Ver 1 5 or later and the pulse execution type can be specified FP10SH cannot be used 3 This instruction is available for Ver 2 0 or later 4 This instruction is only available for FP X Ver 2 0 or later 5 This instruction is available for FP Ver 3 10 or later 17 64 High speed counter output reset with channel specification Positioning control with channel specification Pulse output with channel specification PWM output with channel specification 2080 d Description lean peran HC1R FPO FP e FP2SH FP10SH LL Turns output Yn off when the elapsed value of the built in high speed counter reaches the target 11 value of S41 S Outputs a positioning pulse from the specified output YO or Y 1 5 AAAA according to the contents of the data table beginning at S Outputs a pulse from the specified output YO or Y1 according to the contents of the data tab
140. indication Terminal layout j LLED LAM DON oi send Data 1 FP X External device COM1 Reggae Mer port Send Data 2 FP X External device COM2 Receive Data2 FP X External device port Signal Ground 4 communication 1 N communication eomputeniink Available T Teima L ot S2 R2 JG si _ Ri Receive Data 1 lt External device 92 R2 SG General purpose serial communication Available PC PLC link Available MODBUS RTU Available a ae Note1 Number of units is 2 Only the COM1 port can be used Note2 The RS232C of the COM2 port is not available when using the USB port of the FP X 7 8 1 channel RS485 RS422 Type Product No This communication cassette is a 1 channel unit with an isolated two wire RS485 four wire RS422 port LED indication Terminal layout ESE Signal SD RD Mot used direction B RE422 Lighl peg ine Data Termina yout Transmission Send 6 RR _ line Data T RE hj um DONT RBS L ant en Send Receive Data Receive Cassette backside switch 5 line 4 Vo Le aa L 4 RS485 83422 Swi zi 9j SW 3 1 E d Hae changengyer swiboh 2 ON OFF m F d ED 4 3
141. instruction R902B Interrupt error flag Turns on when an interrupt error occurs Sampling by the instruction 0 UEM sample Hag Sampling at constant time intervals 1 When the sampling operation stops 1 never Sample Wace ena When the sampling operation starts 0 Sampling stop trigger When the sampling stop trigger activates 1 flag When the sampling stop trigger stops 0 When sampling starts 1 Sampling enable flag When sampling stops 0 17 18 WR903 FP X Address Description R9030 Notusd fe urns on when the general purpose communication function is being used Goes off when any function other than the general purpose communication function is being used On Execution is in progress rewrite during the RUN operation Notusd e Notusd _ ____ Goes a transmission error occurs during data communication Goes off when a request is made to send data using the F159 MTRN instruction COM port communication error flag COM port reception done flag during Turns on when the terminator is received during general general purpose serial purpose serial communication communication port transmission Goes on when transmission has been completed in done flag during general purpose serial communication general purpose serial Goes off when transmission is requested in general communication purpose serial communication TOOL port recepti
142. is initial speed to 30 kHz or less 3 Target value K 2147483648 to K2147483647 The value of the 32 bit data specified for the target value should be within the range indicated in the table below Specification of control code Range of allowable Output meta target values _ Specifies a positive value Incremental Decremental Sup specifies a negative value Specifies a value larger eom han the current akin Specifies a value smaller than the current value Decremental counting 10 43 10 4 10 Pulse Output Instruction F175 Linear Interpolation e The linear interpolation controls positioning with two axes according to the specified data table R11 HOF F1 H1000 DT500 Pulses are output from the X axis CHO and the Y axis i5 CH1 so that the composite speed is an initial speed of ie ETE 500 Hz tha maximum speed is 5000 Hz and the F1 DMV K5000 DT504 acceleration deceleration time is 300 ms The two axes F OMY K300 DT506 are controlled so that a linear path is followed to the target position When the program runs the data table and positioning path are as shown below F1 K5000 DT508 F1 DMV K2000 DT510 F175 SPSH DT500 KO e The linear function can be used only when 2 units of the AFPX PLS are being used i Positioning data table Positioning path Y axis CH1
143. is the state when the above program is executed received number of e DT200 to DT204 are used as the receive byles 19 stored as data ig stored buffer System register settings are as follows 1 System register 416 K200 DT202 Recel i data is stored in i Kar Fern System register 417 K5 203 HAS E byte d DT204 HETIG Receive butler when amp completed Sample program for receiving data 10 byte data received in the receive buffer through COM 1 port are copied to Ri RID l FiwoBkMv om nrz4 6 The contents of the four words from OTAM to DT204 are written to data registers to DT3 done detection 1 The inlernal relay R10 E turned on when Ihe reception done comact R38 lurris on EE mm om nq i TE eave d data i Tha received data in the receive pani ls need from the area in which i OTADI and 3 rand in DTO Fm Fil MTAN DT 10 H 4 a E Bea Pencarian Starting trom DT100 ru nts of 0 0 bytes 8 ZL Preparing to receive the next data prepare bo receive thee met data thee F159 instructon resets the buffer wriling point KO and turn
144. link is used for communication with a computer connected to the PLC Instructions command messages are transmitted to the PLC and the PLC responds sends response messages based on the instructions received e A proprietary MEWNET protocol called MEWTOCOL COM is used to exchange data between the computer and the PLC There are two different communication methods 1 1 and 1 N communication A 1 N network is called a C NET The maximum of 99 FP X units can be connected with one personal computer e he PLC answers automatically to the commands received from the computer so no program is necessary on the PLC side in order to carry out communication Compiler Conrad qnem m A measg General purpose serial communication e With general purpose serial communication data can be sent back and forth between an image processing device connected to the COM port and an external device such as a bar code reader e Reading and writing of data is done using a ladder program in the FP X while reading and writing of data from an external is handled through the data registers e t is available only in the RUN mode The computer link mode is automatically selected in the RPOG mode so that the tool etc can be connected checkar FP X Data register DT Data transmission usina IL fe F159 MTAN MAS x I mil Received data Data recaived in receive Buffer Bar code reader rara
145. memory address number specified by index modification is outside the area which can be used 2 BCD data error Operation is attempted on non BCD data when an instruction handling BCD is executed or BCD conversion is attempted on data which is not within the possible conversion range 3 Parameter error In an instruction requiring the specification of control data the specified data is outside the possible range 4 Over area error The data manipulated by a block instruction exceeds the memory range 14 4 2 Operation Mode When an Operation Error Occurs e Normally the operation stops when an operation error occurs e When you set system register 26 to continuation the control unit operates even if an operation error occurs Using programming tool software 1 Set the mode of the CPU to PROG 2 Select the Option in PLC Configuration option from the menu bar 3 On the PLC Configuration menu select Action on error This displays system registers 20 to 26 4 Remove the check of system register 26 5 Press the OK to write the setting to the PLC 14 4 3 Dealing with Operation Errors lt Procedure gt 1 Check the location of the error Check the address where the error occurred which is stored in DT90017 and DT90018 and make sure the high level instruction for that address is correct and appropriate 2 Clear the error Use a programming tool to clear the error e Select Online Sta
146. noise superimposed on the power wires however the noise can be attenuated further by using the isolation transformer Also twist the power supply cables to minimize adverse effects from noise Grounding Ground the instrument to increase noise suppression Exclusive grounding e For grounding purposes use wiring with a minimum of 2 The grounding connection should have a resistance of less than 1000 e The point of grounding should be as close to the PLC unit as possible The ground wire should be as short as possible e f two devices share a single ground point it may produce an adverse effect Always use an exclusive ground for each device C CORRECT X INCORRECT Other device Inverter etc Other device Inverter etc 5 5 3 Power Supply for Expansion FPO Adapter Lise Ihe power supply Gable provided as an accessonj to supply power To Ihe unit Powar supply cable _ AFP SR1 E Green m Function earth wl LU 3 Ir EJ Y UU a j x i aet he Blue T nu n JP LL bw d im Power supply it kae Gabe Power supply wiring for the unit Use the power supply cable Part No AFP0581 that comes with the unit to connect the power supply Brown 24V DC Blue OV Green Function earth FE Power supply wire To minimize adverse effects from noise twist the brown and blue wires of the power supply
147. normally open contact in presume parallel by comparing two 32 bit data in the number comparative condition 1 1 1 lt 2 1 S2 data or S1 1 51 gt 52 1 52 Connects a Form A normally open contact in dl d pP 81 52 parallel by comparing two 32 bit data in the PEPE OR comparative condition S1 1 51 gt 52 1 52 ORF gt Connects a Form A normally open contact in FPO FP e Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32 pt nn bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 52 1 52 udi EE BT Rd Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32 7 Lo bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 51 lt 52 1 S2 or S141 51 gt 52 1 2 51 52 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 1 gt S2 1 2 Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S 1 1 1 gt S2 1 S2 or S1 1 1 2 1 52 Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S 1 1 51 lt 52 1 2 Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32 L bit data in the comparative condition S 1 1 1 lt S2 1 2 or 51 1 51 52 1 52 Connects a Form A normally open contact serially by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 1 2 1 52 Connects a Form A normally open contact serially by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S
148. not necessary to write the response process as a ladder so the program is easier than the general purpose communication function The 1 1 or 1 N communication is available between our devices equipped with the computer link function and the MEWTOCOL COM Our devices e g PLC IPD temperature control unit eco power meter For the MEWTOCOL master function communication is possible with the COM1 and COM2 ports only Do not execute the F145 SEND nor F146 RECV instructions when the unit is used as a slave unit z i a Fa F SS ave clave slave Slave Slave Master num Finis Tr en FN YXTLYT i 1 i KT tamparatura MT temperatura coniral unii eonitrol unt 1 3 MEWTOCOL slave function e his function is to receive commands from the computer link execute the process and send back the results Any special ladder program is not necessary to use this function Set the communication conditions in the system registers It enables the 1 1 or 1 N communication with a master computer or PLC e he program for the computer side must be written in BASIC or C language according to the MEWTOCOL COM MEWTOCOL COM contains the commands used to monitor and control PLC operation Slave Save Slave Slave Slave Slave j ae 5L Z9 aa a i un os e Ap ue 7 ENE EDEN amp 4 F Ue gm a a ba
149. occurred Turns on for an instant when an operation error occurs The address where the operation error occurred is stored in DT90018 The contents change each time a new error occurs This is set if an overflow or underflow occurs in the calculation R9009 Carry flag results and as a result of a shift system instruction being executed Turns on for an instant when the compared results become uen larger in the comparison instructions Turns on for an instant when the compared results are equal in the comparison R900B instructions when the calculated results become 0 in the arithmetic instructions smaller in the comparison instructions Turns on when the set time elapses set value reaches 0 in Auxiliary timer the timing operation of the F137 STMR F183 DSTM Contact auxiliary timer instruction The flag turns off when the trigger for auxiliary timer instruction turns off Tool port em R900E S Turns on when communication error at tool port is occurred communication error Turns on when scan time exceeds the time specified in system register 34 during constant scan execution This goes on if O has been set using system register 34 Backup battery error ions flag non hold Backup battery error flag hold Operation error flag each non hold Constant scan error flag 17 16 WR901 FP X Address Description mos Initial on type pulse Goes on for only the first scan a
150. of S and stores 7 itin D The part is specified by n 7 segment SEGT S D Converts the data of S for use in a 7 decode PSEGT segment display and stores it in 0 1 5 D ENCO S n D Encodes part of the data of S and PENCO stores it in D The part is specified by 7 16 bit data UNIT S n D The least significant digit of each of the combine PUNIT words of data beginning at S are 7 stored united in order in Available 2 Not available A Not available partially 5 Og E U N N 0 17 60 I Boo Ope e Description S ean rand 2 LL DIST Each of the digits of the data of S PDIST are stored in distributed to the least significant digits of the areas beginning at S n D Twelve characters of the character 1 2 F94 P94 16 bit data distribute Character ASCII code PASC constants of S are converted to ASCII code and stored in D to D 5 F96 The data of S1 is searched for in P96 16 bit table data search PSRC the areas in the range S2 to S3 S3 and the result is stored in DT9037 and DT9038 DSRC 51 The data of S1 1 S1 is searched PDSRC S2 for in the 32 bit data designated by 53 53 beginning from S2 and the F97 P97 32 bit table data search result if stored in DT90037 and DT90038 o D D Data shift instructions
151. of 50 15 FO MV K500 DT101 output from YO of specified channel CHO When the program runs the data table will be F173 PWMH DT100 KO as shown below Data table Control code 1 K1 1 Specify the control code by setting the K constant Resolution of 1000 Resolution of 100 Period ms 25 0 k 31 3k 41 7k 0 02 However f ort he medium speed c hannel CH2 and CH3 of the Tr type it is not possible to specify from K21 to k24 12 5 9 51 2 specification of duty specify using constant If the control code is KO to K19 the duty is KO to K999 0 0 to 99 9 If the control code is K20 to K24 the duty is KO to K990 0 to 99 Values are specified in units of 1 K10 digits behind the decimal point are rounded off Note e f a value outside the specified range is written to the duty area while the instruction is being executed a frequency corrected to the maximum value is output If written when instruction execution is started an operation error is occurred 9 52 Chapter 10 High speed counter Pulse Output and PWM Output functions For Ry Type 10 1 Overview of Each Functions Describes the functions of the relay type Ry type FP X control unit 10 1 1 Usable Units and Cassettes 1 The pulse input can be counted using the inputs XO to X7 of the main unit Single phase 8 channels 2 phase 4 channels 2 The pulse input can be counted high speed counter or the pulse outpu
152. or CH2 allocated in the Count D Pond high speed counter setting of the system registers are defined to enable disable woltware reset 0 Mo 1 Yes e he high speed counter to be used with the reset input is CHO and CH2 only High speed counter control code monitor area Channel No cho ch ch2 ch3 ch4 ch ch ch cha DT9088 ch9 DT9069 chA DT960870 chB DTO071 1 2 O Elapsed value write and read instruction F1 e his instruction changes or reads the elapsed value of the high speed counter e Specify this instruction together with the special data register DT90300 e he elapsed value is stored as 32 bit data in the combined area of special data registers DT90300 and DT90301 e Use this F1 DMV instruction to set the elapsed value Example 1 Writing the elapsed value X7 Set the initial value of K3000 in the high speed 1 DMV K3000 DT90300 counter Example 2 Reading the elapsed value X7 Read the elapsed value of the high speed DF F1 DMV DT90300 DT100 counter and copies it to DT100 and DT101 9 14 Target value match ON instruction F166 Example 1 XA If the elapsed value DT90300 and DT90301 DF F166 HC1S KO K10000 for channel 0 matches K10000 output Y7 turns on Example 2 XB If the elapsed value DT90308 and DT90309 I DF F166 HC1S K2 K20000 6 for channel 2 matches K20000
153. port No 0 Timeout 0 Retry time 15 Slave unit 1 IP address 192 168 1 11 Communication protocol TCP Not necessary Netmask 255 255 255 0 Action mode Server connection Gateway 192 168 1 1 Baud rate 115200 bps Communication mode Computer link Source port No 9094 Timeout 0 Slave unit 2 IP address 192 168 1 2 Communication protocol TCP Not necessary Netmask 255 255 255 0 Action mode Server connection Gateway 192 168 1 1 Baud rate 115200 bps Communication mode Computer link Source port No 9094 Timeout 0 2 When using the MEWTOCOL master function in UDP UNICAST communication oet as follows for each unit using Configurator WD lPaddressseting Communication setting Option setting _ Master unit IP address 192 168 1 5 Communication protocol UDP Destination unit No Netmask 255 255 255 0 Action mode Client connection and IP address is Gateway 192 168 1 1 Baud rate 115200 bps specified On Communication mode Computer link Target IP address for Send type UNICAST unit No Destination IP address No 1 192 168 1 11 192 168 1 11 No 2 192 168 1 12 Destination port No 9094 Source port No 0 Slave unit 1 IP address 192 168 1 11 Communication protocol UDP Not necessary Netmask 255 255 255 0 Action mode Server connection Gateway 192 168 1 1 Baud rate 115200 bps Communication mode Computer link Send type UNICAST Source port No 9094 Slave unit 2 IP address 192 168 1 2
154. process 272 to 287 Step ladder process 288 to 303 DT90079 Step ladder process DT90075 304 to 319 Step ladder process DISPO 320 to 335 Step ladder process didus 336 to 351 Read Writ ing ing 17 35 FP X A Available N A Not available D e Read Writ escription Step ladder process diri 352 to 367 Step ladder process 213909 368 to 383 DT90084 Step ladder process 384 to 399 Step ladder process 400 to 415 Step ladder process DT90086 416 to 431 Indicates the startup condition of the step Step ladder process ladder process When the process starts up DT90087 432 to 447 the bit corresponding to the process number Step ladder process turns on bed 448 to 463 Step ladder process Monitor using binary display DT90089 464 to 479 lt je gt DT90090 SteP ladder process SL d aa 480 to 495 D Step ladder process 15 11 7 3 0 Process No 496 to 511 1 Executing 0 Not executing A programming tool software can be used to write data Step ladder process 576 to 591 Step ladder process 592 to 607 DT90085 DT90097 17 36 FP X A Available N A Not available sine 00 Rm Step ladder process Indicates the startup condition of the step DT90107 752 to 767 ladder process When the process starts up DT90108 SteP ladder process the bit corresponding to the process number 768 to 78
155. range MEWNET F I O overlap or I O setting that is over the Sto range is detected in the allocated I O and A mapping PS MEWNET F I O map error Re configure the I O map correctly A Available 17 81 17 82 tion status MEWNET F slave I O terminal Stops mapping error IC card read error Sele error Description and steps to take I O mapping for remote terminal boards remote I O terminal units and I O link is not correct Re configure the I O map for slave stations according to the I O points of the slave stations When reading in the program from the IC memory card due to automatic reading because of the dip switch setting or program switching due to F14 PGRD instruction 1 memory card is not installed There is no program file or it is damaged Writing is disabled There is an abnormality in the AUTOEXEC SPG file Program size stored on the card is larger than the capacity of the CPU gt lnstall an IC memory card that has the program properly recorded and execute the read once again Abnormal I O unit FPX FP X Check the contents of special data register DT90002 and abnormal FP expansion unit application cassette for FP X Then check the unit FP2 and FP2SH Check the contents of special data registers DT90002 DT90003 and abnormal I O unit Then check the unit Selection of operation status using system register21 to continue opera
156. reverse off 10 Absolute CWICCW 12 Absolute pulse and direction forward off reverse 13 Absolute pulse and direction forward on reverse off 2 Speed Frequency Hz lt constant Frequency range 0 15 Hz to 8 8 kHz K1 to KS800 unit Hz error naar 9 8 KHZ approx 0 9 kHz Sat K1 to specify 1 5 Hz 1 48 Hz to 100 kHz K48 to 100000 unit Hz Max error near 100 kHz approx 3 kHz 2 181 Hz to 100 kHz K191 to K100000 unit Hz Max error near 100 kHz approx 0 8 kHz Initial speed Set 30 kHz or less However for the medium speed channels CH2 and CH3 of the Tr type it can be set to a maximum of K20000 Hz 3 Aceleration deceleration time ms lt K constant With 30 steps K30 to K32 60 Specify by 30 steps 5 With 60 steps KED to K32760 Specify by 60 steps 5 4 Target value K constant 2147483648 to K2147483647 5 When the time is not specified in 30 ms units nor 60 ms units it will be automatically corrected to the multiple value larger value of 30 ms or 60 ms 9 29 Sample program Incremental Position Control Operation Plus Direction When XO turns on the pulse is output from CW output YO of the specified channel CHO Note In that case the memory YO does not turn on off according to the pulse output and also the monitoring is not possible 0 V 24V DC K0 startinput x he E Pulse output
157. scan 17 20 WR905 FP X Address Description When using MEWNET WO MEWNET WO Turns on when a transmission error occurs at PC PLO link PC PLC link transmission error flag Turns on when there is an error in the PC PLC link area settings R9051 to R905F 17 21 WR906 FP m 17 22 MEWNET WO PC PLC link 0 transmission assurance Ime o on when Unit No 1 is communicating properly in link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC PLC link mode Turns on when Unit No 2 is communicating properly in PC PLC link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC PLC link mode Turns on when Unit No 3 is communicating properly in link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC PLC link mode Turns on when Unit No 4 is communicating properly in PC PLC link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC PLC link mode Turns on when Unit No 5 is communicating properly in link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC PLC link mode Turns on when Unit No 6 is communicating properly in PLC link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PLC link mode Turns on when Unit No 7 is communicatin
158. scan when the leading edge of the trigger is detected Trailing edge Tums on the contact for only one differential Sr scan when the trailing edge of the Leading edge differential initial execution type CREE Output is set to and held at off E e p perm agg Outputs at set tngger and holds until reset tngger tums on aee e On delay timer After set value n x 0 001 seconds timer contact a is set to on After set poches E n x 0 01 seconds timer contact poches E is set to on 3 After set value n x 0 1 seconds timer contact a is set to on 3 After set value n x 1 second timer contact a is set to on S 3 Auxiliary timer pa 37 vace After set value S x 0 01 seconds 16 bit STMR H aH H the specified output and R900D are o o o o set to on Auxiliary timer F183 After set value S x 0 01 seconds 32 bit tse J the specified output and R900D are set to on Time constant Executes the filter processing for the ES RM MITES peened nou zE jagan y hor er Decrements from the preset value Heset n F _ Available X Not available Not available partially 1 The type of the devices that can be specified depends on the models 2 The allowable number of using the PSHS and RDS instruction depends on the models 3 For FP2SH FP10SH and FP X Ver2 0 or later any device can be set for the setti
159. set by ICTL instruction is stored Periodical interrupt NU OP interval INT24 KO periodical interrupt is not used K1 to K3000 0 5ms to 1 5s or 10ms to 30s Sampling by the SMPL instruction DT90028 Sample trace interval K1 to K3000 x 10 ms 10 ms to 30 s DT90029 Notusd J o 0790030 0790031 The contents of the specified message Data DT90032 length are stored in these special data DT90033 registers when F149 MSG instruction is 0790034 executed 0790035 0790036 Notused CNA Note Scan time display is only possible in RUN mode and shows the operation cycle time In PROG mode the scan time for the operation is not displayed The maximum and minimum values are cleared each time the mode is switched from RUN to PROG DT90027 17 29 FP X A Available N A Not available are Read Writ padres Desonpton er ing The number of data that match the searched DT90037 Dor ue data is stored here when F96 SRC A N A Instructions P instruction is executed The position of the first matching data is DT90038 d stored here when an F96 SRC instruction is A N A Instructions executed DT90039 Notused J amp A 1 The potentiometer value KO to K1000 is DT90040 Volume input 0 stored here This value can be used in analog timers and other applications by using the program to read this value to a data register DT90041 Volume input 1 VO DT90040
160. setting It is the same when the system registers are initialized USB port is not used When USB port is used 3 wire 1 channel 5232 iso nudis ul eoru RS and CS control is not available 3 wire 1 channel 5232 AFPX COM2 3 wire 2 channel RS232C ie Sad channel cannot beused AFPX COM3 No restrictions 1 channel RS485 RS422 1 channel RS485 1 RS485 AFPX COM4 1 channel RS232C RS232C cannot be used Ethernet Ethernet APPACOMS 4 channel RS232C RS232C cannot be used AFPX COM6 2 channel RS485 1 channel RS485 7 15 7 2 Communication Specifications Computer link P erated adus i MODBUS TEN PC PLC 1 1 1 1 pue link 1 1 pu commu i commu communication communication communication nication nication nication RS232C RS232C RS422 RS232C RS422 RS485 RS422 RS232C RS422 tace RS485 TOOL port AFPX COM3 Two wire Two wire Two wire Token Half duplex nar bus Half duplex jun nication duplex duplex m NAT duplex et communication communication Floating communication method communi communi communi master ca ion ca ion cation Note1 Although it has adequate tolerance to noise it is recommendable to make a program to execute retransmission in order to improve reliability of the communication when a communication error Occurs due to excessive noises or when a receiver equipment canno
161. start communication When using the general purpose communication start the communication after receiving the data area write command for the network information notification and after the response timeout time AFPX COMS TeEESVWDDTODOO 0D08 Ng sess mae FF X main unit Sample program Set DT10000 in the network information notification area An Owe IP address is checked by the network information notification when the power tums on 0 gt DT 10000 10000 266 RI Li i Normal start up T Iff Error occurs when the beginning of address is aver 255 2 DT 10000 Rid Error occurrence gt DT 10000 Z DT 10000 1FF R11 17 H DHCP gat error gt DT 10000 H FF 4 DT 10000 H2FF Ri 25 d IP duplicate error Network information confirmation When selecting the computer link and client setting the network information can be confirmed from the FP X by enabling the network information confirmation setting It can be confirmed by reading the confirmation area by the MEWTOCOL data area read command RD For the memory area is fixed The unit number is arbitrary If the network information confirmation setting is enabled the AFPX COM5 responds to the MEWTOCOL data area read command for the confirmation area regardless of unit numbers ______ 5 adn j P 01 RDCO00A800 Mo 01 R DD 100001000856 n FP X
162. switch Ro gt DF H Fai BIN wx1 Set timer 2 mam Set timer time number SSS F81 BIN 10SVO 2 WAT WXU L Digital switches Convert the BCD timer number data WX1 to binary and set it in index register 10 2 Convert the BCD timer set value in WXO to binary and store in the timer set value area SV specified by contents of 10 Example 2 gt Taking external output of the elapsed value in a timer number specified by a digital switch Vi 7 segment indicator Timer elapsed e value display Fu m1 HDF H Fai BIN Wd lO 151 Fao BCD I0EVO WwYO ss 2 E Timer number setting 1 Digital switches WA 1 CD Convert the BCD timer number data WX1 to binary and set it in index register 10 2 Convert the elapsed value data EV in the timer specified by IO to BCD and output it to output relay WYO 14 6 14 4 Operation Errors 14 4 1 Outline of Operation Errors e An operation error is a condition in which operation is impossible when a high level instruction is executed e When an operation error occurs the ERROR ALARM LED on the control unit will blink and the operation error flags R9007 and R9008 will turn on e he operation error code 45 is set at special data register DT90000 e he error address is stored in special data registers DT90017 and DT90018 Types of operation error 1 Address error The
163. ta maximum speed pulses will be output with no acceleratiarideceleratian Composite speed Initial speed 30 kHz ar lass Specify composite sceed to make me component speed of each ans become 1 5 Hz or higher However for the medium seeed channels CH2 and CH3 of the Tr type it can be set to maximum of 20000 Haz 9 44 ed Accaleration Deceleration time ms K canstant agde If thi amp i8 amp will b output for the initial composite as is ah Target value Movement amount K 8388608 lo K8388607 Infinite feeding is not available When operating only ane axis In incremental mode set the target value for the axis which will be not be b In absolute moda sat tha target value for the axis which will not be operated the same as the current value Infinite feeding is not available during the linear interpolation control 5 Component speed Initial speed and max speed of each axis This is stored as 2 words in real numbers type X axis com _ composite spesexd x e iaa dae X axis movement amount Y axis movement amaunt Camposite speed Initial speedy Set to 30KHz ar less Example Even if the initial speed is connected see 3 6 Ihe calculation value wall be stored as is an he operation result storage 6 Frequency range The system automatically selects the frequency range for each component of each axis Range 0 1 5 Hz lo 8 8 kHz Rang
164. the control unit Connect the connector on the back of the communication cassette and the connector of the cassette mounting part of the control unit and secure the two positions bottom left and top right with the screws It is no problem if the ribs remain AFPX COM5 has no rib The screw s tightening torque should be 0 3 to 0 5 N m Screw securely i m Faits P i m d f x 5 Ls M uc a gt 1 ues Siu N cs Saif z 2 HS 2 hy b CEDAR d P Lor gt Secured al 2 positions ume DL r Installation on the application cassette Remove the cover of the application cassette that was secured previously Connect the connector on the back of the communication cassette and the connector at the front of the application cassette and secure the two positions top left and bottom right of the communication cassette which the ribs were cut with the screws AFPX COM5 has no rib Install it after the wiring of the application cassette The screw s tightening torque should be 0 3 to 0 5 N m Screw securely caasemm i Application cassette Communication cassette _ Apolicabon cassene Ne 8 i Secured at 2 positions B 2 anana ray Cut ribs 5 4 2 Installing Application Cassette The application cassette be installed o
165. the download in case of same password Invalid PLC cannot be uploaded invalid Phasel Dnpeobect ig dois T ter in aibhanumenc Satra br Als due downicad to than Vernon 2 5 11 2 Password Protect Function This function is used to prohibit reading and writing programs and system registers by setting a password on the FP X There are two ways to set a password as below 1 Sets using the programming tool 2 Sets using an instruction SYS1 instruction Note Precautions on the password setting Do not forget your password If you forget your password you cannot read programs Even if you ask us for your password we cannot crack it 11 2 1 Password Setting Setting using FPWIN GR 1 Select Online Edit Mode under the Online on the menu bar or press the CTRL and F2 keys at the same time to switch to the Online screen 2 Select or Set PLC Password under Tool on the menu bar The following display will be shown Security information dialog box Ert PLC Pasawerd Untitled Al Indicates the current status of the password MES Wu setting p Camere tan iz not set 2 Specify the type of the password to be used Specify an operation mode e Access Accesses programs by inputting password ipai ede Protect Sets a password c Unprotect Releases the password s
166. timer counter number Timer Counter Data memory for storing the elapsed elapsed value 1024 words EVO to EV1023 value during operation of a timer counter area 2 EV Stores by timer counter number Data memory for storing specific data Special data 374 words DT90000 to register DT DT90373 Various settings and error codes are stored Index register Register can be used as an address of memory area and constants modifier Memory area 15 16 area available for use C30 Master control MCR MC No of labels LBL No of step No of subroutines 500 subroutines SUB No of interrupt Ry type 14 input programs 1 periodical program programs Tr type 8 input programs 1 periodical program INT Decimal K 32 768 to K32 767 for 16 bit operation eens HO to HFFFF for 16 bit operation constants H HO to HFFFFFFFF for 32 bit operation Floating point type F Note1 The number of points noted above is the number reserved as the calculation memory The actual number of points available for use is determined by the hardware configuration Note2 If no battery is used only the fixed area is backed up counters 16 points C1008 to C1023 internal relays 128 points R2480 WR248 to R255F WR255 data registers 55 words C14 DT12230 to DT12284 C30 C60 DT32710 to DT32764 Writing is available up to 10000 times Then the optional battery is used all area can be backed up Areas to be held and n
167. to Y35F e The data for the each channels of FPO A D conversion unit FPO A80 FPO thermocouple unit FPO TCA FPO TC8 FRO RTD unit FPO RTD6 and FPO D A conversion unit FPO AO4V FPO AO04l is converted and loaded with a user program that includes a switching flag to convert the data e Regarding FPO CC Link slave unit please refer to the exclusive manual 4 5 V O Allocation of FP X Add on Cassette The FP X add on cassette is mounted on the FP X control unit numbers Cassette Cassette mounting part 1 mounting part 2 Slot 0 Slot 1 Type of control unit FP X communication AFPX COM1 cassette FP X communication AFPX COM2 cassette FP X communication AFPX COM3 Communication cassette cassette FP X communication cassette FP X communication 5 cassette FP X communication AFPX COMG cassette FP X analog input CHO WX10 CHO WX20 cassette ARAARA CH1 WX11 CH1 WX21 FP X analog output CHO WY10 CHO WY20 cassette ORE CH1 WY11 CH1 WY21 CHO WX10 CHO WX20 Eum ug AFPX A21 CH1 WX11 CH1 WX21 WY10 WY20 FP X thermocouple CHO WX10 CHO WX20 Application CHO WX10 CHO WX20 cassette AFPX RTD2 WX11 CH1 WX24 FP X input cassette AFPX IN8 From X100 From X200 FP X output cassette AFPX TR8 From Y 100 From Y200 FP X output cassette AFPX TR6P From Y100 From Y200 From X100 From X200 I O cassette AFPX IN4T3 From Y100 From Y200 FP X pulse I O cassette From X100 From X2
168. to connect two devices with RS232C port A full lineup of communication functions means you can also work with 1 N communication up to 99 units and PC PLC link function up to 16 units Controlling two devices with RS232C port with one FP X When using the 2 channel RS232C type communication cassette pane wim RS232L port casn be c nnecpad Drim with RE2320 port The ocd por can be Used 16 conne a dispiny panel ar amer daaevic e n Mri Densa with RSZ320 port 1 N communication possible with up to 99 stations units When using the 1 channel RS485 RS422 type communication cassette When using the 1 channel RS485 and 1 channel RS232C in combination bb passe welll lo BE FP2 FP28H FP X Hn 1 2 We B RS485 Link with FP2 and FP is possible Data sharing between small size and medium size PLCs is easily achievable in one network The FP X supports MEWNET WO and the programless PLC link with the FP2 or is possible FPZIFPZSH E Unit No 16 uns Baud rate 115 2 kbps Transmission distance 1200 m gt FP X FP X FP FP X 1 3 Supports Modbus RTU It can be used as a master unit slave units F145 and F146 instructions It can be easily communicated with a temperature control device inverter FP e or overseas PLCs It is possible to communicate with up to 99 units
169. unit FPO AO4V FPO AO04I is converted and loaded with a user program that includes a switching flag to convert the data e Regarding FPO CC Link slave unit please refer to the exclusive manual 15 14 15 2 4 I O Allocation of FP X Add on Cassette The FP X add on cassette is mounted on the FP X control unit numbers Communication cassette Application cassette Note1 There is no I O for the communication cassette and master memory cassette Type of control unit FP X communication cassette FP X communication cassette FP X communication cassette FP X communication cassette FP X communication cassette FP X communication cassette FP X analog input cassette e FP X analog output cassette FP X analog I O cassette FP X thermocouple cassette FP X RTD cassette FP X input cassette FP X output cassette FP X output cassette FP X I O cassette FP X pulse cassette Note3 FP X master memory cassette AFPX A21 AFPX TC2 AFPX RTD2 AFPX IN8 AFPX TR8 AFPX TR6P AFPX IN4T3 AFPX PLS AFPX MRTC Cassette mounting part 1 Slot 0 CHO WX10 CH1 WX11 CHO WY10 CH1 WY11 CHO WX10 CH1 WX11 WY10 CHO WX10 CH1 WX11 CHO WX10 CH1 WX11 From X100 From Y100 From Y100 From X100 From Y 100 From X100 From Y100 Cassette mounting part 2 Slot 1 CH1 WX21 CH1 WY 21 CHO WX20 CH1 WX21 WY20 CH1 WX21 CH1 WX21 From Y200 From Y200 From Y200 From Y200 Note
170. until it stops at the data table containing the pulsa output stop valus KO Whan the program runs the data tabla and pulse output diagram are as shown below Flapsed value ef high speed Counter emo Note When the execution condition R10 of the F174 SPOH instruction goes on the high speed counter control flag R811C R811D goes on When the elapsed value reaches 10000 and pulse output stops R811C R911D goes off 9 42 1 Control code lt constant llUpper word 00000000 D Fixed ll Duty on width Duty 1 2 5096 1 Duty 1 4 25 Ia Frequency range 0 1 5 Hz to 8 8 kHz 1 48 Hz to 100 kHz 2 181 Hz to 100 kHz Operation mode Incremental Specifies the amount of travel number of pulses 1 Absolute eches the target value absolute value E Output method 0 CW Incremental counting 1 CCW Decremental counting 2 Pulse and direction forward off Incremental counting 3 Pulse and direction reverse on Decremental counting 4 Pulse and direction forward on Incremental counting 5 Pulse and direction reverse off Decramental counting 2 Freqency Hz K constant Frequency range 0 1 5 Hz to 8 8 KHz K1to K8800 unit Hz Max error near 9 8 kHz approx 0 9 KHz Set K1 to specify 1 5 Hz 1 48 Hz to 100 kHz K4B to K100000 unit Hz Max error near 100 kHz approx 3 kHz 2 191 Hz to 100 kHz 48 to K100000 unit Hz Max error near 1
171. used on the DT The necessary data is read from the internal F ROM area to be used for ladder programs This function is only available by using the programming tool software in the PROG mode In this case data can be transferred in both cases when the master memory cassette is installed and it is not installed ROM to RAM transfer function All points of the contents of the F ROM data area stored in the internal ROM are read to the operation memory DT This function is only available by using the programming tool software in the PROG mode In this case data can be transferred in both cases when the master memory cassette is installed and it is not installed Internal memory to Master memory transfer function The program information such as ladder programs system registers F ROM data comments and passwords stored in the internal ROM is transferred to the master memory The upload disabled information is specified using the programming tool software It is selectable to transfer the F ROM data area and comments with the programming software or not When transferring the F ROM data area specify the block number that starts transferring and the number of blocks This function is only available by using the programming tool software in the PROG mode When data is transferred to the master memory the data not to be transferred will be erased Master memory to Internal memory transfer function The information stored in the master memory is t
172. v 3 5 jdn anh r 1ius il glg AHH pg u 1 4 mb auc FTT hl 1 A maT SS LU a rl T Socket i T LI 1 AF T Linch sorge 84 40 4 AFCBS503 5035 CHi EM P ARIS Imm fim MTT ERN AARI d aum H Ss xw Ll Unit mm 16 2 2 AFC85305 AFC8531 AFC8532 For extending for the tool port E 1 L AFCBS32 2000 p LE 6 8 ul En S TE 16 4 Chapter 17 Appendix 17 1 System Registers Special Internal Relays Special Data Registers Precaution for System Registers What is the system register area e System registers are used to set values parameters which determine operation ranges and functions used Set values based on the use and specifications of your program e here is no need to set system registers for functions which will not be used Type of system registers The registers to be used depend on each PLC 1 Allocation of timers and counters System registers 5 The number of timers and counters is set by specifying the starting counter number 2 Hold non hold type setting System registers 6 to 13 When these registers are set to hold type the values in the relays and data memory will be retained even if the system is switched to PROG mode or the power is turned off If set to non hold type the values will be cleared to O 3 Operation mode setting on error
173. write command transmission condilion and Ji js the transmission condition of read command Fi R9044 RO R1 Note 2 RO R2 Compares the write data 50 0751 with the read data DTBD and DT61 before 39 sending the write command and updates the write data if they are matched R1 F61 50 R1 R800B 49 r j F360 DT50 sends command to write the data DTS0 and DT51 of the local unit to Ihe and 59 in the unit number 01 from the COM1 port 1 145 SEND DT 100 DT50 Me NES FO MV H1 WRO 70 Sends a command to read the data and 1 in the unit number 01 from the COM1 _ and stores the result in the data DT60 and DT61 of the local unit 2 I F146 DT 100 Dit pre WRO Note1 It is H2001 for COM2 port Note2 It is R804A for COM2 port 7 79 Flow chart Data initializatian R9044 Note OFF ON DT50 and DT50 is equivalent to DT60 and DT641 Increments DT50 and DT51 Sends a data Execute F145 write command SEND instruction Sends a data Execute F146 read command RECV instruction Turns RO off Note It is R904A for COM2 port The above program executes the operation 1 to 3 repeatedly 4 Updates the write data if the write data DT50 and DT51 and the read data DT60 and DT61 are matched
174. 0 Positioning operation running Number of pulsa R101 Positioingoperationstart R102 Positioning done pulse R9110 High speed counter control flag Program When X5 is turned on YO turns on and the conveyor begins moving When the elapsed value DT90300 and DT90301 reaches K5000 YO turns off and the conveyor stops aum r eX mm xb 29110 Rite E100 R100 _ Bi nauis rior Ze DF R _ Positioning rations start 2101 5 F1 DMV KD 2790300 1 PEE EHE MM 500 value of high speed L E E 67 HC1R KO 5000 _ Y f large value malch oli instruction YU goes off when elapsed value of high speed counter CHO reaches 5000 pulses _Speed counter CHO reaches 5000 puis YOgoes ot R101 Yo ae ee Mami M mms Vi jos ad r set the inverter operation signal rO H811D H100 TO H102 d iai ia dane ee 0 5 10 14 Positioning operations with a double speed inverter Wiring example FP X Ry type terminal 1 Encoder input AD ars Operation start O C COM f Output terminal Inverter operation 3 jo Inverter high speed Y1 Operation chart Speed 4500 3000 Number of pul
175. 0 MTRN In amp tructian B S Y Y 1 gt Receive buffer amp o D 1 4 j we 5 HI E i i C m j 4 h Number nf oni cils c3 cd rece pion bytes Write pointer dy F ef yl e oleate wur ihr hist du recaivad a vi mari ESSE TIS r L SrA 0S S Cannot be y Slored whan code is meepuon by F 159 iare flag i an MTRINI JM E d OF li ON Rocio diene i turned oF by mjihng F 158 MTRMN OFE P 6 6 H H E C E 1 x 13 Li p Murnber ol byins Murnber p bytes recnived is ide me moved eared when has lama e V nents e he data is stored in the receive buffer in sequential order When the header is received the number of bytes received is cleared and the address write pointer in the receive buffer is reset to the initial address e Reception is disabled while the reception done flag R9038 or R9048 is on e Also When F159 MTRN is executed the number of bytes received is cleared and the address write pointer in the receive buffer is re set to the initial address e f there are two head
176. 0 to 240 V AC 24 V DC AFPX C60T 32 28 Common Transistor PN Terminal block AFPX C14TD polarities NPN amp common AFPX C30TD 16 14 24V DC AFPX C60TD 32 28 Transistor type PNP Tr type AFPX C14P AFPX C30P 16 14 100 to 240 V AC 24 V DC AFPX C60P 32 28 Common Transistor af Terminal block AFPX C14PD polarities PNP amp common AFPX C30PD 16 14 24V DC AFPX C60PD 32 28 1 6 1 2 2 FP X Expansion Unit Product No of I O Specifications points Power supply Input Output Connection Relay type Ry type AFPXE16R 8 8B 24 0 Common polarities Relay mine amp common Transistor type NPN Tr type 28 U OMEN NE dius Transistor Terminal Common polarities 11418807 Term AFPX AFPX E30TD 24V 24VDC amp common Transistor type PNP Tr type AFPXcE16P 8 8 24VDC 1 100 to 240 V Common polarities ae num AFPX E30PD 24V DC amp common Input only type 16 0 YOE Terminal AFPX E16X X300 to X30F Common polarities block amp common The input specifications are the same as AFPX E16R Output only type Relay type 0 14 Terminal The output specifications are the same as AFPX E16R An 8 cm expansion cable is provided with expansion unit 1 2 3 FP X Expansion FPO Adapter FP X Expansion FPO adapter with 8 cm expansion For connecting FPO expansion unit AFPX EFPO
177. 0 to Y307 Input 16 points X300 to X30F Output 14 points Y300 to Y30D FP X E16X expansion input unit Input 16 points X300 to X30F FP X E14YR expansion output unit Output 14 points Y 300 to Y30D Note E16 cannot be connected on the right side of E16 4 4 Allocation of FPO Expansion Unit 4 4 1 VO Allocation The FPO expansion unit is installed on the right side of the FPO expansion adapter The I O numbers are allocated from the unit nearest to the expansion FPO adapter in ascending order Expansion FPO adapter FPO expansion unit Expansion unit 1 Expansion unit Z Expansion unit 3 4 4 2 Number of Expansion Units and I O Allocation Only one expansion FPO adapter can be connected at the last position of the FP X expansion bus The I O allocation varies depending on the installation location of the expansion FPO adapter Note The ranges of the I O numbers which are actually used differ depending on the units 4 4 4 4 3 VO Allocation of FPO Expansion Unit I O do not need to be set as I O allocation is performed automatically when an expansion unit is added The I O allocation of expansion unit is determined by the installation location I O numbers when installed as the first expansion unit Carry the digit of hundreds place one by one since the second expansion unit TOU Number of Expansion Expansion Expansion zb allocation unit 1 unit 2 unit 3 FPO E8X Input 8 points X300 to
178. 00 more the data will be the same value 20000 as the one at the time of disconnection Note About RTD input range From the Power on to the converted data Ready approx 3 seconds the digital value will be K20001 Take care of the use of the data during this period not to influence other programs From the disconnection or exceeding the rated range digital value K20000 to the recovery and converted data Ready approx 3 seconds the digital value will be K20001 Take care of the use of the data during this period not to influence other programs 8 21 8 3 6 FP X Input Cassette Product No AFPX IN8 Insulation method 8 points common Input points per common Either the positive or negative of input power supply can be connected to common terminal Min on voltage Min on current 19 2 V DC 3 mA Max off voltage Max off current 2 4 V DC 1 mA Input impedance Approx 6 8 Response time Operating mode indicator LED display EN61131 2 Applicable type however according to the above specifications LED indication Terminal layout FACES FN ll Ii LI L1 L1 LI L1 E i du COM 280000008 X0 X X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 Circuit diagram 21 6 lo 26 4 V DC circuit 8 22 8 3 7 Output Cassette Product AFPX TR8 Optical coupler Open collector NPN 24 V DC 21 6 to 26
179. 00 Note3 AFPX PLS From Y100 From Y200 FP X master memory AFPX MRTC cassette Note1 There is no I O for the communication cassette and master memory cassette Note2 Digital conversion values are KO to 4000 As the resolution is 12 bits upper 4 bits are always O Note3 The pulse I O cassette cannot be used with the Tr type 4 6 Chapter 5 Installation and Wiring 5 1 Installation Be thoroughly familiar with the following contents before using the units to eliminate the causes which occur the failure or malfunction of each unit 5 1 1 Installation Environment and Space Operating environment Use the unit within the range of the general specifications when installing Ambient temperatures 0 55 C Ambient humidity 10 to 95 RH at 25 C non condensing Keep the height below 2000m For use in pollution Degree 2 environment Do not use it in the following environments Direct sunlight Sudden temperature changes causing condensation Inflammable or corrosive gas Excessive airborne dust metal particles or saline matter Benzine paint thinner alcohol or other organic solvents or strong alkaline solutions such as ammonia or caustic soda Direct vibration shock or direct drop of water Influence from power transmission lines high voltage equipment power cables power equipment radio transmitters or any other equipment that would generate high switching surges Min 100mm or less Static ele
180. 00 kHz approx 0 8 kHz Set the frequency 1 which is initial speed to 30 kHz or less However for the medium speed channels CH2 and CH3 of the Tr type it can set to maximum of K20000 Hz 2 Target value 2147483648 to K2147483647 The value of the 32 bit data specified for the target value should be within the range indicated in the table below Specification of control code Range of allowable Operation mode Output method target values 3 Specifies a positive value Decremental counting S Specifies a value larger Incremantal counti ng than the current value opecifies a value smaller than the current value Decremental counting 9 43 9 4 10 Pulse Output Instruction F175 Linear Interpolation e The linear interpolation controls positioning with two axes according to the specified data table R11 HoF j r DMV H1000 07500 Pulses are output from the X axis CHO and the Y axis H 50 that the composite speed is an initial speed of Fi K500 DT502 500 Hz the maximum speed is 5000 Hz and the Fl K5000 07504 acceleration deceleration time is 300 ms The two axes F DMW K300 07506 controlled that a linear path is followed to the target position When the program runs the data table and positioning path are as shown below Fi DMV K5000 075 FT K2000 510 F175 SPSH DT500 e The lin
181. 1 Upto2 channels can be used for the current output g9 Ambient temperature CC C14RD Number of points 4 CATETAN ahidi necushr on 44 Amkeni temperature od ponts par Common which are simulta EE Pme on Tk e be 4 sow Humber l l points pei CTT unen ane sgrmulta ap nesh an 45 Li Y 21 Hn ty T AT Amani t rngserature MM Thi E 55 UI 2 5 3 Relay Ry Type AFPX DA2 and AFPX A21 Voltage Output Keep the number of points which are simultaneously on within the following range as determined by the ambient temperature Product number Limitations on number of _ Limitations on number of simultaneous input on points simultaneous output on points AFPX C14R AFPX C30R AFPX C60R AFPX C14RD AFPX C30RD AFPX C60RD eommman which are g simulia neously 55 Armbent temperalure CE COR Humber of poinbs per CAR TIPLE rich 4 simula on 41 45 55 Ambient tempt rature OC t 4a points common which are Simulta neously on 15 8 Ambien temperature CO C 1T4RD Number af posts uen which are simulta SP on ED BA Ambient temperature 1 C 30RD Number pote 16 which 11 nepcumhy on 42 Ambie
182. 1 DTI H2431 R12 P 2 i Hor Check of received data 1 To determing whelher ihe received data is m normal responses the comparison in i ostructi n used check whether ihe mo wath DT3 is converted To iscadecamal and sered in DT50 and DT51 a ee Ge ee ee HH oga ce am a so Preparing to receive the next data To prepare receive Ihe ned data the F19 instuchon resets the buffer wrilimg l paint and lums off the reception done Starting trem DT 100 the conteins cansisting of 0 bytem EE E E 8 u are sent from COMT port Buffer statuses The tables below show the statuses of the send and receive buffers when the sample program is run Send buffer Receive buffer Number of bytes Kia t be Murni ol bytes received Hao 00 HD HIS VPE RE f Set automatically TEPEN Hea 5 H n 0j Hed 8 when the insinu H44 D executed HS2 R mo q Ver 2 0 or later MG up Recenyed data Han 0 i stored in archer trem Th tH 4G low order ce rc byte HO 0 HOG 0 Statues when reception is comple ed Statuses Transmission 1 52 b Key Point Contents of the response If K100 is stored in DTO and K200 is stored in DT1 of the FP series P
183. 1 to stop operation set 0 Verification is possible in FPWIN GR Pro at I O error in the status display function I O unit Expansion unit wiring condition has changed compared to that at time of power up Check the contents of special data register FPO DT9010 FPX FP X DT90010 DT9001 1 and locate the erroneous expansion unit It checks whether an expansion connector is in agreement Check the contents of special data register FP2 FP2SH and FP10SH DT90010 DT90011 FP3 DT9010 DT9011 Selection of operation status using system register23 to continue operation set 1 to stop operation set 0 Verification is possible in FPWIN GR Pro at I O error the status display function A Available 17 83 17 84 tion status System watching dog timer error Slave station connecting time error for MEWNET F system Operation error Description and steps to take Scan time required for program execution exceeds the setting of the system watching dog timer Check the program and modify it so that the program can execute a scan within the specified time Selection of operation status using system register24 to continue operation set 1 to stop operation set 0 The time required for slave station connection exceeds the setting of the system register 35 Selection of operation status using system register25 to continue operation set 1 to sto
184. 1 SPDH F172 PLSH F174 SPOH and F175 SPSH instructions only 17 46 FP X Ry type FP X A Available N A Not available Address Description uM ing ing Counting area for output Note EI DT90348 apsed Lower words Y100 Y101 of the pulse A A DT90349 Higher words Parser PLS CHO The target value is set when Note F172 PLSH F174 SPOH DT90351 Higher words and F175 SPSH are A executed Counting area for output DT 2 Elapsed L A A eure ae Y200 201 of the pulse I O DT90353 area Higher words The target value is set when Note F172 PLSH F174 SPOH DT90355 Higher words and F175 SPSH are AUS executed 0790356 Notused NA NA 0790357 Notused o NA NA 0790358 Notused O NA NA 0790359 Notused O Z 1 1 NA NA When HSC control is executed by FO MV S DT90052 instruction the setting value for the target CH is stored in each CH Control flag monitor area Note Writing in the elapsed value area is available by F1 DMV instruction only Writing in the target value area is available by F171 SPDH F172 PLSH F174 SPOH and F175 SPSH instructions only 17 47 17 2 Table of Basic Instructions o d Lg basic instructions RTCLPE Begins a logic operation with a Form A st pen contact lt a logic ope
185. 1 on edge and 2 off edge 1 on edge Count disable Elapsed value clear 2 off edge Count enable DT90052 bit2 able disable setting of the input can be set by the reset input 10 3 3 Minimum Input Pulse Width For the period T 1 frequency a minimum input pulse width of T 2 single phase input or T 4 two phase input is required Single phase lt Two phase gt T T uS PS T T 2 gt T T T T 4 4 4 4 10 10 10 3 4 I O Allocation e As shown in the table of specifications the inputs and outputs used will differ depending on the channel number being used e The output turned on and off can be specified with instructions F166 HC1S and F167 HC1R for desired output relays Yn n 300 When using 8 of the pulse I O cassette When using 8 of the pulse I O cassette with incremental input and reset input with two phase input and reset input EPRE PpS FP X Ry type Count input AFPX PLS A phase input AFPX PLS X100 1 B phase input Reset input M X102 Reset inpul yn ON and OFF output E and OFF output Y The output turned on and off when the target The output turned on and off when the target value is reached can be specified as desired value is reached can be specified as desired from the outputs of t
186. 1 1 1 lt 2 1 52 or S1 1 1 gt 2 1 52 Connects a Form A normally open contact serially by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 S1 gt S2 1 52 Connects a Form A normally open contact serially by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 S1 gt S2 1 52 or S1 1 51 52 1 52 Connects a Form A normally open contact F5 81 52 4 serially by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 1 lt 2 1 52 Connects a Form A normally open contact serially by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 S1 lt S2 1 S2 or S1 1 51 52 1 52 Connects a Form A normally open contact in Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32 Fe 51 52 parallel by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 S1 gt S2 1 52 or S1 1 51 52 1 52 Connects a Form A normally open contact in parallel by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 51 lt 52 1 52 Connects a Form A normally open contact in parallel by comparing two 32 bit data in the gt 31 52 ail Fe ORF lt comparative condition 1 1 1 lt S2 1 2 or 1 1 1 2 1 2 Cb FP2SHIFPIOSH Available 2 Not available Not available partially 1 This instruction is available
187. 1 33 7 3 4 MEWTOCOL Master Sample Program Use the F145 SEND Data send or F146 RECV Data receive instruction to use the MEWTOCOL master function Sample program Sets the communication port to the remote unit No to 01 and No of processing OL words to 2 in the DT100 and DT101 Clear the WRO to send the write command first _ Clear the write data DT50 and DT51 Set the read data DT80 and DT61 R9013 FO MV H2 3 Fo MV H 1001 101 Note 1 FO MV HO WRO 4 F DMV Drs0 1 HFFFFFFFF DT60 R1 is the transmission condition of write command transmission condition and 31 R2 is the transmission condition of read command R9044 RO R1 2 RO R2 T Compares the write data DT50 and DT51 with the read data DT60 and DT61 before 39 sending the write command and updates the wnte data if they are matched F R1 F61 DCMP 50 R1 R900B 1 gt F36D 1 DTSO Sends a command to write the data DT50 and DT51 of Ihe local unit to the and 55 prt in the unit number 01 from the COM1 port R1 I F145 SEND DT 100 5 km 4 Fo MV H1 wRO 3 70 Sends a command lo read the data and in the unit number 01 from the COM1 _ port and stores the result in Ihe data DT60 and DT61 of the local unit R2 I F148 100 KO Dreo
188. 2 Not available A Not available partially This instruction is available for 32k type 2 This instruction is available for FPX Ver 3 10 or later 3 This instruction is only available for FP X Ver 2 0 or later 17 69 FP2SH FP10SH Ope A Boolean P Description e rand Integer type data processing instructions F270 Maximum 51 Searches the maximum value in the P270 value word 52 D word data table between the S1 and data 16 bit S2 and stores it in the D The address relative to S1 is stored in Dt 1 F271 Maximum DMAX 51 Searches for the maximum value in P271 value double PDMAX 2 D the double word data table between word data 32 the area selected with S1 and S2 bit and stores it in the D The address relative to S1 is stored in D 2 F272 Minimum value 91 Searches for the minimum value in P272 word data 16 2 D the word data table between the area bit selected with 1 and S2 and stores it in the D The address relative to S1 is stored in 0 1 F273 Minimum value 51 Searches for the minimum value in P273 double word 2 D the double word data table between data 32 bit the area selected with S1 and S2 and stores it in the The address relative to S1 is stored in D 2 F275 Total and 51 The total value and the mean value of P275 mean values 2 D the word data w
189. 2 Digital conversion values are KO to 4000 As the resolution is 12 bits upper 4 bits are always O Note3 The pulse I O cassette cannot be used with the FP X Tr type 15 15 15 3 Relays Memory Areas and Constants Number of points and range of memory area available for use Function C14 E C60 Exte js Input 1760 points XO to X109F Turns on or off based on external input External output Note1 Y 1760 points YO to Y109F Externally outputs on or off state Internal relay Relay which turns on or off only within 7 Note z id relay 2048 points LO to L127F Ms relay is a shared relay used for PLC This goes on when the timer reaches the Timer 2 T specified time It corresponds to the timer 1024 points 10 to T1007 C1008 number Counter 9 2 to 1023 P This goes on when the counter C increments It corresponds to the counter number eral relay Xe ye e ere am Roe Spies M pied cpt een nM IM cet te er words 27 Gode for apealing 6 ink relay points as 12285 words 32765 words Data register DTO to DTO to Data memory used in program Data is Note2 DT 0712284 0732764 handled 16 bit units word This is a shared data memory which is used within the PLC link Data is handled ED in 16 bit units one word Timer Counter Data memory for storing a target value of set value area 1024 words SVO to SV1023 a timer and setting value of a counter Note SV Stores by
190. 2 V DC 3 mA from control unit X4 2 4V DC 1 3 mA for control units XO to X3 2 4V DC 1 mA from control unit X4 Approx for control units XO to Input impedance Approx 5 1 kO for control units X4 to X7 Approx 5 6 from control unit X8 For control units XO to X3 135 or less normal input 5 us or less high speed counter pulse catch interrupt input settings For control units X4 to X7 off on Response time 135 us or less normal input 50 us or less 9 high speed counter pulse catch interrupt input settings From control unit X8 C30 C60 only 0 6 ms or less LEDdispay Operating mode indicator LED display EN61131 2 Applicable type TYPES however according to the above specifications Note this specification is applied when the rated input voltage is 24 V DC and the temperature is 25 C Circuit diagram XO to SSRS From Li VU lt Xn z L m v Rz E i n 4 cot X4 to X7 1 5 1 R2 3kQ From X8 R1 5 6kQ R2 1kQ Limitations on number of simultaneous input on points ail Reference lt 2 5 Limitations on Number of Simultaneous Input Output On Points gt 2 2 4 Output Specifications 2 4 1 Relay Ry Type Relay output specifications For C14R C30R C60R control units Description C14 C30 C60 Insulation method Relay insulation Output type 1a output Relay cannot be r
191. 2nd hall For PC link 1 LO for 128 words 2nd hali Ly 255 For link relay For link register e Link areas consist of link relays and link registers and are divided into areas for PC PLC link 0 and PC PLC link 1 and used with those units e The link relay which can be used in an area for either PC PLC link 0 or PC PLC link 1 is maximum 1024 points 64 words and the link register is maximum 128 words Note The PC link 1 can be used to connect with the second PC link WO of the FP2 Multi Communication Unit MCU At that time the link relay number and link register number for the PC link can be the same values as the FP2 from WL64 from LD128 Reference For the information on FP2 MCU Chapter 5 Communication Function PC PLC Link in FP2 Multi Communication Unit Technical Manual ARCT1F396E gt 7 61 Example of allocation The areas for PC PLC link are divided into send areas and receive areas The link relays and link registers are sent from the send area to the receive area of a different PLC Link relays and link registers with the same numbers as those on the transmission side must exist in the receive area on the receiving side For PC PLC link 0 Link relay allocation PP A FP FP2 FP2SH Lint fio 1 Lini 2 Wnt no 3 LATE mo 4 grea System registers No 1 No 4 Range of link relays used 64 64 164 64 o 4 jo 20 120 24 jo Start
192. 3 turns on DT90109 Step ladder process 784 to 799 Monitor using binary displa DT90110 Step ladder process 9 y 800 to 815 Step ladder process Example Step ladder process 0790100 i 0790112 832 to 847 15 11 7 3 0 Process No 1 Executing 0 Not executing DT90113 Step ladder process 848 to 863 DT90114 Step ladder process A programming tool software can be used to 864 to 879 write data Step ladder process iba 880 to 895 Step ladder process 896 to 911 Step ladder process 912 to 927 Step ladder process adidas 928 to 943 Step ladder process 944 to 959 Step ladder process 960 to 975 Step ladder process DT90121 976 to 991 Step ladder process DT90122 992 to 999 higher byte is not used 17 37 DT90124 DT90125 DT90126 DT90127 to DT90139 17 38 Notusd ss instruction end code instruction end code Forced ON OFF operating station display MEWNET WO PC PLC link 0 status MEWNET WO PC PLC link 1 status MEWNET WO PC PLC link 0 status FP X A Available N A Not available m Read Writ Description ing ing For details refer to Programming Manual F145 and F146 For details refer to Programming Manual F145 and F146 lt gt lt gt N A N A A 2 lt gt HE Used by the system N A A N A The number of times the receiving operation is performed The current
193. 320 to Y323 Y340 to Y343 FPO E8YT P Output 8 points Y300 to Y307 Y320 to Y327 Y340 to Y347 FPO FPO E8YR Expansion unit FPO E16X Input 16 points X300 to X30F X320 to X32F X340 to X34F FPO E16R Input 8 points X300 to X307 X320 to X327 X340 to X347 FPO E16T P Output 8 points Y300 to Y307 Y320 to Y327 Y340 to Y347 FPO E16YT P Output 16 points Y300 to Y30F Y320 to Y32F Y340 to Y34F Input 16 points X300 to X30F X320 to X32F X340 to X34F FPO E32T P Output 16 points Y300 to Y3OF Y320 to Y32F Y340 to Y34F Input 16 points WX30 WX32 WX34 CHO X300 to X30F X320 to X32F X340 to X34F 21 FPO analog I O unit CH1 X310 to X31F X330 to X33F X350 to X35F WY30 WY32 WY34 conversion unit FPO TCA CHO 2 4 6 X300 to X30F X320 to X32F X340 to X34F couple unit CH1 3 5 7 X310 to X31F X330 to X33F X350 to X35F Input 16 points WX2 WX4 WX6 RTD unit CH1 3 5 S to X3F to X5F S to X7F eem an run ner X300 to X30F X320 to X32F X340 to X34F conversion unit FPO AO04I CHO 2 Y300 to Y30F Y320 to Y32F Y340 to Y34F CH1 3 Y310 to Y31F Y330 to Y33F Y350 to Y35F FPO FPO IOL Input 32 points X300 to X31F X320 to X33F X340 to X35F I O link unit Output 32 points Y300 to Y31F Y320 to Y33F Y340 to Y35F e he data for the each channels of FPO A D conversion unit FPO A80 FPO thermocouple unit FPO TCA FPO TC8 FPO RTD unit FPO RTD6 and FPO D A conversion
194. 4 if the home return is executed with the deviation counter clear for the pulse output CH1 set the Y5 to the normal output by the system register e f the home return is executed set the home input by the system register 401 If the home return is executed without the setting an operation error occurs C30 C60 Tr type Pulse High speed Medium speed Signal PULSE Ccw SIGN Y B 5 Y Deviation counter clear output Y8 Y9 Home input LKB RR Note The X4 X5 X6 and X of the home input are also used for the input of the high speed counter Use them only for either one signal Note e f the home return is executed set the home input by the system register 401 If the home return is executed without the setting an operation error occurs Restrictions on the execution of related instructions F166 to F175 e f an instruction related to the high speed counter F166 to F175 is executed the control flag special internal relay R9110 to R911D corresponding to the channel used turns on e Please be aware that the control flag in progress may change while a scan is being carried out To prevent multiple read access to this special internal relay it is recommended to generate a copy of it at the beginning of the program e When the control flag for a channel turns on another instruction using that same channel cannot be executed 9 9 9 2 3 Booting Time The booting time is the time sp
195. 5 H i T JOG start ve i 79 amp tar m g a TD JOG start x H boontact contact b contact Stepping motor Moving table 1 side side Stopping motor driver Output terminal Common Pulse output Yo H Q3 CWinput Common Hu Pulse output CCVY Y1 CCW input AA i me gt itf 8 4 2 VDO Ri Ri Power R2 2 Niobe i supply Note When the stepping motor input is 5 V optical coupler type connect a 2 1 2 W resistor with the R1 and a 2 1 2 W to 470 2 W resistor with the R2 Table of allocation Description Pulse output CW Overrunning signal R10 _ Positioning in progress X4 Hf _ Positioning operation stat X8 Near home sensor R12 _ Positioning done pulse 9 27 9 4 6 Positioning Control Instruction F171 Trapezoidal e This instruction automatically performs trapezoidal control according to the specified data table SEM H F1 H1100 DT100 K500 01102 Fi DMV K5000 DT104 21 K300 07106 Fi K10000 DT108 F1 DMV DT410 F171 SPDH DT100 e Positioning data table Control code Initial speed Max speed 5000 Hz 106 Acceleration 300 ms DT107 deceleration time Pulses are generated irom output
196. 5 mA or less between input and protective earth terminals diio uod SUPP 20 000 hours at 55 Guaranteed life Fuse Built in Cannot be replaced Insulation system Transformer insulation Terminal screw M3 Service Power Supply for Input Output AC power supply type only Specifications Rated output voltage 24 V DC Voltage regulation range 21 6 to 26 4 V DC Rated output current 0 4 A Overcurrent protection Available function Terminal screw M3 Note This is a function to protect overcurrent temporarily If a current load that is out of the specifications is connected it may lead to damages DC Power Supply Specifications Rated voltage 24 V DC Voltage regulation range 20 4 to 28 8 V DC Inrush current 12 A or less at 25 C Momentary power off time 10 ms Internal power supply part Guaranteed life 20 000 hours at 55 C Fuse Built in Cannot be replaced Insulation system Transformer insulation Terminal screw M3 3 4 3 2 3 Input and output specifications Input specifications Et6 X E30 J JJ Insulation method Optical coupler Rated input voltage 24 V DC Operating voltage range 21 6 to 26 4 V DC Rated input current Approx 4 3 mA 8 points common 16 points common Input points per common Either the positive or negative of input power supply can be connected to common terminal EN61131 2Applicable ty
197. 55055058 ERO XR OCD od A Available N A Not available Restrictions on control unit Cassette Cassette Expansion Type of add on cassette mounting mounting connector part 1 part 2 part Communication cassette AFPX COM2 A _ Communication cassette AFPX COMS A _ ricalon FPX Communication cassette AFPXCOMA A _ T Z gt gt Input cassete AFPXANB A Analog output cassette AFPXDA2 A FPXAnsglOcassete a a roms FP XThemocouplecasselo AFPXTC2 A a aon FP XRTDcassette ___ AFPXRTD2 a _ cassette Output cassete AFPXTRB a _ Output cassette AFPXTROP a a _ FPXIOcasele AFPXIMTS _ 1 Only one FP X master memory cassette can be installed If 2 units are installed E26 user ROM error will occur 2 One application cassette can be installed in either cassette mounting part 1 or 2 of C30 C60 3 As only one communication cassette can be installed in the cassette mounting part 1 it should be installed on the application cassette if the application cassette is installed It cannot be installed in the cassette mounting part 2 4 The add on cassette cannot be installed in the expansion connector part of C60 it does not work 5 The pulse I O cassette cannot be installed on the FP X Tr type Th
198. 64 2805 metor Lm 10 2 PWM output function Pulse I O cassette When you increase the pulse width By using the exclusive instruction the PWM output 7 E function enables a pulse output of the desired duty ratio Heating increases When you decrease it We 8 5 10 1 3 Performance of Pulse I O Function Healing decreases e of Channel High speed counter Pulse output Built in Control unit Mb Dissert None 2 phase 4 channels Vida siii 2 Max 2 channels Pulse I O cassette p channels AEE TESI Single phase 2 channels or Note1 When using C14 1 channel Note When one unit is added for C14 and 2 units are added for C30 and C60 Counting range e K 2 147 483 648 to K 2 147 483 647 Coded 32 bit binary e he built in high speed counter is a ring counter Consequently if the counted value exceeds the maximum value it returns to the minimum value Similarly if the counted value drops below the minimum value it goes back to the maximum value and continues counting from there pm mm Y value 2 147 483 647 214 48s 646 F214 483 5645 value ME Note When the linear interpolation instruction F175 is used the value for the amount of travel should be set so that it is within the range indicated below 8 388 608 to 48 388 607 Coded 24 bit binary 10 3 10 2 Function Specific
199. 9 are cleared to O In CH1 when X7 turns on deceleration begins and when X5 turns on home return is completed After the return to home is completed the elapsed value areas DT90352 and DT90353 are cleared to O When the operations in both CHs is completed the return to home completes OV i24 v nC sl FP Tr ly pin Home ratum start Pulse output CW m Te 7 3 Ls Home input Pulse oudpad cnp SUL sj Near home input Mator driver input Near home input side side Matar Sy puni xs senso home sensor ce Side Matar T mot 55 Horne amp engor Near home sangar 9 49 0 RB1IC R44 RAD A 9 m 8 AR lt 78110 Es Eas T Pf dala labe H9 1 Contra code ap 200 Hz Bra Fit we weet mee clear ingut used Control code rin DT200 Fin spon DT200 Ki Tha rima Wee Py DT 20 ip ono and pas Pulte cepa Ahi oa tat heen cm m mci m m s Fulps instractb n Home metum The mbie aded m waea and AMIG Peal pr R4 Feat 1 R44 R43 1 CHT hom
200. 9112 DT90309 DT90311 One input ge X4 DT90316 DT90318 Medium spee X6 DT90324 DT90326 inpu 116 DT90325 0790327 100 ps Related instructions FO MV High speed counter control F1 DMV Read write of elapsed value of high speed counter F166 HC15 Target value match on F167 CH1R Target value match off Incremental DT90316 DT90318 D tal Medium speed Note1 These values are available only when the conditions of each item such as counting method or No of channels are executed These values are not available if executing the HSC match ON OFF instruction other pulse I O process simultaneously or executing the interrupt program 9 4 Pulse output function Pulse output when using CPU output Max Con Elapsed output trol value frequency Note2 flag area Channel No R911C DT90348 DT90350 1CH DT90349 0190351 100kHz R911D DT90352 DT90354 2CH DT90353 DT90355 100kHz DT90356 DT90358 didus DT90357 DT90359 DT90360 DT90362 DT90361 0790363 DT90348 0790350 Linear DT90353 DT90355 interpolation f DT90356 DT90358 m DT90361 DT90363 Related instructions FO MV high speed counter control F1 DMV Read write of elapsed value of high speed counter F171 SPDH trapezoidal control home return F172 PLSH JOG operation F174 SPOH Data table control F175 SPSH Linear interpolation control Note1 For C14 Y4 or Y5 For C30 C60 Y8 or Y9 Note2 These values ar
201. 96 x 13 2x 15 4 13ms 0 96 400 0 67 5 407 ms Note The default value for the addition waiting time is 400 ms Given the above conditions the maximum value for the transmission time T of one cycle will be T 11 82 x 15 4 13 5 407 593 43 ms Calculation example 4 When all stations have been added to an 8 unit link the largest station number is 8 relays and register have been evenly allocated and the scan time for each PLC is 5 ms 0 096 Each Pem 23 8 16 x 4 119 bytes Tpc Ttx x Pem 0 096 x 119 11 43 ms Each 5 11 43 16 43 Tit 0 096 13 2x 8 2 79 ms Given the above conditions the maximum value for the transmission time T of one cycle will be T max 16 43 x 8 2 79 5 139 23 ms Calculation example 5 When all stations have been added to a 2 unit link the largest station number is 2 relays and registers have been evenly allocated and the scan time for each PLC is 5 ms 0 096 Each Pem 23 32 64 x 4 407 bytes Tpc Ttx x Pcm 0 096 x 407 39 072 ms Each Ts 5 39 072 44 072 Tit 0 096 x 13 2 x 2 1 632 ms Given the above conditions the maximum value for the transmission time T of one cycle will be T max 44 072 x 2 1 632 5 94 776 ms Calculation example 6 When all stations have been added to a 2 unit link the largest station number is 2 32 relays and 2 register words have been evenly alloca
202. 9600 bps 19200 bps 38400 bps 5 600 bps 115200 bps Starting address for received buffer of 2048 0 to 32764 general serial data communication mode Buffer capacity setting for data received of general 2048 0 to 2048 serial data communication mode Note1 The communication format in a PC PLC link is fixed at the following settings the data length is 8 bits odd parity stop bit is 1 The communication speed baud rate is fixed at 115200 bps Note2 The USB port for C30 and C60 can be selected by the system register setting The USB port has been selected for the COM2 port of C30 and C60 as default setting The USB port is 115 2 kbps despite of the baud rate setting No 415 The setting for No 412 must be changed to communication cassette for using the COM2 port of the communication cassette The COM2 port of the USB port and the communication cassette cannot be used at the same time 17 14 Default Description value p Controller input time constant setting 1 to Controller input time constant setting 1 X4 to X7 Controller input time Cont constant setting 2 ller X8 to XB Controller input time time constant setting 2 XC to XF Controller input time s t constant setting 3 tings X10 to X13 Note1 Controller input time constant setting 3 X14 to X17 Controller input time constant setting 4 X18 to X1B Controller input time constant setting 4 X1C to X1F Note1 These settings are available fo
203. Action View Help Hg _ MATSLISHI EGP21 C Computer we Disk drives Display adapters J DVD CD ROM drives 2 Floppy disk controllers Floppy disk drives c IDE controllers m Keyboards z Mice and other pointing devices Monitors EB Network adapters i Bh Other devices a 2101 USB to UART Bridge Controller E Ports COM amp LET V Sound video and game controllers Y System devices Universal Serial Bus controllers Reinstallation of the USB driver Right click CP210X USB to UART Bridge Controller and select Delete to delete the driver Reinserting the USB cable displays the window for the installation of the USB driver Reinstall the USB driver de Reference 6 3 6 Installation of USB Driver 6 21 6 3 10 Restrictions on USB Communication There are restrictions on the USB communication e A personal computer having the USB and with the OS supporting the USB Windows 98 Second Edition Windows amp Me Windows 2000 Windows amp XP to connect the FP X using the USB e The FP X connected to the USB is recognized by the PC as that is connected through the COM port e The COM port No of the COM port allocated for the USB is fixed unless you change the number e The baud rate when using the USB is 115200 bps e The USB port is allocated to the COM2 port and the functions of the communication cassette are restricted as b
204. C PLC link mode Turns on when Unit No 16 is communicating properly in PC PLC link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC PLC link mode WR909 E R9092 Turns on when Unit No 3 is in the RUN mode Turns off when Unit No 3 is the PROG mode Turns off when Unit No 1 is in the PROG mode Turns off when Unit No 2 is in the PROG mode Turns off when Unit No 5 is in the PROG mode R9094 R9095 Turns on when Unit No 6 is in the RUN mode Turns off when Unit No 6 is in the PROG mode R9096 Unit Turns on when Unit No 7 is in the RUN mode No 7 Turns off when Unit No 7 is in the PROG mode R9093 Turns on when Unit No 4 is in the RUN mode Turns off when Unit No 4 is in the PROG mode R9097 MEWNET WO Turns on when Unit No 8 is in the RUN mode PC PLC link Turns off when Unit No 8 is the PROG mode R9098 1 operation mode relay Turns on when Unit No 5 is in the RUN mode Turns off when Unit No 9 is in the PROG mode R9099 Turns on when Unit No 10 is in the RUN mode Turns off when Unit No 10 is in the PROG mode R909A Turns on when Unit No 11 is in the RUN mode Turns off when Unit No 11 is in the PROG mode R909B Turns on when Unit No 12 is in the RUN mode Turns off when Unit No 12 is in the PROG mode E or Turns on when Unit No 14 is in the RUN mode Turns off when Unit No 14 is in the PROG mode Turns on when
205. CDA 1 2 D Converts the four digits of BCD data PBCDA specified by 1 and S2 to ASCII code and stores it in D 7 Example 1234 32 31 34 33 2143 ABCD 1 2 D Converts the ASCII code specified by S1 PABCD and S2 to four digits of BCD data and stores it in D Example H 34 33 32 31 H3412 432 1 BINA 1 S2 D Converts the 16 bits of binary data PBINA specified by S1 to ASCII code and stores it in D 7 area of S2 bytes 001 Available 2 Not available Not available partially compare P67 F68 P68 o N P70 F71 P71 Hexadecima data gt ASCII code F72 P72 ASCII code Hexadeci mal data F73 P73 4 digit BCD data gt ASCII code F74 P74 ASCII code 4 digit BCD data F75 P75 16 bit binary data gt ASCII code N e 17 59 FP2SH FP10SH Ope A Boolean P Description gt rand ABIN S1 S2 Converts the ASCII code specified by PABIN D S1 and S2 to 16 bits of binary data and stores it in D 7 001 DBIA 1 S2 Converts the 32 bits of binary data 1 to ASCII code and stores it in D area of S2 bytes 1 S2 Converts the ASCII code specified by lt lt lt S1 and S2 to 32 bits of binary data 11 and stores it in 0 1 D Converts the 16 bits of binary data specified by S to four digits of BCD 5 data and stores it in D Example K100
206. Elapsed value of high speed 1000 counter 01000 3000 anoo 10000 of travel Execution condilion R10 RS11C Rott Note When the execution condition R10 of the F174 SPOH instruction goes on the high speed counter control flag R811C 99110 goes on When the elapsed value reaches 10000 and pulse output stops R811C R9110 goes off 10 42 1 Control code lt H constant Upper word LILILILILILILIL Fixed E Cuty on width 0 Duty 1 2 5095 1 Duty 1 4 25 Ia Frequency range 0 1 5 Hz to 9 8 kHz 1 48 Hz to 100 kHz 2 191 Hz to 100 kHz E Operation mode Incremental Specifies the amount of travel number of pulses 1 Absolute Specifies the target value absolute value E Output method CW Incremental counting COW Decremental counting Pulse and direction forward off Incremental counting Pulse and direction reverse on Decremental counting Pulse and direction forward on Incrementa counting Pulse and direction reverse off Decremental counting wna 2 Freqency Hz lt K constant Frequency range 0 1 5 Hz to 9 8 kHz K1 to K9800 unit Hz Max error near 9 8 kHz approx 0 9 kHz Set to specify 1 5 Hz 1 48 Hz to 100 kHz K48 to K100000 unit Hz Max error near 100 kHz approx 3 kHz 2 191 Hz to 100 kHz K48 to K100000 unit Hz Max error near 100 kHz approx 0 8 kHz Set the frequency 1 which
207. FPO Expansion Unit Allocation The FP X expansion unit is installed on the right side of the FP X control unit I O numbers when installed as the first expansion unit Type of expansion unit Number of allocation number Input 8 points X300 to X307 FP X E16 expansion unit Output 8 points V300 to Y307 Input 16 points X300 to X30F FP X E30 expansion unit Output 14 points SOCIETATE Note E16R cannot be connected on the right side of E16R 15 2 3 FPO Expansion Unit Allocation Only one expansion FPO adapter can be connected at the last position of the FP X expansion bus The I O allocation varies depending on the installation location of the expansion FPO adapter Note The ranges of the I O numbers which are actually used differ depending on the units 15 13 l O numbers when installed as the first expansion unit I O do not need to be set as I O allocation is performed automatically when an expansion unit is added The I O allocation of expansion unit is determined by the installation location Hundred s digit Carry the digit of hundreds place one by one since the second expansion unit Number of Expansion Expansion Expansion yP peryogi MM 1 prem 2 pore 3 FPOEBX E8X Input Input B points points to X307 to X307 XS2010X827 to X327 x340 to X347 to X347 SOEUR Input 4 points X300 to X303 X320 to X323 X340 to X343 Output 4 points Y300 to Y303 Y
208. FPX C30PD AFPX C60PD al which ma irl neously an BE Ambient temperabue C30F Humber of 1g pomis CTT which 11 simulta ag ES Ambient temper ture Humber al 4x ports commen which are 18 sancti ar an BS Ambient l C C14PD ol poss common which ara 5 neously an AN 4 4 5 Ambient temperature Humber 4 ponis per Common which are 11 simulta 13 51 55 AMG temperature i CGOFPD Humber al 45 part commen which are ifr on 44 BS Ambient pirau 1 Configuration Hunni pants per common 2 A21 are sande 3 A21 A21 necem on DA2 DA2 nT DA2 A21 Ambient temperature C C30P Number of points per 14 common 12 P ux cau a which are 4 simulta i neously on 48 55 Ambient temperature C Humber al aa part per commen which are 16 i Metush on a6 LIA bot ra ltd iw Mumbar ol points per Commmun which are samultae d necush on d Ambient temperature C 30 Humber of 14 per common 1 which F Simna ne ushy SI 55 Ambient bemperalure CJ C60PD Num
209. FPX COM5 TCP P Select TCP or UDP select Communicati Communication mode of AFPX COM5 i 2 Computer link on mode Select Computer link or General communication Connection mode of AFPX COM5 ion ode Select Client mode or Server mode When selecting Computer link for Communication mode Client mode cannot be selected Baud tate Baud rate for communicating with the COM1 port of FP X Note3 Change the baud rate according to the baud rate for the COM Sens COM port of FP X oelect 9600 bps or 115200 bps Transmi It is valid when selecting UDP in the communication protocol SSi Method for transmitting data to partner devices UNICAST m 5 Select UNICAST BROADCAST ource port number that AFPX COM5 opens N oetting range 1025 to 32767 If AFPX COM5 not communicate with a destination device during this setting time seconds in the state that connection is Time out established connection will be cut Setting range 0 to 1800 s When 0 is set the connection will S not be cut IP Set an IP address other than 0 0 0 0 and 255 255 255 255 Setting range 1025 to 32767 Soure nor Source port number of a destination device No Setting range 0 1025 to 32767 When 0 is set optional m on thod If AFPX COM5 not communicate with a destination device during this setting time seconds in the state that connection is Time out established connection will be
210. GR Ladder symbol mode Boolean mode Rewrite procedure Operation of each instruction OT KP High level instructions MC MCE CALL SUB RET INT IRET Maximum of 128 steps Changes are performed by block When PG conversion is executed online the program will be rewritten Block b If an instruction written in block a is deleted in block b the condition before the rewrite will be held e If an instruction written in block a is deleted in block b the condition before the rewrite will be held e Set values specified by K constants in TM CT instructions are preset in all of the corresponding SV s in the program Elapsed values EV do not change If an instruction written in block a is deleted in block b the condition before the rewrite will be held When writing MC MCE instructions be sure to write the instructions as a pair A subroutine is a program appearing between SUBn and RET instructions Be sure to write it to an address which follows the ED instruction An interrupt program is an program appearing between INTn and IRET instructions Be sure to write it to an address which follows the ED instruction Rewriting performed by step Caution is required as rewriting takes place simultaneously with the change If an instruction written in block a is deleted in block b the condition before the rewrite will be held Y contact relays which are on bill
211. H12 DT90057 setting day of the HOO to HOS week As a day of the week is not automatically set on FPWIN GR fix what day is set to 00 and set each value for 00 to 06 17 33 DT90058 Real Time Clock time setting and 30 seconds correction register FP X A Available N A Not available d occ RR The Real Time Clock is adjusted as follows When setting the Real Time Clock by program By setting the highest bit of DT90058 to 1 the time becomes that written to DT90054 to DT9005 by FO MV instruction After the time is set DT90058 is cleared to 0 Cannot be performed with any instruction other than FO MV instruction Example Set the time to 12 00 00 on the 5th day when the XO turns on IDF FO MV H 0 0 90054 Puts O minutes Inputs 12th FO MV H 512 DT90055 12m FO MV H8000 0790058 Sets the time Note If the values of DT90054 to DT90057 are changed with the programming tool software the time will be set when the new values are written Therefore it is unnecessary to write to DT90058 When the correcting times less than 30 seconds By setting the lowest bit of DT90058 to 1 the value will be moved up or down and become exactly 0 seconds After the correction is completed 0790058 is cleared to 0 Example Correct to O seconds with on xO _ ory FO MV H 4 DT90058 Correct to seconds At the time of correction if between 0 and 29 second
212. Hz with 2 chs Pulse I O cassette cannot be installed installed 80 kHz each PWM 1 5 Hz to 41 7 kHz 1000 resolution 12 5 kHz or less 100 resolution over 12 5 kHz 14 points Input of main unit 8 points XO to X7 Pulse I O cassette points x 2 Periodical interrupt 0 5 ms to 30 s Pulse catch input interrupt input 8 points Input of main unit 8 points XO to X7 Potentiometer Volume C14 C30 2 points resolution 10 bits KO to K1000 input C60 4 points resolution 10 bits KO to K1000 Constant scan Available Available year month day hour minute second and day of week However this Realtime clock can only be used when AFPX MRTC and an optional battery has been installed Note5 Backup by F 12 Flash i Data register 32765 words ROM P13 instructions Automatic backup Counter 16 points C1008 to C 1023 9 internal relay 128 points WR248 to when power is cut WR255 data register 55 words off C14 DT12230 to DT12284 C30 C60 DT32710 to DT32764 Batterv backu Memory that is set as hold area at system register However only when an optional battery has been installed When AFPX is not installed backup Note6 C14 3 3 years or more C30 C 60 2 7 years or more Battery Note8 C14 2 1 years or more C30 C60 1 8 years more Note More than 2 batteries can be installed In that case the battery life is the value multiplied by the N
213. Input ranae Thermocouple type 50 0 to 500 0 P 9 Thermocouple type J 50 0 to 500 0 In normal condition K 500 to K5000 Digital value When exceeding rated range K 501 K5001 or K8000 When wire is broken K8000 When data is getting ready K8001 0 2 The indication is 0 1 by the software averaging procedure 200 ms 2 channels 0 5 F S or less Cold junction error 1 5 344 Transformer insulation isolation IC insulation Note1 When the wire of thermocouple is broken the digital value will change to K8000 within 70 seconds Practice in the ladder program a process for avoiding a risk would be resulting from a broken wire and exchange the thermocouple Note2 From the Power on to the converted data Ready the digital value will be K8001 Create a ladder program not to use the data obtained during that period Terminal layout CHO Thermocouple input 29 Thermocouple input CH1 Thermocouple input tee Thermocouple input p Used by the system NC NC Do not connect NC T NC E Wa Channel 0 EIAS o BE NC Connection method Keep the space more than 100 mm between the input line and the power line high voltage line It is recommended to ground the unit using the shielded compensating wire 8 18 Range setting switch Select the thermocouple type K or J with the switch at the back The CHO and CH1 will be the same
214. L D2 D1 and D2 to the left Right shift of one WBSR D1 Shifts the one digit of the areas by me hexadecimal digit 4 D1 and D2 to the right bit F113 Left shift of one WBSL D1 Shifts the one digit of the areas by bit Available 2 Not available A Not available partially 17 61 FP2SH FP10SH Boolean Description Mb inde P115 PFIFT defined in the buffer Data read from The oldest data beginning from S NM ao SSE and stored in F117 Data write into FIFW 5 The data of S is written to the buffer 5 P117 FIFO buffer PFIFW starting from Basic function instructions F118 UP DOWN counter UDC S D Counts up or down from the value ere mmm e value in cre register D2 the area between D1 and D2 as 5 the register Bm e E rotate PROR the right P121 rotate PROL the left 16 bit data right RCR Rotates the n bits in 17 bit area rotate with carry PRCR consisting of D plus the carry flag flag R9009 data R9009 data to the right F123 16 bit data left RCL Rotates the n bits in 17 bit area P123 rotate with carry PRCL consisting of D plus the carry flag 5 flag R9009 data R9009 data to the left F125 32 bit data right DROR D Rotates the number of bits specified P125 rotate PDROR by n of the double words data 32 bits specified by D 1 D to the right 32 bi
215. LC on the other end 01 RD6400C8006F is returned from the FP series PLC on the other end as the response when the program is executed The received data is stored in the data registers as shown below DT DT3 DT2 DT1 DTO o Dose iia Dyis Lower byla Upper byla Lowe bhie LUpperDyl Lowe bybe Upoe 65e tele H30 H30 H30 H25 0 0 4 6 D 1 0 Velie of DITO m Eie PL on Ihe olher end DT DT6 M Mur m_i maaa trig Lo Dye Lippe bie Lge ibis bee Lower Evie 5 ai Value of OTi in the PLC on the other and Extracting the data register values from the PLC on the other end In the program the data segment of the response from the PLC on the other end is converted to hexadecimal data using the F72 AHEX hexadecimal ASCII hexadecimal data conversion instruction and stored in DT50 and DT51 only if the character string 1 stored in DT1 is detected as a comparison instruction DTG DTS DT4 DT3 S a Lippe Evy tee nte iry Pin Ere inr prot Lippen Loo mg H30 H30 H34 0 0 8 10 0 0 4 a A _ Value OF in Ine PLC on ihe other and Of a ihe PLC an ma other and HEX conversion instruction F 72 Hexadecimal ASCII DT51 DT50 Pn Bowl eua biw ie Lever 0
216. Lower byte ters4andas 0790200 1 No 2 or 10 DT90243 DT90227 Unit Station ter 46 47 Setling contents ion of system register DT90228 40 42 44 and 46 PC PLC m 2 Setting contents of system DT90229 link register 41 43 45 and 47 Unit A N A DT90230 station e When the system register 46 in the home No 3 or 11 ter 44 and 45 unit is in the standard setting the values in DT90231 System regis the home unit are copied in the system ter 46 and 47 registers 46 and 47 DT90232 System regis When the system register 46 in the home PC PLC ter 40 and 41 unit is in the reverse setting the registers DT90233 d System regis 40 to 45 and 47 corresponding to the home Unit ter 42 and 43 unit mentioned in the left column will be System regis changed to 50 to 55 and 57 and the D130233 Map system register 46 will be set as it is Son Svstem regis Also the system registers 40 to 45 DT90235 7 46 47 corresponding to other units will be System regis Changed to the values which the received ter 40 and 41 values are corrected and the registers 46 PC PLC lt and 57 in the home unit are set for the DT90237 System regis gus ter 42 and 43 registers 46 and 47 DT90238 station No 5 or 13 DT90239 ter 46 and 47 17 40 FP X A Available N A Not available o ERE 54 ing Ing System regis ter 40 and 41 PC PLC System reg
217. N A Not available ing ing area for input or EXC EI DT90300 apsed Lower words words X0 X1 of the main unit The target value is set when T Note orac instructions F166 HC1S DT90303 Higher words F167 HC1R are executed DT90304 Elapsed Lower words AEA the main unit HSC CH1 The target value is set when Note DT90306 Target Lower words A A 9 instructions 166 HC1S and 0190307 Higher words F167 HC1R are executed Counting area for input X2 or A DT90308 Elapsed Lower words A A P ibd X2 X3 of the main unit HSC CH2 The target value is set when Note DT90310 Target Lower words A A 9 instructions F166 HC1S and OA jane DT90311 Higher words F167 HC1R are executed DT90312 Elapsed Lower words E TOP In puces ror the main unit value DT90313 area Higher words HSC CH3 The target value is set when Note DT90314 Target Lower words A A 9 instructions F166 HC1S and OA fame DT90315 Higher words F167 HC1R are executed Counting area for input X4 or A av DT9031 Elapsed L r wor A A P PAO X4 X5 of the main unit DT90317 Higher words HSC CH4 The target value is set when Note DT90318 Target L A JA 90318 9 instructions F166 HC1S fame F167 HC1R are executed Note Writing in the elapsed value area is available by F1 DMV instruction o
218. Ne data e Tha type af command thal was read setings and dala an error occured and required in order fo the command could not puer ite the comand be processed succosa fully the content of fee erm The command and data ara 7 to The PLC wiih the A airi specified unii marmber Shida cael pet eaten processed by iha computer 9 computer retri amp ves ihe data thet was sent Response message x1 Check Temi 7851 code nator 1 22 Format of command and response Command message All command related items should be noted in the text segment The unit number must be specified before sending the command DHeader 2 Unit na of destination 01 to 99 decimal i Text Content depends on type of command 4 Check code BCC hexadecimal 5 Terminator Two One 4 ge degit Target that reads the value internal relay R1 specified item 5 specifies that only 1 point should be read Command name e g read contact area Command code Indicates that this is a command 1 Header start code Commands must always have a ASCII code H25 or a lt ASCII code H3C at the beginning of a message 2 Unit number The unit number of the PLC to which you want to send the command must be specified In 1 1 communication the unit number 01 ASCII code H3031 should be specified The unit No of the PLC is specified by the system register 3
219. No master F146 RECV Read Coil Status Read Y and R Coils F146 RECV Read Input Status Read X Input F146 RECV Read Holding Registers Read DT F146 RECV Read Input Registers Read WL and LD and Rs Words Cannot be issued Mask Write 4X Register Write DT Mask Cannot be issued Read Write 4X Registers Read Write DT Table for MODBUS reference No and FP X device No MODBUS reference No X X X X X X X X OX __ ES Bx F145 SEND 06 Preset Single Register WrteDT1Word 4X 0 Cannot be issued 08 Diagnostics LoopbackTest _ x 4 0 1 _ 4 3 F145 SEND Force Single Coil Write Single Y and 4 4 Holding register 400001 432765 0000 7FFC DTO DT32764 OPER 300001 300128 0000 007F WLO WL127 lth 302001 302256 07D0 08CF LDO LD255 Note For C14 MODBUS reference No 400001 411285 data on BUS hexadecimal 0000 2FFC FP X device No DTO DT12784 Setting using FPWIN GR 1 Change the display to the Online monitor by selecting Online Edit Mode under Online in the menu bar or pressing CTRL and F2 keys at the same time 2 Select Options in the menu bar and then select PLC Configuration Click COM Port There are separate tabs for setting the COM1 and COM2 7 77 Dialog box of MODBUS RTU setting PLG GConfie amp uration Untitlel Hold Nan hold 1 Noat Ma
220. No not this time Click Next to continue Note This display is not be shown with Windows XP SP1 6 12 T The next message is shown Select Install the software automatically and click Next Eau Hes Hardware Wizard Welcome to tha Found Naw Hardware Wizard end hele our nett sod ewe ing CPZTUs Ls lo WARI Birdie Lec Pcs 50 T gow hasderarer Game valh n CD oe disk inzerl it rine f heit do rad wand hes wand 1 da 8 Install the abv automannaly Ficcmesended C Install bcm a let or specie lneabon denen Chek Hast b continue 8 The installation of the USB driver starts Although an alert for the Windows logo testing is indicated during the installation click Continue Anyway to continue the installation Found New Hardware Wizard Please wait while the wizard searches Hardware Installation A The software you are installing for this hardware CP210x USB to UART Bridge Controller has not passed Windows Logo testing to verify its compatibility with Windows Tell me why this testing is important Continuing your installation of this software may impair or destabilize the correct operation of your system either immediately or in the future Microsoft strongly recommends that you stop this installation now and contact the hardware vendor for software that has passed Windows Logo testing Continue Anyway 9 The next message is shown and the ins
221. No communication with Ethernet port of Ethernet 1 channel type RS232C AFPX COM5 Procedure 1 Check if the LAN cable is securely connected to each unit or a PC When using a HUB for the connection check if the power supply of the HUB is on Procedure 2 Check if the LINK ACT LED lights up When the LED is off the LAN cable is not connected correctly Procedure 3 Check the IP addresses and the destination Procedure 4 Check if the communication format and baud rate for the COM1 port of the FP X matches the configuration setting of the 5 Condition The ERR LED of Ethernet 1 channel type RS232C is flashing Procedure 1 Check the status with the Configurator WD f the IP duplicate error is indicated for the status the IP address may be duplicate on the network Specify an IP address that is not duplicate f the DHCP error is indicated for the status getting IP from the DHCP server has been failed Check if there is no problem on the network system 13 11 13 12 Chapter 14 Precautions During Programming 14 1 Use of Duplicated Output 14 1 1 Duplicated Output What is duplicated output e Duplicated output refers to repeatedly specifying the same output in a sequence program e f the same output is specified for the OT and KP instructions it is considered to be duplicated output Even if the same output is used for multiple instructions such as the SET RST instruction or high
222. Not available partially 1 This instruction is available for FP e Ver 1 21 or later and FPO V2 1 or later F327 P327 F328 P328 17 72 FP2SH FP10SH z Boolean OPE Description c rand FIX S D Converts real number data specified PFIX by S 1 S to the 16 bit integer data with sign rounding the first decimal point down and the converted data 4 is stored in DFIX D Converts real number data specified PDFIX by S 1 S to the 32 bit integer data with sign rounding the first decimal point down and the converted data 4 is stored in D 1 D ROFF D Converts real number data specified PROFF by S 1 S to the 16 bit integer data with sign rounding the first decimal point off and the converted data is 4 stored in DROFF D Converts real number data specified PDROFF by S 1 S to the 32 bit integer data with sign rounding the first decimal point off and the converted data is 4 stored in D 1 D D The decimal part of the real number data specified in 5 1 S is rounded down and the result is stored in 4 D 1 D D type data round ding the first D D D Floating point type data to 16 bit integer con version rounding the first decimal point down to integer Floating point type data to 32 bit integer con version rounding the first decimal point down to integer Floating point type data to 16 bit integer con version rounding the first decimal p
223. P2SH mo 1 Lini m 2 Umi n 3 Unis no d Send ares System registers Setting for various units No 1 No 2 No 3 No 4 Range of link registers used Starting No for link register transmission 55 Link register transmission size 140 40 as jo Note No 51 range of link registers used must be set to the same range for all the units When link areas are allocated as shown above the No 1 send area can be sent to the No 2 No 3 and No 4 receive areas Also the No 1 receive area can receive data from the No 2 and No 3 send areas No 4 is allocated as a receive area only and can receive data from No 1 No 2 and No 3 but cannot transmit it to other stations Note The PC link 1 can be used to connect with the second PC link WO of the FP2 Multi Communication Unit MCU At that time the link relay number and link register number for the PC link can be the same values as the FP2 from WL64 from 12128 Reference For the information on FP2 MCU Chapter 5 Communication Function PC PLC Link in FP2 Multi Communication Unit Technical Manual ARCT1F396E gt 7 63 Partial use of link areas In the link areas available for PC PLC link link relays with a total of 1024 points 64 words and link registers with a total of 128 words can be used This does not mean however that it is necessary to reserve the entire area Parts of the area which have not been r
224. PX COM3 Procedure 1 Check to make sure the transmission cables have been securely connected between the two terminals and two terminals of the units and that the final unit has been correctly connected Procedure 2 Check if the transmission cables are within the specifications range At this point make sure all of the cables in the link are of the same type and that multiple types of cables are not being used e Do not designate any unit other than those at both ends of the network as a terminal station Procedure 3 Check that link areas do not overlap d Example For the specifications range of the transmission cables 5 8 1 Selection of Transmission Cables gt 13 2 10 Expansion Unit does not Operate Procedure 1 Check if the terminal setting is specified for the expansion unit Check if the terminal setting is specified for multiple expansion units Procedure 2 Check if the expansion FPO adapter is installed at the last position When the expansion FPO adapter is installed at the last position the terminal setting for other expansion unit is not necessary Procedure 3 Check if the power supply has turned on and off in a short time such as momentary power failure There is a possibility that the expansion unit has not been recognized due to the occurrence of momentary power failure Turn off and on the power supply again 13 10 13 2 11 A Communication Error has Occurred through Ethernet Condition
225. Panasonic PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER FP X Users Manual ARCT1F409E 9 2011 09 panasonic electric works net sunx Safety Precautions Observe the following notices to ensure personal safety or to prevent accidents To ensure that you use this product correctly read this User s Manual thoroughly before use Make sure that you fully understand the product and information on safety This manual uses two safety flags to indicate different levels of danger WARNING If critical situations that could lead to user s death or serious injury is assumed by mishandling of the product Always take precautions to ensure the overall safety of your system so that the whole system remains safe in the event of failure of this product or other external factor Do not use this product in areas with inflammable gas It could lead to an explosion Exposing this product to excessive heat or open flames could cause damage to the lithium battery or other electronic parts Battery may explode if mistreated Do not recharge disassemble or dispose of fire CAUTION If critical situations that could lead to user s injury or only property damage is assumed by mishandling of the product To prevent excessive exothermic heat or smoke generation use this product at the values less than the maximum of the characteristics and performance that are assured in these specifications Do not dismantle or remodel the product It could cause excessive exotherm
226. Pete i Note sala ee e Note1 15mAorless 10mAorless 15 or less AFPX COM5 30mAorless 20mAorless 75mAorless AFPX COM6 15mAorless 10mAorless 15mAorless Analog input 1 2 10 mA or less 10 mA or less 15 mA or less Analog output 2 No 50 30mAorless 120 mAorless cassette bes is AFPX A21 30mAorless 20mAorless 70 mA or less cassette Thermocouple Note1 25mAorless Applica AFPX TC2 10 mA or less 25 mA or less UR 83 7 AFPX PLS 10 10 15 orless cassette UU LAE 10mAorless 10mAorless 10mAorless cassette Programmable display 25 mA or less 15mAorless 80mAorless 15 5 10 mA or less 10 mA or less 10 mA or less Note1 These current consumption indicate the increased amount of the current consumption of the Control unit refer to the example of the calculation below Note2 The current consumption of E30 is the current consumption at the supply terminal of E30 The current consumption of the control unit does not increase Unit Current consumption 48 24 V DC Expansion FPO adapter AFPX EFPO 10 mA or less Example of calculation when 100 V AC C30R IN8 TR8 E16R 410 mA 10 mA 10 mA 65 mA 10mA Current consumption of FPO expansion unit Total 495 mA or less 100 V AC 10mA Current consumption of FPO ex
227. R103 _ Positioning done pulse _ R9110 High speed counter CHO control flag 9 17 When X5 is turned on YO and Y1 turn on and the conveyor begins moving When the elapsed value DT90300 and DT90301 reaches K4500 Y1 turns off and the conveyor begins decelerating When the elapsed value reaches K5000 YO turns off and the conveyor stops AS R9110 R103 R100 bO e e R101 Ho z R101 E1 DAY es value of high speed t ounterCHO __ Fis HCIR KO Target value match off instruction YO goes off when elapsed value of high speed counter CHO reaches 5000 pulses _ R101 E Ea Set Ihe operation signal YQ Seen ae A a c URNA LS CNET led e Ne sal Ihe inverter high speed signal 1 ee i R100 eee Le DEMP 4500 DT90300 f 32 001 data comparison instruction R2000 tumes on when the CHO high speed counter amp _ elapsed value becomes greater than 4500 pules R100 ROHE R102 iF a ee ae __ y opeed reduction point reached iI h o R BP ee 102 Y1 Reset the inverter high speed signal Y1 or R Reset the inverter high speed signal 1 R9110 R100 R103 FS SEI eO C ERN 0 Positioning done pulse 0 5 3 E R103
228. S RE temperature I T 0 Humber of g gomman which me 18 4 BS Ambient temnperalure C 2 5 7 Transistor Type PNP Stand alone and With AFPX COM5 Keep the number of points which are simultaneously on within the following range as determined by the ambient temperature Product number Limitations on number of _ Limitations on number of simultaneous input on points simultaneous output on points AFPX C14P AFPX C60PD al poss common which ma rui neously an AR Ambient temperabue C C30F Number of 4a pomis CATIN which simulta nemm on AB ES Ambient lemper ture Humber al 45 porte per commen which are 1g edust on ah AS Ambient C14PD al poss which ara simuli 5 neously an 41 55 Ambient temperature CsoPD Humber of poste ren which ar negim on 1d Humber al 424 poss per commen which are 18 itus ER BS Ambient Configuration 1 Stand alone COM5 Humber of pomt per Chl which exmulta reus a nim der nz n EE EE lian den cicli 45 Ambi bemperabune OC Humber of pomis pir 1 Goin 12 which emuilia on 48 ES Ambi bempera
229. System registers 20 23 and 26 Set the operation mode when errors such as battery error duplicated use of output I O verification error and operation error occur 4 Time settings System registers 31 to 34 Set time out error detection time and the constant scan time 5 MEWNET WO0 PC PLC link settings System registers 40 to 47 50 to 55 and 57 These settings are for using link relays and link registers for MEWNET WO PC PLC link communication Note The default value setting is no PC PLC link communication 6 Input settings System registers 400 to 405 When using the high speed counter function pulse catch function or interrupt function set the operation mode and the input number to be used for the function 7 Tool and COM ports communication settings System registers 410 to 421 Set these registers when the Tool port and COM ports are to be used for computer link general purpose serial communication PC PLC link and modem communication 8 Input time constant settings System registers 430 to 433 Changing the input signal width to be loaded enables to prevent the malfunctions caused by chattering or noises 17 2 Checking and changing the set value of system register If you are going to use a value which is already set the value which appears when read there is no need write it again Using programming tool software Produce 1 Set the control unit in the PROG mode 2 Option gt PLC Configuration 3 When the
230. Thermocouple cassette AFPX TC2 cassette AFPX RTD2 Application cassettes that have restrictions when more than one units are used simultaneously Current output range Quantity Control unit dicor o i AFPX DA2 AFPX A21 MEE DENN E HAFPXAZ amp AFPXCOMS ever AFPX A21 AFPX DA2 AFPX COM5 xm AFPX DA2 unit AFPX COMB 1unit ns AFPX A21 2units AFPX COMS 1 Note1 Up to 2 channels can be used for the current output range When using two units it is possible to use the 2 ch current output range and 2 ch voltage output range Note2 The AFPX DA2 and AFPX A21 both cannot be used with the AFP COM5 Ethernet Voltage output range When using with the output current of 1 mA or below Quantity Control unit used FP X Application cassette AFPX DA2 AFPX A21 2 AFPX A21 j Eaht1 O AFPX DA2 AFPX COMS j Eah1 O O O 21 5 j Eah O O O AFPX A21 AFPX DA2 AFPX COMS Eacht O O AFPX DA2 1unit AFPX COM5 1unit AFPX A21 2units AFPX COMB 1unit Lo ow Jg Ot 520 Note In the voltage output range when using them with the output current at 1 mA to 10 mA the condition is the same as the current output range viii Programming Tool Restrictions Restrictions on usable programming tools dependi
231. Turn off the terminator setting switches of the other expansion units 5 3 Expansion Method of FPO Expansion Unit The FPO expansion unit expansion unit intelligent unit is expected by connecting to the right side of the FP X expansion FPO adapter Unit expansion is done using the right side connector for FPO expansion and expansion hook on the side of the unit 1 Raise the expansion hooks on the top and bottom sides of the unit with a screwdriver 2 Align the pins and holes in the four corners of the control unit and expansion unit and insert the pins into the holes so that there is no gap between the units 5 8 5 4 How to Install Add on Cassette The add on cassette is fitted with the control unit using the provided screws Note The add on cassette must be secured with the control unit using the screws in the actual use for preventing the affect of vibrations The backup battery option should be before installing the add on cassette The installation must be carried out when the power supply is off If the power supply is on it may cause faults Recommended screw Size and other conditions Quantity screw Material SW pan head P tight 2 6 16 Discs cassis pping galvanization trivalent chromate black P 5 4 1 Installing Communication Cassette Ac H Note The communication cassette can be installed only in the cassette mounting part 1 of the control unit Installation on
232. Turns off when Unit No 16 is in the PROG mode R9076 Unit Turns on when Unit No 7 is in the RUN mode No 7 Turns off when Unit No 7 is in the PROG mode Turns on when Unit No 8 is in the RUN mode Turns off when Unit No 8 is in the PROG mode Turns on when Unit No 10 is in the RUN mode 17 23 WHR908 FP m 17 24 MEWNET WO PC PLC link 1 transmission assurance Ime o on when Unit No 1 is communicating properly in link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC PLC link mode Turns on when Unit No 2 is communicating properly in PC PLC link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC PLC link mode Turns on when Unit No 3 is communicating properly in link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC PLC link mode Turns on when Unit No 4 is communicating properly in PC PLC link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC PLC link mode Turns on when Unit No 5 is communicating properly in PC PLC link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC PLC link mode Turns on when Unit No 6 is communicating properly in PLC link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PLC link mode Turns on when Unit No 7 is communicating properly i
233. Unit No 15 is in the RUN mode Turns off when Unit No 15 is in the PROG mode Turns on when Unit No 16 is in the RUN mode Turns off when Unit No 16 is in the PROG mode Turns on when Unit No 9 is in the RUN mode Turns on when Unit No 13 is in the RUN mode Turns off when Unit No 13 is in the PROG mode 17 25 WR910 Address Description R9100 to HSC CH0 CHO R9113 R9115 Turns off when the F166 HC1S and F167 HC1R HSC CH6 conma HSCICHS instructions are completed R9118 flag HSC CH8 e HSC CH9 ete ROMA HSC CHA R911B HSC CHB e R911C_ PLS CHO R911D PLS CH1 Turns on while the pulses are being output by the F171 ReME PLS CH2 9 amp 3 SPDH F172 PLSH F173 PWMH and F174 SPOH PLS CH3 2 instructions Note1 This relay is available for the FP X Ry type only Note2 This relay is available for the FP X Tr type only 17 26 17 1 3 Table of Special Data Registers for FP X A Available N A Not available ing ing Self diagnostic error The self diagnostic error code is stored here DT90000 i code when a self diagnostic error occurs N A 0790001 Notused When an error occurs at the I O board for the application cassette the bit corresponding to Position of abnormal the board will be set on DT90002 I O board for 8 y 3 2 1 O Bit No application cassette px
234. Up to 3 connections can be established at the specified source port Server Connection establishment ice N M o 5 p d 7 86 Setting of communication environment for Computer link Ethernet The following two settings for the FP X and communication cassette AFPX COMS should be set Communication environment of FP X Communication environment of Communication cassette AFPX COM5 Setting communication environment of FP X The programming tool FPWIN GR is used to set the baud rate or communication format of the COM1 port Select Option PLC Configuration in the menu bar and click COM1 Port tab Dialog box of PLC system register setting PIG Configuration Untitlel Hold Non hold 1 Hold Mon hald 2 Mo410 Unit Mo 1 Ha 413 Communication Format Acton on Error No 412 Comm Made Char Bit 8 Bits Computer Link Parity Odd Pulse 1 0 cassette settings HSC PLS5 Modem Enabled E Stop Bit 1 T Controller input settings HSC Interrupt pulse catch settings Time constant setting 3 of CPU input Time constant setting 4 of CPU input Tool interrupt edge settings Time constant setting 1 of CPU input 212 Serm Time constant setting 2 of CPU input 415 Baudrate 3600 bps gt COM2 Fort Cancel ead PEI Initialize Help COM1 port setting AFPX COM5 No Setting item Setting value No 410 1 to
235. V1 DT90041 For C60 only DT90042 Volume input 2 The potentiometer value KO to K1000 is stored here This value can be used in analog timers and other applications by using the A N A program to read this value to a data register DT90043 Volume input 3 V2 DT90042 V3 DT90043 ms wins M mere Mw proa rams tis rs to _ 17 30 DT90052 High speed counter control flag A value can be written with FO MV instruction to reset the high speed counter disable counting continue or clear high speed counter instruction Control code setting FP X Ry type 5 43210 Channel setting HSC 0 ta B CHO to CHB HSC 0 HSC High speed counter instruction 0 Continue 1 Clear HSC Hardware reset Mote 0 Disable T Enable HSC Count 0 1 Disable HSC Software reset 0 No 1 Yes FP X Tr type 4 321 0 Channel setting HSC 0 to 7 CHO to CH7 HSC 0 HSC High speed counter instruction 0 Continue 1 Clear HSC Hardware reset Note 0 Disable 1 Enable HSC Count 0 Enable Disable HS C Software reset 0 Yes Available N A Not available 17 31 DT90052 17 32 Pulse output control flag FP X A Available N A Not available A value be written with FO MV instruction to reset the high speed counter disable counting continue or clear high speed counter instruction Control code setting
236. Winput 4 VOR RI RI R2 R7 Noe l supply f Note When the stepping motor input is a 5 V optical coupler type connect a 2 1 2 W resistor with the R1 and a 2 1 2 W to 470 2 W resistor with the R2 Table of allocation Positioning in progress __ JOG start signal R10 Positioning in progress X4 JOG start signal R11 Positionngoperationstat __ 5 Overrunning signal R12 Positioning done pulse 10 27 10 4 6 Positioning Control Instruction F171 Trapezoidal e This instruction automatically performs trapezoidal control according to the specified data table xO Kor MF Fl DMV KS00 07102 Fl DMV K500 DTI Pulses are generated from output 1100 at an initial speed af 500 Hz a maximum speed of 5000 Hz an acceleration deceleration time of 300 ms and a movement amount of 21 K300 07106 10000 pulsas DMV K10000 01108 KO 0 110 171 SPDH DT100 When this program runs the positioning data table and the pulse output diagram will be as shown below Positioning data table Control code Initial speed Max speed 108 Acceleration deceleration time 01103 Target value 10000 pulse Pulse stop KO i Pulse output diagram 5000 Hz With 30 stans f 5000 500 30 steps 150 Hz Zt 300 ms 30 steps 10 ms With 60 steps 4M
237. X Tr type DT90372 DT90380 DT90373 DT90381 ch2 0790382 0790383 Reference 9 2 1 Table of specifications for information on the special data register Elapsed value write and read instruction F1 e his instruction is used to read the pulse number counted by the pulse output control e Specify this F1 DMV instruction together with the special data register 0790348 e he elapsed value is stored as 32 bit data in the combined area of special data register DT90348 and DT90349 e Use only this F1 DMV instruction to set the elapsed value Example 1 Writing the elapsed value Kf Set the initial value of K3000 in the pulse output DF F1 K3000 DT90348 CHO Reading the elapsed value X8 Reads the elapsed value of the pulse output DF F1 DMV 0790348 DT100 CHO to DT100 and DT101 FP X Tr type Elapsed value and target value areas of pulse output to ch3 Pulse output Channel No Control flag Elapsed value area Target value area R911C DT90348 to DT90349 DT90350 to DT90351 ch1 R911D DT90352 to DT90353 DT90354 to DT90355 ch2 R911E DT90356 to DT90357 DT90358 to DT90359 ch3 R911F DT90360 to DT90361 DT90362 to DT90363 9 26 9 4 5 Wiring for Pulse Output Sample Program F171 to F174 Wiring example FP X Trtype Input terminal Positioning start xO Peslitioning start X1 Home return start CONerrnunnmg Nd Home sensor Near home sensor
238. X101 X102 X200 X201 X202 settings Interrupt Leading edge edge setting Leadi d E X100 X101 X102 X200 X201 X202 for pulse I O eading edge Trailing edge cassette The pressed contact is up and set to trailing edge Note1 For counting two phase input only CHO CH2 CH4 and CH6 can be used When two phase input is specified for CHO CH2 CH4 and CH6 the settings for CH1 CH3 CH5 and 7 corresponding to each CH No are ignored however specify the same setting for those channels Note2 The settings for pulse catch and interrupt input can only be specified in system registers 403 and 404 Note3 If system register 400 to 404 have been set simultaneously for the same input relay the following precedence order is effective High speed counter Pulse catch gt Interrupt input Example When the high speed counter is being used in the addition input mode even if input XO is specified as an interrupt input or as pulse catch input those settings are invalid and XO functions as counter input for the high speed counter Note4 Upgrade FPWIN GR to Ver2 6 or higher version if the No of I O allocation is indicated with 1 digit number such as XO in the setting window No 403 404 and 406 of FPWIN GR 17 11 Unit No setting 1 to 99 Add Default PC o e 17 12 Communication Computer link Computer link mode setting General purpose communications segcuonobmodem Enabled Disabled connection Ente
239. X307 X320 to X327 X340 to X347 FPO EBR Input 4 points X300 to X303 X320 to X323 X340 to X343 Output 4 points Y300 to Y303 20 to Y323 Y340 to Y343 FPO E8YT P Output 8 points Y300 to Y307 Y320 to Y327 Y340 to Y347 FPO FPO E8YR Expansion unit FPO E16X Input 16 points X300 to X30F X320 to X32F X340 to X34F FPO E16R Input 8 points X300 to X307 X320 to X327 X340 to X347 FPO E16T P Output 8 points Y300 to Y307 Y320 to Y327 Y340 to Y347 FPO E16YT P Output 16 points Y300 to Y3OF Y320 to Y32F Y340 to Y34F Input 16 points X300 to X30F X320 to X32F X340 to X34F FPO E32T P Output 16 points Y300 to Y30F Y320 to Y32F Y340 to Y34F Input 16 points WX30 WX32 WX34 CHO X300 to X30F X320 to X32F X340 to X34F 21 FPO analog I O unit CH1 X310 to X31F X330 to X33F X350 to X35F WY30 WY32 WY34 conversion unit 4 CHO 2 4 6 X300 to X30F X320 to X32F X340 to X34F couple unit CH1 3 5 7 X310 to X31F X330 to X33F X350 to X35F Input 16 points WX2 WXA W X6 RTD unit CH1 3 5 X30 to X3F X50 to X5F X70 to X7F WY2 WYA WY6 X300 to X30F X320 to X32F X340 to X34F conversion unit FPO AO04I CHO 2 Y300 to Y3OF Y320 to Y32F Y340 to Y34F CH1 3 Y310 to Y31F Y330 to Y33F Y350 to Y35F FPO FPO IOL Input 32 points X300 to X31F X320 to X33F X340 to X35F I O link unit Output 32 points Y300 to Y31F Y320 to Y33F Y340
240. YO al an initial speed of 500 Hz a maximum speed of 5000 Hz an acceleration deceleration time of 300 ms and a movement amount of 10000 pulsas When this program runs the positioning data table and the pulse output diagram will be as shown below DT 108 Targetvalue 10000 pulse DT110 KO 111 Pulse stop Pulse output diagram 5000 Hz 10000 pulses With 30 steps Af 5000 500 30 steps 150 Hz Zt 300 ms 30 steps 10 ms With 60 steps Af 5000 500 60 steps 75 Hz Art 300 ms 60 steps 5 ms Al 1 1 1 Regarding the specification of acceleration deceleration time specifying acceleralion deceleration time No of steps and initial speed set the value to be calculated by the formula below Specily acceleration deceleration time in the 30 ms unit with 30 steps and in the 60 ms unit with 60 steps 5 Acceleration deceleration time t ms No of steps 1000 Initial speed fO Hz 9 28 1 Control code lt H 5 gt 00000000 B Number of acceleration deceleration steps 30 steps 1 60 steps lllDuty on width Duty 1 2 50 1 Duty 1 4 25 Frequency range 0 1 5 Hz to 9 8 kHz 1 48 Hz to 100 kHz 191 Hz to 100 kHz lloperation mode and output method Incremental CVWICCVV 02 Incremental pulse and direction forward off reverse 03 Incremental pulse and direction forward on
241. a gt Specified in system storage area register no 417 no 419 The system registerin parenthesesrefar t T COM part i 7 37 7 4 2 Communication with External Devices Programming example of general purpose serial communication The F159 MTRN instruction is used to send and receive data via the specified COM port F159 MTRN F144 TRNS instruction is not available with the FP X F159 MTRN instruction Data is sent and received via the specified COM port RO 5 D L F159 MTRN 100 KL F Serial data communication LS gt data communicatio Starting from 0 100 the contents of 8 bytes are senl mhirn disi COM post R1 Devices that can be specified for S Only data registers DT can be specified as the send buffer Devices that can be specified for WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD I IO to ID K H Devices that can be specified for D Only the constants only K1 and K2 Sending data The amount of data specified by n is sent to the external device from among the data stored in the data table starting with the area specified by S through the COM port specified by D Data can be sent with the header and terminator automatically attached A maximum of 2048 bytes can be sent When the above program is run the eight bytes of data contained in DT101 to DT104 and stored in the send buffer starting from DT100 are sent from COM port Receiving d
242. a is 5000 the pulse of 1000 is output from CW by executing the pulse output instruction with the target value 1000 and the current position will be 6000 Absolute Absolute value control gt Outputs a number of pulses equal to the difference between the set target value and the current value Selected Mode Target value greater than current value Target value less than current value Example CW CCW Pulse output from CW Pulse output from CCW Pulse and direction forward OFF reverse ON Pulse output when direction output is OFF Pulse output when direction output is ON Pulse and direction forward ON reverse OFF Pulse output when direction output is ON Pulse output when direction output is OFF HSC counting method Decremental When the current position value of elapsed value area is 5000 the pulse of 4000 is output from CCW by executing the pulse output instruction with the target value 1000 and the current position will be 1000 Home return e When executing the F171 SPDH instruction the pulse is continuously output until the home input X102 or X202 is enabled e To decelerate the movement when near the home position designate a near home input and set bit 4 of special data register DT90052 to off on off e he deviation counter clear output can be output when home return has been completed JOG operation e Pulses are output from the specified channel while the trigg
243. a 3D rm 9 4 7 Positioning Control Instruction F171 Home Return Common to Transistor type e his function performs home return according to the specified data table The elapsed value area CHO DT90348 DT90349 and CH1 DT90352 DT90353 is cleared to zero after the completion of home return Note If the home return is executed set the home input by the system register 401 If the home return is executed without the setting an operation error occurs x2 HOF F DWV H1125 DT200 Fi K200 DT202 F1 DAV DI204 Fi K150 DT206 L 150 ms DMV M10 DT208 F171 SPDH DT200 B Positioning data table Control code H 1125 Initial speed 200 Hz Max speed 2000Hz Acceleration 3 deceleration Deviation counter clear signal output ime Pulse output diagram when home position proximity input is not used Wo ON Home sensor ON 2000 Hz 200 Hz Hz m 150 m amp Pulse output whan home position proximity input is used X2 ON Near home Home sento sensor ON ON 2000 Hz 200 Hz 0 Hz e 150 ms 150 ms Regarding the specification of acceleration decelerattan For spacitying acceleratian deceleration tima of steps and initial speed sat the value 1o calculated by the formula below Specify acceleration decaleration tima in ihe 30 ms unit wih 30 steps and in the 60 ms unit with 60 steps
244. a pe 51 82 parallel by comparing two 16 bit data in the comparative condition S1 S2 Connects a Form A normally open contact in OR pt 81 82 parallel by comparing two 16 bit data in the comparative condition S1 lt S2 or S12 S2 Connects a Form A normally open contact in parallel by comparing two 16 bit data in the comparative condition S1 gt S2 Connects a Form A normally open contact in 31 82 parallel by comparing two 16 bit data the comparative condition S1 gt S2 or S1 S2 Connects a Form A normally open contact in p lt 81 82 parallel by comparing two 16 bit data in the comparative condition S1 lt S2 Connects a Form A normally open contact in parallel by comparing two 16 bit data in the comparative condition S1 lt S2 or S1 S2 Q Available 2 Not available Not available partially 17 53 FP2SH FP10SH BT EE 32 bit 51 82 Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32 Em taa bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 cata pr a S2 1 2 compare Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S 1 1 1 lt S2 1 52 or S1 1 51 gt 52 1 S2 Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32 1 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 1 gt S2 1 52 Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32
245. able Available E er Not available Available Not available Available General purpose Not available Available Not selectable communication Not available Available Option setting 7 82 7 7 4 Communication Tool Software Configurator WD Ver1 10 or Later The communication tool software Configurator WD is required to set Ethernet communication for the AFPX COM5 Install the Configurator WD before setting the AFPX COM5 The Configurator WD can be downloaded from our website free of charge http panasonic denko co jp ac e fasys plc plc fp x software index jsp Member registration is required Free of charge The setting is saved in the 5 IP address setting Default When selecting Obtain an IP address automatically an IP address is Use the obtained from the DHCP server When selecting Use the following IP following IP address an IP address is set manually Unit name for Communication cassette AFPX COM5 can be specified ET IP address of Communication cassette AFPX COM5 IP address Set an IP address other than 0 0 0 0 and 255 255 255 255 19210819 Subnet mask Netmask of Communication cassette AFPX COM5 255 255 255 0 Gateway of Communication cassette AFPX COM5 192 168 1 1 Note1 When an error occurs the ERROR LED will be turned on Obtain IP address automatically Note1 7 83 Communication setting Defaut Communication protocol of A
246. able controller Let Has Aborts communication Read contact area Write contact area 17 89 17 6 Hexadecimal Binary BCD 1 BCD data OIN O 17 90 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000001 00000010 00000011 00000100 00000101 000001 10 000001 11 00001000 00001001 00001010 00001011 00001100 00001101 00001110 00001111 00010000 00010001 00010010 00010011 00010100 00010101 00010110 00010111 00011000 00011001 00011010 00011011 00000000 00011100 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00100111 00011101 00011110 00011111 00111111 11111111 00001111 17 7 ASCII Codes gt 3 x gt N gt m lt o z coss eee DEL 3 b2 b1 b7 06 65 64 03 17 91 17 92 Record of changes ARCT1F409E May 2005 First Edition ARCT1F409E 1 Oct 2005 2 Edition PDF only New product addition AFPX E30R AFPX TR6P AFPX EC30 AFPX EC80 ARCT1F409E 2 SEPT 2006 3 Edition New product addition FP X Control Unit Transistor Type FP X Expansion Unit Transistor Type ARCT1F409E 3 Apr 2007 4 Edition New product addition FP X communic
247. abnormality in the output section Please contact your dealer Check of output condition 2 Output indicator LEDS are off Procedure 1 Monitor the output condition using a programming tool e f the output monitored is turned on there is probably a duplicated output error Procedure 2 Forcing on the output using forcing input output function e f the output indicator LED is turned on go to input condition check e f the output indicator LED remains off there is probably an abnormality in the output unit Please contact your dealer Check of input condition 1 Input indicator LEDs are off Procedure 1 Check the wiring of the input devices Procedure 2 Check that the power is properly supplied to the input terminals e f the power is properly supplied to the input terminal there is probably an abnormality in the input unit Please contact your dealer e f the power is not supplied to the input terminal there is probably an abnormality in the input device or input power supply Check the input device and input power supply Check of input condition 2 Input indicator LEDs are on Procedure Monitor the input condition using a programming tool e f the input monitored is off there is probably an abnormality with the input unit Please contact your dealer e f the input monitored is on check the leakage current at the input devices e g two wire type sensor and check the program again Check 1 Check for the duplica
248. ad the pulse number counted by the pulse output control e Specify this F1 DMV instruction together with the special data register 0790348 e he elapsed value is stored as 32 bit data in the combined area of special data register DT90348 and DT90349 e Use only this F1 DMV instruction to set the elapsed value Example 1 Writing the elapsed value Set the initial value of K3000 in the pulse output I DF 1 DMV K3000 DT90348 CHO Reading the elapsed value X8 Reads the elapsed value of the pulse output I XDF 1 DMV 0790348 DT100 CHO to DT100 and DT101 FP X Ry type Elapsed value and target value areas of pulse output ch0 to ch1 Pulse output Channel Control flag Elapsed value area Target value area R911C DT90348 to DT90349 DT90350 to DT90351 R911D DT90352 to DT90353 DT90354 to DT90355 10 26 10 4 5 Wiring for Pulse Output Sample Program F171 to F174 Wiring example Ry type Input terminal Positioning start Pasitionimg start A1 Home return start JOG start x3 JG start xd Overrunnmng Ah CUM L E b dm a contact contact b contact Moving table FP X pulse WO cassette stepping motor Output terminal side T COM Nearhome sensor X100 2 Stepping motor driver Horne sensor Mite 3 Common Pulse output CW Y100 KY CW input iir ca Pulse output COW Y101 2 CC
249. adder program to prevent chattering or noises to be received as input signals tem fDescipin 3 3 Output type Rated load voltage Operating load voltage range Max surge current Output points per common Off state leakage current On state voltage drop YO 2 us or less when the load current is 15 mA or more 1 5 us or less when the load current is 15 mA or more Response time 1 ms or less External power supply terminals Operating mode indicator Pulse output part 8 26 LED indication Terminal layout Au HSC PLS LL LI LIO XD x1 X2 YO Yl Y2 PLS Terminal layout F 1 F oooo09OQ X1 X2 YO Y1 Y2 Circuit diagram High speed counter part Pulse output part Outpulindicalor LED aa 4 terminal utpat terminal External Load power Load power supply apy 21 6 to P terminal Sio HVDC 26 4 V DC 8 27 8 3 10 FP X Master Memory Cassette Product No AFPX MRTC tem Specifications Year month day hour 24 hour display minute second and day of week Clock Calendar At 0 C less than 104 seconds per month At 25 less than 51 seconds per month At 55 less than 155 seconds per month Memory capacity Flash ROM 512 kB System registers Master memory Ladder programs function Storable data Comment data 328 kB F ROM data area Secu
250. address relative to S1 is stored in D 2 type data 1 S2 The total value and the mean value D of the real number data from the area selected with 51 to S2 are obtained The total value is stored in the D 1 D and the mean value is stored in the 0 3 0 2 type data total and mean values Floating point m mini mum value Floating point FSORT 1 2 The real number data from the area type data sort PFSORT S3 specified by 51 to S2 are stored in ascending order the smallest word is first or descending order the largest word is first Scaling of FSCAL 1 S2 Scaling linearization on a real real number PFSCAL D number data table is performed and data the output Y to an input value X is calculated Q Available Not available Not available partially 1 This instruction is available for FP 32k type 2 This instruction is available for FP X Ver 1 13 or later 3 This instruction is available for FP2 FP2SH Ver 1 5 or later FP10SH cannot be used 17 74 FPO FP e LL FP2SH FP10SH FP2SH FP10SH Ope me Boolean P Description rand Time series processing instruction PID processing S PID processing is performed depending on the control value mode and parameter specified by S to S 2 and S 4 to S 10 and the result is stored in the S 3 Easy PID S1 Temperature control PID can be S2 easily performed using the image S3
251. ade version is not available for Ver 6 Note2 Ver 6 0 can be upgraded to the latest version after Ver 6 1 free of charge at our web site http www panasonic electric works com peweu en html 22164 php Use the latest version Type of computer and suitable cable For the connection between a personal computer RS232C and the control unit RS232C PC side connector PLC side connector Specifications Product No female Mini DIN round 5 pin L type 3 m AFC8503 D Pn female Mini DIN round 5 pin otraight type 3 m AFC8503S Note Note A USB RS232C conversion cable is necessary to connect the unit to the USB port of a personal computer using a PC connection cable For the connection between a personal computer USB and the control unit USB USB cable For C30 and C60 only Use a commercial cable Cable type Length USB 2 0 or 1 1 AB type Chapter 2 Specifications and Functions of Control Unit 2 1 Parts and Functions 2 1 1 Parts and Functions C14 Control unit kd side view de view common to the control units il Iu attachment Cassette mounting part 1 State that the expansion cover was removed C30 Control unit 2 SI XS ERE OI pae EOI d Cassette mounting part 1 Cassette mounting part 2 State that the expansion State that the expansion cover cover was removed and battery cover was removed B C60 C
252. age wires by at least 100mm e Wirings other than the above specifications or incorrect wirings may cause the fault or malfunction Others e Wiring should be carried out after the power supply to the PLC was turned off e Also turn of the power supply when the control unit expansion units and various cassettes are connected If they are connected during the power supply is on it may cause the fault or malfunction 5 7 Wiring of Terminal Block Supplied terminal block Suitable wires M3 terminal screws are used for the terminal The following suitable solderless terminals are recommended for the wiring to the terminals e Fork type terminal i Round type terminal TY LLL 4 6 mm or lass 6 mm or less T a EO XE LI 3 2 mm or mora 4 2 mm ar mora Suitable solderless terminals PartNo Suitable wires mm S saei JST Mfg Co Ltd Round type 2 MS3 Fork type 2 N3A IIO Suitable wires Suitable wires Tightening torque AWG22 to 14 0 3 to 2 0 mm The tightening torque should be 0 5 to 0 6 N m Connection to the terminal block When using the round type terminal remove the terminal cover The same is printed nn ihe rearminal cover and lerrniral block lo match After ohecking the characters fit the terminal cover Install the terminal block cover as it was after wiring to prevent electric shock 5 20 How to remove the terminal block The termin
253. ailable Not available Note1 The RS232C of the COM2 port is not available when using the USB port of the FP X Note2 The PC PLC link function of the FP X is available via Ethernet 7 11 2 channel RS485 Type Product AFPX COM6 This communication cassette is a 2 channel unit with an isolated two wire RS485 port Signal direction LED indication Terminal layout Lr p Transmissi ie ransmission s tine RS485 5485 tese m nx Tansmission COM Transmission line RS485 eee cona eem station set SW ine iu Cassette backside switch 2 Baud rate O 190 2 N COMI general unit 2 N inc spans Default 3 4 4 129 2 COM terminal unit T 115200bps 4 1 O COM2 general unit 20 4 1 2 9600bps terminal unit 3 Default 4 Note The baud rate for the COM1 port is specified only by the system register However for the COM2 port it should be specified by the switches and the system register fircommunication 1 N communication Computer link Available um communication Note Only the 1 port MODBUSRTU Avale can be used Note1 For the port the data is always transmitted by the STOP bit 2 regardless the setting of stop bit The data can be received by either STOP bit 1 or 2 regar
254. al blocks used for C30 C60 E30 can be removed for fitting the screws The terminal block for C14 E16 cannot be removed e Removal Slacken the mounting screws In 2 positions The terminal block will be floated gradually and removed As Ihe mounting screws are fixed al the lenninal block they are nol come alf even alter the Terminal block was removed fron Use mmn urit Munt sores U 2 positions se rew down from the state hal the terminal blook is Tloatina The terminal block will b secured by being pushed with the screws Ihe terminal block is flnating al The tightening torque should be 0 25 to 0 35 Nem 5 21 5 8 Wiring of Add on Cassette Terminal Block A screw down connection type for terminal block is used for the add on cassette The suitable wires are given below a ES 8 i m zd e ob T i rg pU zm a Mu p E T T hs M ee a m dM nis P L4 TE a te ters t E B E Eo a br malin n a L3 i ur m F pus Ae 27 Ig T ar F P wh r E 4 m uL e ic j era 2 ail S Suitable wires twisted Size Nominal cross sectional area AWG 28 to 16 0 08 to 1 00 mm
255. al input Home input of pulse output CH3 Reset input of high speed counter CH2 FP X Irtype ress CHO Normal output YO Y 1 Pulse output YO Y1 Normal output PWM output YO Normal output Y1 Normal output Y2 Pulse uL Pulse output Y2 Y3 PWM output Normal output PWM output Y2 Normal output Y3 settings settings CH2 Normal output Y4 Y5 PLS YO to Y7 Pulse output Y4 Y5 Normal output PWM output Y4 Normal output Y5 CH3 Normal output Y6 Y7 Pulse output Y6 Y7 Normal output PWM output Y6 Normal output Y7 om Re X0 X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X7 Not s l ontroller inp Inter pe The pressed contact is set for the pulse catch rupt settings input Pulse Eh X0 X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X7 settings 404 input TT T T TT 1 Not set put as The pressed contact is set for the interrupt settings input A2 A3 AD Interrupt Leading edge edge setting X2 X3 X4 X5 X8 X7 for controller Trailing edge 1 The pressed contact is up and set to trailing edge Note1 If CHO CH2 CH4 and CH6 of the high speed counter is set to the two phase input individual input or incremental decremental control input the settings of CH1 CH3 CH and CH7 will be invalid Note2 Only CHO and CH2 are available for the reset input of the high speed counter X6 for CHO and X7 for CH2 can be a
256. also cancelled Note When cancelling this setting forcibly All programs and security information will be deleted when the upload protection setting is cancelled We cannot restore the deleted programs even if you ask us We cannot read the data of the control units that are set to prohibit uploading Keeping your programs is your responsibility 11 8 11 4 Setting Function for FP Memory Loader The following three functions of the FP memory loader AFP8670 AFP8671 can be set through the FP X The setting will be effective when it is transferred to another FP X after the upload to the FP memory loader from the set FP X Setting conditions FP X V2 5 or later FP memory loader V2 0 or later FPWIN GR V2 8 or later 8 digit password is set 11 4 1 Download Protection Setting to Previous Versions Allow the download to older than Version 2 5 This is a function to disable the download from the FP X V2 5 or later to the FP X older than V2 5 for enhanced security When setting the download to be enabled the download can be performed regardless of the version of FP X however the limited distribution and upload protection settings cannot be used 11 4 2 Limited Distribution Function Allow the download in case of same password When downloading a program from the memory loader the program can be downloaded only when the program stored in the memory loader matches the password set for the PLC with this function
257. am When X5 is turned on YO turns on and the conveyor begins moving When the elapsed value DT90300 and DT90301 reaches K5000 YO turns off and the conveyor stops 99110 R102 10 ERE E Positioning operations start e ER disais sciat EC Resets ped value of high peed _ Target value match off instruction YO goes off when elapsed value of high Sets high speed eountes CHO i Speed CHO iache 5000 pulges F167 HAR T5 Set the inverter operation signal m TUA FREUD done pulse D 5 s Positioning operations with a double speed inverter Wiring example FP X type terminal Encoder input AD eie EMT Operation start O C COM Output terminal Inverter operation kin 2 J Inverter high speed Y1 gt 4 I 5 1 Operation chart Speed 0 4500 5000 Number of pulse Yo 4 b Conveyor wth 2 A T1 m Pad a QA pe QU rm p A r i P j e ant Rm l ut BF m JP Motor Encoder fe C Dperat Fast Slow COM allocation R100 _ Positioning operation running ___ 101_ Positioning operation start Ri02 Arrival at deceleration point
258. ame Max 118 characters Max 2048 characters Response message The PLC that received the command in the example above sends the processing results to the computer T Header Unit ne of source PLC that processed the command decimal Text Processing resulis and communication error codes ar estored here code BOC Haxadacimal Two One i del Read value Processing results for contact area read contact is off Command name a g read contact area Response code indicates a normal processing result indicates thal an eror occured 1 Header start code 96 ASCII code H25 or lt ASCII code must be at the beginning of a message The response must start with the same header that was at the beginning of the command 2 Unit number The unit number of the PLC that processed the command is stored here 3 Text The content of this varies depending on the type of command The value should be read based on the content If the processing is not completed successfully an error code will be stored here so that the content of the error can be checked 5 R C 2 R Mtha read command was used the data thal was read is stored here If nomnal Command name If error occurs Error code Response code If normal 5 ASCII cade H24 If error occurs TT ASCII code H21 1 24 4 Check code BCC block check code
259. an from the execution of the instruction to the actual pulse output Booting time Approx 200 us with 30 steps Approx 400 us with 60 steps Approx 500 us with 30 steps Approx 700 us with 60 steps Type of instruction Pulse output instruction F 171 SPDH Trapezoidal control home return Pulse output instruction F172 PLSH JOG operation Pulse output instruction F174 SPOH Data table control PWM output instruction F173 PWMH CW CCW is set Pulse direction is set CW CCW is set Pulse direction is set CW CCW is set Pulse direction is set Approx Approx Approx Approx Approx 30 us Note If pulse direction is set a waiting time approx 300 us is included from the time that the direction output goes on until the pulse output instruction can be executed 9 10 9 3 High speed Counter Function 9 3 1 Overview of High speed Counter Function e he high speed counter function counts the input signals and when the count reaches the target value turns on and off the desired output e o turn on an output when the target value is matched use the target value match ON instruction F166 15 To turn off an output use the target value match OFF instruction F167 HC1R e Preset the output to be turned on and off with the SET RET instruction Setting the system register In order to use the high speed counter function it is necessary to set the system regi
260. an inductive load a protective circuit should be installed in parallel with the load e When switching DC inductive loads with relay output type be sure to connect a diode across the ends of the load When using an AC inductive load surge absorber R c varisto i miei L Load Output 4 Liar ed EP X ermina terminal Example of surge absorber Resistance Ri 50 9 Capacity C 047 oF 5 18 When using a DC inductive load gt Output Tae FP X terminal 7 dap COM Ligge Reverse vollage 3 times the load volage Averag rectified terward current Load current or more Precautions when using capacitive loads When connecting loads with large in rush currents to minimize their effect connect a protection circuit as shown below Resistor Inductor Output 5 y Load Output Load FP X terminal L FP X terminal 5 6 3 Precautions Regarding Input and Output Wirings Isolate input output power lines e Be sure to select the thickness dia of the input and output wires while taking into consideration the required current capacity e Arrange the wiring so that the input and output wiring are separated and these wirings are separated from the power wiring as much as possible Do not route them through the same duct or wrap them up together e Separate the input output wires from the power and high volt
261. ange to RUN Condition A syntax error or a self diagnosed error that caused operation to stop has occurred Procedure 1 Check if the ERROR LED is flashing Example If the ERROR LED is flashing check 13 2 1 If ERROR LED is flashing Procedure 2 Execute a total check function using the tool software to determine the location of the syntax error Using FPWIN GR Select Debug on the menu bar and select Totally check program Click on the Execute button in the total check dialog box 13 8 13 2 7 A Communication Error has Occurred through RS485 Procedure 1 Check to make sure the transmission cables have been securely connected between the two terminals and two terminals of the units and that the final unit has been correctly connected Procedure 2 Check if the transmission cables are within the specifications range At this point make sure all of the cables in the link are of the same type and that multiple types of cables are not being used e Do not designate any unit other than those at both ends of the network as a terminal station Procedure 3 Check that link areas do not overlap d Example For the specifications range of the transmission cables 5 8 1 Selection of Transmission Cables gt 13 2 8 A Communication Error has Occurred through RS232C Condition No communication with 1 channel type RS232C cassette AFPX COM1 2 channel type RS232C cassette AFPX COM2 1 channel RS485
262. are use When X1 of PLC with unit no 1 turns on YO of PLC with unit no 2 turns on When X2 of PLC with unit no 1 turns on YO of PLC with unit no 3 turns on Link relay LO tums on FP X RS4B5 FPE FP2 FP25H Unit 1 Unit no 2 Unit no 3j System register settings When using a link the communication format and baud rate are fixed Set Value Communication format for COM1 Data length 8 bits port Parity check Odd Stop bit 1 bit Terminator CR Header STX not exist No 415 Baud rate setting for COM1 port 115200 bps Unit no and communication mode settings Setting for the FP X with unit no 1 No 410 Unit no for COM1 port a No 412 Selection of communication mode for COM1 port PC link Setting for the FP with unit no 2 Unit no for port gt ___ Setting for the FP2 MCU with unit no 3 Name Unit no for COM1 port 3 Set using the unit no setting switch Selection of communication mode for COM1 port PC PLC link Set using the mode speed setting switch b Key Point Make sure the same unit number is not used for more than one of the PLCs connected through the PC PLC link function and specify consecutive numbers 1 68 Link area allocation Link relay allocation FP X FP2IFP2SH unit na T unii na 2 Linit 3 Mo 14 Sey a
263. ase contact your dealer e f the ERROR LED is flashed go to chapter 11 2 1 Procedure 2 Set the mode selector from PROG to RUN mode e f the ERROR LED is turned the program execution time is too long Check the program Check 1 Check if instructions such as JMP or LOOP are programmed in such a way that a scan never finish 2 Check if interrupt instructions are executed in succession 13 5 13 2 3 ALL LEDs are OFF Procedure 1 Check wiring of power supply Procedure 2 Check if the power supplied to the FP X control unit is in the range of the rating e Be sure to check the fluctuation in the voltage Procedure 3 Disconnect the power supply wiring to the other devices if the power supplied to the FP X control unit is shared with them e f the LED on the control unit turn on at this moment increase the capacity of the power supply or prepare another power supply for other devices e Please contact your dealer for further questions 13 6 13 2 4 Diagnosing Output Malfunction Proceed from the check of the output side to the check of the input side Check of output condition 1 Output indicator LEDs are on Procedure 1 Check the wiring of the loads Procedure 2 Check if the power is properly supplied to the loads e f the power is properly supplied to the load there is probably an abnormality in the load Check the load again e f the power is not supplied to the load there is probably an
264. ase 8 chs High speed 4 chs medium speed 4 chs 2 phase 4 chs High speed 2 chs medium speed 2 chs With high speed single phase 1 ch 100 kHz 2 chs 80 kHz Single phase 8 chs or 2 phase 4 chs 3 chs 60 kHz Input of main 4 chs 50 kHz unit With single phase 8 chs 10 kHz each with 2 phase 4 chs 5 kHz each With high speed 2 phase 1 ch 35 kHz 2 chs 25 kHz counter Note3 Note4 With medium speed single phase 4 chs 10 kHz each With Medium speed 2 phase 2 chs 5 kHz each C14 Single phase 2 chs 2 phase 1 ch C30 C60 Single phase 4 chs 2 phase 2 chs when 2 cassettes are installed Pulse I O Pulse I O cassette cannot be installed pou n With single phse 2 chs 80 kHz each 2 phase 1 ch 30 kHz with single phase 4 chs 50 kHz each 2 phase 2 chs 25 kHz each 15 8 e N E d Transistor D E E HEEE 2 chs speed 1 ch C30 C60 4 chs High speed 2 chs medium speed 2 chs Pulse With high speed 2 chs 100 kHz each For linear interpolation composite speed 100 kHz With medium speed 2 chs 20 kHz each For linear interpolation composite Pulse speed 20 kHz output PWM output Input of main unit PWM Note4 High speed 1 5 Hz to 41 7 kHz Medium speed 1 5 Hz to 15 6 kHz 1000 resolution 12 5 kHz or less 100 resolution over 12 5 kHz C14 1 ch C30 C60 2 chs when 2 cassettes are installed Pulse I O cassette is Pulse with 1 ch 100 k
265. assette AFPX MRTO is installed Number of D Type of control unit insialledibatterfes Battery lifetime Suggested replacement interval Ct4 1 yearsormore 3years Note1 The battery lifetime is the value when no power at all is supplied Note2 Note that the lifetime may be shorter than the typical lifetime depending on the use conditions Note3 The battery is used for the battery detection circuit even when power is supplied Battery lifetime when the master memory cassette AFPX MRTC is not installed Number of Suggested conmo installed batteries ues replacement interval C14 Ct4 tpe 33yeasormoe 5yeas Note1 The battery lifetime is the value when no power at all is supplied Note2 Note that the lifetime may be shorter than the typical lifetime depending on the use conditions Note3 The battery is used for the battery detection circuit even when power is supplied Detection of battery error and time for replacement Special internal relays R9005 and R9006 will go on if the battery voltage drops Create a program to announce errors to the outside as necessary Two seconds after starting supplying power the battery voltage is checked When the system register No 4 Battery Error Alarm is enabled the ERR LED of the control unit will flash Although data will be retained for about a week after the detection of battery error without power the battery should
266. ata Reception of data is controlled by turning the reception done flags R9038 R9048 on and off The received data is stored in the receive buffer specified in the system register Data can be received when F159 MTRN turns the reception done flag off When the reception of the data is completed the terminator is received the reception done flag turns on and subsequently receiving data is prohibited To receive the next data execute the F159 MTRN instruction and turn the reception done flag off to clear the number of received bytes to O To receive data continuously without sending data clear the number of transmitted bytes to 0 set n to KO and then execute the F159 MTRN instruction P Reference Programming Manual ARCT1F313E gt Binary communication Selecting STX not exist for the header and None for the terminator in the general purpose serial communication enables the binary communication Sending data Sends the data of bytes to be specified Receiving data Check the No of bytes received before the process At that time the reception done flag does not work 7 38 Sending data to external devices Communication with external devices is handled through the data registers Data to be output is stored in the data register used as the send buffer DT and when the F159 MTRN instruction is executed the data is output from the COM port Data Data regendis Data iramimission using Aig
267. ating a new file or select it from PLC Type Setting under System Setting in the menu bar k P Fleri ie Dicas A WEE TE Depa Paus Boat TP cwret FP iri E ene WIDE w FLEGTARK 4 Alger raider TOGHIBA e Si M Hika PLU i AS PLC Select Unit Setting under System Setting in the menu bar click the IP Address Setting tab to set the IP address of GV Ducit EIE Mi pamm ackbah Dope Siete Meds Dente Ersem oed ng IP Addis fait amp TF Fides 12 7 Modd 7 _ lori Ser Tias n5 um rem f kernal emery 7 111 Select Comm Parameter under System Setting in the menu bar and select FP series Ethernet TCP IP Then click the Detail tab and select 1 n for the connection to set the local number Comm Parameter x Marl Detail Comacin fi H TEO Comm Er Handling E i Step ae J y Code Text Process m LSB t r HSR 6 158 Select Comm Parameter under System Setting in the menu bar and select Network Table Setting Ethernet to open the screen to edit the network The network table number corresponds to the unit
268. ation RE areafirst No connection information Setting range 3000 to 12000 Network information notification Network information confirmation Connection information confirmation Destination unit No and A command is transmitted to the IP address corresponding to IP address is the unit number specified Unit No Select a unit number Invalid Can be selected from the range of 1 to 99 IP address Set an IP address 192 168 1 100 When the power turns on the network information will be Invalid notified to the FP X When using the computer link and client the network Invalid information can be confirmed When using the computer link and server the connection information can be confirmed from the LAN side TONO Invalid 5000 ms 7 85 7 7 5 Communication Mode 1 Computer Link Ethernet The supplement is described below to perform Ethernet communication by the computer link Overview Compuler FP X Cammanrd Response message e Communication is conducted between a computer and a PLC using Ethernet by the computer link e Remote programming and monitoring is possible via LAN line by using a programming tool such as FPWIN GR Outline of operation e Establish connection between a computer and the FP X e In that case the connected computer is called Client and the connected FP X is called Server After connection establishment communication via TCP IP is conducted
269. ation cassette AFPX COM5 FP X communication cassette AFPX COM6 FP X Analog output cassette AFPX DA2 FP X Analog I O cassette AFPX A21 FP X Thermocouple cassette AFPX TC2 cassette AFPX IN4T3 1 409 4 Jan 2008 5 Edition ARCT1FA409E 5 Oct 2008 6 Edition ARCT1F409E 6 Dec 2008 7 Edition ARCT1F409E 7 Feb 2009 8 Edition ARCT1F409E 8 Feb 2010 9 Edition New product addition FP X RTD cassette AFPX RTD2 ARCT1F409E 9 Sept 2011 10 Edition Error correction Change of corporate name Please contact Panasonic Electric Works SUNX Co Ltd m Overseas Sales Division Head Office 2431 1 Ushiyama cho Kasugai shi Aichi 486 0901 Japan m Telephone 81 568 33 7861 m Facsimile 81 568 33 8591 panasonic electric works net sunx Europe Headquarter Panasonic Electric Works Europe AG m Head Office Rudolf Diesel Ring 2 D 83607 Holzkirchen Germany m Telephone 49 8024 648 0 US Headquarter Panasonic Electric Works Corporation of America m Head Office 629 Central Avenue New Providence New Jersey 07974 USA m Telephone 1 908 464 3550 O Panasonic Electric Works SUNX Co Ltd 2011 ARCT 1FAO9E 9
270. ation instructions F20 to F38 as operation in the PLC takes place in binary Input from a digital switch Use the BCD to BIN conversion instruction F81 Digital switch 7 8 BCD Conversion 1 usingF81 BIN instruction Data input into the FLC BCD data Datla which can be processed in ihe PLC BIN data Converted to 1992 i ir de cimal dala Output to a 7 segment display with decoder Use the BIN to BCD conversion instruction F80 Bi Conversion PLC using 280 BOO instruction T segment Tara display Data processed in p 0000 Data autput from FLC BCD data 14 4 14 3 Handling Index Registers 14 3 1 Index Registers e Like other registers index registers have 14 points IO to ID for reading and writing 16 bit data e Use an index register to indirectly specify a memory area number This is also called index modification Example Transferring the contents of data register DT100 to the number specified by the contents of an index register RO DT 100 l0DTO Base memory area In this example the number of the destination data register varies depending on the contents of 10 with acting as a base For example when 10 contains K10 the destination will be DT10 and when 10 is K20 the destination will be DT20 e n this way index registers allow the specification of multiple memory areas with a single instruction and
271. ations and Restricted Items 10 2 1 Specifications High speed counter function High speed counter by the input of the main unit Memory area being used Performance specifications y g Maximum Channel No Control Elapsed Target Minimum input t counting flag value area value area pulse width speed 2 oso 1 DT90312 DT90314 30 3M Decremental DT90320 DT90322 09092 0182922 0790324 0790326 Rav16 Broosss DT90328 DT90330 x jme DT90329 DT90331 DT90300 DT90302 X2 DT90308 DT90310 2 phase input X3 DT90309 DT90311 100 us 5 kHz 4 DT90316 DT90318 X6 DT90324 DT90326 Related instructions FO MV High speed counter control F1 DMV Read write of elapsed value of high speed counter F166 HC15 Target value match on F167 CH1R Target value match off Note1 A Reference For information on minimum input pulse width 10 3 3 Minimum Input Pulse Width Note2 When using the high speed counter of the main unit only 10 4 High speed counter when using pulse I O cassette AFPX PLS Memory area being used Channel No D Control psu Deko pat EUIS Maximum Note1 flag EE width No2 counting speed DT 90332 DT 90334 mare DT 90333 DT90335 DT90336 DT90338 Sibi ane 0790337 0790339 6 25 channels 80 kHz eee moii 0790340 DT90342 100 us Single phase 4 DT90341 DT90343 channels 50 kHz R911B R9118 R911A 2 phas
272. be replaced as soon as possible Note lf a week has passed without power after the special internal relays R9005 and R9006 turned on or the ERR LED flashed retained memory data may be lost Regardless of how much time has passed after the detection of battery error supply power to the control unit for more than two minutes before replacing the battery Special internal relays R9005 and R9006 will be on when a battery error is detected regardless of the setting of system register No 4 5 28 5 10 Safety Measures 5 10 1 Safety Measures Precautions regarding system design In certain applications malfunction may occur for the following reasons e Power on timing differences between the PLC system and input output or mechanical power apparatus e Response time lag when a momentary power drop occurs e Abnormality in the PLC unit external power supply or other devices In order to prevent a malfunction resulting in system shutdown choose the adequate safety measures listed in the following Interlock circuit When a motor clockwise counter clockwise operation is controlled provide an interlock circuit externally Emergency stop circuit Provide an emergency stop circuit to the PLC externally to turn off the power supply of the output device Start up sequence The PLC should be operated after all of the outside devices are energized To keep this sequence the following measures are recommended e urn on the PLC wi
273. bed ammpanent speed be careful Seq 3X8 When ssnullaneously a high speed counter periodical interrupt or PLC ank d mo set lo 60 kHz higher intial speed is set equal io maximum speed pulses will be output with na accelerabon decelerpiian Composite speed Initial speed 30 kHz or less compose speed 10 make the component speed of each axis becomae1 5 Hz or hsgher 10 44 ed Accaleration Deceleration time ms K canstant agde If thi amp i8 amp will b output for the initial composite as is ah Target value Movement amount K 8388608 lo K8388607 Infinite feeding is not available When operating only ane axis In incremental mode set the target value for the axis which will be not be b In absolute moda sat tha target value for the axis which will not be operated the same as the current value Infinite feeding is not available during the linear interpolation control 5 Component speed Initial speed and max speed of each axis This is stored as 2 words in real numbers type X axis com _ composite spesexd x e iaa dae X axis movement amount Y axis movement amaunt Camposite speed Initial speedy Set to 30KHz ar less Example Even if the initial speed is connected see 3 6 Ihe calculation value wall be stored as is an he operation result storage 6 Frequency range The system automatically selects the
274. ber of points per 28 common which are simulta neously 43 55 Ambient temperature 2 6 Terminal Layout 2 6 1 Relay Type AFPX C14R AFPX C14RD AC power supply Aciation oiai iaminn and COM terminals YO C0 Y2 c2 Yolo vs Qutput lerma ale supply terminais ipt AFPX C30R AC power supply terminals Input Input terminals Li 3 a lt 1 132222221 i a L N COM x1 x3 xs xz XD XF B Relation betwee put tei Is and COM t a Eng Yi __ C1 Y2 to Y5 C2 vo v1 v2 ca vr Yo YA YC vetovo 24v col c1 C2 v3 vs YB YD YAto YD Service power Oulpul feminals supply terminals for input output AFPX C30RD DC power supply ong input irina bebwern output terminals and COM terminals YO CO yi Ci Y2 to Y5 lo A lo YD Ca Not used Ouipul benminal 2 20 yes E rai Input terminals 1 Mol ua terminals 2 gf LUN EES Coe Tx Pad EXE TRA RET XE erererspsbererer el Zl alas m
275. between Security Setting and Transmission Status of FP X master memory cassette is installed Security not Uploading 4 digit and 8 digit specified disabled passwords Transmission from the internal A N A A memory to master memory Transmission from the master i A A A memory to internal memory Available N A Available 12 6 12 2 4 Handling of Master Memories Created with Different Models PLC that created master memory Ry type Tr type C14 C60 C60 E25 E25 E25 Installed Can be installed and operated Can be installed depending on the program capacity E25 Master memory model unmatch error Note1 If the E25 occurs the mode will not be the RUN Also the transfer operation from the master memory to the internal memory of the controller will not be executed The transfer operation from the internal memory of the controller to the master memory can be executed even if the E25 occurs Note2 If the version of the Ry type is older than Ver2 0 the E26 User s ROM error is detected not the E25 Note3 Use the tool software to execute the program conversion between different models 12 7 12 3 P13 ICWT Instruction Data registers of 32765 words can be stored and used in the built in ROM F ROM data area of the FP X control unit using the P13 ICWT instruction However note the followings for the use 1 Restrictions on the number of writing Writing can be performed within 10000 times If wr
276. ble DT100 Control code 1 K1 DT101 Duty 2 50 1 Specify the control code by setting the K constant Resolution of 1000 Resolution of 100 Period ms 0 02 0 96 10 51 2 specification of duty specify using K constant If the control code is KO to K19 the duty is KO to K999 0 096 to 99 9 If the control code is K20 to K24 the duty is KO to K990 096 to 99 Values are specified in units of 1 K10 digits behind the decimal point are rounded off Note e f a value outside the specified range is written to the duty area while the instruction is being executed a frequency corrected to the maximum value is output If written when instruction execution is started an operation error is occurred 10 52 Chapter 11 Security Functions 11 1 Type of Security Functions There are mainly three functions as the security function of the FP X It is possible to rewrite data during any of these functions is being used 1 Password protect function It is used to restrict the access to the programs in the FP X from the programming tool by setting a password Writing and reading ladder programs or system registers will be unperformable by setting a password and setting to the protect mode There are two types of passwords as below e 4 digit password 4 characters of 16 characters that are 0 to 9 and A to F can be used e 8 digit password A maximum of 8 English one byte characters case sensitive and sym
277. bnet mask 255 255 255 0 the spproprisim IF settings Default gateway 192 168 1 1 Dire P odd doe c Note The IP address of a computer is an example fr Lipe iha lemen Set the IP addresses of the computer and addii ioe 169 1 100 communication cassette AFPX COM5 Por m 55 ms 25 0 according to the network environment to be Deni osea Ld used He doller LINES erm DMS berate DNS rem 7 90 7 7 7 1 N Communication Computer Link Ethernet Overview A computer is connected respective PLCs through Ethernet The computer and the PLC communicate via commands and responses The computer sends a command specifying the destination IP address and the PLC with that IP address sends a response back to the computer It is no problem if the unit number of the PLC overlaps with other PLCs FP X address Computer Te FP X address B HUB 2 Em w m m m 1 aff m 1 N Communication setting Computer link Ethernet The settings for the FP X system register and communication cassette AFPX COM5 are the same as the settings for the connection computer link Ethernet by a 1 1 communication However set the IP address for a FP X not to overlap with other FP X units 1 91 7 7 8 MEWTOCOL Master Communication Setting Ver 1 10 For using as the MEWTOCOL master set the AFPX COMS5 to the computer link and client Also specify
278. bols can be used 2 Upload protection Ladder programs or system registers cannot be uploaded from the FP X by setting that the program is not uploaded As transferring programs to the master memory cassette as well as the programming tool will be unperformable it ensures higher security 3 Password protect function and upload protection for FP memory loader Those functions are available only when using the FP X V2 5 or later FP memory loader V2 0 or later and FPWIN GR V2 8 or later and when setting a 8 digit password g Reference lt 11 4 Setting Function for FP Memory Loader gt The state of the security can be checked at two displays of the programming tool FPWIN GR 1 Select Online Edit Mode under the Online on the menu bar or press the CTRL and F2 keys at the same time to switch to the Online screen 2 Select Security information or Set PLC Password under Tool on the menu bar The following displays will be shown Security information dialog box Set PLC Password dialog box Security information Untitled Sel PLC Chea tot 17 pm FLC Home p Howe LEE Diti Passed rk rud oi Upload Available seqy courts 3 cuni Parca Password Password i not set number 3 FF M Load Loader option status Hur cs Download to versions older than Version 2 5 perabon Hoek Allow
279. cate pem H mede Geanearal purpose senal communication Cammuniacatimn mode Compute Data area read command Value of spacifiad data registar e When the data area read command 960122 RDDO0O0O000 00001 C is sent from the FP X side the values of the data register of the PLC connected to the system are sent as a response For example if the value K100 is stored in DTO and the value K200 is stored in DT1 of the PLC 01 RD6400C8006F is sent as a response to the command If there is an error 9601 0O is returned OO is the error code e In addition to data area read and write commands MEWTOCOL COM also provides contact area read and write as well as many other commands System register settings of FP series PLCs FPO side In the default settings the COM port is set not to be used For 1 1 general purpose serial communication the system registers should be set as shown below Communication format settings for FP series PLC FPO side No Set Value No 412 Selection of communication mode for COM port Computer link Communication format for COM port Data length 8 bits Parity check Odd Stop bit 1 bit Terminator CR Header STX not exist Note These settings should be the same as the settings of the connected FP X No 414 Baud rate setting for COM port 19200 bps 7 49 Connec
280. ception has completed or not 3 When an F159 MTRN instruction is executed the reception done flag R9038 R9048 turns off except the case when the terminator has been set to None the number of received bytes is cleared and subsequent data is stored in order from the lower order byte For repeated reception of data perform the following steps 1 Receive data 2 Reception done R9038 R9048 on reception prohibited 3 Process received data 4 Execute F159 MTRN R9038 R9048 off reception possible 5 Receive subsequent data Prepare for reception R _ 2 e The reception done flag 9038 R9048 turns on when 380 data reception from the external device is completed Reception of any further data is prohibited To repeatedly perform only reception specify KO e o receive subsequent data you must execute the F159 acc rot EPOD MTRN instruction to turn off the reception done flag tran amp mission 16 performed with byte number specification R9038 R9048 Key Point e The contact numbers in parentheses refer to COM2 port 1 42 Data to be sent received with FP X Remember the following when accessing data in the FP X send and receive buffers e f a header has been chosen in the communication format settings the code STX H02 will automatically be added at the beginning of the data begin sent e he data without the Code STX at the reception is stored in the
281. ch are actually used differ depending on the cassettes and units Expansion 4th unit X600 to X69F WX60 to WX69 Y600 to Y69F WY60 to WY69 Regarding I O number e Specifying X and Y numbers On the FP X and the FPO the same numbers are used for input and output Example toh The same numbers are used for input and output e Expression of numbers for input output relays Input relay X and output relay Y are expressed as a combination of decimal and hexadecimal numbers as shown below x Decimal JT 2 3 9 Hexadecimal he edg 9AB F e Slot No Slot No is the number indicating the installing position of the cassette which is used to generate programs by the add on cassette 4 2 4 2 Allocation of FP X Control Unit The I O allocation of FP X control unit is fixed numbers Type of control unit Number of allocation number Input 8 points to X7 FP X C14 control unit Output 6 points YO to Y5 Input 16 points to uni C30 control unit Output 14 points YO to YD XO to XF Input 32 points X10 to X1F FP X C60 control unit m YO to YD p Y10 to Y1D 4 3 FPO Expansion Unit Allocation The FP X expansion unit is installed on the right side of the FP X control unit I O numbers when installed as the first expansion unit Type of expansion unit Number of allocation number Input 8 points X300 to X307 FP X E16 expansion I O unit Output 8 points Y30
282. contents of the data table that starts with S Outputs the pulses from the specified channel according to the data table specified by S Pulse output with channel specification Selectable data table control Pulses are output from channel in accordance with the designated data table so that the path to the target position forms a straight line Pulses are output from channel in accordance with the designated data table so that F175 Pulse output Linear interpolation F176 Pulse output Circular interpolation the path to the target position forms an arc Available 2 Not available Not available partially 1 The elapsed value area differs depending on used channels 2 This instruction is available for FPX C32T2 C28P2 C32T2H and C28P2H FP2SH FP10SH 17 67 FP2SH FP10SH Boolean Description rand Screen display instructions F180 FP e screen SCR 1 S2 Register the screen displayed on display S3 S4 the FP e registration F181 FP e screen S Specify the screen to be displayed ER p pem e switching Basic function instruction F182 Time FILTR 1 S2 Executes the filter processing for constant S3 D the specified input ac 3 x x processing EN timer 32 bit R900D after 7 4 0 01 s x set value Data transfer instructions TE mer me Se Romae mo P190 data move PMV3 S3 D ss o EET EE EE M data move PDMV3 S3 D 52
283. control S3 D When 1 lt S3 or 52 3 gt 0 1 16 bit data Available 2 Not available Not available partially 1 This instruction is only available for FP e Ver 1 2 or later 2 This instruction is only available for FP X Ver 2 0 or later and FPX Ver 3 10 or later 17 70 FP2SH FP10SH rand F286 Upper and DLIMT 1 2 When 1 1 S1 gt S3 1 S3 S171 P286 lower limit PDLIMT S3 D 1 gt D 1 D control When S27 1 gt 53 1 S3 S2 1 32 bit data 2 gt 0 1 D When 1 1 S1 lt or 3 1 S3 lt or 52 1 52 S3 1 3 gt 0 1 D F287 Deadband BAND 1 52 When 51 gt 53 S3 S1 D P287 control PBAND S3 D When 52 lt 53 S3 825D 10 4 16 bit data When 1 lt S3 lt or S2 05D F288 Deadband DBAND 1 S2 When S1 1 S1 gt S3 1 S3 S3 1 P288 control PDBAND S3 D 53 51 1 S1 gt D 1 D 32 bit data When 52 1 2 lt 3 1 S3 S3 1 53 52 1 S2 5 D 1 D When S171 S1 lt or S341 S3 or 8241 52 0 0 1 D Zone control 1 S2 When S3 0 3 1 gt 0 el Lal When 3 gt 0 3 S2 D Zone control 3 When 3 1 3 lt 0 53 1 P290 32 bit data PDZONE 53 51 1 S1 5 D 1 D When 53 1 3 0 02S D 1 D When 3 1 S3 gt 0 S341 53 52 1 2 gt 0 1 D BCD type real number operation instructions 0990000 P300 operation PBSIN m e j BGD BCOS COS S1 1 1 gt
284. ctricity Before touching the unit always touch a grounded piece of metal in order to discharge static electricity In dry locations excessive static electricity can cause problems Measures regarding heat discharge e Always install the unit orientated with the tool port facing outward on the bottom in order to prevent the generation of heat Upside down Horizontal installation Installation getting of PLC main unit the DIN rail upright e Do not install the unit above devices which generate heat such heaters transformers or large scale resistors 5 2 Installation space e eave at least 50mm of space between the wiring ducts of the unit and other devices to allow heat radiation and unit replacement 5D pmi or mene SU mm er rmore e Maintain at least 100mm of space between devices to avoid adverse affects from noise and heat when installing a device or panel door to the front of the PLC unit 1DD mm Panel daos PLC iml Chay e Leave at least 100mm of space open from the front surface of the control unit in order to allow room for programming tool connections and wiring 5 1 2 Installation and Removal Attachment to DIN rail and removal from DIN rail Can be simply attached to DIN rail Procedure of installation method 1 Fit the upper hook of the unit onto the DIN rail 2 Without moving the upper hook press on the lower hook to fit the unit into position Procedure of removal meth
285. cut Setting range 0 to 1800 s When 0 is set the connection will ry time not be cut Ret When failed in the connection with a destination device 15 Setting range 0 to 1800 s Note1 Set when the server mode has been selected for the action mode Note2 Set when the client mode has been selected for the action mode Note3 As the communication between the FP X and AFPX COM5 is performed using serial communication the baud rate for them should be set to the same value 7 84 Option setting y em Response timeout When selecting the Set the wait time for the response computer link only This is the code for the AFPX COM5 to confirm the end of the message data to be received from the FP X CR CR LF or NONE can be selected Reception continues until the end of the message CR CR LF will be received When selecting NONE the end code is not confirmed Set the wait time for the end code If the next message data is not received within the judgment time without termination ms after the last received message data the AFPX COM5 judges that is no termination and Judgment time without performs the following operation termination End code when selecting CR CR LF The received message data is discarded For TCP the connection is disconnected End code when selecting NONE The message data is transmitted to the connected destination Set the area of DT to be used for the network information and Inform
286. d being processed is congested 160 Parameter error Content of specified parameter does not exist or cannot be used There was a mistake in the contact data area data number Data error designation size designation range or format designation Registration over Operation was does when number of registrations was exceeded error or when there was no registration PC command that cannot be processed was executed during RUN PC mode error MA Link system error Link system error 17 87 Description An abnormality occurred when loading RAM to ROM IC memory card There may be a problem with the ROM or IC memory card When loading the specified contents exceeded the capacity Write error occurs ROM or IC memory card is not installed ROM or IC memory card does not conform to specifications ROM or IC memory card board is not installed A program or system register write operation was executed when Protect error the protect mode password setting or DIP switch etc or ROM operation mode was being used There was an error in the code format of the address data Address error Also when exceeded or insufficient of address data there was a mistake in the range designation Cannot be read because there is no program in the program area or the memory contains an error Or reading was attempted of data that was not registered When inputting with programming tool software editing of an Rewrite during RUN inst
287. d the dala alonad in tha send buffer ABCDEFGH 1 39 Explanation of data table The data table for transmission starts at the data register specified in S At the beginning of transmission the Of bytes to be Transmstbecd is sis Var 20 ef later Transmitted data A area he circled numbers irdicate the order of transmission e Use an FO MV or F95 ASC instruction to write the data to be transmitted to the transmission data storage area specified in S Transmission process When the execution condition of the F159 MTRN instruction turns on and the transmission done flag R9039 R9049 is on operation is as follows 1 N is preset in S The reception done flag R9038 R90468 is turned off and the reception data number is cleared to O 2 The set data is transmitted in order from the lower order byte in S 1 of the table e During transmission the transmission done flag R9039 R9049 turns off e f system register 413 or 414 is set to header start code with STX the header is automatically added to the beginning of the data e he terminator end code specified in system register 413 or 414 is automatically added to the end of the data Io DT OTI FTSBIMTEN execubon Durs During this interval the F158 MTRN cannot be execubed 3 When all of the specified quantity of data has been transmitted the S value is cleared to 0 and the transmission done
288. d to the plus terminal and minus terminal of the RS485 use the wires of the same cross sectional area which is 0 5 mm 5 24 5 9 Handling of Backup Battery 5 9 1 What Backup Battery Does Install an optional backup battery when the hold area is insufficient in the initial state or for using the clock calender function Areas backed up with the battery Classification Hold area when Hold area when battery is not installed battery is installed Timer and counter Hold areas or non Elapsed value area hold vius ni Internal relay R2480 to R255F n A by setting the DT12230 to DT12284 system registers Data register C30 C60 DT32710 to DT32764 No 6 to No 13 using E tool All points can Link relay be also held register Type of backup battery Sold separately Operation memory Name Battery Product No AFPX BATT Installable number of batteries As for FP X the installable number of batteries varies depending on the types of the control unit C60 C14 5 25 5 9 2 Settings of Battery Error Alarm and Hold Area Setting of the battery error alarm Setting the battery error alarm enables you to monitor the remaining backup battery level By default the battery error alarm is set to off in the system register settings For using the battery check the box of the system register No 4 Alarm Battery Error of the control unit ELE Gonfiguration Untitl
289. deviation counter clear Direction output ON and deviaban counter clear 2 Speed Frequency Hz K constant Frequency range 1 5 Hz to 9 8 kHz K1 to K9800 unit Hz Max error near 9 8 KHZ approx 0 9 kHz Set K1 to specify 1 5 Hz 1 48Hz t 100 kHz to K100000 unit Hz error near 100 kHz approx 3 kHz Duty 1 4 1s recommended for this range 2 181Hzto 100 kHz K191 to K100000 unit Hz Max error near 100 kHz approx 0 8 kHz Duty 1 4 is recommended for this range Initial speed Set 30 kHz or less However for the medium speed channels CH and CH3 of the Tr type can be set to maximum of 20000 Hz 3 Aceleration deceleration time ms K constant With 30 steps K30 to K32760 Specify by 30 steps 5 With 60 steps K O ta K32760 Specify by G0 steps 5 4 5 9 34 Deviation counter clear signal ms K constant Output tima of deviation counter clear signal is specified 0 5 me to 100 me KO to K100 Set value and error 0 5 me or less amp Specdy when not useng or when spechying 0 5 rris Deviation counter clear signal is allocated in 102 for CHO and in Y 20 for CH1 When the time is not specified in 30 ms units nor 60 ms units it will be automatically corrected to the multipla value larger value of 30 ms or 60 ms Home return operation modes There are two operation modes for a home return with the FP X Type a
290. dless the setting of stop bit Note2 The RS485 of the COM2 port is not available when using the USB port of the FP X 7 12 7 1 4 Examples of Connection AFPX COM1 1 channel 5 wire RS232C COMI Destination device 0 sese 0_ Receive data E RE Request to Send i Signal Ground Note When the device to connect is a three wire type the RS of the COM 1 port should be connected to the CS AFPX COM2 2 channel 3 wire RS232C COM 2 Destination device 1 Bo NER fa 52 2 SD Destination device 2 Signal name _ RD _ Receive Daia SD SendDaa 1 channel RS485 RS422 Using RS485 COM 3 device DITE S Transmission ine 8 rensmission ine t Notused Need To other device Using RS422 COM 3 Destination device HE Tee REI He Receive Receive Data _ E Not used Note There are several names for the signal names of RS422 Confirm with the instruction manuals for each device 7 13 1 channel RS485 and 1 channel 3 wire 5232 COM 4 Destination device 1 Pinname Signal Abbe Signal name Transmission line gt Transmission line Transmission line RD Receive Data SG 20 Signal Ground To other device Destination device 2 AFPX COMb5
291. e C C14TD Ma restriction C30TD Number of 14 parts per 15 COTM a which simulta nemm on ES ES Ambient temperature C CGOTD Humber al 44 poit commen whith nre 18 Metush on at B5 Ambient Ampiraturm 1 Limitations on number of simultaneous output on points Configuration 1 Stand alone COM5 Number od ponts par Cin g which are simulta necushy on 3 Bl Ambient temperature 037 CsoT Humber af ponts 14 COCHE wnich are netus an Ambient CC Humber pomis 28 commen which are simuia 1 C14TD Ma restriction C30TD Humber af e ponts 14 pm Pal TETT which n TA simultp BS Ambient temperature iC CenTD Humber gl pomis 28 commen which ar amp aL simula d Et AME C 2 5 5 Transistor Tr Type NPN With AFPX DA2 and A21 Current Output Keep the number of points which are simultaneously on within the following range as determined by the ambient temperature Product number _ Limitations on number of _ Limitations on number of simultaneous input on points simultaneous output on points AFPX C14T AFPX C30T AFPX C60T AFPX C14TD AFPX C30TD AFPX C60TD Uae Of pont per Common vhi ac
292. e 2 phase input One input Direction distinction DT90344 DT90346 DT90345 DT90347 Related instructions DT90332 DT90334 DT90333 DT90335 16 7 us channel 30 kHz 2 phase 2 DT90340 DT90342 100 us re DT90341 DT90343 FO MV High speed counter control F1 DMV Read write of elapsed value of high speed counter F166 HC15 Target value match on F167 CH1R Target value match off Note1 The values in parentheses are for the reset input The reset input X102 can be set to either CH8 CH9 The reset input X202 can be set to either CHA or CHB Note2 Reference For information on minimum input pulse width lt 10 3 3 Minimum Input Pulse Width gt Note3 When using the AFPX PLS only Note4 CHA CHB can be used when 2 units of AFPX PLS are installed 10 5 Pulse output function Pulse output when using pulse I O cassette AFPX PLS Input output contact number used Memory area used High speed gin Near ation Elapsed counter channel home Control counter value No input flag clear Note3 area output DT90052 DT90348 DT90350 CHO Y100 Y101 Y102 X102 lt bitd gt DT90349 DT90351 Indepen cd DT90052 DT90352 DT90354 Y200 Y201 Y202 X202 apid R911D DT90353 DT90355 DT90348 DT90350 Inter linear Y100 Y101 is 1 DT90052 DT90349 DT90351 polation Y200 Y201 Note1 Note1 lt bit4 gt DT90352 DT90354 DT90353 DT90355 Max output frequency Using one ch Max 100 kHz Using two chs Max
293. e Ei Tid o 3740 51 iz Ambient temperature C307 Humber of 18 pois pei OTT which are 10 simulta neously on do ES AuTi brent blempetr ture COT Humber al 45 ports commen which are 12 n t FE BS Aiit bempercature Ll C14TD Ma restriction Number 1j poms per 15 comme which ar simulta nemh on amp Pee TEE Tht Am moa Ambient temperature CGOTD Humber al 45 part per commen whith are 18 T netsh a ES Ambient bempercalure i Configuration Number od ponts pai DA2 Common g 2 A21 which are simulta 8 A21 A21 TODS orn DA2 DA2 DA2 A21 Pmbiuent T rmperarture L E C30T Mumber af pois gu 14 COT which ate c eimilta Up to 2 channels can be used for the current output BS Ambil bemnperabune oC Humber of ponts 28 Ten which are 4040 5 Ambient 763 C14TD Ma restriction C30TD Humber al pois 14 Gino 12 wich zaitia E an f EE Ambil bemperabure oC CeoTD Number of ponts 28 Common which are simulta necrsiy on 42 Amen temperature 6 2 15 2 5 6 Transistor Tr Type NPN With AFPX DA2 and A21 Voltage Output Keep the number of points which are simultaneously on within the
294. e 1 48 Hz 16 100 kHz Range 2 191 Hz to 100 kHz If maximum speed 9800 Hz IF speed lt 1 5 Hz initial speed is corrected to 1 5 Hz and range it selected If initial speed 1 5 Hz range is selected b If 9600 Hz lt maximum speed 100000 Hz if initial spaed 48 Hz initial speed is corrected to 48 Hz and range is selected If 48 Hz 5 initial speed lt 181 Hz range 1 is selected If initial speed 191 Hz range 2 is selected 7 Number of acceleration deceleration steps The system automatically calculates the number of acceleration decelaration steps in the range 0 to 60 steps If the oepration result is D pulses are output for the initial speed composite speed as is with na acceleraticn deceleration The number of acceleration deceleration steps is found usang the formula acceleratian decelaration time m amp x component initial speed Hz Example With incremental initial speed 300 Hz max speed 5 kHz acceleration deceleration time 0 5 CHO target value 1000 target value 50 CHO componet _ 300 1000 _ initial sped Jr Sy 393626 H componet 00x50 _ initial 6 peed 508 CHO number of acceleratiaon deceleration steps 500x 107 x 288 6265 147 8 c 60 steps CH1 number of accaleration daceleration steps 500 x 1073 x 14 981 7 4 gt 7 steps Note Precaution for tha specification of composite speed initial speed If each component speed initial
295. e add on cassette gt gt gt gt gt 1 4 Programming Tools 1 4 1 Tools Needed for Programming 1 Programming tool software D Programming The tool software can also be used with the FP eal software series FPWIN Pro Ver 6 or FPWIN GR Ver 2 Windows software is used with FP X FPWIN GR Ver 1x NPST GR and FP Programmer cannot be used 2 PC connection cable he dedicated cable is available A commercial USB cable can be used for the connection for C30 C60 control unit Corngilar Lola 2 i PL connection cable 1 4 2 Software Environment and Suitable Cable Standard ladder diagram tool software FPWIN GR Ver 2 language menu Upgrade Windows XP AFPS10520R Note1 Ver 1 1 must be installed to install the upgrade version Hard disk Type of software OS Operating system Product No Windows 98 Full type wi M AFPS10520 FPWIN GR Ver 2 English 40MB or more version Windows Vista Windows Note2 Ver 2 0 can be upgraded to the latest version after Ver 2 1 free of charge at our web site http panasonic denko co jp ac e dl software list patch plc jsp Use the latest version Conforms to IEC61131 3 programming tool software FPWIN Pro Ver 6 Type of software OS Operating system Windows 2000 Eee Lus 100MB or more FPWINPROFENG English language menu Windows Vista Windows Note1 The small type and upgr
296. e are two ways to transfer data 1 Operation using the FPWIN GR Transferring is available in the PROG mode only 2 Automatic transfer when the PROG mode was changed to the RUN mode When the power supply turns on when started in the RUN mode Transferring using the FPWIN GR 1 Select Online Edit Mode under the Online on the menu bar or press the CTRL and F2 keys at the same time to switch to the Online screen 2 Select Internal memory Master memory under Tool on the menu bar Internal memory lt Master memory dialog box Internal memory Master Untillel Select either Internal memory gt Master s meny gt Made merae Emah memory or Master memory gt Internal C memp o perl mer E o me Bee memory he geogr and spitem had i in Tha andern frkmyong ol yall bee iarna bo ther rasis manmay Sa tha PLC cama be uplasded Select pem except or sorties And progr Commer DT T Transferring is available in the PROG mode only 12 5 Select the data to be simultaneously transferred with programs and registers Following three data can be transferred at the same time Internal memory Memory in the control unit Internal memory to Master memory Master memory to Internal memory _ Sets a master memory cassette to the upload protection setting Upload The control unit that data
297. e available only when the conditions of each item such as output method or No of channels are executed These values are not available if executing the HSC match ON OFF instruction other pulse I O process simultaneously or executing the interrupt program PWM output function PWM output when using CPU output Speca eutput Output frequenc counter contact used Related instructions channel No Control flag When resolution 1000 FO MV High speed counter 1 5 Hz to 12 5 kHz control 0 0 to 99 9 F1 DMV Read write of When resolution 100 elapsed value of high speed 15 6 kHz to 41 7 kHz counter 0 to 9996 F173 PWMH PWM output When resolution 1000 FO MV High speed counter 1 5 Hz to 12 5 kHz control 0 0 to 99 9 F1 DMV Read write of When resolution 100 elapsed value of high speed 15 6 kHz only counter 0 to 9996 F173 PWMH PWM output 9 5 9 2 2 Functions Used and Restrictions Simplified chart Maximum counting speed of High speed counter The maximum counting speed of the high speed counter varies according to No of channels to be used or the simultaneous use of the pulse output function Use the chart below as a guide Max counting speed Frequency kHz Combination with pulse output function No pulse output Combination of high speed counter Single phase high Single phase medium speed channels speed channels 2 phase 2 phase medium high
298. e buffer Werdi The number of e Specify the data registers in system register 416 to bytes received is stored in this area 419 5 e 1 w e The number of bytes of data received is stored in the 2 4 ag Reception data starting address of the receive buffer The initial value sinrage area ae The cireted numbers is 0 L T e Received data is stored the received data storage slorage 2n area in order from the lower order byte Reception process When the reception done flag R9038 R9048 is off operation takes place as follows when data is sent from an external device The R9038 R9048 flag is off during the first scan after RUN 1 Incoming data is stored in order from the lower order byte of the 2nd word area of the receive buffer Header and terminator start and end codes are not stored Beginning af reception Received data Al B T Kek UM e REOS 89048 Execution R10 3 hy Reception Reception 7189 Reoepltion is possible not possible is possible Ex cution of F158 2 When the terminator end code is received the reception done flag R9038 R9048 turns on Reception of any further data is prohibited When the terminator has been set to None the reception done flag does not turn on Check the number of received bytes to judge whether the re
299. e preceding the input of 4001 8 16 0 V to 10 V output Conversion characteristics graph V gmail range an i Culpul s PJ m e 1000 2000 SUL ANENE a Digital input value Table of D A converted values When exceeding the rated range Digital input value Analog output value Negative value Value preceding the input of a negative value Unchanged Value preceding the input of 4001 Each channel data is allocated as I O data as shown below Analog output cassette Installed slot No Output channel Cassette mounting part 1 Cassette mounting part 2 Slot 0 Slot 1 wo T Note e Use double core twisted pair shielded wires It is recommended to ground them However depending on the conditions of the external noise it may be better not to ground the shielding e Do not have the analog output wiring close to AC wires power wires or load DA part Internal block diagram A voltage amplifier and a current amplifier is connected in parallel to one DA converter IC Do not connect an analog device to the voltage output terminal and current output terminal of the same channel simultaneously Curent amplifier e alee Voltaga amplifier T p miero converter computer E E 8 17 8 3 4 Thermocouple Cassette Product No AFPX TC2 Nem O No of input points 2 channels cassette
300. e pulse cassetta A Note1 DT90337 Higher words HSC CH9 Note2 i The target value is set when A Target PONE WONGS instructions F166 15 and F167 HC1R DT90339 Higher words Counting area for input X3 A DT90340 Elapsed Lower words X3 X T fie e cassette A DT90341 Higher words HSC CHA Note2 The target value is set when A instructions F166 HC1S F167 1 DT90343 Higher words Counting area for input X4 of A DT90344 Elapsed Lower words cassette A Note1 A DT90345 Higher words HSC CHB Note2 The target value is set when A senes instructions F166 15 F167 1 ted DT90347 Higher words Note1 Writing in the elapsed value area is available by F1 DMV instruction only Writing in the target value area is available by F166 HC1S and F167 HC1R instructions only Note2 Available for the FP X Tr type only 17 44 D EBENE FP X A Available N A Not available MEN area for the pulse I O EN DT90348 Elapsed Lower words CHO YO 1 DT90349 Higher words A a PLS CHO The target value is set when Note DT L A A instructions F171 SPDH OA F172 PLSH F174 SPOH and F175 SPSH are A uA executed Counting area for the pulse I O Note DT 2 El L A A een ge CH1 Y2 J value DT90353
301. e pulse output In case of CHO DF JH FO MV H108 FO MV H100 In case of CH1 DF JH FO MV H1108 FO MV H1100 pro002 2190052 6190052 T 2190052 Z 0790052 0790052 0790052 0790052 In these programs the near home input is enabled in step 1 and 0 is entered just after that in step 2 to perform the preset operations The output counting value of the elapsed value area may be different from the input counting value of the motor side if the forced stop is executed by these programs 9 25 Key Point High speed counter pulse output control flag area of FP X Tr type B T UE e The area DT90052 for writing channels and control codes is allocated as shown in the left Channal specification figure HO to H3 CHO te CH3 e Control codes written with an FO MV instruction are stored by channel special ore Ty Seance data register DT90380 to DT90383 Note The output counting value of the elapsed Near home input 0 OFF 1 ON value area may be different from the input counting value of the motor side if the pulse output is stopped by the Continue stop of pulse output After the Count 0 Permit 1 Prohibit pulse output stops execute the home return Pulso output 0 Contnue 1 Stop Mote Sofware reser Of Mo 1 Yett Pulse output control code monitor area High speed counter Control code monitor area Channel No FP X Ry type FP
302. e return completes _ a d Home retur completes iem near hieme deoceleration sli _ EE Cor Fo wv Hno nrax 0 OH EOD DT 90052 1 s Fo My OT 90052 m m E near home deceleration amp tart H 1100 DT90052 Key Point As there is not interpolation function for the home return the home return should be executed for each channel After the home return for both channels is completed the positioning operation running program R40 turns off Pulse output diagram CHO Near home sensor Home sensor XO ON XB ON X4 OM 150 me 150 ms Hear home sensor Home sensor AQ QN x1 ON ON 9 5 PWM Output Function Pulse I O Cassette 9 5 1 Overview of PWM Output Function PWM output function With the F173 PWMH instruction the pulse width modulation output of the specified duty ratio is obtained System register setting When using the PWM output function set the channel corresponding to the system register 402 to PWM output Note The pulse I O cassette AFPX PLS cannot be used with the FP X Tr type 9 52 Instruction to be Used for PWM Output Function PWM Output Instruction F173 AB F0 MV Ki DT100 While X amp is in the on state a pulse with a period of 502 5 ms and duty ratio
303. e wait while the wizard searches Hardware Installation A The software you are installing for this hardware 210 USB Composite Device has not passed Windows Logo testing to verify its compatibility with Windows Tell me why this testing is important Continuing your installation of this software may impair or destabilize the correct operation of your system either immediately or in the future Microsoft strongly recommends that you stop this installation now and contact the hardware vendor for software that has passed Windows Logo testing Continue Anyway 5 The next message is shown and the installation of the USB driver completes Click Finish Found New Hardware Wizard Completing the Found New Hardware Wizard The wizard has finished installing the software for 210 USB Composite Device Click Finish to close the wizard 6 After that the PC recognizes the USB COM conversion driver automatically As the next message is shown select No not this time and click Next Found New Hardware Wizard Welcome to the Found New Hardware Wizard Windows will search for current and updated software by looking on your computer on the hardware installation CD or on the Windows Update Web site with your permission Read our privacy policy Can Windows connect to Windows Update to search for software Yes this time only Yes now and every time connect a device
304. ear interpolation function can be used in the combination of chO and ch1 or ch2 and ch3 i Positioning data table ai Positioning path Sething area with usar program Target value X axis CHO 5000 X axis CHO rin X axis CF J el Control code lt H constant HO OOOH EE eed Lap Operation Fixad 1 Bret result storage OT xis CH rats Duty 1 2 SO rg 171 corpore D Food J caleuimed due ax CHOIR Tere o 2 mode and thei accelerato deceleration steps am 00 incremantal CON axis hene Incremental pulsa and direcson loread offre on acc leratia deceleration 5t 28 OO Incremental pulse and duecsen onrmevera o TE Absolute CYC 12 Absolute pulse and drecton forward olfireverse on 13 Absolute pulse and drecten Toreard o 2 Composite speed initial speed Max speed Hz constant 1 5 Hz to 100 kHz K1 to K100000 However 1 5 Fee or an angle of D dag or 80 deg oriy Also Spec when specifying 1 5 He If the aged drops lower than the mammur Spied for each frequency range then the speed will booome the corrected component speed so be careful See 2 6 When simultanecusly using a high speed counter pernadecal intennupt ar PLC link do no set to BO kHz ar higher If inthal speed i amp set equal
305. ecedence in system register 400 and the CHB setting takes precedence in system register 401 Note3 CHA CHB CH1 input signals in system register 401 are the signals when the pulse 1 0 cassette AFPX PLS is installed in the cassette mounting part 2 Note4 If the operation mode setting for the pulse output CHO and CH1 is carried out it cannot be used as normal output When the operation mode for the pulse output CHO is set to 1 the reset input setting for the high speed counter CH8 and CH9 is invalid When the operation mode for the pulse output CH1 is set to 1 the reset input setting for the high speed counter CHA and CHB is invalid Note5 Upgrade FPWIN GR to Ver2 6 or higher version if the No of I O allocation is indicated with 1 digit number such as XO in the setting window No 400 and 401 of FPWIN GR 17 9 FP X Ry type ress CHO Cont roller input settings HSC Inter rupt pulse catch settings 17 10 High speed counter settings X0 to X7 Pulse catch input settings Interrupt input settings Do not set input XO as high speed counter CH1 Do not set input X1 as high speed counter CH2 Do not set input X2 as high speed counter CH3 Do not set input X3 as high speed counter CH4 Do not set input X4 as high speed counter CH5 Do not set input X5 as high speed counter CH6 Do not set input X6 as high speed counter CH7 Do not set input X7 as high speed counter Not
306. ecification of composite speed initial speed If each component speed initial speed of CHO and CH1 which is calculated using the following formula is not 1 5 kHz or higher ihe path may nol be linear iz 1 av Gd x 2 ex 41x CH ol which distance betwen the target value and the current value is short 21 CH of which distance betwen the target value and the current value is long 10 45 Sample program of interpolation control Wiring example FP X f ontrol unit Ry typo raburn start x i Posiieening stan X1 Q i 45 Emergency sinp pL OO 1 TI 1T ks vr HT ET B side 3 x UO exesotdio Sepp nic c ut ees Hoar home sirem x1 Meving table Henw iuro AME ne ee Common Pulse e gt Lornmemen Pulse output COV 101 2 3 cow vide T T s retur CHI A i FP X Pulsa LO cassette expansion 2 Hoar harm Sore Homme output Cy Pulss eutput COM Note When the stepping motor input is a 5 V optical coupler type connect a 2 1 2 W resistor with the R1 and a 2 1 2 W to 470 Q 2 W resistor with the R2 Table of allocation 10 46 Restrictions on positioning data setting e Designate settings for the target posit
307. ecifications No Product No FP X output cassette FP X output cassette FP X cassette FP X pulse I O Note2 cassette FP X master memory cassette 8 point transistor output NPN 6 point transistor output PNP 4 point DC input 3 point transistor output NPN 2 channel high speed counter 1 channel pulse output Master memory Clock Calendar From Y100 From Y200 From 100 From Y200 From X100 From Y100 From X200 From Y200 From X100 From Y100 From X200 From Y200 AFPX TR8 Note1 The I O numbers are the cassette mounting part 1 from X100 and Y100 and cassette mounting part 2 from X200 and Y200 i Reference 4 5 Allocation of FP X Add on Cassette Note2 The pulse I O cassette cannot be used with the Tr type 8 4 8 3 Specifications 8 3 1 FP X Analog Input Cassette Product No AFPX AD2 Specifications No of input points 2 channels cassette Voltage 0to 10V Input range to 20 mA Digital conversion value KO to K4000 Resolution 1 4000 12 bits Conversion speed 1 ms channel Total accuracy 1 F S or less 0 to 55 C Voltage 40 kQ Input impedance 125 0 3 to 15 V Absolute max rating 2to 30 mA Input protection Diode Insulation Non isolated between analog part and internal digital circuit part Note1 When the analog input values exceed the upper and lower limits the digital values maintain the upper and lower li
308. ecifications 20A or less 24 V DC at 25 C 3 12 Chapter 4 I O Allocation 4 1 Allocation FP X Control Unil paca ny 4 13 Expansonunt 2m Expanson unm 3nd Expanson ure Sth Expansen und AU Io X SF ts Yor do AGF S0 in Made xBD imo xa A TOOG ip X THEE Y300 te Y ASF to Y 59f 1000 te Y 1OSF mua gm E i t i i 1 i o n mw k i a i i I os us em EN t m m i Sw 0 Sid 1 af dum acu li gb th rp nbi qu og al TOG du X TSP A 2I SHE Wie 1 TSF Tau ta Control unit to X9F WXO to WX9 YO to Y9F WYO to WY9 Sage mounting part t 100 to WX10 to WX19 Y100 to Y19F WY10 to WY19 aaa mounting part 200 to X29F WX20 to WX29 Y200 to Y29F WY20 to WY29 Expansion 1st unit X300 to X39F WX30 to WX39 Y300 to Y39F WY30 to WY39 Expansion 2nd unit X400 to X49F WX40 to WX49 Y400 to Y49F WY40 to WY49 Expansion 3rd unit X500 to X59F WX50 to WX59 Y500 to Y59F WY50 to WY59 Expansion 5th unit X700 to X79F WX70 to WX79 Y700 to Y79F WY70 to WY79 Expansion 6th unit X800 to X89F WX80 to WX89 Y800 to Y89F WY80 to WY89 Expansion 7th unit X900 to X99F WX90 to WX99 Y900 to Y99F WY90 to WY99 Expansion 8th unit X1000 to X109F Y1000 to Y109F WX100 to WX109 WY100 to WY109 Note The ranges of the I O numbers whi
309. el Haold Maon hald 1 Hald Man hald 2 W 20 Disable settings Far duplicated output Mo 23 Stop when an 1 0 verification error occurs Pulse 10 cassette settings HSC PLS Controller input settings HSC Interrupt pulse catch settings 26 Stop when an operation error occurs Interrupt edge settings Time constant setting 1 of CPLI input Time constant setting 2 of CPU input Time constant setting 3 of CPU input Time constant setting 4 of CPU input Tool Port COMI Fort COM Port Cancel Initialize Help Settings of Hold area Non hold area The settings of the operation memory area such as data regiters and system registers No 6 to No 14 are necessary ELG Configuration Untitlel Hald Mon hald 2 No 5 Counter starting address 1008 10 1024 Achon an Error Time Link SV D D Link w U 1 Pulse 1 0 cassette settings HSC IPLS Controller input settings HSC Interrupt pulse catch settings No 8 Hold type area starting address for data reqisters 82710 10 32765 Interrupt edge settings Time constant setting 1 of CPU input Time constant setting 2 of CPL input No 14 Step Ladder hold Time constant setting 3 of CPU input Time constant setting 4 of CPH input Nod Leading edge differential during MC holds the previous value Taol Part I COM Part NOTICE In case of not using back up batterv eption ar battery exhaustion COM Fort we cant guarantee the hold area value Cancel Freee Initialize Help
310. elow The USB port is available in the default setting It is the same when the system registers are When USB port is not used When USB port is used 3 wire 1 channel 5232 AEFI ONN RS and CS control is not available 3 wire 1 channel 5232 AFPX COM2 3 wire 2 channel RS232C bie ad channel cannot besed initialized AFPX COM3 No restrictions 1 channel RS485 RS422 1 channel RS485 1 channel RS485 dac d 1 channel RS232C RS232C cannot be used Ethernet Ethernet NS 1 channel RS232C RS232C cannot be used AFPX COM6 2 channel RS485 1 channel RS485 Note There is no USB port for the C14 control unit e When multiple FP X are connected to one PC with the USB it cannot communicates with them simultaneously The PC can communication with only the FP X that was connected first and other FP X cannot communicate 6 22 Chapter 7 Communication Cassette 7 1 Functions and Types 7 1 1 Overview of Communication Cassette USB port 1030 7050 Communicahan cassette Option _ AFPX COM1 5 wire 1 channel RS232C AFPX COM 2 3 wire 2 channel RS232C AFPX COM3 1 channel RS485 R5422 AFPX COMMA 1 channel RS485 EEE NE ETE TATE J wire 1 channel RS232C Ethernet 3 wire 1 channel RS232C AFPX COMO 2 channal RS485 Tool port 852326 ic There are restrictions on the combination the USB port and communication cassette for C30 C60 only Re
311. ents of special data registers DT9131 to DT9137 and locate the abnormal slave station and recover the communication condition Selection of operation status using system register27 to continue operation set K1 to stop operation set KO In the unit on the slave station an abnormality such as missing unit abnormal intelligent unit was detected FP2 FP2SH and FP10SH Check the contents of special data registers DT90131 to DT90137 and locate the abnormal slave station and recover the slave condition Check the contents of special data registers DT9131 to DT9137 and locate the abnormal slave station and recover the slave condition Selection of operation status using system register28 to continue operation set 1 to stop operation set 0 The power supply for the expansion unit was turned on after the control unit Turn on the power supply for the expansion A unit at the same time or before the control unit is turned on The voltage of the backup battery lowered or the backup battery of control unit is not installed Check the installation of the backup battery and then replace battery if necessary By setting the system register 4 you can disregard this self diagnostic error gt 17 85 57 17 86 MEWNET F terminal station error MEWNET F update synchro nous error Multi CPU regis tration error CPU2 only IC memory card back
312. eplaced 2 250 V AC 2 30 V DC Rated trol it 6 A or less common 8 A or less common Output points per common 1 point common 2 points common 3 points common 4 points common Response time Approx 8 ms 20 million times or more Frequency of switching 180 times min Lifetime 100 thousand times or more Frequency of switching at the rated control Electrical capacity 20 times min Surge absorber Operating mode indicator LED display Note1 Resistance load Circuit diagram Internal circuit Reference 2 5 Limitations on Number of Simultaneous Input Output On Points 2 8 2 4 2 Transistor Tr Type NPN Output specifications C30 C60 nsulation method Output type Rated load voltage Allowable load voltage 4 75 to 26 4 V DC range Max load current Max inrush current Input points per 6 points Common 8 points Common 6 points Common common Off state leakage 1 or less current On state voltage drop 0 3 V DC or less 2 us or less YO to Y3 Load current at 15 mA or more 20 us or less C14 Y4 to Y5 C30 C60 Y4 to Y7 Load current at 15 mA or more 1 ms or less C14 None C30 C60 from Y8 8 us or less YO to Load current at 15 mA or more 30 us or less C14 Y4 to Y5 C30 C60 Y4 to Y7 Load current at 15 mA or more 1 ms or less C14 None C30 C60 from Y8 Voltage 21 6to 26 4 V DC YOto Y5 Y7 YBto YD Y1i0to Y17 Y18to Y1D
313. er for F172 PLSH instruction is in the ON state Also the pulse output can be stopped when the specified target value is matched e he direction output and output frequency are specified by F172 PLSH instruction 10 22 Precautions on programming Flag conditions The uses of the flag in the program Turns on during execution of pulse output instructions and then maintains that state during pulse output from CHO This flag is the same for instructions F166 to F175 R911C Control flag CHO Turns on during execution of pulse output instructions and then maintains that state during pulse output from CHO This flag is the same for instructions F166 to F175 R911D Control flag CH1 Note e he above flags vary during scanning Use this to prohibit the simultaneous execution of other high speed counter instructions and pulse output instructions and to verify completion of an action Use this to prohibit the simultaneous execution of other high speed counter instructions and pulse output instructions and to verify completion of an action Example If the above flags are used for more than one time as input conditions there may be the different states in the same scan Replace with internal relays at the beginning of the program as a measure 10 23 10 4 3 Allocation Double pulse input driver CW pulse input and CCW pulse input method e Two output contacts are used as a pulse output for CW
314. er supply of the outlying voltage and frequency or using inappropriate wires may cause the fault of the power supply of the PLC Reference 5 7 Wiring of Terminal Block Isolation of power supply systems Isolate the wiring systems to the FP X output devices and mechanical power apparatus Input output devices ME PLC Isolation transformer 5 11 z Note Power supply of the FP X expansion units Be sure to supply power to the FP X expansion units and the control unit from the same power supply and turn the power on and off simultaneously for both The same winng gystem Turn on off simultaneously Control unit To avoid the influence of noises Use the power supply causing less noise The inherent noise resistance is sufficient for the noise superimposed on the power wires however the noise can be attenuated further by using the isolation transformer Also twist the power supply cables to minimize adverse effects from noise Grounding Ground the instrument to increase noise suppression Exclusive grounding e For grounding purposes use wiring with a minimum of 2 The grounding connection should have a resistance of less than 1000 e The point of grounding should be as close to the PLC unit as possible The ground wire should be as short as possible e f two devices share a single ground point it may produce an adverse effect Always use an exclusive ground for
315. ers data following the second header overwrites the data in the receive buffer e he reception done flag R9038 or R9048 is turned off by the F159 MTRN instruction Therefore if F159 MTRN is executed at the same time the terminator is received the reception done flag will not be detected 7 45 Sending data The reception done flag the transmission done flag and the F159 MTRN instruction are related as follows Transmitted data a Sp d e ET a Mei el Med i Yrs ON Transmisstan done flag 2 R9038 er i THEE R904 j Duplax Vasiamission fessis whia F Th xv X IMTRN bes F158 MTRN Te eM T instruetlan ereculion Send buffer i Let be i Number l bytes Number l byles mat Pu taf 20 s i gt 29 25 gt yet transmitted a Trarcsmissun pis des e Header STX and terminator ETX are automatically added to the data being transmitted The data is transmitted to an external device e When the F159 MTRN instruction is executed the transmission done flag R9039 or R9049 goes off e Duplex transmission is disabled while F159 MTRN is being executed The transmission done flag R9039 or R9049 must be observed Key Point e he contact numbers in parentheses refer to COM2 port 1 46 Changing commu
316. erts the hour minute and second P138 utes and sec data of S 1 S to seconds data and onds to the converted data is stored in D 1 D seconds data F139 Seconds to Converts the seconds data of S 1 S P139 hours to hour minute and second data minutes and and the converted data is stored in seconds data D 1 D plae e E P140 R9009 set PSTC P141 R9009 reset PCLC Watching WDT The time allowable scan time for the dog timer S system v watching dog timer is ER changed to 5 x 0 1 ms for that scan F143 Partial IORF D1 D2 Updates the I O from the number P143 update PIORF specified by D1 to the number specified by D2 F144 Serial data TRNS The COM port received flag R9038 is communica set to off to enable reception tion control Beginning at S n bytes of the data registers are sent from the COM port pues 2 208 1 S 2 Sends the data to another station in the Ch x E E P145 D N network MEW NET via link unit F146 S1 S 2 Receives the data to an zn station PRECV in the network MEW via link unit fie Ru S1 S 2 Sends the to the slave station as e D N the MOD bus master via COM port S1 S 2 Receives the data from the slave station 146 D as the MOD bus master via COM port 3 FH pon Ea EAD 145 D the MOD bus master type II F146 Data receive RECV 51 S
317. eserved can be used as internal relays and internal registers Link relay allocation N Mi missam Starting No of word for link relay transmission Link relay transmission size Lira A With the above settings the 14 words 224 points consisting of WL50 to WL63 can be used as internal relays Receive area Range of link registers used _ 6 gt Starting No for link register transmission Link register transmission size Send area J With the above settings the 28 words consisting of LD100 to Receive area LD127 can be used as internal registers Next user Internal relay 7 1 7 64 Note Precautions When Allocating Link Areas If a mistake is made when allocating a link area be aware that an error will result and communication Will be disabled Avoid overlapping send areas When sending data from a send area to the receive area of another PLC there must be a link relay and link register with the same number in the receive area on the receiving side In the example shown below there is an area between No 2 and No 3 which is overlapped and this will cause an error so that communication cannot be carried out Example of link relay allocations FP X FP X ilimi 1j LL 227 Writ no 31 Ma MIL j Ld Regele area 1 1 Send area Mn3 aes 00 area Receive aea Nos al nmm Receive T senmi area
318. eter input output terminals Between communication cassette RS485 and power supply input output earth terminals Between power supply terminal and earth terminal 500 V AC for 1 Insulation resistance Note1 15 2 Description 1 0 0 O 5 to 9 Hz single amplitude of 3 5 mm 1 cycle min 9 to 150 Hz constant acceleration of 9 8 m s 1 cycle min 10 min on 3 axes Shock resistance Shock of 147 m s 4 times on 3 axes 1500 Vp p with pulse widths 50 ns and 1ys based on in house Noise measurements AC power supply terminal Vibration resistance immunity 1000 Vp p with pulse widths 50 ns and 1 based on in house measurements DC power supply terminal Operation condition Free from corrosive gases and excessive dust Se EMC EN61131 2 LVD EN61131 2 directive Overvoltage category Category Il Pollution level Pollution level 2 Note1 Not isolated between the tool port USB port Analog input cassette and Communication cassette RS232C part Note2 Cutoff current 5 mA Factory default setting Note3 Excluding between the Analog input cassette Communication cassette RS232C part and protection earth terminal Note4 Excluding between the input terminal and the output terminal of the pulse I O cassette Power supply specifications AC Power Supply 030 660 lt a Inrush current 40 Aor Momentary power off time 10 ms when using 100 V AC
319. ethod Start stop synchronous system Transmission line Multicore shielded line Shielded twisted pair cable VCTF Max 1200 m Max 1200 m 872 Baud rate 3 to be set by system register 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 115200 bps Note8 Computer link ASCIl JIS7 JIS8 mission aT ASCII JIS7 JIS8 Binary code serial communication Communication format to be set by system register EUN Max 99 units No of connected units 5 9 7 2 units max 32 units when C NET adapter is connected Note1 When connecting a commercially available device that has an RS485 interface please confirm operation using the actual device In some cases the number of units transmission distance and baud rate vary depending on the connected device Note2 The values for the transmission distance baud rate and number of units should be within the values noted in the graph below Fer baud rie 115 2 3 p M me Bt T For bak m amp 76kbos rx x LI hunt bre bw oF units stations 40 IER Fon Irarramisasion distance diri When using a baud rate of 300 bps to 38400 bps you can set up to a maximum of 99 units stations and maximum transmission distance of 1200 m Note3 Only 9600 bps or 19200 bps can be specified when the C NET adapter is connected with the RS485 interface Note4 The start code and end code can be used only in the gene
320. ette mounting part 2 N A A Available N A Not available 9 1 2 Three Pulse I O Functions There are three pulse I O functions built into the FP X Tr type High speed counter function Control unit FP X Tr The high speed counter function counts external inputs such as those from sensors or encoders When the count reaches the target value this function turns on off the desired Encoder autput i input t the high speed counter M Roller Motor Encoder tout WU oe output 2 j Inverter X dl i D START Ad STOP signal Cutter Cutter blade control signa lape lead wire Pulse output function Control unit Stepping motor Combined with a commercially available FP X Pulse autput CW Servo epar motor driver the function enables positioning control With the exclusive instruction you can perform trapezoidal control home return and JOG operation Pulse output CCW Pule output CW za Motor ui im Ra d c driver Dy hy stepping matar servo motor 9 2 PWM output function Control unit B When you increase the pulse width By using the exclusive instruction the PWM S 2 output function enables a pulse output of the desired duty ratio Heating increases When you decrease it WE JE Note The pulse I O cassette AFPX PLS cannot be used with the FP X Tr type control unit Healing decreases 9 1 3 Performance o
321. etting TESTA Input a password reet 5 Optional setting for FP memory loader e Enterin siphanimenc Use the FP X V2 5 or later FPWIN GR Sita hs FP loader OOS V2 8 or later and set it to download to the FP lip tim oF memory loader Ver2 0 or later i Confirmation the contents of the password setting Confirm the settings indicated in the dialog box Current status Indicates the current status of the password setting There are following five statuses 1 Password is not set Password is not set 2 4 digits Protect Password is 4 digit password and access is prohibited 4 digits Available to access Password is 4 digit password and access is allowed The status that inputting the password completes and that can access programs 4 8 digits Protect Password is 8 digit password and access is prohibited 5 8 digits Available to access Password is 8 digit password and access is allowed The status that inputting the password completes and that can access programs 11 3 Available retry counts This is the number of times that you can input the password in succession Every time incorrect password is input the number will decrease up to 3 times If you fail to input the correct password for 3 times in succession you cannot access the program Turn the power supply of the FP X off and then on again to try to input the password again ic If the power
322. ettings Otherwise proper functioning of hold non hold values cannot be guaranteed Previous value is held for a Hold Ho Non hold leading edge detection instruction DF instruction with MC Hold type area starting number for PC PLC WO 0 link relays Hold type area starting number for PC PLC WO 1 link relays Hold type area starting number for PC PLC WO 0 link registers Hold type area starting number for PC PLC WO 1 link aces 20D Disable or enable setting for Disabled duplicated output Operation setting when an I O ru Stop verification error occurs Operation setting when an Stop operation error occurs 64 0 to 64 128 64 to 128 128 0 to 128 Disabled Enabled Stop Continuation of operation Stop Continuation of operation When a battery error occurs a self diagnostic error is not issued and the ERROR ALARM LED does not flash Action on error Alarm battery error Disabled Operating setting when battery error occurs When a battery error occurs a self diagnostic error is issued and the ERROR ALARM LED flashes 10 to 81900 ms Wait time setting for multi frame 6500 0 ms communication Timeout setting for SEND RECV RMRD RMWT commands 10000 0 ms 10 to 81900 ms 0 Normal scan Constant value settings for scan Normal io 250m Sansone ech time scan n specified time interval 0 Expansion unit recognition time No wait 0 to 10 s 0 1 second bit time 17 4
323. every 10 24 us HO to HFFFF Difference between the values of the two points absolute value x 10 24 us Elapsed time between the two points Note The exact value is 10 24 us Note1 It is renewed once at the beginning of each one scan Note2 As DT90020 is renewed even if FO MV DT90020 and D instruction is being executed it can be 17 28 used to measure the block time Read Writ ing ing Z lt gt 2 gt FP X A Available N A Not available Address The current scan time is stored here Scan F time is calculated using the formula Scan time current _ value Note Scan time ms stored data decimal x 0 1 ms Example K50 indicates 5 ms The minimum scan time is stored here Scan Tn time is calculated using the formula Scan time minimum value Note Scan time ms stored data decimal x 0 1 ms Example K50 indicates 5 ms The maximum scan time is stored here The scan time is calculated using the formula Scan time maximum value Net Scan time ms stored data decimal x 0 1 ms Example K125 indicates 12 5 ms The mask conditions of interrupts using the instruction can be stored here Monitor using binary display 15 13 11 7 Bit DT90022 DT90023 DT90024 Mask condition monitoring register for interrupts INTO to 13 13 11 7 INT 0 Interrupt disabled 1 Interrupt enabled DT90025 DT90026 Lu The value
324. f AFPX COM5 S gem Setting value ym 1 Communication protocol Baud MS RENI Source port No 0 1025 to 32767 iet Mi E rate COM1 115200 bps 9600 bps EM remm pica ns Bloc iw 1c mam nua qi am ariar Note1 Specify the same baud rate as the communication environment setting of the COM1 port of the FP X Note2 When selecting BROADCAST the setting of the 2 2 8 destination IP address is not required Dehri Pat Ma Wil B iia zd ha D umm Initializing Ethernet takes approx 5 seconds the AFPX COMB after turning on the power supply Until it finishes data cannot be sent or received For Ethernet communication programming is necessary to start communication after a lapse of 5 seconds after the power activation 1 101 7 7 11 PC PLC Link Communication Ethernet Ver 1 10 or Later Overview Data sharing is available using the PC PLC link function of the FP X via Ethernet How to use and set is the same as the PC PLC link via RS485 IP address IP address B IP address C IP address D Unit na T Unit na Unit no 3 Unit no 7 102 PC PLC link communication setting When the PC PLC link function has been selected on the FP X the baud rate is automatically 115200 bps Set the baud rate in the 1 port communication setting for the AFPX COMS to 115200 bps as well Setting Ethernet communication env
325. f Pulse I O Function Number of Channel I O to be used High speed counter Pulse output Single phase 8 channels or 2 phase 4 C14 Tr type ch Note The pulse I O cassette AFPX PLS cannot be used with the FP X Tr type Fono unit Counting range e K 2 147 483 648 to K 2 147 483 647 Coded 32 bit binary e he built in high speed counter is a ring counter Consequently if the counted value exceeds the maximum value it returns to the minimum value Similarly if the counted value drops below the minimum value it goes back to the maximum value and continues counting from there Y value 2 147 483 647 2 147 483 646 Min value Note When the linear interpolation instruction F175 is used the value for the amount of travel should be set so that it is within the range indicated below 8 388 608 to 48 388 607 Coded 24 bit binary 9 3 9 2 Function Specifications and Restricted Items 9 2 1 Specifications High speed counter function High speed counter by the input of the main unit 9 specifications Reset input Control Eug DT90300 0790302 DT90304 DT90306 speed DT90308 DT90310 DT90312 DT90314 DT90320 DT90322 DT90324 DT90326 DT90328 DT90330 X0 DT90300 DT90302 2 Prase speed x2 DT90308 DT90310 2 phase input CH2 X7 R
326. ference 7 1 6 About USB Port For C30 C60 Only 7 2 7 1 2 Functions of Communication Cassette With the communication cassette the FP X offers four different communication modes as below Computer link e The computer link function is to communicate between a computer and PLCs or between PLC and external devices connected A proprietary MEWNET protocol called MEWTOCOL COM is used for communicating with the computer link MEWTOCOL COM is also used for the communication between the tool software such as FPWIN GR and the PLC e There are a MEWTOCOL master function and a MEWTOCOL slave function for the computer link The side that issues commands is called master and the side that receives the commands executes the process and sends back responses is called slave Note It is necessary to set the system register of the communication port to the computer link for using this function 1 Only the slave function is available for the FP X relay type Ver1 20 or former version 2 Both the master and slave functions are available for the FP X transistor type and relay type Ver1 21 or later version however the master function is not available for the TOOL port MEWTOCOL master function Transistor type and relay type Ver1 21 or later version e his function is to carry out the communication on the master side side Othat issues commands of the computer link It is executed with the PLC s instruction F145 SEND or F146 RECV It is
327. fter operation RUN has relay been started and goes off for the second and subsequent scans oa Initial off type pulse Goes off for only the first scan after operation RUN has R9014 been started and goes on for the second and subsequent relay scans me e relay on type the step ladder control R9016 Notused amp v 0 0 R9017 Notused R9018 0 01 s clock pulse relay ie Operations MOH 0 01 s R9019 0 02 s clock pulse relay epeats on off operations in 0 02 s cycles 502 l R901A 0 1 s clock pulse relay Repeats on off operations in 0 1 s cycles KETY R901B 0 2 s clock pulse relay Repeats on off operations in 0 2 s cycles KEFY Repeats on off operations in 1 s LJ R901 1 lock pul Repeats on off operations in 2 s LJ R901D 2 s clock pul Repeats on off operations in 1 min 1 min clock pulse relay cycles 1 min 17 17 WR902 Addess _ Turns off while the mode selector is set to PROG R3020 erode nag Turns on while the mode selector is set to RUN R9024 Notusd e R9026 flag Turns on while the F149 instruction is executed NE S R9029 Forcing flag Turns on during forced on off operation for input output relay timer counter contacts Turns on while the external interrupt trigger is enabled by R902A Interrupt enable flag the ICTL
328. g The default setting for the communication speed for the various ports is 9600 bps Change the value to match the external device connected to the COM port Click on Ivi and select one of the values from 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 and 115200 bps Restrictions The COM port of the communication cassette supports all the commands of the MEWTOCOL COM There is no restriction 7 27 7 3 2 1 1 Communication Computer link System register settings Settings for COM1 port AFP COM1 AFPX COM2 AFPX COM3 AFPX COM5 No Set Value No 410 Unit number COM1 port No 412 Communication mode port Computer link Communication format for COM1 port Data length 7 bits 8 bits Parity check None Odd Even Stop bit 1 bit 2 bit Terminator CR Header No STX No 415 Baud rate setting for COM1 port 2400 to 115200 bps Settings for COM2 port AFPX COM2 AFPX COM4 AFPX COM5 Unit number COM2 port e No 414 Communication format for COM2 port Data length 7 bits 8 bits Parity check None Odd Even Stop bit 1 bit 2 bit Terminator CR Header No STX The communication format and baud rate communication speed should be set to match the connected computer Note They are set in different bit positions of the same system register no so the different settings are possible for port 1 and port 2
329. g K10 and using a 1 5 _ Umer L 10 31 Absolute position control operation When X1 is turned on pulses are output from CW output Y100 or CCW output Y101 of the specified channel CHO If the current value at that point is larger than 22000 the pulses are output from Y101 and if the value is smaller than 22000 the pulses are output from Y 100 Note In that case the memory Y100 or Y101 does not turn on off according to the pulse output and also the monitoring is not possible OV 24V DC FP X mE x1 Stait inui Pise vilput CuV m LE Sal eA c I xi Motor Arwr 1 ada Meter a um 3 pale rir A 10 000 22 000 30 000 Regardless of the current value movement is Towards postion 22 000 Program X1 R32 R36 Fe Positioning operation running f Positioning operation start ____ Posilionang cata brat Canirol code H1110 Fi 2 t intial pood 2000 MA E Gi 108 Max EU Arcmierntian ma Rb me 1 ety i pnt av Cri 8 Target vale E 1 ei 00 Miri amor 22000 pulum F1 E 7110 stop Fi code H1119 Duty 148 12558 bg La BA LE WS Fart BPDH DT 100 Pulse ouput tabla 3 aped control SS The dete heeded by DET 100 m dala table headed by DT
330. g control e Following items are provided as options Application cassettes such as the positioning control function by the high speed counter and pulse output Fulfilling communication cassettes Realtime clock function Basic functions as compact size general purpose PLC suitable for the small scale facility control Basic functions including the followings are equipped even though it is a general purpose style such as AC power supply screw terminal block and relay output 1 32k step program capacity 2 0 32 us command processing speed Max 382 points I O control Single phase 8 channel and 2 phase 4 channel high speed counter functions are equipped for the control unit Fulfilling function enhancement Various add on cassettes are available as options such as 10 types of application cassettes and 6 types of communication cassette e Application cassettes DC 8 point input type transistor 8 point NPN output type transistor 6 point PNP output type DC 4 point input transistor 3 point NPN output type analog 2 ch output type analog 2 ch input analog 1 ch output type thermocouple 2 ch type RTD 2 ch type analog 2 ch input type high speed counter input pulse output type master memory type with realtime clock 32k step program can be copied and stored e Communication cassettes 1 ch RS232C type 2 ch RS232C type 1 ch RS485 RS422 changeover type 1 ch RS232C 1 ch RS485 type Ethernet 1 ch RS232C type 2 ch RS485 t
331. g from the programming tool the setting of the mode switch and the actual mode of operation may differ Verify the mode with the status indicator LED e Restart FP to operate in the mode set with the RUN PROG mode switch RUN upward USB connector B type This is a connector to connect the programming tool Commercial USB cables AB type can be used e The baud rate with the USB is 115 2 kbps fixed e Either USB port or COM2 port of 2 channnel type communication cassette is selected The USB port cannot be used when the COM2 port is used G Analog potentiometer analog dial Turning this dial changes the values of special data registers DT90040 to DT90043 within the range of KO to K1000 It can be used for analog timers and other applications C14 and C30 equips 2 points and C60 equips 4 points 2 3 Tool port RS232C This port is used to connect a programming tool A congre mini DIN 5 pin connector is for the Tool port on the control unit PinNo Signalname __ Abbreviation Signal direction 1 SigalGond SGP send Data Unit External device 3 Receive Data RD Unite External device Not used NE NER eee 5 esv Unit External device The followings are the default settings set when the unit is shipped from the factory The system register Tool port setting should be used to change these Baud rate 9600 bps Character bit 8 bit Parity check Odd parity
332. g of Backup Battery Specifications dem Specifications sol Setting items Year month day hour 24 hour display minute second and day of week Clock calendar At 0 C less than 104 seconds per month Accuracy At 25 less than 51 seconds per month At 55 less than 155 seconds per month Area of clock calendar With the clock calendar function data indicating the hour minute second day year and other information stored in the special data registers DT90053 to DT90057 can be read using the transmission instruction and used in sequence programs Special data register No Higher bytes Lower bytes Hour data Minute data HOO to H23 HOO to H59 Minute data Second data 59 59 A Available N A Available Day data Hour data 1 to H31 HOO to H23 Year data Month data HOO to H99 H01 to H12 Day of the week data Setting of clock calendar There are two ways to set the clock calendar as described below Setting using FPWIN GR 1 Select Online Edit Mode under the Online on the menu bar or press the CTRL and F2 keys at the same time to switch to the Online screen 2 Select Set PLC Date and Time under Tool on the menu bar Set PLC Date and dialog box LINDE SA The above steps display the Set PLC Date and Time dialog box shown at the left Input the date and time and click on the OK button Tuer Fry Cros
333. g properly in link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC PLC link mode Turns on when Unit No 8 is communicating properly in PC PLC link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC PLC link mode Turns on when Unit No 9 is communicating properly in link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC PLC link mode Turns on when Unit No 10 is communicating properly in PC PLC link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC PLC link mode Turns on when Unit No 11 is communicating properly in PC PLC link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC PLC link mode Turns on when Unit No 12 is communicating properly in PC PLC link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC PLC link mode Turns on when Unit No 13 is communicating properly in link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC PLC link mode Turns on when Unit No 14 is communicating properly in PC PLC link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC PLC link mode Turns on when Unit No 15 is communicating properly in link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs
334. ges to slave units and the slave units respond response messages according to the instructions e Enables the communication between the devices of max 99 units as the master function and slave function is equipped e he communication cassette can be used About MODBUS RTU e he MODBUS RTU communication is a function for the master unit to read and write the data in slave units communicating between them e here are ASCII mode and RTU binary mode in the MODBUS protocol however the FP X is supported with the RTU binary mode only Master function Writing and reading data for various slaves is available using the F145 SEND and F146 RECV instructions Individual access to each slave and the global transmission is possible FP X Sigve Slave Slave Slave Slave JE aii Tu 2 3 Fu mura Dianne S KENES xin Lacs rin Wi LN a m n ul iab u y FF X KT temperatura KT temperatura contral unit control unit Slave function If the slave units receive a command message from the master unit they send back the response message corresponding to the content Do not execute the F145 SEND or F146 RECV instructions when the unit is used as a slave unit Peres Lee I E slave ave Slave Saye navi Slave r E i il io qe a Fn Ea P m amp So amp E li T a P i a i
335. grams destroying files or overwriting the contents of a file documents should be printed out and then saved e Specifying the password carefully The password setting is designed to avoid programs being accidentally overwritten If the password is forgotten however it will be impossible to overwrite the program even if you want to Also if a password is forcibly bypassed the program is deleted When specifying the password note it in the specifications manual or in another safe location in case it is forgotten at some point e Upload protection When the upload protection setting is specified programs will be disabled to be read out If the setting is cancelled forcibly all programs and system registers will be deleted Therefore note that programs and system registers should be managed on your own responsibility Backup battery Do not install the battery when it is not used There is a possibility of leak if the battery remains discharged vi Differences in Functions Between Versions of Controller Usable model Usable functions UP DOWN switching of high speed counter by SYS instruction Real number basic compare instructions 18 types STF S1 S2 ANF S1 S2 ORF S1 52 STF lt gt S1 2 ANF lt gt S1 S2 lt gt 51 2 V1 10 Ry type STF gt S1 S2 gt 1 S2 ORF gt S1 2 STF gt S1 2 gt 1 S2 ORF gt S1 82 STF lt S1 2 lt 1 S2 ORF lt S1 2 STF lt S1 S2 ANF lt S1 S2 ORF lt S1 2 system registe
336. he height below 2000m For use in pollution Degree 2 environment Do not use it in the following environments Direct sunlight Sudden temperature changes causing condensation Inflammable or corrosive gas Excessive airborne dust metal particles or saline matter Benzine paint thinner alcohol or other organic solvents or strong alkaline solutions such as ammonia or caustic soda Direct vibration shock or direct drop of water Influence from power transmission lines high voltage equipment power cables power equipment radio transmitters or any other equipment that would generate high switching surges Min 100mm or less Static electricity Before touching the unit always touch a grounded piece of metal in order to discharge static electricity In dry locations excessive static electricity can cause problems Wiring the Power Supply to the Control Unit Use a power supply wire that is thicker than 2 mm2 AWG14 and twist it he unit has sufficient noise immunity against the noise generated on the power line However it is recommended to take measures for reducing noise such as using a isolating transformer before supplying the power Allocate an independent wiring for each power supplying line input output device and operating device If using a power supply without a protective circuit power should be supplied through a protective element such as a fuse Be sure to supply power to a control and an ex
337. he main unit or add on from the outputs of the main unit or add on cassette cassette Reference 10 2 1 Table of Specifications 10 3 5 Instructions used with High speed Counter Function High speed counter control instruction FO e This instruction is used for counter operations such as software reset and count disable e Specify this instruction together with the special data register DT90052 e Once this instruction is executed the settings will remain until this instruction is executed again Operations that can be performed with this instruction e Counter software reset bitO e Counting operation enable disable bit e Hardware reset enable disable bit2 e Clear high speed counter instructions F166 to F167 e Clear target value match interrupt Example Performing a software reset In case of CHO In case of CH1 HDF HH Fo MV OT90052 H DF Fo MV H 1001 0790052 D MV 0190052 2 Fo MV H 1000 DT90052 In the above program the reset is performed in step 1 and 0 is entered just after that in step 2 The count is now ready for operation If it is only reset counting will not be performed 10 11 High speed counter pulse output control flag area of FP X Ry type v I NET GEORGES NC The area DT90052 for writing channels Seu uec reser fessus and control codes is allocated as shown in the left figure
338. he memory is expanded In the program high level instructions which execute in every scan and at the leading edge of the trigger are programmed to be triggered by one contact e g FO MV and PO PMV are programmed using the same trigger continuously Correct the program so that the high level instructions executed in every scan and only at the leading edge are triggered separately There is an incorrect operand in an instruction which requires a specific combination of operands for example the operands must all be of a certain type Enter the correct combination of operands Program may be damaged to send the program again When inputting with the programming tool software a deletion addition or change of order of an instruction ED LBL SUB RET INT IRET SSTP and STPE that cannot perform a rewrite during RUN is being attempted Nothing is written to the CPU A Available 17 79 17 4 2 Table of Self Diagnostic Error Opera Error i x tion Description and steps to take code status LL Probably a hardware abnormality E20 Stops Pica contact your error1 error2 RAM Probably an abnormality in the internal RAM Stops Mind contact error5 Master memory The models of master memories are different A model Stops Use the master memories created with the 4 unmatch same model error FP e FPO FPOR FP gt FP1
339. hod Connect each channel as mentioned below After the connection confirm that the polarity and terminal positions are correctly connected CHO CH1 h H Use gwe Prod 1100 Note1 When extending the lead wire of RTD use 3 wires in the same resistance and the same length Note2 Do not place the input signal line close to an AC power line or high voltage line Also do not bundle it with them Note3 Use shielded wires for the input signal line It is recommended to ground them However depending on the conditions of the external noise it may be better not to ground the shielding Noter4 Do not connect one RTD to other equipment in parallel input RTD input range Conversion characteristics graph Ki 25000 ER Em mm rt i i ya gt 5650 l gt i V i u i 1 30 273 865 900 di Table of converted values Input value C Converted value 2000 850 8500 When exceeding the rated range Reference values which accuracy is not assured are indicated up to 15 Input value Converted value 215 or less 2150 865 C or more 8650 20000 Note When exceeding the maximum minimum value exceeding the rated range the converted values will be the values as mentioned above However if the temperature drops below 230 C or rise over 9
340. home input is enabled in step 1 and 0 is entered just after that in step 2 to perform the preset operations The output counting value of the elapsed value area may be different from the input counting value of the motor side if the forced stop is executed by these programs 10 25 bs Key Point High speed counter pulse output control flag area of FP X Ry type ZEE 58 2 e The area DT90052 for writing channels and MERE control codes is allocated as shown in the left Ghanned figure CHOHO CHtHi e Control codes written with an FO MV HEC PLS scecificati instruction are stored by channel in special JC speaohcabon PLS data register 0790372 and DT90373 Note The output counting value of the elapsed Near home input 0 OFF 1 ON value area may be different from the input counting value of the motor side if the pulse output is stopped by the Continue stop of pulse output After the Count 0 Permit 1 Prohibit pulse output stops execute the home return Pulse output 0 Continue Stoo Now Sottware reset D T Was Pulse output control code monitor area High speed counter Control code monitor area Channel No c2 J 09032 O c3 AJ 090383 Reference 10 2 1 Table of specifications for information on the special data register Elapsed value write and read instruction F1 e his instruction is used to re
341. hout electricity momentarily and the verify error may occur In that case turn off the power supply and then turn on again 5 10 3 Protection of Output Sections Protection of output If current exceeding the rated control capacity is being supplied in the form of a motor lock current or a coil shorting in an electromagnetic device a protective element such as a fuse should be attached externally 5 30 Chapter 6 Tool Port and USB Port 6 1 Tool Port and USB Port CONOR pee 9 e Tool port RS232C This port is used to connect a programming tool A commercial mini DIN 5 pin connector is used for the Tool port on the control unit PinNo Signalname Abbreviation Signal direction 1 SignalGround SG o 3 Receive Data _ RD Unit External device 4 Notused es ee ee Unit gt External device The followings are the default settings set when the unit is shipped from the factory Baud rate 9600 bps Character bit 8 bit Parity check Odd parity Stop bit length 1 bit USB connector i This is a connector to connect the programming tool Commercial USB cables AB type can be used The connector is the commercial B type 6 2 AA AGULUULL UOUGZ 6 2 Functions of Tool Port 6 2 1 Tool Port With the tool port the FP X offers two different communication modes as below Computer link e Computer
342. i i HoF ds 1 gt Tro MV H1110 90052 icm near home deceleration start Fo Mv H1100 0 90052 Key Point As there is not interpolation function for the home return the home return should be executed for each channel After the home return for both channels is completed the positioning operation running program R40 turns off Pulse output diagram Hear home sensor Home sensor xO ON 100 ON x107 0M Hr 200 Hz E 150 ms 190 ms Near home sensor Home sensor ON Xx 200 ON Keo 150 mis 150 ms 10 5 PWM Output Function Pulse Cassette 10 5 1 Overview of PWM Output Function PWM output function With the F173 PWMH instruction the pulse width modulation output of the specified duty ratio is obtained System register setting When using the PWM output function set the channel CHO and CH1 with system registers 400 and 401 to Use output YO as PWM output E Note With the FP X Ry type the pulse I O cassette AFPX PLS is necessary to use the pulse output function 10 5 2 Instruction to be Used for PWM Output Function PWM Output Instruction F173 AB ro MV Ki DT100 While X6 is in the on state a pulse with period of 502 5 ms and duty ratio of 5096 is FO MV K500 DT101 output from Y100 of specified channel CHO When the program runs the data table will be F173 PWMH DT100 as shown below Data ta
343. i ieee avineenveaedecincicicodandantevents docs dasludesletudessduasceencnseeshesscenae 12 9 12 5 Sampling Trace FUNCOM 12 10 12 6 Time Constant Processing mnnn 12 13 13 Self Diagnostic and Troubleshooting 13 1 T13 T Self Dradnostie TUR CHO auct oov eau e eu ee Gh ae oh a co uineas 13 2 13 2 WEOUDICSNOOUNG e T 13 4 14 Precautions During Programming 14 1 14 1 Use of Duplicated niea ots ie e ae eaae EE PRECES Ex EINE EDI EE EIE 14 2 14 2 Handling BCD Dalai iiio deed ecuador ee ORE SEP AE RAE ERE 14 4 14 3 Handling Index Registers 14 5 144 14 7 14 5 Instruction of Leading Edge Detection Method 14 9 14 6 Precautions Tor Programming ss assena o ore eene e EE ERR E 14 13 14 7 Rewrite Function During HUN irit oor ioter coop PERI IE er 14 14 14 8 Processing During Forced Input and Output 14 19 joxerlegpe ie
344. ialog Leg Levis a i RM box Fic Finde Sot aUa 7 me 4 UD Corse Fine mu b 4 E pomme i Y nm LA ur mr as After correcting the error click on the ies M as n NE o i Clear Error button to clear the error ain ams am 35 PLC REMOTE PEOG 5 RE Eier Pag ade Fog br rl Fat ifl diim Vosa ee TEST Midi 0 owes irs a feme och d i taata 0 bimi 9 i Ser Desired E A mici ce g Key Point To display the status display dialog box select Status Display under Online on the menu bar Procedure 2 lt For error code is 1 to 9 gt Condition There is a syntax error in the program Operation 1 Change to PROG mode and clear the error Operation 2 Execute a total check function using FPWIN GR to determine the location of the syntax error lt For error code is 20 or higher gt Condition A self diagnostic error other than a syntax error has occurred Operation Use the programming tool in PROG mode to clear the error 13 4 For error code is 42 1 gt Condition The expansion unit or add on cassette that had been connected when the power supply of the control unit was turned on has come off or the expansion unit has powered off Operation 1 Turn off the power supply of the control unit and connect the expa
345. ic heat or smoke generation Do not touch the terminal while turning on electricity It could lead to an electric shock Use the external devices to function the emergency stop and interlock circuit Connect the wires or connectors securely The loose connection could cause excessive exothermic heat or smoke generation Ground the protective earth PE terminal Class D grounding Failure to do so could lead to an electric shock Do not allow foreign matters such as liquid flammable materials metals to go into the inside of the product It could cause excessive exothermic heat or smoke generation Do not undertake construction such as connection and disconnection while the power supply is on It could lead to an electric shock Copyright Trademarks This manual and its contents are copyrighted You may not copy this manual in whole or part without written consent of Panasonic Electric Works SUNX Co Ltd Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries Ethernet is a registered trademark of Fuji Xerox Co Ltd and Xerox Corp All other company names and product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners PLC FPX Table of Contents Before You Start Differences in Functions Between Versions of Controller Restriction on using the Add on cassette Programming Tool Restrictions 1 Features Functions and Restrictions
346. ich the values in the registers change in response to the analog potentiometers being moved If the values of these registers are sent to the clock setting value area a clock can be created that allows the time to be set using the potentiometer Example Writing of the clock setting value The value of the special data register DT90040 that corresponds to the analog potentiometer VO is sent to the setting value area SVO of TMXO to set the time for the clock 1H Fo MV DT 90040 0 C Data transmission instruction The value of special data register DT90040 nt to the setti ing value area TMX 0 SV Te ce type timer 12 9 12 5 Sampling Trace Function 12 5 1 Overview The FP X control unit Ver2 0 and later versions support the sampling trace function Using this function enables to take samplings and record accumulate the state of arbitrary data of 16 bits 3 data registered in the PLC at an arbitrary timing and to examine the changes in the bit and data in details after stopping sampling at an arbitrary timing The sampling trace function is used in the time chart monitor function under the online menu of the FPWIN GR The instructions functions special relays and special registers related to the sampling trace function are as below F155 SMPL sampling instruction F156 STRG sampling stop trigger instruction Time charge monitor of FPWIN GR R902C Sample point flag OFF Sampling
347. id Service power terminals 1 terminals 2 supply terminals for input output AFPX C60RD DG power supply terminal nra peat terminal 1 Not used terminal 2 j at 8 J AE ee NH L OM COM 1 X13 X17 Xi X1D X1F Tou OM xio x12 Xi4 Xi6 X18 XII Not used Chulpedl terminal 1 Oulpul termine 2 E Relation between output terminals and COM CD Y10 C0 Yi C Tit G1 T2 to Ya C2 112 p Y6 to Y8 Y13 C3 YA to YD C4 Y 14 to Y15 C4 16 to Y10 C5 Y1A lo Y 10 C65 g Key Point Input terminal Each COM terminal in the same terminal block is connected within the unit However the COM terminals of the input terminals 1 and 2 for C60 are isolated They are not connected internally Output terminal Each COM port CO C1 is separate Use them in the range surrounded by the bold black lines 2 21 2 6 2 Transistor type AFPX C14T Power supply for YO Power amp upply YO fo Y 5 Power supply for YO lo Yir Hot used Cuiput ierrminal used 2 22 AFPX C14PD Power supply fac YO io Y5 Lond Lamp md used Cuiput terminal Mot used AFPX C30T ad cat Input terrrri nad X erg amp com xo x2 xe
348. ied mme output only for one scan when trailing edge of the trigger is detected for pulse relay Alterna RLE Inverts the output condition on off each time Pal A the leading edge of the trigger is detected HH I Connects the multiple instruction blocks Ew po ppp Connects the multiple instruction blocks in qus ET pat eine delete fe fete Available gt Not available Not available partially A The type of the devices that can be specified depends on the models 2 This instruction is available for FP X Ver 2 0 or later and FPX Ver 3 10 or later 3 In the FP2 FP2SH 10SH when using X1280 Y1280 R1120 special internal relay included L1280 T256 C256 or anything beyond for the ST ST OT AN AN OR and OR instructions the number of steps is shown in parentheses Also in the FP2 FP2SH FP10SH when a relay number has an index modifier the number of steps is shown in parentheses For the FP and FP X the number of steps varies according to the relay number to be used 17 48 peu errr the PSHS instruction 2 Deuk Leading edge differential c FP2SH FP10SH trigger is detected Tums on the contact for only one scan when the leading edge of the tngger is detected The leading edge detection is possible on the first scan Reads and clears the operated result stored by the PSHS instruction Tums on the contact for only one
349. ing No of word for link relay transmission Note No 40 range of link relays used must be set to the same range for all the units Link relay transmission size Link register allocation gt FP2 FP2SH Urtt no 11 mo 2 Unit no 2 ng 4 1 2 Mna System registers ooo etr 1 No 2 No 3 No 4 41 Range of link registers used Starting No for link register transmission o 180 0 Link register transmission size 4 4 48 0 Note No 41 range of link registers used must be set to the same range for all the units When link areas are allocated as shown above the No 1 send area can be sent to the No 2 No 3 and No 4 receive areas Also the No 1 receive area can receive data from the No 2 and No 3 send areas No 4 is allocated as a receive area only and can receive data from No 1 No 2 and No 3 but cannot transmit it to other stations 1 62 For PC PLC link 1 Link relay allocation FP X FP2 FP25H FP X Unit na 1 Unit na 2 no 21 Unit no 4 Receive area System registers No 1 2 _ No 4 No 3 Range of link relays used Starting No of word for link relay transmission Link relay transmission size 20 20 24 jo Note No 50 range of link relays used must be set to the same range for all the units Link register allocation FP2 F
350. ing the simultaneous transmission by broadcast or the target IP address for unit number in the option setting enables the communication with various PLCs MEWTOCOL master setting in TCP pete E Ims 1 ee ee Note1 Specify the same baud rate as the Dertinahon IP m m communication environment setting of the Port po COM1 port of the FP X Source Port Hi i Tassa T Ho Tipat Tia Pe Tmi D iil Note If you want to transmit data when connection is not established the connection can be established from the AFPX COM5 and data can be transmitted In the TCP it takes some time for connection The connection timeout for the AFPX COM5 is the same as the response timeout value Set the timeout time for the SEND RECV instruction longer than the response timeout value to judge the connection timeout 1 92 MEWTOCOL master setting UDP ET Sunmation Setime Communication protocol Client connection Baud rate COM1 15200 bps 9600 bps Note1 i ELE i Chara Bee Mod Tein Cori Fi Gioi ued caneria Sette 4 CORT bos Computer link Send type UNICAST BROADCAST Note2 Destination IP address IP address of destination Destination port No 1025 to 32767 Source port No 0 1025 to 32767 Note1 Specify the same baud rate as the Gee
351. input of the main unit and the system registers No 400 to 401 for the pulse I O cassette 10 3 2 Input Modes and Count Incremental input mode Unit input r X7 ILFLFLELELL THFLELELE 2 AFPE PLEX100 1013 XZDOLX2011 M Mp TM IET Counl at ils Two phase input mode increment input Unit input AFPX PLS N LS LJ Le om M2 200 X3 X7 c ount t 2 mei l Camere ment input Coo Uni input AFPX PLS ON x xino PY om X2 X4 XE 27001 xw FLL X3 X5 X7 X201 m 2x i Count n 1 2 n dmm Decremental input mode Unit irigut XO 10 X7 L f J i 4 ON AFPX PLS KIDOLXCYOT OFF n Lee X200 X201 7 Lauri Individual input mode only for pulse I O cassette Incremental decremental input mode 1 5S X100 i rai X200 ON OFF X201 Count 7 3 s Le Increasing p Inicrea gang Decreceing Direction discrimination only for pulse I O cassette aera ON X14 X200 rr X101 ON X201 OFF Count 0 Increasing Decreasing 10 9 Count for reset input only for pulse I O cassette Incremental input mode ci X200 or X201 HET OFF X102 of lt X202 count is prahibited The reset input is executed by the interruption at
352. interval between two receiving operations value in the register x 2 5ms The minimum interval between two receiving operations value in the register x 2 5ms The maximum interval between two receiving operations value in the register x 2 5ms The number of times the sending operation is performed The current interval between two sending operations value in the register x 2 5ms The minimum interval between two sending operations value in the register x 2 5ms The maximum interval between two sending operations value in the register x 2 5ms The number of times the receiving operation is performed The current interval between two receiving operations value in the register x 2 5ms The minimum interval between two receiving operations value in the register x 2 5ms The maximum interval between two receiving operations value in the register x 2 5ms The number of times the sending operation is performed The current interval between two sending operations value in the register x 2 5ms The minimum interval between two sending operations value in the register x 2 5ms The maximum interval between two sending operations value in the register x 2 5ms Area used for measurement of receiving interval Area used for measurement of sending interval N A N A N A Z A Available N A Not available Adress Name Denton ig ing ing ing Area used for measurement of receiving DT90159 PC PLO link 1 status
353. ion Ioan peran p High speed counter Pulse output instruction for FPX FP X High speed MV DT90052 Performs high speed counter counter and and Pulse output controls Pulse output according to controls the control code specified by S The control code is stored in DT90052 F1 Change and read FP Transfers S 1 S to high of the elapsed S DT90044 speed counter and Pulse output value of high FP X elapsed value area DT90045 speed counter S DT90300 DT90044 and Pulse output Transfers value in high speed DT90044 D counter and Pulse output FP X elapsed value area DT90045 DT90300 D DT90044 to D 1 D Target value Turns output Yn on when the much on with elapsed value of the built in channel high speed counter reaches the specification F167 Target value much off with elapsed value of the built in channel high speed counter reaches the specification target value of 5 1 S Positioning pulses are output from the specified channel in accordance with the contents of the data table that starts with S F171 Pulse output with channel specification Trapezoidal control and home return F172 Pulse output with channel specification JOG operation F173 PWM output PWM output is output from the with channel specified output in accordance specification with the contents of the data table that starts with S Pulse strings are output from the specified output in accordance with the
354. ion Once the sampling operation stops the data will be automatically retrieved by the tool software and will be indicated in a time chart It is possible to adjust whether to see before or after the trigger point by the setting of the No of delay 12 10 Operation image of sampling trace race memory in PLC 1 sampling data v Back to the biginning If exceeding the area 12 5 3 How to Use Sampling Trace let 12 i ER Vee Lear Het x j efe m 3 ii Lamar Brua CELL iaraa sigan rin Sampling Tides 1000 Tias Beil locas configuration a Sampling data display Nx o Pata entry fime cule t 2 1 tT 7 Mta E E z Cursor information i Cire y i ES p hcm Prin jier m TW Pk 1 Sampling at regular time intervals 1 Register the bit word device to be monitored by the time chart monitor function of FPWIN GR 2 Specify the sampling configurations Set the mode of the sampling configurations to Trace Set the sampling rate time Sampling Configurations TRACE Mode Sampling Times 1000 Times 100 1000 Sampling Rate Even SMFL instruction E 00 mec 10 30000 Delap Times i 00 Times 1 388 12 11 3 Start monitoring Start with the Ei button 2 Sampling by instruction
355. ion under Options and then select COM1 tab Dialog box of PLC system register setting PLC Confieuratiron Untitlel Hold Non hold 1 Hald Maon hald 2 Hodin Ha 1 413 Communication Format Nati Comm Mo ill Char Bit 8 Bits Computer Link Parity Odd Usage settings 1 for CPU input Madem Enabled Stop Bit 1 Usage settings 2 For CPL input Usage settings for CPU output Special input Special input Software filter settings 1 of CPU input 415 Baudrate 9600 bps Software filter settings 2 af CPU input Software filter settings 3 of CPU input Software filter settings 4 of CPU input Tool Port i Trl ij 1 rere COM Cancel Ban Initialize Help No 410 for COM1 port Unit number setting Select the COM port operation mode Click on wi and select unit number between 1 and 16 Note1 Unit numbers should be set sequentially and consecutively starting from 1 with no breaks between them If there is a missing unit number the transmission time will be longer Note2 If fewer than 16 units are linked the transmission time can be shortened by setting the largest unit number in system register no 47 Setting with SYS instruction P Reference FP series Programming Manual ARCT1F353 gt 1 60 Link area allocation e The link relays and link registers to be used in the PC PLC link are allocated in the link area of the CPU unit Link area a
356. ion FPWIN GR Ver 2 70 or later version About USB cable A commercial cable is necessary Cable for SUB 2 0 or 1 1 AB type Max 5 6 3 4 USB Connection Procedure This procedure should be performed only once for the first connection It is not necessary to do it from the next time However the communication setting must be changed when switching between the USB connection and the tool port connection 6 3 5 Installation of FPWIN GR Install the FPWIN GR Relay type Ver 2 50 or later version Transistor type Ver 2 70 or later version before connecting the FP X with a PC RIT Note Do not connect the FP X to a PC with the USB cable before the FPWIN GR is installed or during the installation If they are connected the USB driver will not be installed correctly uil Reference 6 3 9 Reinstallation of USB Driver Reference For the information on the installation of the FPWIN GR FPWIN GR Ver 2 Operation Guide Book ARCT1F332 gt 6 9 6 3 6 Installation of USB Driver Following 2 USB drivers must be installed to recognize the USB e USB driver e USB COM conversion driver The installation procedures differ depending on the OS in the PC to be used r For the PC with more than one connectors it may be requested to reinstall these 2 drivers if the positions of the USB connecters are changed In that case reinstall the drivers With Windows XP 1 Turn on the power supply of the FP X and c
357. ion and moving amount so they are within the following range Allowable range 8 388 608 to 8 388 608 e When using in combination with other positioning instructions like F171 designate so the target value is within the above range even in those instructions Sample program Continuous interpolation control e Using the linear interpolation function perform positioning control that draws trajectory like the one shown below X axis CHO CV direction P1 0 0 P2 10000 0 0 10000 P4 10000 10000 Y axig LH direction Relay allocation Emergency stop switch R20 From P1 to P2 start R911D Pulse output flag CH1 R21 From P2to P3 stat R22 From P3 to P4 stat ____ R23 From P4 to P1 stat R2F Positioning done Data register allocation DTO to DT1 Conto code Control code when executing linear interpolation absolute DT2 to DT3 Startup speed 2000 Hz User setting DT4 to DT5 Target speed 2000 Hz area for DT6 Acceleration de ms linear celeration time interpolation DT8 to DT9 Target position opecify the target position of X axis when moving X axis from P1 gt P2 gt gt P4 gt P1 Target position Specify the target position of Y axis when moving from P1 P2 gt P4 gt Work area DT12 to DT23 Operation result Parameters calculated due to instruction storage area execution are stored 10 47 Program
358. ion memory Errors can also be cleared by turning off and on the power while in the PROG mode However the contents of operation memory not stored with the hold type data will also be cleared The error can also be cleared depending on the self diagnostic error set instruction F148 ERR Steps to take for self diagnostic error The steps to be taken will differ depending on the error contents For more details use the error code obtained above and consult the table of self diagnostic error codes MEWTOCOL COM Transmission Errors These are error codes from a PC or other computer device that occur during an abnormal response when communicating with a PLC using MEWTOCOL COM 17 77 17 4 1 Table of Syntax Check Error Opera tion Description and steps to take status A program with a syntax error has been written Change to PROG mode and correct the error Two or more OT Out instructions and KP Keep instructions are programmed using the same relay Also occurs when using the same timer counter number Duplicated Change to PROG mode and correct the output program so that one relay error is not used for two or more OT instructions Or set the duplicated output to enable in system register 20 A timer counter instruction double definition error will be detected even if double output permission has been selected For instructions which must be used in a pair such as jump JP and LBL one instruction is Not paired e
359. ion units Unit mm G9 6 Umm 5 4 5 2 Installation Using Expansion Cable The FP X expansion unit and the FP X expansion FPO adapter are connected to the control unit using the exclusive expansion cable The expansion cable AFPX EC08 is packaged with the expansion unit and expansion FPO adapter It can be purchased separately The expansion cables AFPX EC30 and AFPX EC80 are sold separately ME Note The total length of the expansion cables should be within 160 cm When using the expansion cable AFPX EC30 or EC80 keep it away from the devices and wirings generating noises as much as possible 5 5 5 2 1 Expansion Method of FP X Expansion Unit 1 Remove the expansion cover 2 Fit the expansion connector cable into the expansion connector part of the control unit and the one left side of the expansion unit 4 Set the terminator setting switch All the switches of the expansion unit installed at the last position should be on um a uu if SET er x9 Terminating e sattng Tii T DIP switch 5 6 5 2 2 How to Connect with FP X Expansion FPO Adapter 1 Remove the expansion cover There is no expansion cover for the expansion FPO adapter C2 Note Although there is no terminator setting switch for the expansion FPO adapter the terminator setting has been done within the expansion FPO adapter
360. ironment of Communication cassette AFPX COM5 The Configurator WD is used to set Ethernet communication environment of the AFPX COMS Dialog box of Communication setting municat m Settine X Settingitem Setting value _ Communication protocol 115200bps Protocol 2 pcm Cancel Action Mode Option Eert re Central uet Communication cassetta Setting Baud vate of COMI Sendtpe BROADCAST Destination port No 1025 to 32767 0 1025 to 32767 Note1 Specify the same number for the destination port No and the source port No for the 5 to be used in the PC PLC link Communication mode General purpose communication EC E Communicelen Made General Communication 2nd tine IBROADGAZT 7 UDPsettine Destination Address Destination Port 0 1006 32767 Source Port Na ip 1005 32750 Timeout 0 Ho 1 Setting communication environment of FP X The programming tool FPWIN GR is used to set the baud rate or communication format of the COM1 port Select Option PLC Configuration the menu bar and click COM1 Port tab Dialog box of PLC Configuration settinc PLU Contieuration Un tticc HoldMNonhad 1 aei 2 3 Action on 410 Urit Ho h i 40 412 Comm Controle 1 HSC Controle input settings 2 HSCJPLS Controlle cut
361. is link ter 42 and 43 Unit station System regis No 6 or 14 ter 44 and 45 System regis ter 46 and 47 System regis ter 40 and 41 PC PLC System regis link ter 42 and 43 Unit No 7 or 15 ter 44 and 45 System regis ter 46 and 47 System regis ter 40 and 41 PC PLC System regis link ter 42 and 43 Unit station System regis No 8 or 16 ter 44 and 45 System regis ter 46 and 47 The contents of the system register settings pertaining to the PLC inter link function for the various unit numbers are stored as shown below Example when DT90219 is O Higher byte Lower byte DT90220 to 4 0790243 lt Unit Station Setting contents of system register 40 42 44 and 46 Setting contents of system register 41 43 45 and 47 e When the system register 46 in the home unit is in the standard setting the values in the home unit are copied in the system registers 46 and 47 When the system register 46 in the home unit is in the reverse setting the registers 40 to 45 and 47 corresponding to the home unit mentioned in the left column will be changed to 50 to 55 and 57 and the system register 46 will be set as it is Also the system registers 40 to 45 corresponding to other units will be changed to the values which the received values are corrected and the registers 46 and 57 in the home unit are set for the registers 46 and 47 17 41 FP X A Available
362. is Internal USB select COM cassette e When the MEWTOCOL master is used also select Computer Link Dialog box of PLC system register setting FLE Configuration Untitlel Hold Non hald 1 Hald Man hald 2 4 Ma 1 413 Communication Format No412 Comm Mode Char Bit 8 Bits gt Computer Link Parity Odd lt settings 1 for CPU input Modem Enabled Stop Bit E Usage settings 2 for CPU input Usage settings for CPU output Special input Special inputz Software filter settings 1 of CPU input Mo 415 Baudrate 3600 bps Software filter settings 2 af CPU input Software filter settings 3 of CPU input Software filter settings 4 of CPU input Tool Part COM Part Cancel za Initialize Help No 410 for COM1 port No 411 for COM2 port unit number The unit number can be set within a range of 1 to 99 No 412 Communication mode Select the COM port operation mode Click on MI and select Computer Link No 413 for 1 port No 414 for COM2 port Communication Format setting Default setting Char Bit ees 8 bits Stop Bit 1 bit Terminator CR Header STX not exist To change the communication format to match an external device connected to the COM port enter the settings for the various items No 415 Baud rate communication speed settin
363. is point Example 1 gt Using the DF instruction between MC and MCE instructions MC 8 r vo HDF H 03 Time chart 1 A was on when 1 AU became aff The input condition 41 for the DF instruction has not changed since the time of the previous execution thus derivative output is not obtained Time chart 2 x1 I1 i YO H A1 was off when 1 EAD became off The input condition X1 forthe DF instruction has changed fram off fo an since the time of the previous execution thus derivative output ts obtained 14 11 Example 2 gt Using the CT instruction between JP LBL instructions LBL 1 Time chart 1 RO AU Counting M Operation Final timing at which the The count is not incremented because the final timing at which the previous JP instruction previous JP instruction was not exeouted has not been change and was nat executed the execution condition for the counter input has not changed Time chart 2 XO Counting operation Final timing at which the The count ts not incremented because the count input changed previous JP instruchon from off ta on after tha final timing at which the previous JP was not executed instruction was not executed 14 12 14 6 Precautions for Programming Programs which are not executed correctly Do not write the following programs as they will not be executed correctly Example 1 gt
364. is section of the program is processed as If RO are on 14 2 The output is determined by the final operation results e f the same output is used by several instructions such as the OT KP SET RST or data transfer functions the output obtained at the I O update is determined by the final results of the operation Example Output to the same output relay YO with OT KP SET and RST instructions xO YO 1 See YO ON x1 YO 85 4 YO ON X2 YO HBRo 1 YO OFF When to X2 are all on YO is output as off at I O update e f you need to output a result while processing is still in progress use a partial I O update instruction F143 14 3 14 2 Handling BCD Data 14 2 1 BCD Data BCD is an acronym for binary coded decimal and means that each digit of a decimal number is expressed as a binary number lt Example gt Expressing a decimal number in BCD Decimal number 4 Each digi is converted to a binary BCD 0110 0100 0101 Binary coded decimal 14 2 2 Handling BCD Data in the PLC e When inputting data from a digital switch to the PLC or outputting data to a 7 segment display with a decoder the data must be in BCD form In this case use a data conversion instruction as shown in the examples at below e BCD arithmetic instructions F40 to F58 also exist which allow direct operation on BCD data however itis normally most convenient to use BIN oper
365. is transferred protection with this master memory cassette mounted will be also set to the upload protection setting Comments 22 Transfers comments to the master Transfers comments to the control memory cassette unit Transfers the data in the F ROM data Transfers data registers to the F ROM F ROM data area area of the control unit internal ROM data area in the control unit internal Note2 Note3 to the master memory cassette ROM Specify the starting block No and No Specify the starting block No and No of blocks to be transferred of blocks to be transferred Once the data is transferred The data in the master memory is all afterwards the information in the Precautions deleted So the devices not to be internal memory and the master transferred will be deleted memory are compared and the matched information is not transferred Note1 When a password has been specified data is transferred automatically Note2 If there is no data transferring cannot be performed Note3 Reads using the F12 ICRD instruction and writes using the P13 ICWT instruction It is possible to write data in the F ROM data area using the RAM gt ROM transfer function of the FPWIN GR The storage area is composed of 16 blocks 1 block 2048 words that are from the blocks No 0 to No 15 Cannot be selected P Reference For the details on the F12 ICRD and P13 ICWT instructions Programming Manual ARCT1F353 gt 12 2 3 Relation
366. it send io and recesveri Tj ham Hin diim feiss V Tat afl i a z ae a Note e The data received before changing to the PROG mode remain in the data registers Execute the F159 MTRN instruction right after the mode was changed to the RUN mode and clear them 6 3 6 2 2 Tool Port Setting Setting communication parameters in the computer link mode Setting for Baud rate and communication format The settings for baud rate and communication format of the tool port are entered using the FPWIN GR Select Options in the menu bar and then select PLC Configuration Double click Tool Port Dialog box of PLC system register setting ELG Configuration Untitlel Hald Non hald 1 Mad410 Unit Na 1 Ma 413 Communication Format Na412 Comm Mode Char Bit 8 Bits duh Computer Link Parity Odd settings 1 for CPU input Modem Enabled Stop Bit 7 Usage settings 2 for CPU input Usage settings for CPU output Special input Special inputz Software filter settings 1 of CPU input 415 Baudrate 3600 bps Software filter settings 2 of CPU input Software filter settings 3 of CPU input Software filter settings 4 of CPL input aal Gala Sannin Part Jal data lem nad COM Port Helo No 410 unit number The unit number can be set within a range of 1 to 99 No 412 Communicatio
367. ite into RMWT 1 S2 Writes the data into the intelligent P153 MEWNET F PRMWT n D unit at the MEWNET F remote x slave station I O slave station piss fo Ire oreet P155 PSMPL 5 4 F156 Sampling STRG When the trigger of this mme RICO mum eei trace stops F157 Time addition CADD S1 2 The time after S2 1 2 P157 PCADD D elapses from the time of S1 2 9171 1 is stored in 0 2 0 1 1 D Time CSUB S1 2 The time that results from subtraction PCSUB D subtracting S2 1 S2 from the aod in PM D B Diii lt lt lt 0 2 0 1 D Serial port MTRN D This is used to send data to an communication PMTRN external device through the 7 specified CPU COM port or MCU 2 2 COM port MCU serial port MRCV 5 0 1 Data is received from external reception PMRCV D2 equipment via the COM port of 7 9 the specified MCU BIN arithmetic instruction arithmetic instruction O O S F160 Double word DSQR 5 P160 32 bit data PDSQR v S D 7 square root High speed counter Pulse output instruction for FPO FP e High speed MV S Performs high speed counter and counter and DT9052 Pulse output controls according Pulse output to the control code specified by 5 controls S The control code is stored in DT9052 Change and DMV S Transfers S 1 S to high speed read of the DT9044 counter and Pulse output elapsed elapsed value value area of
368. ith sign from the area word data 16 selected with S1 to S2 are bit obtained and stored in the F276 Total and DMEAN 91 The total value and the mean value of P276 mean values PDMEAN S2 D the double word data with sign from double word the area selected with S1 to S2 data 32 bit are obtained and stored in the D F277 Sort word SORT 1 The word data with sign from the P277 data 16 bit PSORT S2 area specified by 1 to S2 are 3 sorted in ascending order the smallest word is first or descending order the largest word is first F278 Sort double DSORT 91 The double word data with sign from P278 word data 32 PDSORT 52 the area specified by S1 to S2 are bit 53 sorted in ascending order the smallest word is first or descending order the largest word is first F282 Scaling of SCAL 91 The output value Y is found for the 16 bit data input value X by performing scaling for the given data table F283 Scaling of DSCAL 91 The output value Y is found for the P283 32 bit data PDSCAL S2 D input value X by performing scaling for the given data table F284 Inclination 51 Executes the linear output for the P284 output of 16 bit S2 specified time from the specified data S3 D initial value to the target value Integer type non linear function instructions F285 Upper and LIMT S1 When 1 gt 3 1 gt 0 P285 lower limit PLIMT S2 When 1 lt 3 52 0 10
369. ither missing or in an incorrect position error Change to PROG mode and enter the two instructions which must be used in a pair in the correct positions An instruction has been written which does not agree with system register settings For Parameter example the number setting in a program does mismatch not agree with the timer counter range setting error Change to PROG mode check the system register settings and change so that the settings and the instruction agree An instruction which must be written in a specific area main program area or subprogram area has been written to a different area for example a subroutine SUB to RET is placed before an ED instruction Change to PROG mode and enter the instruction into the correct area Program area error A Available Note This error is also detected if you attempt to execute a rewrite containing a syntax error during RUN In this case nothing will be written to the CPU and operation will continue 17 78 Compile memory full error High level instruction type error High level instruction operand combina tion error No program error Rewrite during RUN syntax error Opera tion status Description and steps to take The program is too large to compile in the program memory Change to PROG mode and reduce the total number of steps for the program FP10SH If memory expansion is poss ble compilation will become possible when t
370. iting continues for more than that the correct operation cannot be guaranteed 2 The power supply turns off when the P13 ICWT instruction is being executed If the power supply turns off during this instruction is being executed the hold type area may not be kept Also when the power is shut off during rewriting in the RUN mode the same event may occur 12 8 12 4 Analog Potentiometer 12 4 1 Overview of Analog Potentiometer The FP X is equipped with two analog potentiometers four for C60 only as a standard feature Turning the potentiometers changes the values of the special data registers DT90040 to DT90044 within a range of KO to K1000 Using this function makes it possible to change the internal set values in the PLC without using the programming tool so this can be used for example with analog clocks to change the set value externally by turning the potentiometer ERA mI SN MM ue SITIIILL 7 4 LI QM eet oe one oo ot 4 ele D HHEIL TERR 0 an i RM j Panasonic meg N j j TEs e o m JU vL n 1 Applicable special data register Symbol Potentiometer No Special data register Range of values Control unit DT90040 Voume1 DT904 idi Volume 1 DT90041 0790042 m 0790043 12 4 2 Example Showing How to Use Analog Potentiometer The FP X is provided with special data registers in wh
371. itional Functions Ver 1 10 or Later Additional functions Support UDP IP too As it supports two protocols which are TCP IP 1 and UDP IP 2 communication with various devices on a network such as computers can be established Broadcast transmission is available with UDP IP communication Also the PC PLC link function of the FP X is available using broadcast transmission Data can be transmitted to multiple destinations for separate unit numbers station numbers max 99 units when selecting the computer link P can be automatically get DHCP function he information such as own IP address can be confirmed on the FP X using the network information notification and confirmation functions Note When the firmware version of AFPX COM5 is older than Ver1 10 it can be upgraded by downloading the later version from our website http panasonic denko co jp ac e dl software list tool plc jsp 7 81 Differences between Ver1 00 and Ver1 10 TCP communication setting Communication mode select Operation mode select Ver1 00 Ver1 10 Client connection Not available Available Computer link server connection Available Available General purpose Client connection Available Available communication Server connection Available Available UDP communication setting Communication Operation mode Transmission Ver1 00 Veri 10 mode select select method Not available Available Client connection T Not avail
372. ived in general purpose communication mode No 421 Buffer capacity setting for data received in general purpose communication mode To use general purpose serial communication the receive buffer must be specified To change this area specify the starting address using system register no 420 and the volume number of words using no 421 The receive buffer layout is shown below Receive buffer Ene number ol bytes i amp stored hare Starting area specified In system register Mo Th number of words dala gt specified in system area No 421 6 5 6 3 USB Port 6 3 1 Functions of USB Port With the USB port the FP X offers one communication mode as below Computer link e Computer link is used for communication with a computer connected to the PLC Instructions command messages are transmitted to the PLC and the PLC responds sends response messages based on the instructions received e A proprietary MEWNET protocol called MEWTOCOL COM is used to exchange data between the computer and the PLC There are two different communication methods 1 1 and 1 N communication A 1 N network is called a C NET The maximum of 99 FP X units can be connected with one personal computer e The PLC answers automatically to the commands received from the computer so no program is necessary on the PLC side in order to carry out communication Computer Command mes
373. l rcc eee 15 1 5 Table Of SDecilICallOliS oes co su 6c 15 2 15 2 Table of I O Number Allocation on o s a ones esu eap 15 13 15 3 Relays Memory Areas and 15 16 16 DIMENSIONS x5 16 1 16 aea eu 16 2 16 2 Cable Adapter 2 22 16 4 aee m 17 1 17 1 System Registers Special Internal Relays Special Data Registers 17 2 12 2 TaDle of Basic INSUUCTIOINS icio eese uL Ds Cuin duties anuos aa cu twn TES 17 48 17 3 Table of High level Instructions eesee eere 17 56 7 4 enn 17 76 17 5 MEWTOCOL COM Communication Commands 17 89 17 6 Hexadecimal Binary BD es eau coru cosa sa uss ae Denso 17 90 ieea egenm 17 91 Before You Start Operating environment Use the unit within the range of the general specifications when installing Ambient temperatures 0 55 C Ambient humidity 10 to 95 RH at 25 C non condensing Keep t
374. lable when using the USB port of the FP X Note3 When using this cassette the data is always transmitted by the STOP bit2 regardless the setting of stop bit The data can be received by either STOP bit 1 or 2 regardless the setting of stop bit 7 10 Ethernet and 1 channel RS232C Combination Type Product No AFPX COM5 This communication cassette is a 1 channel unit with an Ethernet interface and an isolated three wire RS232C port Ethernet performs communication at 100 Mbps or 10 Mpbs but communication between AFPX COM5 and FP X is performed at up to 115200 bps according to the system register setting of FP X LED indication Terminal layout C e LEDs for Ethernet et i Em 80 Flashing During communication Off 10 Mbps E To ri p Dm M On Error occurred s LINE CN I HD 3 Cassette backside switch Initialization of communication setting It is used to restore the setting to the factory default in such a case that an error occurred in ON communication The setting is initialized by turning on electricity with the switch being on After Default initialization turn off the power supply of the main unit and then turn the switch off Pp 11 communication 1 N communication Computer link Available Available of 3 General purpose serial connections are avaliable Available Not available pica PC PLO link Note2 Note2 computer link mode MODBUS RTU Av
375. le beginning at S Performs PWM output from the specified output YO or Y1 according to the contents of the data table beginning at S High speed counter Pulse outp put nstruetion for FPOR High speed counter and Pulse output controls Cam control Target value much on with channel specification High speed counter control Pulse output control Target value much off with channel specification High speed counter control Pulse output control Pulse output JOG positioning type 0 1 Trapezoidal control Pulse output JOG operation 0 and 1 Change and read of the elapsed value of high speed counter and Pulse output PWM output with channel specification HC1S HC1R PLSH PWMH Pri oo Performs high speed counter and Pulse output controls according to the control code specified by S The control code is stored in DT90052 Transfers S 1 S to high speed counter and Pulse output elapsed value area DT90045 DT90044 Transfers value in high speed counter and Pulse output elapsed value area DT90045 DT90044 to D 1 D Controls cam operation on off patterns of each cam output according to the elapsed value of the high speed counter Turns output Yn on when the elapsed value of the high speed counter or pulse output reaches the target value of S 1 S 1 Turns output Yn off when the elapsed value of the high speed
376. leared to When the operations in both CHs is completed the return to home completes OV 24 V DC EPA TIT IH Home return start 2c puss ouput cw ze 000 YIOD a Home input COW P aur vidi LX 4 rad JUL ren Seton Near homa input Motor driver 1 Dow Home input Near home input side side Matar SSS S puni eo Tu side 4 side Matar Ps mm ee 4 _ 4102 25 x 100 Horne amp engor Near home sensor 10 49 R911C R9110 R44 R40 0 DF Positioning operation running R40 a R40 R41 EA _ AAA Positioning operation start J Ral Positioning data table CHO 1 I rF 7 UT202 Fi omv K200 DT202 Fi omv 7 Fi DMV K 150 DT 206 Grats Deviation counter clear input Mot used Control coda 1121 Fi DT208 Hz 10100 kHz Home retum F171 DT 200 KO Pulse output instruction Home return The data table headed by OT200 is used and pulsas rin SPDH DT 200 K1 K E Pulse output instruction Home return g The data table headed by OT200 is used and pulsas R811C R40 R44 R42 1 Fo MV 110 DT 90052 4 near home deceleration start aii FO 100 DT 90052 i
377. llocated Note3 X4 to X7 can be used as the home input of the pulse output CHO to CH3 When using the home return function of the pulse output always set the home input In that case X4 to X cannot be set as the high speed counter Note4 When using the pulse output PWM output the controller output settings must be specified The output that has been set to the pulse output PWM output cannot be used as the normal output Noted If the same input has been set to the high speed pulse catch and interrupt input simultaneously the following precedence order is effective High speed counter Pulse catch Interrupt input 17 7 FP X Ry type ress Do not set input X100 as high speed counter Two phase input X100 X101 Two phase input X100 X101 Reset input X102 Incremental input X100 CH8 Incremental input X100 Reset input X102 Do not set Decremental input X100 input X100 as Decremental input X100 Reset input X102 ah iah Incremental decremental input X100 X101 Incremental decremental input X100 X101 Reset input X102 settings Incremental decremental control input X100 X100 to X102 X101 Incremental decremental control input X100 X101 Reset input X102 CH9 Do not set input X101 as high speed counter Do not set Incremental input X101 input X101 as Incremental input X101 Reset input X102 high speed Decremental input X101 Decremental input X101 Reset i
378. llocations are specified by setting the system registers of the CPU unit System registers value 0 to 64 words 40 Range of link relays used for amp 0 41 Range of link data registers used for PC PLC link 0 00128 words 42 Starting number for link relay transmission 0 0063 43 Link relay transmission size Oto64words 44 Starting number for link data register transmission 0 Oto127 45 Link data register transmission size 0 Oto 28words 46 PC PLC link switch flag Normal Normal 1st half Reverse 2nd half Maximum unit number setting for MEWNET WO 16 1 to 16 PC PLC link 46 PC PLC link switch flag Normal Normal 1st half Reverse 2nd half 50 Range of link relays used for link O 0064 words 51 Range of link data registers used for PC PLC link 0 Oto 128 words 53 Link relay transmission size 0 Oto64words link 1 55 Link data register transmission size 0 Oto 28words 57 Maximum unit number setting for MEWNET WO 16 1to 16 PC PLC link Note The same maximum unit number should be specified for all the PLCs connected in the PC PLC link Link area configuration word For PG link 0 L far 1024 points half For PC link 0 LO far 128 wards 1 amp t half I 12 a 128 For PC link 1 L far 1024 ponts
379. lly 1 This instruction is available for FP e Ver 1 21 or later and FPO V2 1 or later F337 P337 S S S S S Floating point type data degree radian F338 P338 Floating point type data radian degree gt 17 73 v rand Floating point FLIMT 1 S2 When 1 1 S1 S341 S3 type data PFLIMT S3 D 8141 1 gt D 1 D upper and When S241 S2 lt S3 1 3 lower limit S241 2 5 0 1 D control When S171 S1 or S371 S3 or 52 1 2 S341 3 D 1 D Floating point FBAND 1 2 When S141 S1 S341 S3 type data PFBAND S3 D S341 3 1 1 S1 gt D 1 D dead band When S241 S2 lt S3 1 S3 control S341 3 2 1 2 gt 0 1 D When S171 S1 or S341 S3 or S2 1 2 0 05 D 1 D Floating point 1 S2 When 3 1 S3 lt 0 0 type data S3 D S341 3 1 1 S1 gt D 1 D zone control When S371 S3 0 0 0 0 0 1 D When 53 1 S3 gt 0 0 S3 1 53 52 1 2 2 D 1 D Floating point FMAX 1 S2 Searches the maximum value in the type data PFMAX D real number data table between the maxi mum area selected with S1 and S2 value and stores it in the 0 1 D The address relative to S1 is stored in D 2 Floating point 1 S2 Searches the minimum value in the D real number data table between the area selected with S1 and S2 and stores it in the 0 1 D The
380. lune C Mumber af poris 28 common 4 eimilta on AQ 48 ES Ambi bemperalune C C T4P D lumber of per Coco TT which ae Sali an Ambil c C30PD Humber of poris 14 CORO 44 which are 16 eimilta E 55 Ambii bemperalune cl pomis per 28 LTT can which agre 17 semulim on 43 i best petra bu Ti 2 5 8 Transistor Tr Type PNP With AFPX DA2 and A21 Current Output Keep the number of points which are simultaneously on within the following range as determined by the ambient temperature Product number Limitations on number of _ Limitations on number of simultaneous input on points simultaneous output on points AFPX C14P AFPX C30P AFPX C60P AFPX C14PD AFPX C30PD AFPX C60PD al poss commen which ma neously an Ambetnl temperabune ee Humber of 4g pomis simulta nemus 38 Ambient temperature CC Humber al 4 ponts commen which are 18 i LR TERMES UMS S Yi 77774 i Em E Ambient tempecatuze i ed C14PD Murrber al points common which ara i neously an NN A 37 40 55 Ambient temperature oC C30PD Humber of 15 ponis pei iM CUurTIITICHn j which are 10 si
381. main unit 7 106 Sample program Set DT10000 in the network information notification area HIN Confirms network information when switching RUN PRO Mii 0 I Reads the network information confirmation area Mii 89010 MY H OT 10 FO MV H 1001 OT M 29044 R3020 RO THL 1 nH lt 148 10 sod 000 DT 10000 HH Own IP address is checked by the network infomation notification when the power tums an ffir ed 2 10000 KO s 10000 255 RI Nein aiian 40 Error occurs when the beginning of address is over 255 Ii COmmunicaton start OK 2 DT 10000 RI Error occurence 2 DT 10000 T DT 10000 1FF R11 1b 3 DHCP get error 2 DT 10000 gt 10000 H 2FF R12 m E ae IP duplicate error Connection information confirmation When selecting the computer link and server setting the connection information can be confirmed from the LAN side by enabling the connection information confirmation setting It can be confirmed by reading the confirmation area by the MEWTOCOL data area read command RD from the LAN For the memory area DT is fixed If the connection information confirmation setting is enabled the AFPX COM5 responds to the MEWTOCOL data area read command for the confirmation area regardless of unit numbers RD command message 01 RDD10010100195C RD response message 01 RDDCOOO
382. mat setting Default setting Char Bit 8 bits Stop Bit 1 bit Terminator CR fixed Header No STX fixed To change the communication format to match an external device connected to the USB 2 port enter the settings for the various items No 415 Baud rate setting The baud rate is fixed at 115200 bps Restrictions The USB COM2 port supports all the commands of the MEWTOCOL COM There is no restriction 6 3 3 USB Connection The FP X C30 control unit and C60 control unit is equipped with the USB connector Connecting the units with a personal computer using the USB cable enables the communication with our software such as FPWIN GR The FP X C14 control unit is not equipped with the USB connector It is a communication method that uses the USB as a virtual serial port so that the FP X connected with the USB is treated from the PC as that it is connected via the COM port Note that the USB is equivalent to the serial port Necessary items for the connection About PC The PC with the following OS is necessary to connect the FP X with the USB Windows 98 Second Edition Windows Me Windows 2000 Windows XP ace Note The FP X cannot be connected with the USB cable when using Windows 95 About programming tool The following programming tool is necessary Relay type Transistor type FPWIN GR Ver 2 50 or later vers
383. mber Setting unit numbers with the system register A unit number between 1 and 99 can be set with the system register To set unit numbers with the FPWIN GR programming software Select Options in the menu bar and then select PLC Configuration Click COM Port There are separate tabs for setting the COM1 and COM2 Dialog box of PLC system register setting ELE Configuration Untitlel Hold Nar hold 1 Hald Mon hald 2 i 1 Ma 41 3 Communication Format Action on Error Mo410 No Time Mo412 Comm Mod Char Bit 8 Bits Um Computer Link Parity Odd Usage settings 1 for CPU input Madem Enabled Stop Bit Usage settings z for CPU input Usage settings for CPU output Special input Special inputz Software filter settings 1 of CPU input Sotware filter settings 2 of CPU input Software filter settings 3 of CPU input Software filter settings 4 of CPU input Tool Part No 415 Baudrate COM Port No 410 for COM1 port No 411 for COM2 port unit number settings Click on wi and select a unit number from 1 to 99 Note With a C NET adapter a maximum of 32 units stations can be specified 1 32 Connection with external devices AFPX COMS when setting 5485 Connection diagram FP X Sade pin terminal a aa Ta oxen device ie Wt 5485 port To extemal device x gt lt ip with REARS pori Winery should exteri from one
384. mit values As the resolution is 12 bits the higher 4 bits of the input contact are always O Note2 Following time is required to reflect the analog data in the input of the control unit 10 V OV Conversion Wearing for Analog input lime retresh 1 ms to 2 ms U to scan time K4000 W210 Note3 Averaging cannot be processed with the cassette If averaging is necessary use a ladder program to execute averaging process Terminal layout B S NEN T n NM CHO casam Qo 00m VO 10 SEL COM jCumentinut COM Common Note There is no LED indication vt 1 SEL Channel 1 8 5 Connection method With voltage input D to 10V Aral devices T J 5 y LU A i ty fo w y BEF j 1 T ial With current input 0 to 20 mA Analog device D 20emA ee CL SEL m d 4 COM hort circuit the SEL and COM terminals DC input 0 mA to 20 mA Conversion characteristics graph K 400 w 2000 AD converted value 1000 4 s z 10 15 AKMA 4 Analog input range 4M Table of A D converted values Input current mA A D converted value When exceeding the rated range Input voltage V Converted value mA or less Negative value 4000 8 6 DC input 0 V to 10 V Conversion charac
385. mn jimin Fri Meese Soon Ain t fan Des S sSweDeas En AS HwownDaa RDe E i du C m Using AFPX COM4 gt Combination of 1 channel RS485 and 1 channel RS232C type ro dre desse akit mpa rae him j whe aed Receive Diki au Hga Gmail OT mene ini Using AFPX COM5 gt Combination of Ethernet and 1 channel RS232C type GT series side side lermial Signal name Abore RO Receive 1 55 sianal Ground 1 30 7 3 3 1 N Communication Computer Link Overview For a 1 N computer link the computer and the FP X are connected through a commercially available RS232C RS485 converter and the respective PLCs are wired using an RS485 cable The computer and the PLC communicate via commands and responses The computer sends a command specifying the unit number and the PLC with that unit number sends a response back to the computer FP X FP X FP X FP X Linit 1 Unit 2 Unit 3 Linit no 4 Computer Commercially available P converter The unit number for the PLC to whech ine command rs being sent is included in the command message The unit number of Ihe PLC sending a response is incluged in the response message Note Lineeye 51 35 is recommended to be used as a converter Setting system registers Setti
386. multa nemm Md 1 55 AME temperature Humber al 45 ports commen which are eam tushy 4 BB Ambient tmpeiralure Configuration Humber of pomis par peira whch are o ne 8 21 21 neously on 3 DA2 DA2 37 40 45 SA DA2 A21 7 Ammen T mgeralur Up to 2 Humber of points par 14 channels can iim 12 WAG aa imnlla n oushy on be used for the current output AB Amien temperature C7 Humber of points per 28 common which __ amp iirnilla 1 neously on 1 rens Amen temperature 172 Humber of pomis par eormmmarn which ana neously on A7 40S Ambient temperature C C30PD Humber of paints per COTTON 44 _ which ara iirnilla neously on y 4981 Ambient Temperature CC CGoPD Number cl points per 28 euren d which ara 4s esee ran nan nn imnilla 11 i E Ambient temperatura C 2 5 9 Transistor Tr Type PNP With AFPX DA2 and A21 Voltage Output Keep the number of points which are simultaneously on within the following range as determined by the ambient temperature Product number Limitations on number of _ Limitations on number of simultaneous input on points simultaneous output on points AFPX C14P AFPX C30P AFPX C60P AFPX C14PD A
387. n link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC PLC link mode Turns on when Unit No 8 is communicating properly in PC PLC link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC PLC link mode Turns on when Unit No 9 is communicating properly in PC PLC link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC PLC link mode Turns on when Unit No 10 is communicating properly in PC PLC link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC PLC link mode Turns on when Unit No 11 is communicating properly in PC PLC link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC PLC link mode Turns on when Unit No 12 is communicating properly in PC PLC link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC PLC link mode Turns on when Unit No 13 is communicating properly in PC PLC link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC PLC link mode Turns on when Unit No 14 is communicating properly in PC PLC link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC PLC link mode Turns on when Unit No 15 is communicating properly in link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the P
388. n Network information is notified to the from the AFPX COM5 Network information is written to the data register of FP X by the AFPX COM5 2 Network information confirmation Network information the AFP COM5 can be confirmed from the FP X The virtual data register within the 5 is read from the FP X 3 Connection information confirmation Connection information on the AFPX COM5 can be confirmed from a destination device from a device on a LAN The virtual data register within the AFPX COM5 is read from a destination device on a LAN 7 104 Network information notification area Set the area to be used for the network information notification network information confirmation and connection information confirmation When DT1000 default is set for the network information notification area the following areas will be used Network information notification and network information confirmation areas Register Description Description No Higher bytes Lower bytes DT10000 Own IP address 15 When own address is 192 168 1 5 DT10001 0x00 reserve Own db address 279 HOOCO K192 is no fled confirmed i n m DT10000 and HOOA8 K168 isi n DT10002 0x00 reserve Own IP address 3 DT10001 DT10003 0x00 reserve Own IP address 4 When de stination po rt No i s 9094 Explanation DT10004 0x00 reserve Destination IP address 1 nd DT10005 0x00 reserve
389. n is a function for the master unit to read and write the data in slave units communicating between them e here are ASCI mode and RTU binary mode in the MODBUS protocol however the FP X is supported with the RTU binary mode only Master function Writing and reading data for various slaves is available using the F145 SEND and F146 RECV instructions Individual access to each slave and the global transmission is possible FP X gt i Pi Ss Slave slave Slave Slave slave a a Master er Ev E 5 TLA LEA B IET um iF rom T Hin nds Ia a ETIT I gt hn ib a lj v FF X KT temperatura KT temparatura contral unit conira unit Slave function If the slave units receive a command message from the master unit they send back the response message corresponding to the content Do not execute the F145 SEND nor F146 RECV instructions when the unit is used as a slave unit Clave lave Slave Slava Slave a z i ae em Nm ze E m E m c h i a ru ee ie ee ies i Rec p SO So ee SSS sr OM S Lis oe FP 1 d a gt in a LN RU i vo Tha y a EY i Tm od A a di 1 6 7 1 3 Communication Cassettes Name Specifications No FP X communication cassette FP X communication cassette FP X comm
390. n mode Select the tool port operation mode Click on v and select Computer Link No 413 Communication Format setting Default setting Char Bit 8 bits Stop Bit 1 bit Terminator Cannot be specified Header Cannot be specified To change the communication format to match an external device connected to the tool port enter the settings for the various items The terminator and the header cannot be changed No 415 Baud rate setting The default setting for the baud rate is 9600 bps Change the value to match the external device connected to the tool port Click on Rak and select one of the values from 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 and 115200 bps Setting communication parameters in the general purpose serial communication mode By default the tool port is set to Computer link System register settings should be entered for the following items The settings for baud rate and communication format are made using the FPWIN GR programming tool Select Options in the menu bar and then select PLC Configuration Click Tool Port Dialog box of PLC system register setting EPLE Gontfiguration Untitlel Hald Maon hald 1 Hold Man hald 2 Madia 1 Mo 413 Communication Format Action an Error Time Ma412 Comm Made Char Bit Bits General Lomimunicatinm Parity
391. n the control unit and the expansion FPO adapter However there are restrictions on E14 E16 Reference 1 3 1 Restrictions on FP X Expansion Unit 3 2 3 2 FP X Expansion Unit 3 2 1 Parts and Functions FP X E16 exapansion I O unit DIN standard rail attachment oleceeeeeeeosll DIN standard allachment State that the expansion cover was removed Input and Output indicator LEDs Indicates the on off status of the input and output Input terminal block This is the input terminal A solderless terminal for M3 can be used Output terminal block This is the output terminal A solderless terminal for M3 can be used Expansion connector Connects with the control unit expansion unit and the expansion FPO adapter using the exclusive expansion cable Expansion cover It is used after the expansion cable has been fitted DIN rail attachment lever This lever enables the expansion unit to attach to a DIN rail at a touch Terminator setting DIP switch All switches should be turned on for the expansion unit installed at the last position 3 3 3 2 2 Power Supply Specifications AC Power Supply Specifications Rated voltage 100 to 240 V AC Voltage regulation range 85 to 264 V AC Inrush current 40 A or less at 240 V AC 25 C Momentary power off time 10 ms when using 100 V AC Frequency 50 60 Hz 47 to 63 Hz Leakage current 0 7
392. n unit is not installed in the slot specified using the configuration data Either install a unit in the specified slot or change the parameter The error specified by the F148 ERR P148 PERR instruction is occurred Take steps to clear the error condition according to the specification you chose A Available 17 4 3 Table of MEWTOCOL COM Communication Error Description NACK error Link system error WACK error Link system error Unit No overlap Link system error Transmission format error Link unit hardware error Link system error 27 Link system error Link system error Link system error Link system error Transmission Link system error impossible error Communication stop Link system error No destination error Link system error Other communication Link system error error M0 BCCemo J A transfer error occurred in the received data M1 Formaterror A command was received that does not fit the format M2 No support error A command was received that is not supported LIEBE uiii MN procedure error frames ery celgaing Link setting error M number 2y designating the ie ata time ou error buffer is congested E iN Transmission processing to another device is not possible Link error unit runaway etc Command process cannot be received because of multiple frame Busy error processing Or cannot be received because comman
393. nal names of RS422 Confirm with the instruction manuals for each devices Using gt Combination of 1 channel RS485 and 1 channel RS422 type Computer side To other coving FP x sin iD zum E i D erm Using AFPX COM5 gt Combination of Ethernet and 1 channel RS232C type c mpuler side pr E T Lm r M so 4 FP 7 29 1 1 communication with programmable display GT series Overview A 1 1 computer link with a programmable display connects the FP X and the programmable display using an RS232C cable Communication is performed via commands from the programmable display and responses from the PLC No program is required for communication Simply set the mutual communications settings to operate the PLC via the programmable display FP X Priami display OT trie P UU f Using 1 gt 1 channel RS232C type GT series side FP X side 5 pin terminal Sun c Receive Data io Send D Signal Ground lt Using AFPX COM2 gt 2channel RS232C type GT seres side FRX shie inrminnlj iiri Signal nare T Sen Um Don 1 Send Cota Rexarivu 2 S ng Gemina Tn other device Using AFPX COM3 RS422 setting 1 channel RS485 RS232C type hn pera FP cl
394. nd Type II Type home return The home input is effective regardless of whether or not here is a near home input whether deceleration is taking place or whether deceleration has been completed Without near home input With near home input Speed Home input ON Speed Mear home input ON input ON Max speed Max speed Initial speed g Initial speed E Home input rs effective at any tima Home input ON during deceleration Mear home speed input ON Home Input ON Max speed Initial speed OH Type 1 home return In this mode the home input is effective only after deceleration started by near home input has been completed Speed Near home Input ON Home Max speed Input ON Initial speed Home input is effective only after deceleration has been completed de Reference The pulse output control instruction FO is used for the near home input 9 4 4 Pulse output control instructions FO 1 gt 9 35 Sample program Home return operation using CHO Minus direction When X2 turns on a pulse is output from CCW output Y1 of the specified channel CHO and the return to home begins When X5 turns on deceleration begins and when X4 turns on home return is completed After the return to home is completed the elapsed value areas DT90348 and DT90349 are cleared to O OV 2a V no Arne rin FPEM d 1121
395. ng of COM1 port No 410 Unit number for COM1 port 1 to 99 Set the desired unit number With a C NET adapter a maximum of 32 units stations can be specified No 412 Selection of communication mode for COM1 port Computer link Communication format for COM1 port Data length 7 bits 8 bits Parity check None Odd Even Stop bit 1 bit 2 bit Terminator CR Header STX not exist Note1 The communication format and baud rate communication speed should be set to match the connected computer Note2 The terminal units of the AFPX COM3 AFPX COMA and AFPX COM6 are specified by the dip switch in the communication cassette Note3 The baud rates of 300 600 and 1200 bps can be specified by the SYS1 instruction However the setting value of the system register cannot be changed 1 31 Setting of unit numbers By default the unit number for each communication port is set to 1 in the system register settings There is no need to change this for 1 1 communication but if 1 N communication is used to connect multiple PLCs to the transmission line e g in a C NET the unit number must be specified so that the destination of the command can be identified The unit number is specified by using the system register Unit Ma Computer a m z Cornmaercialiy uam available IT 1 conversion ars adapter TEC The PLC to which the response is sent is identified with he uni nu
396. ng on the units as of Feb 2009 Type of unit AFPX C14R AFPX C14T C14TD C14P C14PD AFPX C30R AFPX C30T C30TD C30P C30PD AFPX C60R AFPX C60T C60TD C60P C60PD Used Used Windows software Ver 2 5 or later Ver 2 70 or later FPWIN GR Ver Windows software Used Used Ver 6 Type of programming tool FPWIN Pro Used Used Me Ver 5 1 or later Ver 5 22 or later AFP1113V2 AFP1114V2 AFP1113 unit AFP1111A AFP1112A 1111 Not used Not used AFP1112 FP memory loader eo polis y AFP8671 Only programs and system registers can be transmitted Note Precautions concerning version upgrade e n case of using FPWIN GR Ver 1 please purchase upgrade model FPWIN GR Ver 2 e FPWIN GR Ver 2 0 can be upgraded to Ver 2 5 or later free of charge at our web site e FPWIN Pro Ver 6 0 can be upgraded free of charge at our web site e The handy programming unit cannot be used Do not download any programs for other units such as FP1 to the FP X using the handy programming unit Website address http panasonic denko co jp ac e dl software list patch plc jsp Chapter 1 Features Functions and Restrictions 1 1 Features and Functions of the Unit Features e Compact size general purpose PLC that is suitable for the small scale facility control e Can be directly connected to a personal computer using USB communication port e High dimensional security functions to deal with copying programs e Supports analo
397. ng point type ATAN TAN 5 1 S gt D 1 D data arctangent PATAN operation data natural PLN 1 logarithm Floating point type EXP 5 1 S gt D 1 D data exponent PEXP 10 1 9 pense data logarithm PLOG prr data power PPWR S2 D 1 data square root PFSQR 1 S gt D 1 D 1 16 bit integer data to FLT Converts the 16 bit integer data floating point type PFLT with sign specified by S to real data conversion number data and the converted data is stored in D 32 bit integer data to DFLT S Converts the 32 bit integer data floating point type PDFLT with sign specified by S 1 S to data conversion real number data and the converted data is stored in D 1 D Floating point type INT S D Converts real number data data to 16 bit integer PINT specified by S 1 S to the 16 conversion the bit integer data with sign the largest integer not largest integer not exceeding the exceeding the floating point data and the floating point type converted data is stored in D data Floating point type DINT S D Converts real number data data to 32 bit integer PDINT specified by S 1 S to the 32 conversion the bit integer data with sign the largest integer not largest integer not exceeding the exceeding the floating point data and the floating point type converted data is stored in D 1 data D Available Not available
398. ng the SYS1 instruction Programming example of SYS1 instruction SYS1 M PCLK1T1 100 Function Setting SYS1 to change the time that the PC PLC link transmission assurance is off from the default value of 6400 ms to 100 ms Keywords Setting for key word no 1 PCLK1T1 Permissible range for key word no 2 100 to 6400 100 ms to 6400 ms Note Enter one space after M and then enter 12 characters to be aligned to the right If the second keyword is digits put 2 spaces and if it is 4 digits no space is needed Note The setting should not be changed as long as a longer transmission assurance relay detection time does not cause any problems e The SYS1 instruction should be executed at the beginning of the program at the rise of R9014 The same time should be set for all linked PLCs e he time should be set to a value of at least twice the maximum transmission cycle time when all of the PLCs are connected to the link e f short time has been set the transmission assurance relay may not function properly The shortest time that can be set is 100 ms 1 14 7 6 Communication Function 4 MODBUS RTU Communication 7 6 1 MODBUS RTU Communication Function overview e he MODBUS RTU protocol enables the communication between the FP X and other devices including our FP e Programmable display GT series and KT temperature control unit e Enables to have conversations if the master unit sends instructions command messa
399. ng time is the time span from the execution of the instruction to the actual pulse output Booting time CW CCW is set Approx 200 us with 30 steps Approx 400 us with 60 steps Pulse direction is set Approx 500 us with 30 steps Approx 700 with 60 steps Pulse output instruction F171 SPDH Trapezoidal control home return Pulse output instruction F172 PLSH JOG operation Pulse output instruction F174 SPOH Data table control PWM output instruction F173 PWMH Approx 30 us Note If pulse direction is set a waiting time approx 300 us is included from the time that the direction output goes on until the pulse output instruction can be executed CW CCW is set Approx Pulse direction is set Approx CW CCW is set Approx Pulse direction is set Approx 10 8 10 3 High speed Counter Function 10 3 1 Overview of High speed Counter Function e he high speed counter function counts the input signals and when the count reaches the target value turns on and off the desired output e o turn on an output when the target value is matched use the target value match ON instruction F166 15 To turn off an output use the target value match OFF instruction F167 HC1R e Preset the output to be turned on and off with the SET RET instruction Setting the system register In order to use the high speed counter function it is necessary to set the system register No 402 for the
400. ng value of counter or timer instruction 4 This instruction is available for FP X Ver 2 0 or later 5 In the FP2 FP2SH FP10SH when using Y 1280 R1120 special internal relay included 11280 or anything beyond for the KP instruction the number of steps is shown in parentheses Also in the FP2 FP2SH FP10SH when a relay number has an index modifier the number of steps is shown in parentheses 6 In the FP2 FP2SH FP 10SH when timer 256 or higher or counter 255 or lower is used the number of steps is the number in parentheses Also in the FP2 FP2SH FP10SH when a timer number or counter number has an index modifier the number of steps is the number in parentheses For the FPE and FP X the number of steps varies according to the specified timer number or counter number 17 49 UP DOWN counter Shift register Left right shift register Boolean F118 UDC PWN 5 Symbol r Increments or decrements from the preset value S based on up down input Shifts one bit of 16 bit word internal relay WR data to the left Shifts one bit of 16 bit data range specified by D1 and D2 to the left or to the right FPO FP e LL FP2SH FP10SH F119 LRSR Control instructions Master MC control JP The program jumps to the label instruction and continues from there LBL LBL BL The program jumps to the label instruction specified by S and continues
401. nication mode of COM port An F159 MTRN instruction can be executed to change between general purpose serial communication mode and computer link mode To do so specify H8000 for n the number of transmission bytes and execute the instruction Changing from general purpose to computer link R9032 RO H k 1 gt F159 MTRN DT100 H8000 i Set to H8000 Specify tha part t be changed Changing from computer link to general purpose R9032 Ro HDF 12 F159 DT100 H8000 Ki Set to HBOOO Specify the port t be changed The COM port communication mode flag in R9032 or R9042 turns on when general purpose serial communication mode is selected ME Note e When the power is turned on the operating mode selected in system register no 412 takes effect It is not possible to change to the MODBUS RTU mode 7 47 7 4 3 Connection with 1 1 Communication General purpose serial communication System register settings Settings for COM1 port AFPX COM1 AFPX COM2 AFPX COMS3 AFPX COM5 Set Value No 412 Selection of communication mode for General purpose serial communication COM 1 port Communication format for COM1 port Data length 7 bits 8 bits Parity check None Odd Even Stop bit 1 bit 2 bits Terminator CR CR LF None ETX Header No STX STX No 415 No 416 Starting address for receive buffer for DTO to DT32764
402. nimize the increase in the transmission cycle time Programming example of SYS1 instruction SYS1 M PCLK1TO 100 Function Setting SYS1 to change the waiting time for a link to be added to the PC PLC link from the default value of 400 ms to 100 ms Keywords Setting for key word no 1 PCLK1TO Permissible range for key word no 2 10 to 400 10 ms to 400 ms Note Enter one space after M and then enter 12 characters to be aligned to the right If the second keyword is 2 digits put 2 spaces and if itis 3 digits put one space If there are any units that have not been added to the link the setting should be changed as long as a longer link transmission cycle time does not cause any problem e The SYST instruction should be executed at the beginning of the program at the rise of R9014 The same waiting time should be set for all linked PLCs e The waiting time should be set to a value of at least twice the maximum scan time for any of the PLCs connected to the link e f a short waiting time has been set there may be PLCs that cannot be added to the link even if their power supply is on The shortest time that can be set is 10 ms 7 73 Error detection time for transmission assurance relays The power supply of any given PLC fails or is turned off it takes as a default value 6 4 seconds for the transmission assurance relay of the PLC to be turned off at the other stations This time period can be shortened usi
403. nk Source port No 9094 Timeout JO UDP IP can be used for the communication method In that case change the communication method of the FP2 ET LAN unit to UDP IP Set the communication protocol of the AFP COM5 to UDP and set the send type to UNICAST Note For MEWTOCOL master function of the FP2 ET LAN unit MEWTOCOL COM is not available For communicating with the by the computer link transmit the MEW TOCOL COM data format using the transparent communication on the FP2 ET LAN unit In this case an exclusive header is not required for the ET LAN unit 7 110 Connection with GV series via Ethernet Overview Connect the FP X to the GV series via Ethernet Transmission is performed by sending a response from the FP X to the command issued by the GV The operation with a programmable display can be performed only by specifying communication settings for each unit without any program for communication Example of connection FP A Unit No 2 MN IP address 192 168 1 12 S Listen port No 9094 FP X unit No 3 gr IP address 192 168 1 13 A Listen port No 2094 Command HUB SS mr Unit No 4 IP address 192 168 1 14 Unit 1 IP address 192 168 1 100 1 Listen part No 9094 Setting of GV Use the GV Programmable Operator Terminal CVWIN to specify the Ethernet setting for the GV Select FP series Ethernet TCP IP in the dialog box of Select PLC type when cre
404. nk number F415 CBFL P415 PCBFL instruction Available Not available Not available partially 1 This instruction is available for FPO V2 1 or later only 2 This instruction is available for FP X V 1 20 or later and FP 32k type 3 This instruction is not available for FP10SH 17 75 17 4 Table of Error codes Difference in ERROR display There are differences in the way errors are displayed depending on the model FP X FPO0 FPOR FP X ERROR ALARM Flashes continually lit Screen display Continually lit Error Confirmation When ERROR Turns ON When the ERROR on the control unit CPU unit turns on or flashes a self diagnostic error or syntax check error has occurred Confirm the contents of the error and take the appropriate steps Error Confirmation Method Procedure 1 Use the programming tool software to call up the error code By executing the STATUS DISPLAY the error code and content of error are displayed 2 Check the error contents in the table of error codes using the error code ascertained above Syntax check error This is an error detected by the total check function when there is a syntax error or incorrect setting written in the program When the mode selector is switched to the RUN mode the total check function automatically activates and eliminates the possibility of incorrect operation from syntax errors in the program When a syntax check error is detected ERROR
405. nly the cassette mounting part 1 and 2 of the control unit Installation on the control unit Connect the connector on the back of the application cassette and the connector of the cassette mounting part of the control unit and secure the two positions bottom left and top right with the screws The screw s tightening torque should be 0 3 to 0 5 Screw securely I Becured at 2 posilians 5 4 3 Precautions on Installation Do not touch the back side of the add on cassette and the connector The parts such as IC etc may be damaged by static electricity 5 4 4 State When Add on Cassette is Installed Commsunmicalim asset aa Application cassette 5 5 Power Supply 5 5 1 AC Power Supply Wiring of power supply Separate the wiring systems to the control unit and tha davices e The wire should be 2mm AWG14 or larger 0 9 and twisted Breaker E d b gg ul EE NEM Zw PE Use the isolation transformer Ju Power supply terminal supplies 100 240 V AC in situations of excess noise LJ Earth terminal rounding C3Q0 C50 Confirm that the power supply voltage is within the allowable range of the power supply All All lef Rated input voltage owableweltage Rated frequency owable frequency amplitude range range 100 to 240 V AC 85 to 264 V AC 90 60 Hz 47 to 63 Hz c Using the pow
406. nly Writing in the target value area is available by F166 HC1S and F167 HC1R instructions only DT90319 Higher words 17 42 FP X A Available N A Not available ing ing A for i X5 of DT90320 Elapsed Lower words OUR ids 1 the main unit A DT90321 Higher words HSC CH5 The target value is set when A Hence instructions F166 HC1S and F167 HC1R DT90323 Higher words rd Counting area for input X6 or A Dem e eee X6 X7 of the main unit iid DT90325 Higher words HSC CH6 The target value is set when A Target instructions F166 HC1S 167 HC1R DT90327 Higher words 0790328 Elapsed Lower words is da the main unit A DT90329 Higher words HSC CH7 The target value is set when A issu Target instructions F166 HC1S and F167 HC1R DT90331 Higher words Counting area for input A value A DT90333 area Higher words HSC CH8 Note2 The target value is set when A usps PRESSE instructions F166 HC1S and F167 HC1R ted DT90335 Higher words Note1 Writing in the elapsed value area is available by F1 DMV instruction only Writing in the target value area is available by F166 15 and F167 HC1R instructions only Note2 Available for the FP X Ry type only 17 43 FP X A Available N A Not available ing ing Counting area for input X1 of A DT90336 Elapsed Lower words th
407. nput X102 counter counter counter Pulse output CHO Normal output 100 Y101 Pulse I O settings Normal Pulse output Y100 Y101 cassette Y100 to Y101 output PWM output Y100 Normal output Y101 Setungs Do not set input X200 as high speed counter HSC Two phase input X200 X201 PLS Two phase input X200 X201 Reset input X202 Incremental input X200 CHA Incremental input X200 Reset input X202 Do not set Decremental input X202 input X200 as Decremental input X202 Reset input X202 Incremental decremental input X200 X201 Incremental decremental input X200 X201 Reset input X202 settings Incremental decremental control X200 to X202 X200 X201 Incremental decremental control counter counter CHB Does not set input X201 as high speed counter 0 irs Incremental input X201 pag aS Incremental input X201 Reset input X202 high speed Decremental input X201 counter Decremental input X201 Reset input X202 Pulse output CH1 Normal output Y200 Y201 settings Normal Pulse output Y200 Y201 Y200 to Y201 output PWM output Y200 Normal output Y201 17 8 Note1 If the operation mode is set to Two phase incremental decremental or incremental decremental control the setting for CH9 is invalid in system register 400 and the setting for CHB is invalid in system register 401 Note2 If reset input settings overlap the CH9 setting takes pr
408. nput and Output 14 8 1 Processing when forced input output is initiated during RUN Forced processing PLC i External input X put update ln External Y n Lu Forced set resmH processing B Oneratio n Forced sel reset processing Penpheral service 1 Processing of external input X e Regardless of the state of the input from the input device forced on off operation will take precedence at a contact specified for forced input output in the above procedure B At this time the input LED will not blink however the area of input X in the operation memory will be rewritten e Contacts not specified will read in the on off state according to the condition of the input from the input device 2 Processing of external output Y e Regardless of the result of operation forced on off will take precedence at a contact specified for forced input output in the above procedure A At this time the area of output Y in the operation memory will be forcedly rewritten External output will take place according to the input output update timing in the above diagram e he on off state of contacts not specified will be determined by the operation result 3 Processing of Timer T and Counter C e Regardless of the timer counter input condition forced on off operation will take precedence at a contact specified for forced inpu
409. nput terminals 1 and 2 for C60 are isolated They are not connected internally Output terminal Each power supply terminal is separate Use them in the range surrounded by the bold black lines 2 25 2 26 Chapter 3 Expansion Cassette and Expansion FPO Adapter Specifications 3 1 Expansion Method Two types of expansion method are available for the FP X 1 Installs the FP X expansion unit or FPO expansion unit expansion FPO adapter using the expansion cable 2 Installs the add on cassette to the cassette mounting part of the FP X control unit 3 1 1 Expansion Using the Expansion Cable For the FP X the FP X expansion unit and the FPO expansion unit expansion FPO adapter AFPX EFPO is necessary can be used by using the exclusive expansion cable Ne 2 EM jura m TID T 55558 Expansion unit Expansion unit e Up to B units can be connected 963 69 69 699 9696090 L XL Up to 7 Control unit expansion Expansion Expansion Expatisibn units can FPO imit i uasa be connected adapter Expansion unit 2 Note Only one expansion FPO adapter can be installed at the last position of the expansion bus It should be installed at the right hand side of the AFPX E16 and E30 Up to seven FP X expansion units can be also installed betwee
410. nsion unit and add on cassette Operation 2 Turn on the power supply of the expansion unit For error code is 42 2 gt Condition A temporary blackout such as a momentary power off occurred and the power supply of the expansion unit was turned off Operation Once the power supply of the expansion unit is restored the control unit will be automatically reset and restarted Using FPWIN GR Click on the Clear Error button in the Status display dialog box Error code 43 and higher can be cleared e n the PROG mode the power supply can be turned off and then on again to clear the error but all of the contents of the operation memory except hold type data are cleared e An error can also be cleared by executing a self diagnostic error set instruction F148 ERR g Key Point When an operation error error code 45 occurs the address at which the error occurred is stored in special data registers DT90017 and DT90018 If this happens click on the Operation Err button in the Status display dialog box and confirm the address at which the error occurred before cancelling the error 13 2 2 If ERROR LED is ON Condition The system watchdog timer has been activated and the operation of PLC has been activated Procedure 1 Set the mode selector of PLC from RUN to PROG mode and turn the power off and then on e f the ERROR LED is turned on again there is probably an abnormality in the FP X control unit Ple
411. nstruction FO F1 9 41 9 4 9 Positioning Control Instruction F174 Data Table Control e Positioning is performed according to the specified data table 5010 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 Rio U DMV DMV DMV DMV DMV DMV DMV 1200 DT400 1000 DT402 1000 2500 DT406 2000 DT408 5600 DT410 8000 DT412 K 1000 DT414 2000 07418 K 0 DT418 HDF HF174 SPOH DT400 K0 i Positioning data table 07404 Control code 200 Freguaeney 1 1000 Hz Targe value 1 1000 pulses Frequency 2 2500 Hr Target valus 2 2000 pulsas Frequency 3 8000 Hz Targel value 3 5000 pulis Frequency 4 1000 Hz Target value 4 2000 pulse Output stop Puke outpul start 1000 pulses 2500 Hz 2000 pulses Target value 3 5ODO pulses Frequency 4 TODO Hz Target value 4 2000 pulses DT418 Pulse output 07419 stop setting aii Pulse output diagram Frequency speed Hz Executi 01000 3000 boc 0000 Amount of travel condilian R10 RBT1C When the execution condition R10 goes on pulses are output from YO af the pulsa 1 0 cassatte at a frequancy of 1000 Hz and positioning begins At the point when 1000 pulses have been counted the frequency switches to 2500 Hz Posiboning is then carned oul sequentially in accordance with the values of the data table
412. nt bemper lure CJ Humber of dU ponts per common which zamalta on En Ambient temperature CC Configuration 1 DA2 2 A21 simula 8 21 21 DA2 DA2 DA2 A21 Number y per COT ice which are on Boc 35 45 55 CGOR puer common which are 13 imuta w Aman temperatum iC C14RD Mumbar of points per common which ere amp imulla neoushr on Amibeant temperature X Number of pons par 15 common which are 11 simulia nenmusly on g Ambeent temperature C CBORD Number of 2H ponts _ common which simulia newsy on B Ambiant temperature CC 2 13 2 5 4 Transistor Tr Type NPN Stand alone and With AFPX COM5 Keep the number of points which are simultaneously on within the following range as determined by the ambient temperature Product number AFPX C14T AFPX C30T AFPX C60T AFPX C14TD AFPX C30TD AFPX C60TD Limitations on number of simultaneous input on points Paar of pont Per a TIT Ca which ace aama IE 51 Ambient temperature C30T Number af 18 posts COTTA which are 10 simulta on do ES AuTi brent btemper ture C Number of 32 points per common which 16 simulta neously on 40 42 55 Ambient temperatur
413. ntact area Read timer counter elapsed value area Reads the timer counter elapsed value Register or Reset contacts monitored Registers the contact to be monitored Register or Reset data monitored MD Registers the data to be monitored Monitors a registered contact or data using MD Monitoring start G and MC Preset contact area fill command opecifies the contents of a system register Reads the specifications of the programmable controller and error codes if an error occurs Write system register Read the status of PLC Switches the operation mode of the programmable controller Aborts communication Reference lt MEWTOCOL Communication Procedure Write timer counter elapsed value area Writes the timer counter elapsed value M W R Remote control Read system register RR Reads the contents of a system register RK K C D Embeds the area of a specified range in a 16 5 i point on and off pattern Preset data area fill command SD Writes the same contents to the data area of a specified range R RT M AB 7 26 Setting communication parameters Setting for Baud rate and communication format The settings for baud rate and communication format of the COM port are entered using the FPWIN GR Select Options in the menu bar and then select PLC Configuration Click COM Port There are separate tabs for setting the COM1 and COM2 e As the default of the COM2 port
414. ntro i The dats inhin hy OT isimni L and pulses ar mm F171 DT 100 The doin tnbie hooded by DIT 100 Pulses are output from CHO pee oo TO Pulse output diagram 5000 Hz pulses EDO Fi 0 Hz ms BUR 10 30 Incremental Position Control Operation Minus Direction When X1 turns on the pulse is output from CCW output Y 101 of the specified channel CHO Note In that case the memory Y101 does not turn on off according to the pulse output FPN eases XT se hti PERITI TH L iris E alde BUDG puses Motor F171 DT 100 The data table headed by DT 100 is used Pulses are output from CHO 10 Pulse output diagram 6000 Hz B100 pulses 1000 Hz Hz 300 ms 300 ms Start OV 24 V DC LLL Qm M S c Positioning dala table DT100 TIO Control DT102 DT103 019 Max speed OTe DT107 Target valua 1100 1000 Initial speed Acceleration tima 300 ms DT108 Mevemenl around 8000 pulses DT110 p pT111 Pulse slop Control code H1100 Duty 1 4 2456 I 48 Hz A B Pulse output instruction table shaped control The data table headed by OT 100 is used and pulses are output fram CHO 01s lype limer Settin
415. o of batteries life When AFPX MRTC is installed 15 9 Note1 The number of points actually available for use is determined by the hardware configuration Note2 The number of points can be increased by using an auxiliary timer Note3 This is the specifications when the rated input voltage is 24 V DC at 25 The frequency will decrease depending on voltage temperature or usage condition Note4 The maximum frequency varies depending on the use Note5 Precision of realtime clock At O C less than 119 seconds per month At 25 C less than 51 seconds per month At 55 less than 148 seconds per month Note6 Writing is available up to 10000 times When the optional battery is used all areas can be backed up Areas to be held and not held can be specified using the system registers Note If an area is held when the battery is not installed the value of data may be indefinite as it is not cleared to O when the power is turned on When the battery ran out of the power the data at the hold area will be indefinite Note8 Note that the lifetime in actual use may be shorter than the typical lifetime depending on the use conditions Note9 Refresh time of FPO expansion unit 16 point unit 32 pointunit of units used x 1 3 Note10 The contact information and the elapsed value EV of the counter is backed up The setting value SV is not held 15 1 3 Communication Specifications Computer link
416. o a unit number via TCP a new connection should be established after disconnecting the existing connection 1 108 7 7 13 Example of Connections Ethernet Ver 1 10 or Later Connection with FP2 ET LAN unit Overview Connection can be established with a maximum of 8 FP X simultaneously using a FP2 ET LAN unit and transmission is performed by the computer link Example of connection Unit No 2 IP address 192 168 1 12 Listen port No 9094 Server Unit No 3 IP address 192 168 1 13 Listen port No 9094 Command HUB Server Response Unit No 4 IP address 192 168 1 14 Active open Client Server 4 Listen port 9094 Unit No 1 At IP address 192 168 1 100 Max 8 units Setting of FP2 ET LAN unit Mem J Setting value Communication method TCP IP Open method Active open Application in which connection is used General purpose communication Transparent communication Source node port No Arbitrary Destination node IP address IP address of the destination FP X Destination node port No 9094 can be changed Reference For information of the setting method of FP2 ET LAN unit FP2 ET LAN Unit Manual FP2 ET LAN Unit Manual Additional Version 1 109 Setting of FP X 1 FP X System register setting No 412 Computer link mode 2 Setting of AFPX COM5 Setting value Communication protocol TCP Computer li
417. o units cannot be connected consecutively since the power should be supplied from the unit with the power supply as no power supply is built in AFPX E16 E16 expansion I O unit cannot be connected on the right side of the control unit or AFPX E30 For AFPX E30 There is no restriction on AFPX E30 so that up to 8 units can be connected consecutively The total length of the expansion cable should be within 160 cm Type of control unit Comic utut tint EL Leases MOOD PE EEI M rese GC Control Expaneca Elo Exbansj5n unl E30 unt Eto 1 10 1 3 2 Restrictions on Expansion Unit Up to three dedicated FPO expansion units can be added using the FP X and the expansion FPO adapter The relay output type and the transistor output type can be used in combination O G9 9696093 S999 ye vr Up to 7 expansion Expansion Expansion Expansion units can unit 1 unit3 be connected adapter Expansion unit 2 Controllable I O points Number of I O points when Number of I O points when Type of control unit using control unit using FPO expansion unit FP X C14 Control unit 14 points Max 110 points FP X C30 Control unit 30 points Max 126 points FP X C60 Control unit 60 points Max 156 points Note1 Up to seven FP X expansion I O units can be also installed between the c
418. od 1 Insert a slotted screwdriver into the DIN rail attachment lever 2 Pull the attachment lever downwards 3 Lift up the unit and remove it from the rail 5 3 Installation with screws Use 4 size screws for the installation Reference For the information on the installation dimensions 13 1 4 Dimension Diagram for Installation Installation and removal of the expansion FPO adapter FPO expansion unit Attachment to DIN rail and removal from DIN rail Can be simply attached to DIN rail Procedure of installation method 1 Fit the upper hook of the unit onto the DIN rail 2 Without moving the upper hook press on the lower hook to fit the unit into position Procedure of removal method 1 Insert a slotted screwdriver into the DIN rail attachment lever 2 Pull the attachment lever downwards 3 Lift up the unit and remove it from the rail Installation Using the Optional Mounting Plate When using the slim type mounting plate AFP0803 for mounting FPO Use M4 size pan head screws for attachment of the slim type mounting plate and install according to the dimensions shown below mrm gU 12 5 mimi i torr installata n IT Sat i The rest of the procedure is the same as that for attaching the unit to the DIN rails Tighten the screws after joining all of the slim type mounting plate to be connected Tighten the screws at each of the four corners Example When two expans
419. oes off when elapsed value of high speed counter CHE reaches 3000 pulses 10 17 Positioning operations with a double speed inverter Wiring example FP X Ry AFPX PLS Input terminal Conveyor Encoder input X100 n P k a Es QU ie a a Operation start X102 Foo or MR ra Pal F i COM iO OV o marl d QU u a F am j M P 4 Motor Encoder Output terminal Inverter Inverter operation Y100 pap Operation Stop Inverter F gh speed 4101 1 Fast Slow T 2 COM Operation chart I O allocation i i Lx No OM inde R100 Positioning operation running Number ol pulse Positioning operation start F 8102 Arrival at deceleration point RO O Positioning done pulse vim L R900C Comparison instruction lt flag gt R9118 High speed counter CH8 control flag 10 18 When X102 is turned on Y100 and Y101 turn on and the conveyor begins moving When the elapsed value DT90332 and DT90333 reaches K4500 Y101 turns off and the conveyor begins decelerating When the elapsed value reaches K5000 Y100 turns off and the conveyor stops A102 H8118 H103 H100 UE NEMESIS Positioning operations running R100 H101 H F1 0790332 unter amp F 67 HCIR 5000 100 Target value match
420. of the SEL terminal However the inputs of 0 to 5 V and 0 to 20 mA can be used at the same time depending on the connection Connection method With voltage input 0 t 10V Analog dinca d 0 c if d E k 3 k T SEL COM j ibi he V With voltage Input 0 to 5 With current input 0 to 20 mA olv sierras device 2 y p m imf ua r E TE gt Ti Th 2 T T KON E rT l l P OX A OR M SEL eT t amp COM ahortorcul TW SEL eco circuit SEL and COM herve and COM lemmas Wilh voltage output 0 to 10V With current output 0 to 20 mA vV er AE i3 FCR m mam mm FA 0 TT i 26 pi Fi P amp Fo P TR AR WA Analog es zal ical Mal xl I F WS H Aot m E COM DC input 0 mA to 20 mA Conversion characteristics graph AD converted value 5 10 15 20 4 Analog input range Table of A D converted values When exceeding the rated range Input voltage V Converted value mA or less Negative value 4000 8 13 DC input 0 V to 10 V Conversion characteristics graph AT converted value
421. of the output memories YO Y1 Y2 4 and Y5 are not output So they will not be turned on off even if monitoring with the tool 9 20 Operation mode Incremental Relative value control Outputs the pulses set with the target value Selected Mode Pulse and direction forward OFF reverse ON CW CCW Pulse output when Pulse output from CW direction output is OFF Pulse output when direction output is ON Positive Pulse output megane from CCW Example Pulse and direction forward ON reverse OFF Pulse output when direction output is ON Pulse output when direction output is OFF HSC counting Method Decremental When the current position value of elapsed value area is 5000 the pulse of 1000 is output from CW by executing the pulse output instruction with the target value 1000 and the current position will be 6000 Absolute lt Absolute value control gt Outputs a number of pulses equal to the difference between the set target value and the current value Selected Mode Pulse and direction forward OFF reverse ON CW CCW Pulse output when direction output is Target value greater than Pulse output current value oN OFF Target value Pulse output when Pulse output i 2 less than direction output is from CCW current value ON Example Pulse and direction forward ON reverse OFF Pulse output when direction output is ON Pulse output when direction ou
422. off instruction When elapsed value reaches 5000 LY 100 goes off R100 R2000 i Speed reduction point reached 0 1 npe timer HoF J 5 Positioning operations start Y 100 goes off when elapsed value of high cuts high speed counter CHE amp peed Gount r reaches 5000 pulses o J R100 DOMP 4500 32 bit data comparison instruction FEOUC lums on when the CAS high speed counter 8 elapsed value becomes greater than 4500 pules e e e S o e e e e um gt M RD M NO E Ds zm RE ee dE ee ae eee ca z oa oe mA TERE 5 S A a Setting KS and using it as a 0 5 s timer _ LE dE L LLL 10 19 10 4 Pulse Output Function Pulse I O Cassette 10 4 1 Overview of Pulse Output Function Instructions used and controls Together with a commercially available pulse string input type motor driver the pulse output function can be used for positioning control Exclusive Type of control instru Description Usable cassette ction Provides trapezoidal table shaped control for automatically obtaining pulse outputs by specifying the initial F171 speed maximum speed SPDH acceleration deceleration
423. oint off to Floating point type data to 32 bit integer con version rounding the first decimal point off to integer Floating point type data round ding the first decimal point down Floating point FINT PFINT FRINT The decimal part of the real number PFRINT data stored in S 1 S is rounded off and the result is stored in D 1 1 decimal point off D Floating point The real number data stored in 5 1 type data sign S is changed the sign and the changes result is stored in D 1 D Floating point FABS S D Takes the absolute value of real type data absolute PFABS number data specified by S 1 S and the result absolute value is 1 stored in D 1 D S The data in degrees of an angle PRAD specified in S 1 S is converted to radians real number data and the 1 result is stored in D 1 D S The angle data in radians real number data specified in S 1 S is converted to angle data in degrees 1 and the result is stored in D 1 D Floating point type real number data processing instructions Floating point FCMP 91 S141 51 gt 52 1 S2 R900A on type data compare PFCMP 92 51 1 51 52 1 S2 R900B on 10 gt S141 1 lt 2 1 S2 R900C on F346 Floating point FWIN 91 8141 S1 S3 1 83 R900A on P346 type data band 52 1 S2 lt or 1 1 S1 lt or EP compare 53 1 S3 gt R900B on PFWIN S2 S3 Available 2 Not available Not available partia
424. ol of data that needs to be consistent throughout the network such as target production values and type codes can easily be implemented to coordinate the data and the data of all units are updated at the same time Link relay In the figure below when link relay LO of the master station no 1 turns on this signal is converted by the programs of the other stations and YO of the other stations is activated Link register In the figure below if a constant of 100 is written to LDO of the master station no 1 the contents of LDO in the other stations are also changed to a constant of 100 t FO Link 49 2 Link d ge 4 ribi eher Loo LD 100 LD LOC Mo Link register LD 100 Only the COM1 port can be used for the PC PLC link Excluding AFPX COM5 1 5 MODBUS RTU Function overview e The MODBUS RTU protocol enables the communication between the FP X and other devices including our FP e Programmable display GT series and KT temperature control unit e Enables to have conversations if the master unit sends instructions command messages to slave units and the slave units respond response messages according to the instructions e Enables the communication between the devices of max 99 units as the master function and slave function is equipped e he communication cassette and the USB port can be used About MODBUS RTU e he MODBUS RTU communicatio
425. ommon terminal Min on voltage Min on current 19 2 V DC 3 mA Max off voltage Max off current 2 4V DC 1 mA Approx 5 1 for control units XO to X7 Approx 5 6 kQ from control unit X8 For control units to X7 0 6 msorless normal input 50 us orless high speed counter pulse catch interrupt off on Note Response time input settings From control unit X8 0 6 ms or less Operating mode indicator LED display EN61131 2 Applicable type however according to the above specifications Note this specification is applied when the rated input voltage is 24 V DC and the temperature is 25 C Input points per common Input impedance Circuit diagram aa 5 o w 2 For to X7 1 5 1 2 3 8 R1 5 6 2 1 COM Limitations on number of simultaneous input on points Reference 2 5 Limitations on Number of Simultaneous Input Output On Points 2 6 2 3 2 Transistor Tr Type Common to NPN and PNP Transistor type common to NPN and PNP Approx 8 mA for control units XO to X3 Rated input current Approx 4 7 mA for control units X4 to X7 Approx 4 3 mA from control unit X8 8 points common 16 points common Input points per common Either the positive or negative of the input power supply can be connected to common terminal Mns tussi on Re onere 19 2 V DC 6 mA for control units XO to X3 9 19
426. on done flag during general purpose communication TOOL port transmission Goes on when transmission has been completed in done flag during general purpose serial communication general purpose serial Goes off when transmission is requested in general communication purpose serial communication Note R9030 to R903F can be changed during 1 scan Turns on when the terminator is received during general purpose serial communication 17 19 WR904 FP E R9040 TOOL port mode flag Goes on when the general purpose serial communication is used Goes off when the MEWTOCOL is used R9041 COM port PC PLC link flag Turn on while the PC PLC link function is used R9042 COM2 port mode flag Goes on when the general purpose serial communication is used Goes off when the MEWTOCOL is used R9043 Notusd 0 0 O R9044 R9045 COM1 port SEND RECV instruction execution flag COM1 port SEND RECV instruction execution end flag Monitors whether the F145 SEND or F146 RECV instructions can be executed or not for the COM1 port Off None of the above mentioned instructions can be executed During executing the instruction On One of the above mentioned instructions can be executed Monitors if an abnormality has been detected during the execution of the F145 SEND or F146 RECV instructions for the COM1 port as follows Off No abnormality detected On An abnormalit
427. on Help D Communication Settings EPWIN GR Configuration Gomer Customize Private Configuration 4 Specify the communication setting as the table below Once the setting has been completed the communication with the USB becomes available Communication Setting Untrtlel Network ype G NET RS232C COM port Cancel Baud rate 115200 E Initialize Data length C bits f B bits Help Stop bit C 2 bits Parity Non f Odd Even Time out Parameter tor automatic setting Baud rate Data Length Parity Network type C NET RS232C Port No COM port No allocated for the USB Baud rate Specify 115200 bps Communicates with 115200 bps when the USB is connected Data length 8 bits Stop bit 1 bit Parity 6 20 6 3 9 Reinstallation of USB Driver The USB driver must be installed again if the installation was carried out in wrong procedures or cancelled in the process Also reinstall the driver when the USB connection does not work well Confirming the status of the USB driver 1 Display Device manager P Reference 6 3 7 Confirming COM Ports 2 CP210X USB to UART Bridge Controller is indicated in Other devices or Unknown device the installation of the USB driver has been failed O Device Manager File
428. onnect the FP X with a PC using the USB cable _ USE cable Commercial 2 After the connection the PC recognize the USB driver automatically As the following message is shown select No not this time and click Next Found New Hardware Wizard Welcome to the Found New Hardware Wizard Windows will search for current and updated software by looking on your computer on the hardware installation CD or on the Windows Update Web site with your permission Read our privacy policy Can Windows connect to Windows Update to search for software Yes this time only Yes now and every time connect a device 9 No not this time Click Next to continue Note This display is not be shown with Windows amp XP SP1 3 The next message is shown Select Install the software automatically and click Next Found Mew Hardware Wizard Welcome to the Found Now Hardware Wizard Tha verad Acker inca arbrar for CP Garde Deen gt M your hardware name with an instaliatinn CD 9 ar Rapp disk insert now Vul io yuu cranii Urn 3d do CE ve safe lames Recommended C reia inca i cu ione la sn od annes Luck Hast to 4 The installation of the USB driver starts Although an alert for the Windows logo testing is indicated during the installation click Continue Anyway to continue the installation Found New Hardware Wizard Pleas
429. ontrol unit sm B LP booooetococldbEockobeeopg 9101601001019 Cassette mounting part 1 Expansion connector part 2 Silda State that the expansion remo mounting vart cover and battery cover State that the expansion cover was removed Status indicator LEDs These LEDs display the current mode of operation or the occurrence of an error LED and operation status Lights when in the RUN mode and indicates that the program is Z being executed RUN It flashes during forced input output The RUN and PROG LEDs flash alternately Lights when in the PROG Mode and indicates that operation has stopped Lights when in the PROG Mode during forced input output It flashes during forced input output The RUN and PROG LEDs flash alternately Flashes when an error is detected during the self diagnostic ERROR function ERROR ALARM Lights if a hardware error occurs or if operation slows because of the program and the watchdog timer is activated ALARM Input output indicator LEDs Indicates the on off status of the input and output RUN PROG mode switch This switch is used to change the operation mode of the PLC Operation mode This sets the RUN mode The program is executed is executed and operation begins PROG downward This sets the PROG mode The operation stops e The remote switching operation from the programming tool is operable e When performing remote switchin
430. ontrol unit and the expansion FPO adapter Note2 Only one expansion FPO adapter can be installed at the last position of the FP X expansion bus It should be installed at the right hand side of the AFPX E16 and E30 Note e Install the FPO thermocouple unit on the right side of other expansion units If it is installed on the left side the total precision will deteriorate e Install the FPO CC Link slave unit on the right side of the other expansion units There is no expansion connector on the right side 1 3 3 Restrictions on FP X Add on Cassette The add on cassette is installed in the cassette mounting part 1 and 2 only the cassette mounting part 1 is available for C14 of the control unit Communication cassette Application cassette Cassette mounting part 1 Geesesi 2 The state when 1 application cassette is installed Cassette Cassette mounting mounting The state when the communication part 1 part 2 casseltei is installed on the application 2 cassette Beeooeocoocde el The state when 1 application cassette and 1 communication cassette is installed pix 26 ODOC oid Cassette Cassette mounting mounting part 1 part 2 Expansion connector part o leeeeeoeeeeeolieeeeeeeeeeel BE g G990990 eld The state when 2 CERIS CD application cassette and 1 communication cassette is installed 0000 2555
431. onversion in the tool software and then change to the online edit mode to check 2 When boolean mode A ladder editing is cleared Set it to the offline edit mode and carry out the editing operation again After the operation change to the online edit mode to check When the timeout error occurs using the through mode in GT series programmable display Extend the timeout time of the programmable display using the GTWIN The default setting is 5 seconds Communication Setting gt Select Transfer from File in the menu bar The transfer data screen will open Select Condition to We open Communication Setting screen _ Change the value for Timeout pele Wisi Click OK button to complete the change of setting Network tupe t ahi t will be set as the following value automatically Data Lenath 8 Step Bit 1 Even C B Time out sec Parameter for automatic setting Baud rate ia Parity 14 15 Cases where rewriting is not possible during RUN 1 When the result of rewriting is a syntax error Example When executing the rewriting which does not form the following pair of instructions 1 Step ladder instructions SSTP STPE 2 Subroutine instructions SUB RET 3 Interrupt instructions INT IRET 4 JP LBL 5 LOOP LBL 6 MC MCE Also rewriting is not possible during RUN in case of other syntax errors 2 During the forced input
432. or command multi frame more than two connections cannot be established Also If the UDP is selected for the communication protocol the UDP communication cannot be used as the programming tool FPWIN GR does not support it although no restriction on connections 7 88 7 7 6 Communication Computer Link Ethernet Overview A 1 1 computer link connects the FP X and a computer using a UTP cable CAT5 Communication is conducted via commands from the computer and responses from the PLC Computer PX m di E Response message 1 nn y j p rabia CATS 1 1 Communication setting Computer link Ethernet This setting enables the 1 1 communication between the FP X and a computer using the computer link Ethernet Computer Setting of IP address of a computer Sytem register setting FP X COMS cassette setting Setting of IP address of FP X System register setting of FP X specified using FPWIN GR Dialog box of PLC system register setting PLC Configuration Untitlel Hold Non hold 1 Hold Non hold 2 No 410 Unit No 1 No 413 Communication Format Action on Error Time No412 Comm Char Bit 8 Bits tink wot Computer Link Parity 099 Pulse 1 0 cassette settings HSC PLS Modem Enabled ig Stop Bit E Controller input settings HSC Interrupt pulse catch settings r Interrupt edge settings Time constan
433. or when not in the PC PLC link mode Turns on when Unit No 16 is communicating properly in PC PLC link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC PLC link mode WR907 FP X R9072 Turns on when Unit No 3 is in the RUN mode Turns off when Unit No 3 is in the PROG mode R9073 Turns on when Unit No 4 is in the RUN mode Turns off when Unit No 4 is in the PROG mode Turns off when Unit No 1 is in the PROG mode Turns off when Unit No 2 is in the PROG mode Turns on when Unit No 5 is in the RUN mode Turns off when Unit No 5 is in the PROG mode R9074 R9075 MEWNET WO PC PLC link Turns on when Unit No 6 is in the RUN mode Turns off when Unit No 6 is in the PROG mode R9078 0 operation mode relay Turns on when Unit No 9 is in the RUN mode Turns off when Unit No 9 is in the PROG mode Turns off when Unit No 10 is in the PROG mode z E nid ZA Turns off when Unit No 11 is in the PROG mode R907B Turns on when Unit No 12 is in the RUN mode Turns off when Unit No 12 is in the PROG mode Turns on when Unit No 11 is in the RUN mode Turns on when Unit No 13 is in the RUN mode Turns off when Unit No 13 is in the PROG mode Turns on when Unit No 14 is in the RUN mode Turns off when Unit No 14 is in the PROG mode Turns on when Unit No 15 is in the RUN mode Turns off when Unit No 15 is in the PROG mode Turns on when Unit No 16 is in the RUN mode
434. ore 1 ms or less C14 None C30 C60 from Y8 Voltage 21 6 to 26 4 V DC YOtoY5 Y7 Y8Sto YD Y10to Y17 Y18to Y1D eee C14 External power supply or less or less or less or less or less or less or less Circuit diagram PNP output LYO to DIURNO EM Output indicator LED Ouiput indicator LED Ad A a terrminal inl I I 1 1 i Cudtup t tierrninal Exlernal i m benmingd E power C Load supply 3 E i i nar supply i z ae amp Power 1 yi LJ id ud a 4 1 1 E ny LI i TOM 5 inal m LF x T ad DC E MV Dc da forminal 42 Deren pe eeii Limitations on number of simultaneous input on points Reference 2 5 Limitations on Number of Simultaneous Input Output On Points 2 10 2 5 Limitations on Number of Simultaneous Input Output On Points 2 5 1 Relay Type Stand alone and With AFPX COM5 Keep the number of points which are simultaneously on within the following range as determined by the ambient temperature Limitations on number of Limitations on number of Product number simultaneous input on points simultaneous output on points AFPX C14R AFPX C30R AFPX C60R AFPX C14RD AFPX C30RD AFPX C60RD C14R Number of i common 5
435. ormation on the password protect it will be transferred simultaneously If the master memory cassette that is prohibited uploading is installed on another FP X the information on the settings will be transferred to the FP X automatically therefore that FP X will be prohibited uploading as well Reference For the information on the transmission to the master memory cassette 12 2 2 Master Memory Function Cancelling the upload protection using the programming tool Setting using FPWIN GR 1 Select Online Edit Mode under the Online on the menu bar or press the CTRL and F2 keys at the same time to switch to the Online screen 2 Select Upload settings under Tool on the menu bar The following displays will be shown Upload settings dialog box Set PLC Password dialog box heal srtinga Unt gt x it Sith PLC carent pte A fs by Mai cond Doman Mode Select Release the upload protection by i 3m compulsion T Click Execute 8 duis Ete s Seni nes joa EE recap nahe Eden Phu y oben gr en 2 5 Click Force Cancel 1 If the setting for the upload protection is cancelled all ladder programs system registers and password information will be deleted 2 If Force Cancel is executed in the setting for PLC password the setting for the upload protection will be
436. ort e f DT200 is being used as the receive buffer received data will be stored in the registers starting from DT201 in sequential order of first the lower byte and then the upper byte DT203 DT202 DT201 Upper byt Loam byta Unperbyin Lower Uppar Lower byin H34 H33 H32 5 W 3 2 7 43 Flag operation in serial communication Header No STX Terminator CR Receiving data The reception done flag the transmission done flag and the F159 MTRN instruction are related as follows Dgigreceied SS Et F a Irom external m NES zm m m Canna In shod when Cewice i flag it n LI 1 ht aw Reception done lay R9035 or ROD4B e F158 MTRNI IN j Fuga Ir namiesien aie uctian a Te F 129 MTRN 1 Ewing EM vacui ri amp xecultio n Y t 3h Transmission flag HERES of HSMR Jr E T F A P 1 j 8 GR Stoned Receive buffer A A E a E B Hd j F BH Ie B el E we a HE E L Number oF es dis c 0 Es ds port Number of bytes received t3 cleared when F158 MTIRN ingiruction 5 execuled 4 e For general purpose serial communication half duplex transmission must be used e Reception is di
437. ot held can be specified using the system registers If an area is held when the battery is not installed the value of data may be indefinite as it is not cleared to 0 when the power is turned on When the battery ran out of the power the data at the hold area will be indefinite Note3 The points for the timer and counter can be changed by the setting of system register 5 The number given in the table are the numbers when system register 5 is at its default setting E c gt o0 E gt c O O Constant 15 17 15 18 Chapter 16 Dimensions 16 1 Dimensions 16 1 1 Control Unit BAFPX C14 When installing Add on cassette VT 8 6 Communication cassette Communication cassette AFPX COM5 Communication cassette Npfiiostion AFPX COMS m m 19 gr 18 6 8 6 Note AFPX COM5 is 5 mm taller than other communication cassettes 16 2 When installing cables I5 DIN installing groove width 35 mm 16 1 3 Expansion FPO Adapter BAFPX EFPO 16 1 4 Dimension Diagram for Installation 2 1 i j Gio 16 3 16 2 Cable Adapter Specifications 16 2 1 AFC8503 AFC8503S PC m aad 2 CN2 Mini DINS piri Male SUE Female TEN f aiin F PAN i 3 nm
438. out seltngs PES Interrupt pulse catch sattinze Interrupt edge 56005 Time constant selbng 1 of CPU inpet Time constant selling 2 of CPU ind Time constant setbng 3 of CPU inp constent seing 4 of CPU inpar Tool Part Cancel No Setting item E 1 No 412 PC link Do not use the same unit number for multiple FP X units 7 103 7 7 12 Applied Usage Ethernet Ver 1 10 or Later How to confirm the network information on the FP X The network information own IP address destination IP address destination port No version that has been set for the AFPX COM5 can be confirmed from the FP X by the option setting The connection information destination IP address own IP address version of the AFPX COM5 can be confirmed from the LAN side Dialog box of option settinc Response timent 10 60000 rs _ Uudement time without termination 20 10 60000 information hor mation ares first number nm Faona 396 m5 Network information notitication Notificetios ares range 0 10700 0710079 Network information confirmation ees rece DTIDODO D TI 0003 Target IP address for unr number Destination unit number and P address is spec died Unit Number Address 1921681100 g2 1921581100 1921681100 IP 1921881100 1 Network information notificatio
439. output operation Interrupt restrictions When using interrupt high speed counter pulse output or PWM output functions do not perform a rewrite during RUN If a rewrite during RUN is executed the operation as below will be performed Exercise caution 1 Interrupt programs will be disabled Enable by executing an ICTL instruction once again Example Using R9034 rewrite during RUN completed flag R9013 51 52 f R9034 2 The high speed counter will continue to count Target value match on off instructions F166 F167 will continue Coincidence interrupt programs will be disabled when the F166 F 16 7 instruction is running 3 The pulse output PWM output stops when the rewriting is performed The operation after the completion of the rewriting during RUN varies depending on each instruction Instruction Operation after the completion of number rewriting during RUN Th E F171 SPDH Pulse output Trapezoidal control Seren continues The operation before rewriting F171 SPDH Pulse output Home position return continues F172 PLSH Pulse output JOG operation F173 PWMH PWM output F174 SPOH Pulse output Selectable data table The operation before rewriting control operation continues F175 SPSH Pulse output Linear interpolation continues 4 The fixed time sampling trace will not be stopped 14 16 14 7 3 Procedures and Operation of Rewrite During RUN FPWIN GR FPWIN
440. ower supply earth terminals min 4912 Between power supply earth terminals 500 V AC for 1 Relay type Between cassette I O terminal and 500 V AC for 1 min input terminals min 02 Between cassette I O terminal and 2300 V AC for 1 2300 V AC for 1 output terminals min min e Between communication cassette 500 V AC for 1 RS485 and power supply input 2 output earth terminals Kotes Lu P HS for 1 Between power supply terminal 1500 v AC for 1 voltage Note1 A and earth terminal min Between input terminal and output 500 V AC for 1 terminal min Between input terminals and power supply earth terminals Between output terminals and 2300 V for 1 2 gt power supply earth terminals min Between cassette I O terminal and power supply earth terminals 2 2 VAG for Between cassette I O terminal and input output terminals Between communication cassette RS485 and power supply input output earth terminals Between power supply terminal 1500 V AC for 1 and earth terminal min ete Between input terminal and output terminal Between input terminals and power supply earth terminals Between output terminals and power supply earth terminals Between cassette I O terminal 100 or more power supply earth terminals 500 V DC Between cassette I O terminal measured with a megohm m
441. p operation set 0 Operation became impossible when a high level instruction was executed Selection of operation status using system register26 to continue operation set K1 to stop operation set KO The address of operation error can be confirmed in either special data registers DT9017 and DT9018 or DT90017 and DT90018 It varies according to the model to be used DT9017 DT9018 FP e FPO FPOR FPO mode DT90017 DT90018 FP FP X FPOR FPOR mode FP2 FP2SH FP10SH Verification is possible in FPWIN GR Pro at I O error in the status display function A Available tion status Remote commu nication error MEW NET F attribute error Expansion unit power supply sequence error battery error Description and steps to take FP X FP X S LINK error Occurs only in FPO SL1 When one of the S LINK errors ERR1 3 or 4 has been detected error code E46 remote I O S LINK communication error is stored Selection of operation status using system register27 to continue operation set K1 to stop operation set KO MEWNET F communication error A communication abnormally was caused by a transmission cable or during the power down of a slave station FP2 FP2SH and FP10SH Check the contents of special data registers DT90131 to 0790137 and locate the abnormal slave station and recover the communication condition FP3 Check the cont
442. pac seu o6 dala cerned of AME ip phe coe moni le Datema self d ol No 412 Communication Mode Select the COM port operation mode Click on wi and select General Communication No 413 for 1 port No 414 for COM2 port Communication Format setting Default setting Char Bit 8 bits PONY PS Odd Stop Bit 1 bit Terminator CR Header STX not exist Enter the appropriate settings to match the communication format of the external device connected to the COM port No 415 Baud rate communication speed setting The default setting for the communication speed for the various ports is 9600 bps Change the value to match the external device connected to the COM port Click on wi and select one of the values from 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 and 115200 bps No 416 for COM1 port No 418 for COM2 port Starting address for data received No 417 for COM1 port No 419 for COM2 port Buffer capacity setting for data received To change this area specify the starting address using system register no 416 no 418 for COM2 port and the volume number of words using no 417 no 419 for COM2 port The receive buffer layout is shown below buller The number of received bytes is stored hare otarting area specified in System redqisber no 416 na 41H The number of words Received dat
443. pansion unit 24V DC Example When one FPO expansion unit FPO E32T is connected FPO expansion adapter 10 mA or less FPO E32T 40 mA or less total 50 mA or less 15 6 15 1 2 Performance Specifications Relay type 14 points 30 points 60 points 14 points 30 points 60 points DC input DC input DC input DC input DC input DC input Control unit 8 16 32 8 16 32 Ry output Ry output Ry output Tr output Tr output Tr output 6 14 28 6 14 28 contro expansion l O units points points points points points points llable Max 254 Max 270 Max 300 Max 254 Max 270 Max 300 I O When using E30R points points points points points points points expansion units up to 8 up to 8 up to 8 up to 8 up to 8 up to 8 units units units units units units Max 110 Max 126 Max 156 Max 110 Max 126 Max 156 When using FPO points points points points points points expansion units up to 3 up to 3 up to 3 up to 3 up to 3 up to 3 units units units units units units Relay symbol Cyclic operation Built in Flash ROM without backup battery C30 C60 32k steps No of 111 instruction 216 From 0 32 us step by basic instruction With E16 0 34 ms x No of units I O refresh base time With E30 0 47 ms x No of units With expansion FPO adapter 1 4 ms FPO expansion unit refresh time 1760 points X0 to X109F External output Y 1760 points YO to Y109F 4096 points RO to R255F 192 poin
444. pansion units from a single power supply Turning on off of the power of all the units must be conducted simultaneously Power supply sequence In order to protect the power supply sequence make sure to turn off the control unit before the input output power supply If the input output power supply is turned off before the control unit or if the control unit is not shut off momentarily the controller detects change of input level and might conduct an unexpected operation Before turning on the power When turning on the power for the first time be sure to take the precautions given below e When performing installation check to make sure that there are no scraps of wiring particularly conductive fragments adhering to the unit e Verify that the power supply wiring I O wiring and power supply voltage are all correct e Sufficiently tighten the installation screws and terminal screws e Set the mode selector to PROG Mode Before entering a program Be sure to perform a program clear operation before entering a program Operation procedure when using FPWIN GR Ver 2 Select Online Edit Mode on the FPWIN GR On line menu Select Clear Program on the Edit menu When the confirmation dialog box is displayed click on Yes to clear the program Request concerning program storage To prevent the accidental loss of programs the user should consider the following measures e Drafting of documents To avoid accidentally losing pro
445. pe Circuit diagram Xn internal circuit COM _ 1 5 6 2 1 Relay output specifications em EB M o Output points per common 1 point common 1 point common 3 points common 4 points common Approx 8 ms 20 million times or more Frequency of switching 180 times min 100 thousand times or more Frequency of switching at the rated Electrical lh control capacity 20 times min Surge absorber Operating mode indicator LED display Note Resistance load 3 5 Transistor type NPN Et J X Open collector 5 to 24 V DC 4 75 to 26 4 V DC Max load current 0 5A Max inrush current 1 5 A 6 points Common 0 3 V DC or less 1 ms or less 1 ms or less External power supply YOtoY7 Y8toYD and terminals Current E16 45mAorles Surge absorber Zener diode Operating mode indicator LED display Circuit diagram Output indicator LED AA terminal Mu Chubupt terminal External Load H power L P Power Supply aie Sle supply of 24V DC m LL i i T m bans Eika T bad EI B Sto 24V DC 2444 Sc terminal 3 6 Transistor type PNP ____ Open collector 24 V DC 21 6 to 26 4 V DC 0 5 15 Input points per common 8 points Common 8 points Common inis P 6 points Common 1 pA or less 0 5 V DC or less 1 ms o
446. points which are simultaneously on within the following range as determined by the ambient temperature Product number _ Limitations on number of _ Limitations on number of simultaneous input on points simultaneous output on points AFPX C14R AFPX C30R AFPX C60R AFPX C14RD AFPX C30RD AFPX C60RD C14R Humber of B pir comman which are simulia 4 neously on ad 35 a lemperalure Humber ELIT points per which are 9 neously 8045 35 Ambient temptirature C C60R Number of points per common which simulta neously on 55 Ambient temperature C Number pasita Commen which simulta punica on 3 4g 5O 55 Ambit tempetr tunme i CJ CsoRD Humber of parta pei which are qa simulta nemm on 40 43 j 55 Purr Geet temperature C Number of 4 pow p common which are i iT Nae te 4 on 12 dE 3740 Eg 5S Ambient bempetr ture Mumbar ar peor eemmon which are me et z 7 neously on Number of 14 Pant common vwlhich m neously on 025 Ambien temperatuni Humber of 28 points common which are 13 amp imaulta neously Qn a Configuration DA2 2 A21 3 A21 A21 DA2 DA2 DA2 A2
447. ps Starting address for received buffer of 0 to 32764 general serial data communication mode Buffer capacity setting for data received of general 2048 0 to 2048 serial data communication mode Note1 The communication format in a PC PLC link is fixed at the following settings Data length is 8 bits odd parity stop bit is 1 The communication speed baud rate is fixed at 115200 bps Data length bit 8 bits Parity check Odd Stop bit 1 bit Communication format setting Reference For information on MODBUS RTU mode operation MODBUS RUT Specifications 17 13 FP X Add Default mw LIN NEM RENE S N Unit No setting 1 to 99 E Computer link Communication mode Computer G ia pus setting eneral purpose serial communication MODBUS RTU Selection of modem Disabled Enabled Disabled connection Selection of port Built in USB Bulltin USB Communication cassette Enter the settings for the various items Data length bit 7 bits 8 bits Data lenath Parity check none odd even as vs Stop bit 1 bit 2 bits Communication Me The following setting is valid only when Parity check EST ie format setting with odd the communication mode specified by ATE system register 412 has been set to Stop bit 1 bit Qo MP General purpose serial communication Terminator CR CR LF None Header STX not exist STX exist 2400 bps 4800 bps 9600 bps Baud rate setting
448. ption of power supply for Unit type Control unit AFPX CCT4AR 185 f30mAorless PAFPX C14RD 235mAorless PAFPX C30R_ 4f0mAorless 260 mAorless AFP COORRD 360mAorless AFPX CCOOR 540mAorless 320mAorless PAFPX C6ORD 550 PAFPX C14T 60mAorles 110mAorless LAFPX C14P 60mAorles 110mAorless Contau AFPX C30T_ 360 mA orless 225 mA orless PAFPX C30P 370 mAorless 230 mAorless AFPX CO0T 370 mAorless 230 mAorless AFPX COOP 380 mA orless 240mAorless PAFPX C14TD f60mAorless PAFPX C14PD fC f60mAorless PAFPX C30TD J gt 200mAorless AFPX C30PD_ J 210mAorless AFPX COOTD J gt 250mAorless AFPX C60PD 290mAorless _ 310mAorles 270mAorless AFPXCESORD 320mAorless Expansion unit AFPX ESOT S345mAorles 220mAorles _ 350 mAorless 225mAorless PAFPX E30TD 7 o f 0mAorless AFPX E30PD_ J gt 220mAorless AFPX E14YR 75 mA or less 40 mA or less 210 mA or less AFPX COM1 2
449. put r ce Direction Input that is not used for other applications is specified for the near home input Note If the deviation counter clear output function is performed when the home return is done Y5 is used for the C14 Tr type and Y9 is used for the C30 C60 Tr type lt When using CH3 gt C30 C60 Tr type only FP X Tr type 7 Near home Js t ZEE TP X200 Driver Pulse output YT _ Direction output Input that is not used for other applications is specified for the near home input Note The deviation counter clear output function is not available for the CH2 and CH3 FS Reference lt 9 2 1 Table of Specifications gt lt 9 2 2 Functions Used and Restrictions gt 9 24 9 4 4 Pulse output control instructions FO F1 Pulse output control instruction FO e This instruction is used for resetting the built in high speed counter stopping the pulse output and setting and resetting the near home input e Specify this FO MV instruction together with special data register DT90052 e Once this instruction is executed the settings will remain until this instruction is executed again Example 1 Enable the near home input during home return operations and begin deceleration In case of CHO X3 HDF H Fo MV 110 FO MV H 100 In case of CH1 br H FO MV H1110 FO MV H1100 Example 2 Performing a forced stop of th
450. r 36 for setting expansion unit recognition time MEW TOCOL master function F145 SEND Data send LE F146 RECV Data receive E356 EZPID Easy PID instruction Time constant processing of input Refer to Chapter 12 6 CPU input System register setting Other input F182 FILTR Time constant processing Sampling trace function Refer to Chapter 12 5 Sampling by instructions F155 SMPL Sampling F156 STRG Sampling trigger Sampling by specifying time Leading contact trailing contact instructions STT ANT ORT STL ANY ORV An arbitrary device can be specified for the setting value of YAN UPS TENPE Timer counter instruction e g TML 0 DTO Other additional convenient instructions F252 ACHK ASCII data check F284 RAMP Inclination output Baud rate setting 300 600 1200 bps by SYS instruction High speed operation FO MV and F1 DMV instructions Execution time Approx 1us Only when every operands are without index modifier Function addition to existing instructions F O BCC Block check code calculation F356 EZPID Easy PID instruction Note The Ry and Tr types with the same specifications have the same version name Reference Programming Manual ARCT1F313E gt Vii Restriction on using the Add on cassette Application cassettes that the version of the FP X control unit is specified FP X Application cassette Version of control unit FP X Analog output cassette AFPX DA2 FP X Analog I O cassette AFPX A21 FP X
451. r less 1 ms or less Voltage 21 6to 26 4 V DC External power supply YOtoY7 Y8 to YD and terminals Current 65 mA or less E30 65 mA or less 50 mA or less Surge absorber Zener diode Operating mode indicator LED display Output indicator LED i AA a terminal hl m 1 1 Outpt terminal External i L p L D WE 3 e ed Load supply a l 2 3 gm ites sm pore e kir 2 n supply r amp 24V DC g 3 terminal JE c7 4 I 1 3 7 3 2 4 Terminal layout AFPX E16R Output terminal AFPX E16T Ew s Ds psp vs ya vs vr e Le Hut eed Output terminal AFPX E16X Input terminal 3 8 B Relations between the output terminals and COM terminals CO YU _ 1 Y2 to Y4 c2 Y5 to Y7 16 Wn xa xa inci vs NC vol ye yal vs Power supply for YO in YT Mot used Chip terminal AFPX E14YR Quiput terminal un 4 Y2 te Y5 te Y7 ca T to YA C4 YB to T D C5 EMEN Ss S VEEN CQOuipurtenmminal Not uiad Output a Relations between the output terminals and COM terminals AFPX ESOR
452. r ngul AFPX E30TD senminal npurl terminal E 9139 oe oa oe Qi QU Q Lg Power supply for D bo YT Right Power supply for Y8 to YD AFPX E30PD OG power supply senminal terminal gt Power supply for D bo YT Right Power supply for Y8 to YD Input terminal Each COM terminal in the same terminal block is connected within the unit Output terminal Each COM terminal CO C1 of Ry type is separate Each power supply terminal of Tr type is separate Use them in the range surrounded by the bold black lines 3 10 3 3 FP X Expansion Adapter 3 3 1 Overview For the FP X a maximum of units of the FPO expansion units expansion unit intelligent unit can be used using the expansion FPO adapter All FPO expansion unit can be used DC input unit Transistor output unit Relay output unit Analog I O unit Thermocouple unit Network unit tmi tc m Cc Expansion FPO expansion adapter FPO up to 3 units adapter The expansion FPO adapter does not function by itself Always connect the FPO expansion unit to it 3 11 3 3 2 Parts and Functions FP X expansion FPO adapter AFPX EFPO TUTO I Eh nn 2p ry S hed bel bed E ELI M 4 4 4 1
453. r the FP X V2 0 or later None tant 17 15 17 1 2 Table of Special Internal Relays for FP X The special internal relays turn on and off under special conditions The on and off states are not output externally Writing is not possible with a programming tool or an instruction WR900 FP X Address R9000 Self diagnostic error Turns on when a self diagnostic error occurs flag The content of self diagnostic error is stored in DT90000 R9001 Application cassette Turns on when an error is detected in the I O type application R9002 I O error flag cassette Application cassette n R9003 abnormal error flag Turns on when an error is detected in the application cassette R9004 free Turns on when an I O verification error occurs Turns on when a backup battery error occurs Turns on when the battery has run out even if the system register No 4 has been set not to inform the battery error Turns on when a backup battery error occurs Turns on when the battery has run out even if the system register No 4 has been set not to inform the battery error Once a battery error has been detected this is held even after recovery has been made Jt goes off if the power supply is turned off or if the system is initialized Turns on and keeps the on state when an operation error Operation error flag OCCUIS hold The address where the error occurred is stored in DT90017 indicates the first operation error which
454. r the settings for the various items Data length bit 7 bits 8 bits Parity check none with odd with even Data length _ stop bit 4 bit 2 bits Communication bit 8 bits The following setting is valid only when Parity check ae P format setting with odd the communication mode specified by system register 412 has been set to Stop bit 1 bit E RS General purpose serial communication Terminator CR CR LF None Header STX not exist STX exist Starting address for received buffer of 0 to 32764 general serial data communication mode 2400 bps 4800 bps 9600 bps Baud rate setting 9600 bps 19200 bps 38400 bps 5 600 bps 115200 bps Buffer capacity setting for data received of general 2048 0 to 2048 serial data communication mode Default m Unit No setting 1 to 99 Computer link Communication Computer link General purpose serial communication mode setting PC PLC link MODBUS RTU Selection of modem Disabled Enabled Disabled connection Enter the settings for the various items Data length bit 7 bits 8 bits Parity check none with odd with even Stop bit 1 bit 2 bits The following setting is valid only when the communication mode specified by system register 412 has been set to General purpose serial communication Terminator CR CR LF None Header STX not exist STX exist 2400 bps 4800 bps 9600 bps Baud rate setting 9600 bps 19200 bps 38400 bps 5 600 bps 115200 b
455. ral purpose serial communication mode Note5 The converter SI 35 manufactured by Lineeye Co Ltd is recommendable for the RS485 at the computer side Adjust the response time for the FP X by the SYS1 instruction if necessary Note6 Unit numbers should be registered by the system register Note7 The termination resistance of the RS485 RS422 in the COM3 COM4 and COM6G is specified by the dip switch in the communication cassette There is no termination resistance at the RS232C port Note8 The baud rates of 300 600 and 1200 bps can be specified by the SYS instruction only Ver2 0 or later 15 11 Communication specifications 2 Interface Ethernet lem Specifications Connector shape RJ45 Communication cable UTP Category 5 TCP IP UDPIIP ICMP ARP DHCP Function Auto negotiation function MDI MDI X Auto crossover function Note1 The length between a HUB and the module inde specifications segment length 15 12 15 2 Table of Number Allocation 15 2 1 l O Allocation of FP X Control Unit The I O allocation of the FP X control unit is fixed numbers Type of control unit Number of allocation number Input 8 points to X7 FP X C14 control unit Output 6 points YO to Y5 Input 16 points to XF FP X C30 control unit Output 1 points YO to YD XO to XF Input 32 points X10 to X1F FP X C60 control unit usura YO to YD p p Y10 to Y1D 15 2 2
456. ram and the FP X data registers Sanding data using F159 MTRNI _ sent by transfering the data te i Data register DT adata regestir and Erznsmitirm sew using the F 153 instruction d NNNM Trareanited data Bar code reader ver dala RecalyIng data Cipta iy received by transfermng the data r Prom tha pert to iha data register un pected in tha system mgister as rna racene buffer and her being stored there autamabzalhy mad reervinm data Wilh Wie memmad rp ums is carried Gul via daia register HR de Outline of operation To send data to and receive it from an external device using the general purpose serial communication function the data transmission and data reception functions described below are used The F159 MTRN instruction and the reception done flag are used in these operations to transfer data between the FPX and an external device Sending data Data to be transmitted from the PLC is stored in the data register used as the send buffer DT When F159 MTRN is executed the data is output from the COM port Dela Dia register DT Gata nint e The terminator specified in the system wng ne register is automatically added to the data a that has been sent ge e he maximum volume of data that can be Sr E T sent is 2048 bytes 12572320 part
457. range Switch backside Thermocouple type K Thermocouple type J K and J range Conversion characteristics graph i ED ee Pa 50 1 500 1 Hi Input value Convagrsion Si c When exceeding the rated range Converted value 50 1 C orless K 501 500 1 or more K 5001 or K 8000 When wire is broken K 8000 8 19 8 3 5 FP X RTD Resistance Temperature Detector Cassette Product No AFPX RTD2 Nem Specifications RTD Pt100 9 7 200 0 to 850 0 In normal condition K 2000 to K8500 When exceeding rated range K 2150 to K 2001 K8501 to K8650 2 When wire is broken K20000 When data is getting ready K20001 Notes Note4 0 1 Minimum unit 200 ms or less Total accuracy 0 2 F S or less Ambient temperature 0 to 55 Allowable input wire Resistance value per wire 10 Q or less resistance Between analog input circuit and internal circuit Transformer insulation Insulation photo coupler insulation Between analog input channels Transformer insulation Occupation No of I O Input 32 points Note7 contacts Note1 Use a 3 wire type RTD Note2 When exceeding the rated range reference values which are not in the range of the conversion accuracy assurance are indicated up to 15 C However if the temperature drops below 230 C or rise over 900 C more the data will be the same value K20000
458. ransferred to the internal ROM when the PROG mode is changed to the RUN mode when the power supply is turned on in the RUN mode or when the transfer instruction is executed by then programming tool software in the PROG mode Nonexistent data is not transferred Once the data is transferred afterwards the information in the internal memory and the master memory are compared and the matched information is not transferred Key Point Selectable using FPWIN GR on from Tool of the menu in the PROG mode or online monitor mode gh Reference FPWIN GR Operation Guide Book ARCT1F332E gt 12 2 12 2 Function of Master Memory Cassette The clock calendar to set year month day day of week and time and the master memory is equipped in the master memory cassette The following 2 methods can be selected with the switch at the back 1 Clock calendar only default setting 2 Clock calendar Master memory Note It cannot be used as master memory when it has been specified to be used as clock calendar only Install the optional battery in the control unit to use the clock calendar The clock calendar does not work without the battery 12 2 1 Clock Calendar Function The clock calendar function can be used if the backup battery is attached in the FP X and the FP X master memory cassette AFPX MRTC is installed Note that this function cannot be used without the backup battery Reference 5 9 Installation and Settin
459. ration with a Form B ele normally closed contact 2 for XX ap o eee output 2 ep eee instruction NEVER de serially 2 ANDNO fan Connects a Form B normally closed contact A serially FP2SH FP10SH FPO FP e FPX Connects a Form A normally open contact in parallel Connects a Form B normally closed contact in parallel Leading YXRTGL Begins a logic operation only for one scan edge ee when the leading edge of the trigger is start detected Trailing Begins logic operation only for one scan edge Jr L when the trailing edge of the trigger is start detected Leading Connects a Form A normally open contact INN edge serially only for one scan when the leading AND edge of the trigger is detected Trailing Connects a Form A normally open contact Y R T serially only for one scan when the trailing AND edge of the trigger is detected Leading Connects a Form A normally open contact edge OR parallel only for one scan when the leading edge of the trigger is detected Trailing Connects a Form A normally open contact edge OR Ar adds in parallel only for one scan when the trailing edge of the trigger is detected Leading Outputs the operated result to the specified edge out output only for scan when leading edge of the trigger is detected for pulse relay Trailing Outputs the operated result to the specif
460. re available for the FP X 1 Add on the FP X expansion unit or FPO expansion unit expansion FPO adapter with the expansion cable 2 Add on the add on cassette in the cassette mounting part of the FP X control unit For the FP X the add on cassette application cassette and communication cassette can be installed on the FP X control unit The number of the expansion units that can be installed varies depending on the types of the control unit C14 Control unit T HA HU ni iu Deo HELL _ ud Li r i m9 y One application cassetta can be installed C60 Control unit a 4 4 i ze E 45 JE EE lc T UD ACT a 5 Ic TERTA aper Two application cassettes can be Installed Tar ar qa ox 8 2 8 2 Application Cassettes Name Specifications No Product No FP X analog input cassette FP X analog output cassette FP X analog I O cassette FP X thermocouple cassette FP X RTD cassette FP X input cassette 2 channel analog input non isolated 2 channel analog output isolated isolated between channels 2 channel analog input isolated non isolated between channels 1 Channel analog output isolated 2 channel thermocouple input isolated isolated between channels 2 channel RTD input insulated insulated between channels From X100 8 point DC input From X200 8 3 1 Nme Sp
461. rea PCOPY between D1 and D2 a Data read The data stored in the expansion memory from EEP S2 D of the EEP ROM specified by S1 and S2 ROM are transferred to the area starting at PICWT EON The data specified by S1 and S2 are EEP ROM S2 D transferred to the EEP ROM starting at Data read ICRD The data stored in the expansion memory from F ROM S2 D of the F ROM specified by S1 and S2 Er are transferred to the area starting at Data write to PICWT The data specified by S1 and S2 are ul AL transferred to the F ROM starting at D Data read ICRD The data stored in the expansion memory from IC card PICRD 2 D of the IC card specified by S1 and 52 EIE are transferred to the area starting at Data write to ICWT The data specified by S1 and S2 are PICWT transferred to the IC card expansion memory area starting at Program read The program specified using S is P14 from IC PPGRD transferred into the CPU from IC memory memory card card and executes it Available X Not available Not available partially A This instruction is available for FP2 FP2SH Ver 1 5 or later FP10SH cannot be used 2 This instruction is available for FPO Ver 2 0 or later and FP e 17 56 FP2SH FP10SH Boo lean Description rand m o eer CIC GC P15 exchange eH ERE CN D2 1 ba elelelele
462. reater than 4520 pules R102 k Di Speed reduction point reached R102 TT SRE Ar MNA CLER alee ON EE or R Reset the inverter high speed signal Y 1 R3110 R100 TO R103 a 0 1 s type timer Setting KS and using it as a 0 5 timer 10 16 10 3 7 Sample program Pulse l O Cassette Positioning operations with a single speed inverter Wiring example FP X Ry AFPX PLS ternninal Conveyor Encoder input 100 E ues Ex JP E Pu Operalion start X102 ae rd i ER ut F8 urn Pa P b Lowe P al P II Motor Encoder mS A terminal Inverter 100 Operation 3tap allocation in X100 Encoderinpt unit X102 Operation start signal vO __ 100_ Positioning operation running 8101 Positioning operation start 8102 Positioning done pulse fJ Number of puse Be Program When X102 is turned on Y100 turns on and the conveyor begins moving When the elapsed value DT90332 and DT90333 reaches K5000 Y100 turns off and the conveyor stops R118 Rite am u mr ee E R100 R101 DF _ R101 Fi om 0790922 T counter CHA _ 67 HC1R K B OR i ze Fh d Target value match off instruction i Y100 g
463. receive buffer and the reception done flag turns on when the terminator end code is received When the terminator has been set to None the reception done flag does not work However if the code STX is added in the middle of the data the number of received byte is cleared to 0 and the data is stored from the beginning of the receive buffer again e A terminator is automatically added to the end of the data being sent e here is no terminator on the data stored in the receive buffer Sending data Data written to the send buffer will be sent just as it is Example The data 12345 is transmitted as an ASCII code to an external device 1 Data sent using the F95 ASC instruction should be converted to ASCII code data Conversion to ASCli code ru 4 23 4 5 Deta to be mam Ca nvarsi n to ASCII coda A P Lr H 31 32 33 34 35 Coded dala 1 2 3 4 5 2 If DT100 is being used as the send buffer data will be stored in sequential order in the data registers starting from the next register DT101 in two byte units consisting of the upper and the lower byte DT103 DT102 DT101 aa WEE v Lipper Ein Loam Erin Upper yin Lower Eye Upper byte Lower inde H35 H34 H33 H32 H31 5 4 3 2 1 Receiving data The data of the receive area being read is ASCII code data Example The 12345 is transmitted from a device with RS232C p
464. rity function o Note Only the Clock Calendar function is valid at the factory setting Install a battery in the control unit to use the Clock Calendar function If the battery is not installed the Clock Calendar does not function Function changeover switch between the Clock Calendar and the master memory Use the switch at the back of the cassette to switch between the Clock Calendar and master memory functions Chageover switch backside E T OFF Realtime clock RTC Factory default setting Li i Realtime clock amp master memory ON RTC amp ROM o En 8 28 Chapter 9 High speed Counter Pulse Output and PWM Output Functions For Tr Type 9 1 Overview of Each Functions 9 1 1 Usable Units and Cassettes 1 The pulse input can be counted using the inputs XO to 7 of the main unit Single phase 8 channels 2 phase 4 channels 2 The pulse output can be carried out using the output of the main unit C14 Tr type ch C30 C60 Tr type 4 ch ch 1ch High speed pulse 2 ch 3ch Medium speed pulse The pulse I O cassette AFPX PLS cannot be used with the FP X Tr type control unit Restrictions on the pulse I O functions of each control unit C14 Tr C30 Tr C60 Tr type type type Input of main unit XO to X7 Output of main unit YO to Y7 A YO to Y5 Input and output of Cassette mounting part 1 N A Pulse I O cassette AFPX PLS Cass
465. ruction ED SUB RET INT IRET SSTP and STPE that error cannot perform a rewrite during RUN is being attempted Nothing is written to the CPU 0 SIM over error Program area was exceeded during a program write process 7 71 Exclusive access A command that cannot be processed was executed at the same control error time as a command being processed External memory error No program error and No data error 167 17 88 17 5 MEWTOCOL COM Communication Commands Table of MEWTOCOL COM commands Reads the on and off status of contact Specifies only one point Specifies multiple contacts Specifies a range in word units Turns contacts on and off Specifies only one point Specifies multiple contacts Specifies a range in word units Read data area RD Reads the contents of a data area t Monitors a registered contact or data using the Monitoring start code MC or MD Preset contact area fill command SC Embeds the area of a specified range in a 16 point on and off pattern Preset data area fill command SD Writes the same contents to the data area of a specified range Read system register B Reads the contents of a system register Write system register opecifies the contents of a system register Read the status of PLC RT Reads the specifications of the programmable controller and error codes if an error occurs Switches the operation mode of the Remote control programm
466. s Digital input value Output voltage V 0 Y OO 240 60 88000 8 86000 0 2990 10 0 When exceeding the rated range Digital input value Analog output value Negative value Unchanged 9 Value preceding the input of a negative value Unchanged DOMI MIS Value preceding the input of 4001 Each channel data is allocated as I O data as shown below Installed slot No icq qiie Cassette mounting part 1 Cassette mounting part 2 p Slot 0 Slot 1 WY10 WY20 WY11 WY21 Note e Use double core twisted pair shielded wires It is recommended to ground them However depending on the conditions of the external noise it may be better not to ground the shielding e Do not have the analog output wiring close to AC wires power wires or load DA part Internal block diagram A voltage amplifier and a current amplifier is connected in parallel to one DA converter IC Do not connect an analog device to the voltage output terminal and current output terminal of the same channel simultaneously Voltage amplifier opo DA micro converte computer Current amplifier em 8 10 8 3 3 FP X Analog I O Cassette Product No AFPX A21 No of input points Digital conversion value Resolution Conversion speed Total accuracy Voltage _ Voltage Absolute max Input 30 mA Current input Between analog ou
467. s The setting has completed AN PUD rated 55 vnm rm Note If the power supply of the PLC is turned on off with the setting that the access is allowed the setting will be that the PLC is protected again How to cancel the password setting Following two methods are available to cancel the password setting o Descipion Program Unprotect Cancels the registered password to be specified All programs are retained n All programs are deleted Erases all programs and security information to The upload protection setting is cancel the setting forcibly also deleted Releasing the protection of PLC Programs are retained x As the dialog box is shown select as below jJ Digit num ber apicis Cancel Select 4 digits or 8 digits God Operation Mode Mode Select Unprotect 4 digits or 8 digits password Input a password to be set BE dais paie Click Settings Carr 87 reecorng acea hr hes Het ta Fas Veron Z5 x Click OK ni The pretest ob PUG veri reed Note The protection cannot be released if the access is not allowed Executing the force cancel Programs and security information are all deleted Panamera latitia x Click Force cancel PLC Cameri ito
468. s it will be moved down and if between 30 and 59 seconds it will be moved up In the example above if the time was 5 minutes 29 seconds it will become 5 minutes O seconds and if the time was 5 minutes 35 seconds it will become 6 minutes 0 seconds DT90059 Communication error Error code Is stored here when a N A N A code communication error occurs 17 34 FP X A Available N A Not available _ Step ladder process DT90060 0 to 15 Step ladder process DT90061 16 to 31 Step ladder process DT90062 32 to 47 Step ladder process DT90063 48 to 63 Step ladder process DT90064 64 to 79 Step ladder process DT90065 80 to 95 Step ladder process 96 to 111 rocess DT90067 Step ladder pro 112 127 Indicates the startup condition of the step 90068 SteP ladder process ladder process When the process starts up 128 to 143 the bit corresponding to the process number Step ladder process turns on Mies 144 to 159 Step ladder process Monitor using binary display 160 to 175 E le gt DT90071 P d 3 Step ladder process 15 11 7 3 0 Process No 0790072 192 to 207 1 Executing 0 Not executing Step ladder process DT90073 208 to 223 A programming tool software can be used to write data DT90074 Step ladder process 224 to 239 Step ladder process 240 to 255 Step ladder process eee 256 to 271 Step ladder
469. s amp 98Second Edition 6 17 6 3 7 Confirming COM Ports The USB connected to the FP X is recognized by the PC as a COM port It depends on your PC environment to which COM port the USB is allocated Therefore it is necessary to confirm the COM port number allocated Procedure for displaying Device Manager Displaying Device Manager Displays Device Manager when the FP X is connected to the PC with the USB cable The display method varies depending on the OS in the PC to be used In case of Windows amp XP My computer gt View System information Click Hardware tab Click Device Manager In case of Windows 2000 My computer Control panel System Click Hardware tab Click Device manager Click View menu Device by type With Windows 98 Second Edition Windows amp Me My computer Control panel System Click Device manager tab and select View devices by type 6 18 Procedure for confirming COM ports 1 Display Device Manager Device Marapet EWE x fie Abm Wew Hep gt HB amp m ADIZEEM a x Engate Dek drives xod derer T M Floppy das contreliger BM Uer dedos e Londen amp Ip Enty j and okher paining omnes v Ports COM sound ideo Md qma contre yd
470. s off the reception coser ont ROS Th data in the recense Duffer is mol cleared Sent from CON AT port KK 1 The program described above is executed in the following sequence 1 The data sent from external devices is stored in the receive buffer 2 The reception done contact R9038 R9048 is turned on 3 The received data is sent from the receive buffer to the area starting with data register DTO 4 The F159 MTRN instruction is executed with no data to reset the buffer writing point and to turn off the reception done contact R9038 R9048 The system is now ready to receive the next data e data in the receive buffer is not cleared gt e Be aware that reception done flag R9038 or R9048 changes even while a scan is in progress e g if the reception done flag is used multiple times as an input condition there is a possibility of different statuses existing within the same scan To prevent multiple read access to the special internal relay you should generate a copy of it at the beginning of the program Explanatory diagram Disi n giaqer iDTi mas inii ILE pescesahunri Hi ya m 2 ecepbon egaerHSgapsOmw 3 Fipcepbor ready mon imo 1 41 Explanation of data table Data sent from an external device connected to the COM port is stored in the data registers that have been set as the receiv
471. sabled when the reception done flag R9038 or R9048 is on e When F159 MTRN is executed the number of bytes received is cleared and the address write pointer in the receive buffer is reset to the initial address e Also when F159 MTRN is executed the error flag R9037 or R9047 the reception done flag R9038 or R9048 and the transmission done flag R9039 or R9049 goes off e Duplex transmission is disabled while F159 MTRN is being executed The transmission done flag R9039 or R9049 must be observed e Reception stops if the error flag R9037 or R9047 goes on To resume reception execute the F159 MTRN instruction which turns off the error flag Note e Be aware that the reception done flag R9038 or R9048 changes even while a scan is in progress e g if the reception done flag is used multiple times as an input condition there is a possibility of different statuses existing within the same scan To prevent multiple read access to the special internal relay you should generate a copy of it at the beginning of the program g Key Point e The contact numbers in parentheses refer to COM2 port 7 44 Header STX Terminator Receiving data The reception done flag the transmission done flag and the F159 MTRN instruction are related as follows JI Data received OX 4 nia deeper devices ie Receptian done flag RB038 or t F15
472. sage i Response message 6 6 6 3 2 USB Port Setting Setting communication parameters in the computer link mode Setting for Baud rate and communication format The settings for baud rate and communication format of the tool port are entered using the FPWIN GR Select Options the menu bar and then select PLC Configuration Click COM2 Port Key Point The default setting is Internal USB for the port selection so that the setting is not necessary unless the default setting has not been changed Dialog box of PLC system register setting PLG Configuration Untrtlel Hald Man hald 1 Hold Man hald 2 Ma4ll nit Ma 1 414 Communication Format Acton on Error Time 41 Comm Made Char Bit Bits p a Parity Odd Pulse 120 cassette settings 5 5 Modem Enabled Stop Bit Controller input settings HSC Interrupt pulse catch settings Port selection Intemal USB Interrupt edge settings Time constant setting 1 of CPU input Time constant setting 2 of CPU input 45 415 Baudrate Time constant setting 3 of CPU input Time constant setting 4 of CPU input Tool Port COM1 Port Cancel Initialize Help No 411 unit number The unit number can be set within a range of 1 to 99 No 412 Communication mode Select Internal USB for the port selection The communication mode is Computer Link No 414 for COM2 port Communication For
473. sconnect the wire check the terminal hole and then re connect the wire e f two wires are connected to the plus terminal and minus terminal of the RS485 use the wires of the same cross sectional area which is 0 5 mm i g E QO Clockwise Counter clockwise 5 23 5 8 1 Transmission Cables Please use the following cables for systems using the communication cassette Appropriate electrical cables twisted cables Conductor Insulator Sample Cross sectional Resist Cable 5 Thick appropriate ance EE diam 1 20 Belden 9207 Shielded Shield Gover Max Hitachi Cable 0 5 mm Polye Max Approx twisted Gon lt f Ins AWG20 e Se pair 907 4 S0 5 mm x 1P Max Polychlo eon E 0 5 mm Approx VCTF 0 5 ductor VW 7 AWG20 0 6 mm 6 2 mm mm x 2C JIS IX Q km biphenyl Shielded S CN PES 0 3 Max Onamba Co Je A Vinyl Max Approx multicore E AWG22 58 8 Ltd ONB D6 x ductor b i nd gn chloride 0 3 mm 6 6 mm 2 cable or greater Q km 0 3 mm Note Use shielded twisted pair cables e Use only one type of transmission cable Do not mix more than 1 type e Twisted pair cables are recommended in noisy environments e When using shielded cable with crossover wiring for the RS485 transmission line grounded one end e If two wires are connecte
474. se yo edt 1b Conveyor e z JT i 1 Pd a Fi i a QR m r FM ee L J d LJ Fa E aa cet re li 7 i Ld LA pr CN AP Motor En oder C Liperal Fast Slow allocation R100 _ Positioning operation running ___ 101_ Positioning operation start R102 Arrival atdeceleration point R103 _ Positioning done pulse R9110 High speed counter CHO control flag 10 15 When X5 is turned on YO and Y1 turn on and the conveyor begins moving When the elapsed value DT90300 and DT90301 reaches K4500 Y1 turns off and the conveyor begins decelerating When the elapsed value reaches K5000 YO turns off and the conveyor stops AS 99110 R103 R100 R100 RTOH R10 Hr KO 7 Ko E gt 9680 o 1 Positioning operations start Ty Resets elapsed value of high speed __counter CHO B Target value match off instruction E YU goes off when elapsed value of high speed counter CHO reaches 5000 pulsas e k RICH Set the inverter operation signal YO c eee Set the inverter high speed signal r1 R100 B FOND OE Fei beue Kaso 790300 L 32 bit data comparison instruction ROOS tums on when me CHO high speed counter i elapsed value becomes g
475. se 100 LF LA LE LA L Rotation Y 01 UN on nection Yu Irucrermental euo c Note The output signals are the numbers on the pulse I O cassette Control is carried out using two pulses a forward rotation pulse and a reverse rotation pulse Control is carried out using one pulse output to specify the speed and another to specify the direction of rotation with on off signals In this mode forward rotation is carried out when the rotation direction signal is OFF Control is carried out using one pulse output to specify the speed and another to specify the direction of rotation with on off signals In this mode forward rotation is carried out when the rotation direction signal is ON When executing the pulse output only pulses are output The output memory Y 100 Y200 and 2011 not output 10 21 Operation mode Incremental Relative value control gt Outputs the pulses set with the target value Selected Mode Positive Negative Example CW CCW Pulse output from CW Pulse output from CCW Pulse and direction forward OFF reverse ON Pulse output when direction output is OFF Pulse output when direction output is ON Pulse and direction forward ON reverse OFF Pulse output when direction output is ON Pulse output when direction output is OFF HSC counting Method Decremental When the current position value of elapsed value are
476. se Built in Cannot be replaced Insulation system Transformer insulation Terminal screw M3 2 2 2 Service Power Supply for Input Output AC Power Supply Type Only Specifications C14 C30 C60 Rated output voltage 24 V DC Voltage regulation range 21 6 to 26 4 V DC Rated output current 0 15 Overcurrent protection Available function Terminal screw M3 Note This is a function to protect overcurernt temporarily which protects the output short circuit If the short circuit is detected all the power supply for the PLC will be turned off If a current load that is out of the specifications is connected and the overloaded status continues it may lead to damages 2 2 3 DC Power Supply C14 C30 C60 Rated voltage 24 V DC Voltage regulation range 20 4 to 28 8 V DC nrush current 12 A or less at 25 C Momentary power off time 10 ms Internal power supply part Guaranteed life 20 000 h at 55 Fuse Built in Cannot be replaced Insulation system Transformer insulation Terminal screw M3 2 5 2 3 Input Specifications 2 3 1 Relay Ry Type Input Specifications For C14R C30R C60R control units Insulation method Optical coupler Rated input voltage 24V DC 21 6 to 26 4V DC Approx 4 7 mA for control units XO to X7 Approx 4 3 mA from control unit X8 8 points common C14R 16 points common C30R C60R Either the positive or negative of the input power supply can be connected to c
477. sed for counter operations such as software reset and count disable e Specify this instruction together with the special data register DT90052 e Once this instruction is executed the settings will remain until this instruction is executed again Operations that can be performed with this instruction e Counter software reset bitO e Counting operation enable disable bit e Hardware reset enable disable bit2 e Clear high speed counter instructions F166 to F167 e Clear target value match interrupt Example Performing a software reset In case of CHO In case of CH1 EA X7 DOF j FO MV H 1 0199952 1 I DF MV 1001 0790052 Fo MV DTeons2 2 Fo MV 1000 0790052 In the above program the reset is performed in step 1 and 0 is entered just after that in step 2 The count is now ready for operation If it is only reset counting will not be performed 9 13 High speed counter pulse output control flag area of FP X Tr type 15 1211 B 0 e The area 0790052 for writing channels and control codes is allocated as shown in the left figure e Control codes written with an FO MV mM instruction are stored by channel in special data registers DT90370 to DTSOUS 00 fixed DT90377 Clear high speed counter instruction 0 Continue 1 Clear Note Reset input setting ote e n the reset input setting the reset input EAM TTE X6 or X7 for CHO
478. set Description Do not set input X0 as high speed counter Incremental input X0 Decremental input X0 Two phase input X1 Do not set input X1 as high speed counter Incremental input X1 Decremental input X1 Two phase input X1 Do not set input X2 as high speed counter Incremental input X2 Decremental input X2 Do not set input X3 as high speed counter Incremental input X3 Decremental input X3 Two phase input X2 X3 Do not set input X4 as high speed counter Incremental input X4 Decremental input X4 Two phase input X3 X4 Do not set input X5 as high speed counter Incremental input X5 Decremental input X5 Two phase input X4 X5 Do not set input X6 as high speed counter Incremental input X6 Decremental input X6 Do not set input X7 as high speed counter Incremental input X7 Decremental input X7 Two phase input X6 X7 KO x a2 XA AS AG import x100 101 X102 AO Rani Az Pulsa AO The pressed contact is set for the pulse catch input KO x1 aa Fao KA AS AG Kj Cnirniler input XT X101 XT xS A301 NY PO The pressed contact is set for the interrupt input FP X Ry type ress X0 X1 X2 X4 X5 X6 Interrupt edge setting for Leading edge controller Inter input Leading edge X0 X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 Trailing edge The pressed contact is up and set to trailing rupt edge edge X100
479. speed of CHO and CH1 which is calculated using the following formula is not 1 5 kHz or higher ihe path may nol be linear iz 1 av Gd x 2 ex 41x CH ol which distance betwen the target value and the current value is short 21 CH of which distance betwen the target value and the current value is long 9 45 Sample program of interpolation control Wiring example Input terminal Hore um Shar Pasitloning stari Emergency slop Home sensor fer CHO Hore Sardar fer GH 1 Hear home d J amsor for CHD Y ox l 4 bicar home i Lio i side for GHI Stepping molor side j sida VM CHO E Fal ri Pulsa output CV L for CHO r output COV Pr CHO Pulse cutout Stepping motor for CH1 DII GHI Pulse output COW i for CHT Commen Cimri CC Stepping medor see R Note When the stepping motor input is a 5 V optical coupler type connect a 2 1 2 W resistor with the R1 and a 2 1 2 W to 470 Q 2 W resistor with the R2 Table of allocation Homereumstatsigna XI Positioningstat O X2 Emergency stop X6 Near home sensor X4 Homesenor YO Pulseoutputcw 9 Yi PuseouputCOW X7 Near home sensor X5 Homesenor Y2 Pulseou
480. speed counter Single phase No of channels 30k 00 O 25kHz Max frequency 80 kHz 80 kHz 50 kHz 50 kHz 50 kHz 50 kHz Conditions When the duty is 50 and the match on off instruction is not used 10 7 Restrictions on I O allocations e Various functions listed in the table of specifications cannot be allocated to one 1 0 at the same time e Except for the examples noted below inputs and outputs that have been allocated to the various functions cannot be allocated as normal inputs and outputs Exceptional cases AFPX PLS Example 1 If no reset input is used in the high speed counter function X102 and X202 can be used as normal inputs Example 2 If no output is used to clear the differential counter in the pulse output function Y102 and Y202 can be used as normal outputs Restrictions on the execution of related instructions F166 to F175 e f an instruction related to the high speed counter F166 to F175 is executed the control flag special internal relay R9110 to R911D corresponding to the channel used turns on e Please be aware that the control flag in progress may change while a scan is being carried out To prevent multiple read access to this special internal relay you should generate a copy of it at the beginning of the program e When the control flag for a channel turns on another instruction using that same channel cannot be executed 10 2 3 Booting Time The booti
481. ssette Product No AFPX IN4T3 Input specifications Rated input voltage 24 V DC Operating voltage range 21 6 to 26 4 V DC Rated input current Approx 3 5 mA Input points per common 4 points common Min on voltage Min on current 19 2 V DC 3 mA Max off voltage Max off current 2 4 V DC 1 mA Input impedance Approx 6 8 kQ Operating mode indicator LED display Output specifications Descipion LED indication Terminal layout LED indication Y pp e oe COM Xi X2 X3 COM YO Yi Y2 IN4TS Terminal layout F a x uH COM input X1 X2 X3 COM YO Y1 Y2 Oulpul Circuit diagram Input Output P i B Bk L C mmi m Load 7 8 duh 4 prea L 21860 IS da 21 6 to i a T T B T 286 ay De m a CN ES 28 4v DC 3 LO amp amp 202 i gs COM COM 8 25 8 3 9 Pulse I O Cassette Product No AFPX PLS Note The pulse I O cassette cannot be used with the FP X Control Unit Tr type High speed counter part Wem SSpecdficaions EN61131 2 Applicable type Note This is the specification when the rated input voltage is 24 V DC at 25 C As the input of the pulse I O cassette is for the counter input the response time is quick Therefore if itis used as a normal input it is recommended to add a timer by a l
482. stem registers It enables the 1 1 or 1 N communication with a master computer or PLC e he program for the computer side must be written in BASIC or C language according to the MEWTOCOL COM MEWTOCOL COM contains the commands used to monitor and control PLC operation Master qer 7 21 Outline of operation when using computer link MEWTOCOL slave Command and response e Instructions issued by the computer to the PLC are called commands Messages sent back to the computer from the PLC are called responses When the PLC receives a command it processes the command regardless of the sequence program and sends a response back to the computer MEWTOCOL COM sketch e Communication is carried out in a conversational format based on the MEWTOCOL COM communication procedures e Data is sent in ASCII format e he computer has the first right of transmission The right of transmission shifts back and forth between the computer and the PLC each time a message is sent Computer 7 Transmission program A Reception processing program lt 2 I TT hs unit number of the PLC thal sent ihe S Command message ogntmnation o whether or Check Tern not the processing was lion 1 code nator carried oul successfully ElIThe type of command The number of the PLE processed to which he command es baing sent LUN the command was used to dala
483. sters No 400 and 401 9 3 2 Input Modes and Count Incremental input mode Unit input xx xv Count T J 1 Two phase input mode increment input CY Unitinpul ON 10 LI LJ L J LT bese X2 X4 XB i ON OFF X5 Count 1 2 a Decrement input CCW Uni input w X2 X4 aM o OFF PLE Count n 2 i 3 m 2 1 i X3 X5 X7 Direction discrimination Unit input i ON OFF Ac AG AB ON Ma X7 ur Count 1 2 i 2 rons rg Doeg i Decremental input mode Unit input 1o f f 2 Ima eT lalafi Te Count Individual input mode Incremental decremental input mode Unit input ON OFF X2 X4 X6 ss oer X3 X5 XT 1 2 a4 3 2 1 2 8 8 Increasing Deceasing increasing Decreasang Count for reset input Incremental input mode Unit input ON mexsttltbFifthHL LL L oer l X7 0 2 1 2 n 1 count is prohibited The reset input is executed by the interruption at 1 on edge and 2 off edge 1 on edge Count disable Elapsed value clear 2 off edge Count enable DT90052 bit2 able disable setting of the input can be set by the reset input 9 3 3 Minimum Input Pulse Width
484. sults to a special internal relay F258 Character string 51 These instructions couple one P258 52 D character string with another Number of LEN S D These instructions determine the characters in a number of characters in a character character strinc string F260 Search for SSRC 51 The specified character is searched P260 character string Retrieving data from character strings right side Retrieving data from character strings left side Retrieving a character string from a character string 92 D ina character string 91 These instructions retrieve a S2 D specified number of characters from the right side of the character string RIGHT LEFT 51 2 D These instructions retrieve a specified number of characters from the left side of the character string These instructions retrieve a character string consisting of a specified number of characters from the specified position in the character string These instructions write a specified number of characters from a character string to a specified position in the character string A specified number of characters in a character string are rewritten e D gt i NO 264 MIDW P264 E Writing a character string to a character strinc Replacing character strings 2 0 N U zx NO Dp 5 N starting from a specified position in the character string Available
485. supply of the PLC is turned on off with the setting that the access is allowed the setting will be that the PLC is protected again Setting the Password protect function Set PLC Password Untitle1 As the dialog box is shown select as below E Hone Current status Password is not set Close Digit num ber Available retry counts 3 counts Select 4 digits or 8 digits digit number Help C 4digits Hes on 8 digits alphanumeric Match case Operation Mode Select Protect Operation Mode Access Protect 4 digits or 8 digits password Unprotect Input a password to be set 8 digits password Enter in alphanumeric okka Click Settin g S Setting for FP memory loader option Allow the download to older than Version 2 5 Set PLC Password lintitlel X Input the password for confirmation again and Enter the password in alphanumeric click OK Dio not forget this password The setting has completed Setting to allow the access to the program by inputting a password EL fimi As the dialog box is shown select as below FIE ajos E diae M i Digit number ere Select 4 digits or 8 digits dgra Mach card tg Operation Mode Puer Select Access Rae 4 digits or 8 digits password ae a ao Input a password to be set rar eee L pik eean Click Setting
486. t receive data temporarily Communication port Ethernet General purpose serial Computer link communication IEEE802 3u 10BASE T 100BASE TX Max 3 connections Server 7 16 Communication ER RIORUM Interface RS232C RS422 RS485 Item Specifications 5232 5422 isolated Note1 2 Communication mode 1 1 1 N communication Communication method Half duplex communication Two wire half duplex communication Synchronous method Start stop synchronous system Transmission line Multicore shielded line Shielded twisted pair cable or VCTF 1200 m Max 1200 m Baud rate to be set by system register Note8 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 115200 bps Computer link ASCII JIS7 JIS8 mission NM ASCII JIS7 JIS8 Binary serial communication Communication format to be set by system register bs Max 99 units No of connected units 6 7 2 units max 32 units when C NET adapter is connected Note1 When connecting a commercially available device that has an RS485 interface please confirm operation using the actual device In some cases the number of units transmission distance and baud rate vary depending on the connected device Note2 The values for the transmission distance baud rate and number of units should be within the values noted in the graph below baud rote 115 2 kbps Rm Cf ES
487. t a parameter correct parameter Interrupt Probably a hardware abnormality error 0 Stops Please contact your dealer An interrupt occurred without an interrupt Interrupt request A hardware problem or error due to Stops noise is possible A error 1 Turn off the power and check the noise conditions There is no interrupt program for an interrupt which occurred tere Stops Check the number of the interrupt program A A error 2 and change it to agree with the interrupt request Multi CPU CPU2 This error occurs when a FP3 FP10SH is used as CPU2 for a multi CPU system A unmatch Stops Refer to Multi CPU system Manual An abnormal unit is installed FP X FPOR FPOR mode FP X FP2 FP2SH and FP10SH Check the contents of special data register DT90036 and locate the abnormal unit Then turn off the power and replace the unit with a Stops new one A FP3 Check the contents of special data register DT9036 and locate the abnormal unit Then turn off the power and replace the unit with a new one MEWNET F A unit which cannot be installed on the slave station of the MEWNET F link system is Stops installed on the slave station A illegal unit Remove the illegal unit from the slave station MEWNET F The number of slots or I O points used for remote MEWNET F remote I O system exceeds the Stops limitation A i Re configure the system so that the limitation number of slots and points is within the specified
488. t and PWM output can be carried out using the pulse I O cassette AFPX PLS Single phase 2 channel or 2 phase 1 channel pulse count can be carried out for one pulse cassette AFPX PLS Also 1 ch pulse output is available Using the pulse I O cassette enables the count of the faster pulse than the input of the main unit Restrictions on the pulse I O functions of each control unit ype Input of main unit XO to X7 Input and output of Cassette mounting part 1 Pulse I O cassette AFPX PLS Cassette mounting part 2 A Available N A Not available 10 1 2 Three Pulse I O Functions There are three pulse I O functions built into the FP X Ry type High speed counter function Control unit Pulse I O cassette FP X The high speed counter function counts external inputs such as those from sensors or encoders When the count reaches the target value this function turns on off the desired output Encoder output is input to the high speed counter Roller Motor Encoder U m K 2 Inverter START STOP signal Cutter blade control signal Cutter Tape lead wire Pulse output function Pulse I O cassette omini JL Combined with a commercially available motor P driver the function enables positioning control With the exclusive instruction you can perform PEA trapezoidal control home return and JOG operation Be of 17905
489. t data left DROL D n Rotates the number of bits specified rotate PDROL by of the double words data 32 5 bits specified by D 1 D to n left 32 bit data right DRCR D n Rotates the number of bits specified rotate with carry by n of the double words data 32 flag R9009 data bits specified by D 1 D to the right together with carry flag R9009 data 32 bit data left DRCL D n Rotates the number of bits specified rotate with carry PDRCL by n of the double words data 32 flag R9009 data bits specified by D 1 D to the left together with carry flag R9009 data Bit manipulation instructions i P130 PBTS the data of D to 1 te MIGNE eee P131 reset PBTR the data of D toO oH MMC P132 PBTI BUB data of D F133 16 bit data bit test BIT Tests the value of bit position of P133 PBTT the data of D and outputs the result 5 to R900B moe P135 bits in 16 bit data PBCU data of S in D enga o 18 8 P136 bits in 32 bit data PDBCU data of 5 1 S in D Available Not available Not available partially F127 P127 F128 P128 17 62 FP2SH FP10SH Ope Description lean rand Basic function function Basic function F137 Auxiliary STMR Turns on the specified output and sl ejelele ele timer 16 bit R900D after 0 01 s x set value T T 4r Special instructions F138 Hours min Conv
490. t in 32 bits Available 2 lt Not available Not available partially FP2SH FP10SH Boo Peres Q i BCD arithmetic instructions Fm meme m o GGG P40 data addition PB pose eee data addition PDB mmm cm REP data addition PB pose oo ene n data addition PDB as suction ref a subtraction 8 digit BCD data DB 0 1 D S 1 S gt D 1 D m mann 7 ESE subtraction ms wann pos e m fefefefefele subtraction PDB 7 multiplication PB REC IEIBEGEEE multiplication m on division MUR DT9015 8 digit BCD data DB 1 S2 D S1 1 S1 S2 1 S2 5quotient division PDB D 1 D remainder DT9016 DT9015 meme p qme da increment Pes 8 digit BCD data DB 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 D a DN ni decrement PB 1 8 digit BCD data E decrement PDB 1 Data compare instructions 16 bit data CMP 1 2 R9OOA on ig R900B on 32 bit data S141 S1 S241 S2 5 R900A on compare PDCMP 141 1 2 1 S2 5 R900B on 141 1 lt 2 1 S2 5R900C on 16 bit data band S1 S3 R900A on compare PWIN 92 5 1 lt or S3 R9YOOB on S1 S2 5 R900C on Available 2 Not available A Not available partially 0 1 D 1 gt D 1 D 8 84 i o e 17 58
491. t of the control unit in the analog output K4000 Insulation KO Waiting for Conversion EFEO refresh tima 1msto2ms 19 scan lime Analog output uM Terminal layout CHO CH CHO Voltage output pu Current output COMO Current output COMI U a DEM Crane NC V1 11 COMI I L1 um rl x Linannel DAZ Voltage output Connection method With voltage output to 10V T es T X F7 F I A N Analog device pM CC X X COM With current output 0 to 20 mA UAR m Ry OL ON Analog device 0 mA to 20 mA output Conversion characteristics graph mA Z2 Y x gt 15 i m E i vi 5 i H 5 Y Qo Y 1000 2000 3000 AOOO K w Digital input value 4W Table of D A converted values Digital input value Output current mA When exceeding the rated range Digital input value Analog output value Negative value Unchanged 9 Value preceding the input of a negative value Unchanged Value preceding the input of 4001 0 V to 10 V output Conversion characteristics graph Wi i 10 A P ors m vi i amp 25 Y o i 1000 2000 3000 4000 K H Digital input value 4M Table of D A converted value
492. t output At this time the contact of the timer T or counter C in the operation memory will be rewritten Timing and counting will not take place during control e he on off state of contacts not specified will be determined by the operation result Operation during operation For small sized PLCs FP1 gt and FP X The internal relay R or output Y specified by OT or KP instruction is rewritten according to the results of operation However as the R or Y is set reset again right before the peripheral service as the above procedure C the monitoring value with the tooling software or the output to external devices is forcibly rewritten to a specified value For medium sized PLCs FP2 and FP2SH For the internal relay R and output Y specified by OT or KP instruction the value of the forced processing has a priority When rewritten by a high level instruction the result of the instruction has a priority 14 19 14 20 Chapter 15 Specifications 15 1 Table of Specifications 15 1 1 General Specifications Mem Description 0 to 55 C 40 to 70 C 10 to 9596RH at25 C non condensing Storage humidit 10 to 9596 RH at25 C non condensing AC power supply DC power supply Between input terminal and output 2300 V AC for 1 terminal min ete Between input terminals and power 500 V AC for 1 supply earth terminals 2300 V AC for 1 min e Between output terminals and min e 2300 V AC for 1 p
493. t setting 1 of CPU input Time constant setting 2 of CPU input 415 3600 bps Time constant setting 3 of CPL input 4 Time constant setting 4 of CPL input p rk PT Tool Part ame COM2 Part Cancel PEI Initialize Help COM port setting AFPX COM5 No Setting item 1 Setting value Paritycheck Odd No 413 icati 1 89 Setting of Communication cassette AFPX COM5 specified using Configurator WD IP address setting Bie intense ERE FPX ET uem p ue 192 168 1 5 FW Mika 192 1568 1 5 255 255 255 0 Sep 266 che 192 168 1 1 ior 1 1 De sull Ci aba suas Communication setting T Sah ee Baud rate 1 115200 bps 9600 bps Cammunsalinn Moin Computer Li Action Made Server Hoda Computer link Source port No 9094 Server SB Time out Source Pur fena 1628 12767 Note1 Specify the same baud rate as the Tire Ouid g 8 ns Ns Tinetut communication environment setting of the lent Satire COM1 port of the FP X Deviruken F uni Cammuneskon canes iad rara 2d amr ibis Destra Few he Source Port Tone Cnt a na Tina Setting of a computer IP address setting Interact Probacol xj Genera IP address 192 168 1 100 rui ah petras ieir gan acd Su
494. ta table headed by DT300 is used X5 HDF Fo MV H108 90052 p b Overrun process Fo Mv moo ors Pulse output diagram X3 JOG ON side bam Gum ort Motor gt 300Hz Y100 Pulse 10 40 JOG operation Minus direction While X4 is in the ON state a pulse is output from the CCW output Y 101 of the specified channel CHO Program 4 Data table H OF HF 1121 Dra 7 DT31 Control code F DMV 12 7 DT31 Frequency speed 300 Hz Control code 12 Daly 1 4 26 18 Fiz to 100 Decremenial counting CCOW X4 172 PLSH pr 310 l F Pulse output instruction JOG operation The data table headed by DT310 is used The data table headed by DT310 is used Pulses are output fromOHo and pulsas are output from CHO x5 HDF MV H1i08 DT 90052 XT Overrun process Fo My Dre Pulse output diagram i X4 JOG ON side side consent OFF Motor 300Hz Y 101 Pulse ill Reference The pulse output control instruction FO is used for the pulse output stop 10 4 4 Pulse output control instruction FO F1 10 41 10 4 9 Positioning Control Instruction F174 Data Table Control e Positioning is performed according to the specified data table
495. tallation of the USB COM conversion driver completes Click Finish Found New Hardware Wizard Completing the Found New Hardware Wizard The wizard has finished installing the software for 9 210 USB to UART Bridge Controller Click Finish to close the wizard The installation of the USB driver has been completed 6 14 With Windows 2000 Windows Me After a PC recognized the USB driver the installation is started automatically You do not need to carry out operation for the installation particularly Note that the messages during the installation are not indicated With Windows 98 Second Edition 1 After the connection the PC recognizes the USB driver automatically As the following message is shown click Next Add New Hardware Wizard Next 6 15 3 Check only Specify a location and input the following folder name in Specify a location c Program Files Panasonic MEW Control FP X USB Uncheck the other boxes and then click Next Add New Hardware Wizard C Program FilessPanasonic MEV Contra FP o New gt 4 As the next message is shown click Next Add New Hardware Wizard 6 16 9 The next message is shown and the installation of the USB driver completes Click Finish Add New Hardware Wizard The installation of the USB driver has been completed It is not necessary to install the USB COM conversion driver with Window
496. ted and the scan time for each PLC is 1 ms 0 096 Each Pem 23 1 1 x 4 31 bytes Tpc Ttx x Pem 0 096 x 31 2 976 ms Each Ts 1 2 976 3 976 ms Tit 0 096 13 2x 2 1 632 ms Given the above conditions the maximum value for the transmission time T of one cycle will be T max 3 976 x 2 1 632 1 10 584 ms Note e In the description stations that have been added refers to stations which are connected between station no 1 and the largest station number and for which the power supply has been turned on e Comparing examples 2 and 3 the transmission cycle time is longer if there is one station that has not been added to the link As a result the PC PLC link response time is longer e he SYST instruction can be used to minimize the transmission cycle time even if there are or more stations that have not been added to the link 7 72 Reducing the transmission cycle time when there are stations that have not been added If there are stations that have not been added to the link the TIk time link addition processing time and with this the transmission cycle time will be longer 7151 7152 t Tsnt TIC Tso Tic link addition command sending time T Tis link error stop command sending time Tso master station scan lime With the SYS1 instruction the link addition waiting time Twt in the above formula can be reduced Thus SYS1 can be used to mi
497. ted use of output Check whether the output has been rewritten using the high level instruction 2 Check the program flow when a control instruction such as MCR or JMP is used 13 7 13 2 5 A Protect Error Message Appears When a password function is used Procedure Enter a password in the Set PLC Password menu in FPWIN GR and turn on the Access radio button Using FPWIN GR 1 Select Set PLC Password under Tool on the menu bar 2 The PLC password setting dialog box shown below is displayed Turn on the radio button next to Access enter a password and click on the Settings button Set PLC password dialog box 4 digit password 8 digit password m PLG m Delia xj faq PLC PLC Hona mum PLC eww mem Dumi manus A dign Clans Dup mimi B digi Protec Choe in e Souris Tests Face Carica Pie Caneel degli P Ehra doh Motch cass ode f fi Protect F nonet ugs permed pasted E nber m Fass Tm Enter phain mm AS Note The password setting can be specified when the PLC is being connected online When using the master memory cassette The program editing cannot be carried out with the master memory cassette Turn off the power supply and remove the master memory 13 2 6 PROG Mode does not Ch
498. ter setting value gt e The input signal of X contact is retrieved at the timing of the normal I O update e f the partial update instruction is executed for the input in the time constant processing the time constant processing will be invalid and the input status at the time will be read out and set e The time constant processing can be performed for the input other than XO to X1F add on cassettes or expansion units by the F182 FILTR instruction e he time constant processing is invalid when the high speed counter pulse catch or interrupt has been specified 12 13 12 14 Chapter 13 Self Diagnostic and Troubleshooting 13 1 Self Diagnostic function 13 1 1 LED Display for Status Condition Status indicator LEDs on control unit The control unit has a seli diagnostic function which BRUN mERA AQ oe E identifies errors and stops operation if necessary o ex P OE x e When an error occurs the status of the status indicator talus indicator LED i O cal im meu Y mins LEDs on the control unit vary as shown in the table above 1 om UM EA status Operation ERROR Description E ALARM Light L3 Normal operation PROG mode Light on Off LED does not flash even if the forcing Stop Normal i Ps output is performed in program mode ponent Forcing input output in Run mode Flashes RUN and PROG LED Operation alternately Abnormal condition Light on
499. teristics graph AT converted value E c 7 2 8 4 Analog input range Table of A D converted values Input voltage V A D converted value 240 9 80 J 393200 90 HH 10 0 When exceeding the rated range Input voltage V Converted value 0 V or less Negative value OO 4000 Each channel data is allocated as I O data as shown below Installed slot No ee Cassette mounting part 1 Slot 0 Slot 1 ic Note e Use double core twisted pair shielded wires It is recommended to ground them However depending on the conditions of the external noise it may be better not to ground the shielding e Do not have the analog input wiring close to AC wires power wires or load 8 7 8 3 2 FP X Analog Output Cassette Product No AFPX DA2 No of output points Voltage Current Output range Digital value KO to K4000 Resolution 1 4000 12 bits Conversion speed 1 ms 1 channel Total accuracy Output impedance Output max current Output allowable load resistance Between analog output terminal and internal digital circuit part Transformer insulation Isolation IC insulation Between each channel of analog output terminals Transformer insulation Isolation IC insulation Note1 When the digital value exceeds the upper and lower limits D A conversion will not be performed Note2 Following time is required to reflect the outpu
500. th the mode selector set to the PROG mode and then switch to the RUN mode e Program the PLC so as to disregard the inputs and outputs until the outside devices are energized Note In case of stopping the operation of the PLC also have the input output devices turned off after the PLC has stopped operating Grounding When installing the PLC next to devices that generate high voltages from switching such as inverters do not ground them together Use an exclusive ground for each device The terminal block cover must be used for preventing electric shock 5 10 2 Momentary Power Failures Operation of momentary power failures If the duration of the power failure is less than 10 ms the FP X continues to operate If the power is off for 10 ms or longer operation changes depending on the combination of units the power supply voltage and other factors In some cases operation may be the same as that for a power supply reset Although the duration of the power failure for the expansion FPO adapter is 10 ms judge the permissible time as a system after confirming the permissible duration of the power failures for the DC power supply that supplies power to the expansion FPO adapter Supply the power to it from the servicing power supply for the input of the FP X control unit When the expansion unit that has a power supply built in E30 expansion FPO adapter depending on the duration of the momentary power failure only one unit may be wit
501. that is not used for other applications is specified for the near home input Note The deviation counter clear output function is not available for the CH2 and CH3 3 Reference 9 2 1 Table of Specifications 9 2 2 Functions Used and Restrictions 9 23 Single pulse input driver pulse input and directional switching input method e One output point is used as a pulse output and the other output is used as a direction output e The I O allocation of pulse output terminal direction output terminal and home input is determined by the channel used e Near home input is substituted by allocating the desired contact and turning on and off the lt bit4 gt of special data register DT90052 When using CH0 FF X Tr type Home input Near home bs ing 100 m Driver Pulse output Y1 Lirectian Input that is not used for other applications is specified for the near home input Note If the deviation counter clear output function is performed when the home return is done Y4 is used for the C14 Tr type and Y8 is used for the C30 C60 Tr type When using CH2 gt FP X Irtype Rome Near Aone 8 input X100 Driver Ya Pulse output YS _ Direction output Input that is not used for other applications is specified for the near home input When using CH1 gt Tr type Home input Near hone IP Eu Lirrver Pulse cut
502. the data of the control units that are set to prohibit uploading Keeping your programs is your responsibility Interaction with the password protect function The password setting can be specified for the FP X that this function is set at the same time Also this function can be specified for the FP X that a password is set 11 3 1 Upload Protection Setting Following two methods are available to set the upload protection 1 Set in the control unit using the programming tool 2 Specify the information on the upload protection in the master memory cassette and set in the control unit Setting using FPWIN GR 1 Select Online Edit Mode under the Online on the menu bar or press the CTRL and F2 keys at the same time to switch to the Online screen 2 Select or Upload settings under Tool on the menu bar The following display will be shown X Select Set that PLC cannot be uploaded NEN Se Close Click Execute Set that PLC cannot be uploaded C Release the upload protection by compulsion Help Specifying the information on upload protection in the master memory cassette Programs cannot be transferred from the FP X prohibited uploading to the master memory cassette The upload protection can be set to the master memory cassette from the FP X that is not prohibited uploading using the Internal memory to Master memory function of the programming tool At that time if there is the inf
503. the power supply of the PLC and transfer the program to the master memory cassette using Internal memory gt Master memory in the programming tool e Reference For the information on the transmission to the master memory cassette 12 2 2 Master Memory Function 11 6 11 3 Upload Protection This function is to prohibit reading programs and system registers by setting to disable program uploading on the FP X If the FP X is set to prohibit program uploading note that the ladder programs and system registers will be disabled to be uploaded after that However editing the files that are controlled with a PC can be carried out online using the programming tool Note that the programs will be broken if the programs are not absolutely matched When using this function store ladder programs as files without fail Unperformable operations on the FP X set to prohibit uploading 1 Uploading ladder programs and system registers to PCs 2 Transferring programs to the master memory cassette and FP memory loader The setting for this function can be cancelled using the programming tool however all ladder programs system registers and password information will be deleted when the setting is cancelled Note When cancelling this setting forcibly All programs and security information will be deleted when the upload protection setting is cancelled We cannot restore the deleted programs even if you ask us We cannot read
504. the target unit is on before using the data 2 Conditions ON When the PLC link is normal for on off OFF If transmission is stopped a problem has occurred or a PLC link is not used Operation mode relays For PC PLC link 0 R9070 to R907F correspond to unit no 1 to 16 For PC PLC link 1 R9090 to R909F correspond to unit no 1 to 16 The operation modes RUN PROG can be checked for any given PLC Conditions ON When the unit is in the RUN mode for on off ON When the unit is in the PROG mode PLC link transmission error relay R9050 This relay goes on if a problem is detected during transmission wto 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 12 13 14 t5 16 ON When a transmission error has occurred in the PLC link or when there is an error in the setting for the PLC link area OFF When the unit is in the PROG mode Conditions for on off Key Point Monitoring the PC PLC link status In FPWIN GR the PC PLC link status items such as the transmission cycle time and the number of times that errors have occurred can be monitored by selecting the PC PLC link switch on the FPWIN GR Status Monitor screen Note Remote programming of the linked PLCs is not possible 7 67 7 5 4 Connection Example of PC PLC Link When using three PLCs In the example shown here link relays
505. thus index registers are very convenient when handling large amounts of data 14 3 2 Memory Areas Which can be Modified with Index Registers e Index registers can be used to modify other types of memory areas in addition to data registers DT Example IOWXO IOWY1 IOW RO IOSVO IOEV2 IODT100O e Constants can also be modified Example I0K10 I0H1001 e An index register cannot modify another index register Example 1010 1011 e When using index modification with an instruction which handles 32 bit data specify with IO In this case 10 and 11 are handled together as 32 bit data Higher 16 bit area Lower 16 bit area Contents of I1 Contents of IO 1 1 In 14 3 3 Example of Using an Index Register Repeatedly reading in external data Example Writing the contents of input WX3 to a sequence of data registers beginning from DTO RU 74 Fo KO 10 R1 Dil 1 0 MV WX3 IODTO 3 F35 1 10 CD When RO turns 0 is written to index register 10 2 When the R1 turns on the contents of input WX3 is transferred to the data register specified by IODTO 3 Add 1 to IO In this case the contents of IO will change successively and the destination data register will be as follows Input times of H1 Contents of 10 Destination data register 1st 0 DTO 2nd 1 DT1 3rd 2 DT2 Inputting and outputting data based on a number specified by an input Example 1 Setting a timer number specified by a digital
506. time and target value Enables automatic home return operation AFPX PLS Trapezoidal control Causes pulses to be output as long as the execution condition is on A F172 operation target value can also be set so that PLSH pulse output stops at the point when the target value is matched SPOH accordance with the data table Enables pulses to be output using linear interpolation control by specifying the composite speed the acceleration deceleration time and the target value F175 SPSH Only when using 2 Linear interpolation units of AFPX PLS Note e With the Ry type the pulse I O cassette AFPX PLS is necessary to use the pulse function Setting the system register When using the pulse output function set the channels corresponding to system registers 400 and 401 to Use output YO to 2 as pulse output or Use output YO as PWM output 10 20 10 4 2 Types of Pulse Output Method and Operation Modes Clockwise counter clockwise output method p Forward or Ewe vioo PO cow pulse vien Incremental counting Decremental counting Pulse direction output method forward OFF reverse ON Forward Ravasi incremental counting Decremental counting Pulse direction output method forward ON reverse OFF Foward i Reverse Pulse Pul
507. tion set 1 to stop operation set 0 Verification is possible in FPWIN GR Pro at I O error in the status display function MEWNET TR communication error FP3 and FP10SH Check the contents of special data registers FP3 DT9002 DT9003 FP10SH DT9 0002 DT90003 and the erroneous master unit and abnormal I O unit Then check the unit Selection of operation status using system register21 to continue operation set 1 to stop operation set 0 Verification is possible in FPWIN GR Pro at I O error in the status display function FPX gt gt lt LL AI AIA A Available Intelligent unit error unit verify error Opera tion status Description and steps to take An abnormality in an intelligent unit FP FP X Check the contents of special data register DT90006 and locate the abnormal intelligent unit application cassette for FP X FP2 FP2SH and FP10SH Check the contents of special data registers DT90006 DT90007 and locate the abnormal intelligent unit Then check the unit referring to its manual Selection of operation status using system register22 to continue operation set 1 to stop operation set 0 FPS Check the contents of special data registers DT9006 DT9007 and locate the abnormal intelligent unit Then check the unit referring to its manual Selection of operation status using system register22 to continue operation set
508. tion to FP series PLCs FPO Using AFPX COM1 gt 1 channel RS232C type Connection with FPO COM port FPO COM port side FP X side 5 pin terminal 3 pin terminal edom sb L RD Receive Data RD RS Reawest to Send 8 G5 CS Clear to Send o Signal Greund oG Using AFPX COM2 gt 2channel RS232C type Connection with FPO COM port FPO COM side FP X side 5 pin terminal 3 pin terminal einmal names 50 Receive Dats RD To ether device Using AFPX COM4 gt Combination of 1 channel RS485 and 1 channel RS232C type Connection with FPO COM port To ether device FP X side 5 pin terminal fmia _ ae FPO COM port sida 3 pin tarminal Send Data ED RD jReceweData RD SG Signal Ground EIE Using AFPX COM5 gt Combination of Ethernet and 1 channel RS232C type Connection with FPO COM port FPO COM port side pin terminal FP X side 5 pin terminal Symbol Receive Data RD SG Signal Ground 7 50 Procedure of communication In this example an FP series PLC is connected to COM1 port K100 and K200 are respectively being stored in DTO and DT1 of the PLC on the other end Apra e FP series PLC Data register RS232C port Data ores read commandg e i SE irr superied Bevel fer i 2 Data wil E389 MIT
509. to H 5 52 s 01 oH No 47 changinc Change the communication conditions for the COM port or tool port based on the contents specified by the character constant Change the password specified by the PLC based on the contents specified by the character constant Set the interrupt input based on the contents specified by the character constant Set the system setting time when a PLC link is used based on the contents specified by the character constant Change the communication conditions of the COM port or tool port for MEWTOCOL COM based on the contents specified by the character constant Change the operation mode of the high speed counter based on the contents specified by the character constant Change the setting value of the system register for the PLC link function Q Available 2 Not available A Not available partially 1 With FP X Ver2 0 or later and FP Ver 3 10 or later the baud rate can be selected from 300 600 or 1200 bps 2 With 32k type the 8 digit password can be selected 3 With 32k type and FP X Ver1 10 or later it can be used 17 52 FP2SH FP10SH FP2SH FP10SH H e oco gin Data compare instructions instructions 16 bit ST Begins a logic operation by comparing two 16 bit data in the comparative condition S1 S2 data compare Start 5 85D Begins a logic operation by comparing two 16 7 1
510. to switching to RUN mode make a program as below using R9014 initial pulse off relay R9014 is a special internal relay which is off during the first scan and turns on at the second scan Example 1 DF leading edge differential instruction AO YO H DF ii R9014 X0 R9014 H IA OF RUN Power on Even if X0 was initially on the input condition for the DF instruction is off lo on al Ihe second scan therefore derreative output is obtained Example 2 CT counter instruction AL CT ifr 1 Add E8014 AU ee RUN Paver an XD cmoo gunting operation Even if was initally an the inpiir condition far the counter is eff To on atthe second scan therefore the count im incremented 14 10 14 5 3 Precautions When Using a Control Instruction e f a leading edge detection instruction is in a control instruction it will be executed only under the following condition The leading edge detection instruction was off when the execution condition of the previous control instruction was reset and the leading edge detection instruction is on when the execution condition of the current control instruction becomes on e When a leading edge detection instruction is used with an instruction which changes the order of instruction execution such as MC MCE JP or LBL the operation of the instruction may change as follows depending on input timing Take care regarding th
511. tored in the D DGRY S D Converts the 32 bit binary data of PDGRY 5 1 S to gray code and the converted result is stored in the D 1 D S D Converts the gray codes of S to P237 binary data PGBIN binary data and the converted conversion result is stored in the D F238 32 bit gray code DGBIN S D Converts the gray codes of S 1 S P238 binary data PDGBIN to binary data and the converted code conversion F237 16 bit gray code GBIN ASCII binary ATOB data conversion conversion result is stored in the D 1 D F240 Bit line to bit COLM S The values of bits 0 to 15 of S are P240 column PCOLM D stored in bit n of D to DC 15 conversion F241 Bit column to bit LINE S n The values of bit n of S to S415 P241 line conversion PLINE D are stored in bits O to 15 of D Binary data gt BTOA 91 Converts multiple binary data to ASCII 92 n multiple ASCII data 4 conversion D 51 Converts multiple ASCII data to 52 multiple binary data D ASCII data ACHK 1 Checks the data strings to be check 2 used in F251 ATOB instruction Jo sem A MEM n n m Character strings instructions Comparing character F257 P257 SCMP 91 These instructions compare two specified character strings and o strings output the judgment re
512. tput is OFF HSC counting method Decremental When the current position value of elapsed value area is 5000 the pulse of 4000 is output from CCW by executing the pulse output instruction with the target value 1000 and the current position will be 1000 Home return e When executing the F171 SPDH instruction the pulse is continuously output until the home input X4 X5 X6 or X7 is enabled for the C14 Tr type X4 X5 or X6 e o decelerate the movement when near the home position designate a near home input and set bit 4 of special data register DT90052 to off on off e he deviation counter clear output can be output when home return has been completed However the deviation counter clear output is available only for CHO and CH1 JOG operation e Pulses are output from the specified channel while the trigger for F172 PLSH instruction is in the ON state Also the pulse output can be stopped when the specified target value is matched e he direction output and output frequency are specified by F172 PLSH instruction 9 21 Precautions on programming Flag conditions The uses of the flag in the program R911C Control flag CHO R911D Control flag CH1 R911E Control flag CH2 R911F Control flag CH3 Note Turns on during execution of pulse output instructions and then maintains that state during pulse output from CHO This flag is the same for instructions F166 to F175
513. tput terminal and internal digital circuit part Transformer insulation Isolation IC insulation Between each channel of analog output terminals Transformer insulation Isolation IC insulation Note1 When the analog input values exceed the upper and lower limits the digital values maintain the upper and lower limit values As the resolution is 12 bits the higher 4 bits of the input contact are Insulation always O Note2 Following time is required to reflect the analog data in the input of the control unit Analog input ene 1 msto 2 ms Dto scan time KADDO WX1D Note3 Averaging cannot be processed with the cassette If averaging is necessary use a ladder program to execute averaging process No of output points Voltage _ Digital value Resolution Conversion speed Total accuracy Output impedance Output max current Output allowable load resistance Between analog output terminal and internal digital circuit part Transformer insulation Isolation IC insulation Between analog output terminal and analog input terminal Transformer insulation Isolation IC insulation Insulation 8 11 Terminal layout 1 Cumentinpt 1 Cumentinpt Input range selection SEL 9 0 to 10 V or A9 wo p rode 0 to 5 V 0 to 20 mA pu M ts re Voltage output 1 Current output Common for output Note The CHO and CH1 will be the same range according to switching
514. tputCW j PuseouputCOW X0 X1 X2 X6 X4 YO Y1 X7 X5 Y2 Y3 9 46 Restrictions on positioning data setting e Designate settings for the target position and moving amount so they are within the following range Allowable range 8 388 608 to 8 388 608 e When using in combination with other positioning instructions like F171 designate so the target value is within the above range even in those instructions Sample program Continuous interpolation control e Using the linear interpolation function perform positioning control that draws trajectory like the one shown below LX nxis CHO P2 10000 0 CV direction os X F4 0 10000 P4 10D00 10000 Y axis direction Relay allocation R20 From P1 to P2 start R911D Pulse output flag CH1 R21 From P2to stat R22 From P3 to P4 stat R23 From P4 to P1 R2F Positioning done Data register allocation DTO to DT1 Control eode Control code when executing linear interpolation absolute DT2 to DT3 Startup speed 2000 Hz User setting DT4 to DT5 Target speed 2000 Hz area for DT6 Acceleration de mE linear celeration time interpolation DT8 to Target position opecify the target position of X axis when moving X axis from P1 P2 gt gt P4 gt P1 Target position opecify the target position of Y axis when moving from P1 P2 P4
515. tric sensor or proximity sensor the use of a bleeder resistor is recommended as shown below The formula is based on an input impedance of 5 6k The input impedance varies depending on the input terminal number Precaution when using LED equipped limit switch LER E If the input of PLC does not turn off because of equipped Bleeder rex the leakage current from the LED equipped limit Imit switch bead switch the use of a bleeder resistor is recommended as shown below Power supply for input r Internal recsbor of limit ewiten Bleeder resistor aff voltage af input is 2 9 V Theredore when the power supply voltage is 24 V select the bleeder resistor R so that Lo a 44 24 The current will be greater than resistance mat the bleeder niegistor is 01344 amp 8xi 24 The wattage W of the resistor is Power supply voltage R VW to 5 times Servicing power supply for input Use it for input and the expansion FPO adapter Use an external power supply for the FPO expansion unit When it is used for another device confirm the consumption current of the device side before it is connected If excess current is being supplied for a long time the power supply may be damaged 5 6 2 Output Wiring Do not connect a load that exceeds the maximum switching ability to the output terminal Protective circuit for inductive loads e With
516. trol unit When the master memory cassette is not installed on the FP X control unit Status of security Security not Upload 4 digit 8 digit set protection password password Upload protection A A Sets 7m Cances 4 gitpasswrd a NA a NA When the master memory cassette is installed on the FP X control unit set protection password password say protection wa NA Camus 4ditpasswod na na NA n A Available N A Not available 11 13 11 14 Chapter 12 Other Functions 12 1 Transfer Function between Memories Flow of program information Selectable whether to transfer F ROM dala area and comments or not Data not to be transferred will be erased Control unit Internal memory Master casselle internal F ROM Syslem registers Ladder programs Comment data Master memory Transfers storage data RAM to ROM ROM to Transfers verification unmatched data ginge X x transfer PROG to RUN auto transfar Specified transfer by ta l software in PROG mode FROM data area to operation memory OF Operation memory DT to F ROM dala area data are transferred RAM to ROM transfer function All points of the contents of the DT in the internal RAM are transferred to the internal F ROM data area This function is used to transfer large volumes of the default data to be
517. ts gt 9 1024 points 2 for initial setting Timer 1008 points TO to T1007 Counter 16 Timer points C1008 to C1023 Counter T C Timer can count up to in units of 1ms 10ms 100ms or 15 32767 Counter Can count up to 1 to 32767 Link relay L 2048 points LO to L127F C14 12285 words DTO to DT12284 Dat ter DT Special data register DT 374 words 384 words gt Note9 D D E c 9 256 words LDO to LD255 None 14 words 10 to ID Unlimited points Master control relay points MCR 256 points No of labels JP and LOOP 256 points No of step ladders 1000 stages No of subroutines 500 subroutines 15 N Relay type Ci cso ce co C14 Input 14 programs periodical interrupt 1 Input 8 programs periodical interrupt 1 No of interrupt programs di prag prog Available Sampling by commands Sampling at regular time intervals For one sampling 16 bits 3 words C14 300 samples C30 C60 1000 samples All comments including I O comments explanatory notes interlinear comments can be stored Backup battery is not necessary 328 kbytes PLC link function Max 16 Lus relay 1024 points link 2015186 128 Data transmission and remote programming is not possible Availabe o O Program editing during RUN Available Sampling trace Single ph
518. tting the FP X as the master Note that the unit numbers for the GV and FP X are not duplicated 7 113 7 7 14 Initialization Procedure Overview e The Ethernet communication environment setting of the AFPX COM5 can be initialized Initialization procedure Switch 1 Turn on the switch at the back of the AFPX COM5 2 Install the AFPX COM on the FP X and turn on the power supply The ERR LED of the AFPX COM5 flashes every 5 seconds Initialization completes 4 Turn off the power supply of the FP X Remove the AFPX COM5 5 Turn off the switch at the back of the AFPX COMO 6 Install the AFPX COM5 on the FP X and turn on the power supply Note The Ethernet communication setting including the IP address cannot be changed when the switch at the back of the AFPX COM5 is on Always turn it off after initialization Setting for initialization IP address setting F lo an Maz ET zm 192 1681 1 Cere Communication setting EUER IM Communication protocol ee Sse Baud rate COM1 9600 bps Byte baee zio dugm wur Sr doc E Computer link Source port No 9094 Duma Puri is LI Time out LE i b assa Cete 17 amm ur ow Daun P by m a epe a Tamka Poet amp E Bn mur 1 114 Chapter 8 Application Cassette 8 1 Expansion of Application Cassette Following two methods of expansion a
519. turns on or flashes Operation will not begin even after switching to the RUN mode Remote operation cannot be used to change to RUN mode Clearing a syntax check error By changing to the PROG mode the error will clear and the ERROR will turn off Steps to take for syntax error Change to the PROG mode and then execute the total check function while online mode with the programming tool connected This will call up the content of error and the address where the error occurred Correct the program while referring to the content of error 17 76 Self diagnostic Error This error occurs when the control unit CPU unit self diagnostic function detects the occurrence of an abnormality in the system The self diagnostic function monitors the memory abnormal detection abnormal detection and other devices When a self diagnostic error occurs The ERROR turns on or flashes The operation of the control unit CPU unit might stop depending on the content of error and the system register setting The error codes will be stored in the special data register DT9000 DT90000 n the case of operation error the error address will be stored in the DT9017 DT90017 and DT9018 DT90018 Clearing the self diagnostic error At the STATUS DISPLAY execute the error clear Error codes 43 and higher can be cleared You can use the initialize test switch to clear an error However this will also clear the contents of operat
520. tus Display in the menu bar Execute Clear Error e An error can be cleared by turning the power off and on in PROG mode however the contents of the operation memory except the hold type data will be cleared e An error can also be cleared by executing a self diagnostic error set instruction F148 e f the mode selector is set to RUN RUN will resume as soon as the error is cleared So if the cause of the error is not removed the error may seem not to be cleared 14 7 14 4 4 Points to Check in Program 1 Check if an extraordinarily large value or negative value was stored in the index register Example When a data register is modified using an index register RO H Fo MV DTO lODTO In this case index register modifies the address of data register If data in 10 is too large it will exceed the addressable range of the data register The last address of the data register is DT32764 so if the contents of IO exceeds 32764 an operation error will occur The same is true when the contents of lO a negative value 2 Is there any data which cannot be converted using BCD BIN data conversion Example When BCD to BIN conversion is attempted RO H F81 BIN DTO DT100 In this case if contains a hexadecimal number with one of the digits A through F such as 1244 conversion will be impossible and an operation error will result Example When BIN to BCD conversion is attempted
521. ue 400 ms can be changed using SYS1 system register instruction Tls 7 x Ttx sending time per byte Ttx 1 baud rate x 1000 x 11 ms Approx 0 096 ms at 115 2 kbps Tso Master station scan time Calculation example 1 When all stations have been added to a 16 unit link the largest station number is 16 relays and registers have been evenly allocated and the scan time for each PLCs is 1 ms Ttx 0 096 Each Pem 23 4 8 4 71 bytes Tpc Ttx x 0 096 x 71 6 82 ms Each Ts 1 6 82 7 82ms Tit 0 096 x 13 2 x 16 4 32 ms Given the above conditions the maximum value for the transmission time T of one cycle will be T max 7 82 x 16 4 32 1 130 44 ms Calculation example 2 When all stations have been added to a 16 unit link the largest station number is 16 relays and registers have been evenly allocated and the scan time for each PLC is 5 ms Ttx 0 096 Each Pem 23 4 8 4 71 bytes Tpc Ttx x 0 096 x 71 6 82 ms Each Ts 5 6 82 11 82 ms Tit 0 096 13 2x 16 4 32 ms Given the above conditions the maximum value for the transmission time T of one cycle will be T max 11 82 x 16 4 32 5 198 44 ms 7 71 Calculation example 3 When all but one station have been added to a 16 unit link the largest station number is 16 relays and registers have been allocated evenly and the scan time for each PLC is 5 ms Ttx 0 096 Each Ts 5 6 82 11 82 ms TIt 0 0
522. unication cassette FP X communication cassette FP X communication cassette communication cassette 5 wire type 1 channel RS232C 3 wire type 2 channel RS232C 1 channel RS485 RS422 isolated e 1 channel RS485 isolated e 3 wire type 1 channel RS232C e Ethernet e 3 wire type 1 channel RS232C e 2 channel RS485 isolated non isolated between channels Product No AFPX COM1 AFPX COM2 AFPX COM3 AFPX COMA AFPX COM5 AFPX COMG 7 N 1 channel RS232C Type Product No AFPX COM1 This communication cassette is a 1 channel unit with a non isolated RS232C port RS CS control is possible LED indication Terminal layout cy LED COM Sp HD AS C3 PLI COM 0000 Signal Ground Note1 RS Request to Send is controllable by the SYS1 instruction Note2 Data cannot be sent without the pin CS Clear to Send When using with a three wire port short circuit the pin RS and CS Note3 With the C30 or C60 type when the USB port is used the RS and CS signals are invalid cannot be controlled __ 1 communication 1 N communication Computerlink Available General purpose serial communication Available MODUSRTU Available Note Number of units is 2 2 channel RS232C Type Product No AFPX COM2 This communication cassette is a 2 channel unit with a non isolated three wire RS232C port Name Signal direction LED
523. unit t Unis nel Never run Rad wires iam a sinole unit 15 two other units Correct winng oN OAL hire wiring XU lA With 1 N communication the various RS485 devices are connected using twisted pair cables Use only one and terminals AFPX COM4 Connection diagram FP X side 5 pin terminal M um eee ine 1 rnin ing T pt E Sena Data To divite am pe wih E485 port Receive Data Ground In case of using the AFPX COM4 connect two cables each to the terminal terminal Use the wires of the same cross sectional area which should be 0 5 mm AFPX COM6 Connection diagram FP X sid amp 5 pin terminal Ee pamm mm KT enema nie 5 with 95485 Transmissien ine 1 up a bk To extemal devica Transmission lese 1 lt 2 4c ns Be To osiem P GEM pe HILT 485 port a x Te veia pe with Eg port In case of using the AFPX COM6 connect two cables each to the terminal and terminal Use the wires of the same cross sectional area which should be 0 5 mm Note Non insulated between the COM1 and COM2 Setting of terminal unit The terminal unit is specified with the dip switch located in the communication cassette E um mu mm gm To conversion adapter of computer connecbon
524. urn with the FP X Type and Type II Type home return The home input is effective regardless of whether or not here is a near home input whether deceleration is taking place or whether deceleration has been completed Without near home input With near home input Speed Home input ON Speed Mear home input ON input ON Max speed Max speed Initial speed g Initial speed E Home input rs effective at any tima Home input ON during deceleration Mear home speed input ON Home Input ON Max speed Initial speed OH Type 1 home return In this mode the home input is effective only after deceleration started by near home input has been completed Speed Near home Input ON Home Max speed Input ON Initial speed Home input is effective only after deceleration has been completed de Reference The pulse output control instruction FO is used for the near home input 10 4 4 Pulse output control instructions FO F1 gt 10 35 Sample program Home return operation using CHO Minus direction When X2 turns on a pulse is output from CCW output Y 101 of the specified channel CHO and the return to home begins When X100 turns on deceleration begins and when X102 turns on home return is completed After the return to home is completed the elapsed value areas DT90348 and DT90349 are cleared to O OV 24 V DC Ry sAFPX PLE CE
525. ut No 3 Stop when an 1 0 verification error occurs Usage settings 1 for CPU input Usage settings 2 Far CPL input Usage settings for CPU output ff 26 Stop when an operation error occurs Special inputi Special inputs Software filter settings 1 of CPU input Software filter settings 2 of CPU input Software filter settings 3 of CPU input Software filter settings 4 of CPU input Tool Part Nod Alarm Battery Error COM Part COM Cancel 3d F Initialize Help Example1 When allowing duplicated output Turn off the check box for No 20 When operation is resumed it will not be handled as an error Example2 When continuing operation even a calculation error has occurred Turn off the check box for No 26 When operation is resumed it will be continued but will be handled as an error 13 3 13 2 Troubleshooting 13 2 1 If ERROR LED is Flashing Condition The self diagnostic error occurs Procedure 1 Check the error contents error code using the programming tool Using FPWIN GR With the FPWIN GR if a PLC error occurs during programming or debugging and the RUN mode is changed to the PROG mode the following status display dialog box is displayed automatically Check the contents of the self diagnosed error Status display dialog box If the error is an operation error the error Feng em Lir Pozan address can be confirmed in this d
526. ut NPN 2 ch high speed counter AFPX PLS 1 ch pulse output Master memory realtime AFPX MRTC clock AFPX AD2 AFPX DA2 AFPX A21 AFPX TC2 AFPX RTD2 1 2 5 Related Parts __ Nam Description Product Necessary for the backup of FP X Backup battery data registers etc or for using AFPX BATT the realtime clock function For C30 C60 control unit FP X terminal block for E30 expansion I O unit C30 C60 with 21 pin cover no printing 4 pcs pack AFPX TAN1 FP X expansion cable 30 cm AFPX EC30 80 cm AFPX EC80 For Expansion adapter FPO power supply cable Length 4 m AFP0581 FPO mounting plate Used for expansion FPO slim type adapter Expansion AFP0803 T unit 10 pcs pack Note The total length of the expansion cable should be within 160 cm 1 9 1 3 Restrictions on Unit Combinations 1 3 1 Restrictions on FP X Unit add Control unit His nailon unit Expansion unit ecm al Up to 8 units can be connected Controllable I O points Number of I O points when Number of I O points when using 8 units of E30 in ntrol uni using contro unit expansion I O unit FP X C14 Control unit 14 points Max 254 points FP X C30 Control unit 30 points Max 270 points FP X C60 Control unit 60 points Max 300 points sc note Up to eight units of FP X can be connected however the restrictions on each expansion unit vary For AFPX E16 E14 Tw
527. ut Y is held 2 External input X is ignored 3 The timer T stops the clock 4 Rise and fall changes in the inputs of differential instructions DF counter instructions CT and left right shift registers are ignored Interrupt functions are stopped 6 Internal clock relays special internal relays are also stopped 7 Pulse output is stopped during the rewrite Set values for timer counter instructions All set values specified with decimal constants K in timer and counter instructions are preset in the corresponding set value areas SV Values in the elapsed value area EV do not change Operation of rewrite during RUN completed flag The rewrite during RUN completed flag R9034 is a special internal relay that goes on for only the first scan following the completion of rewriting in the RUN mode It can be used instead of the initial pulse relay following a change in the program 14 14 14 7 2 Cases Where Rewriting During Run is not Possible When the timeout error message is indicated Even if the timeout error message is indicated it is highly possible that the program in PLC has been already rewritten Carry out the following operations FPWIN GR uj Timeout error while changing program in PLE Prograni may differ from PLC Please click below Help button ta find the way haw te solve it 1 When ladder symbol mode As a ladder editing is left set it to the offline edit mode Complete the program c
528. wntten to link register LDO of unit 1 The contents of LOO in the ether units ere also changed 10 constant of 100 1 57 7 5 2 Setting Communication Parameters Setting of communication mode In the default settings the 1 port is set to computer link mode Set the communication mode using the FPWIN GR programming tool Select PLC Configuration under Options and then click port tab The PC PLC link is available for COM1 port only Dialog box of PLC system register setting PLG Configuration Untitlel Hald Man hald 1 Hold Mon hald 2 Mo410 Unit Mo 1 Na 413 Communication Format Mo 412 Comm Mode Char Bit Bits Computer Link Parity Odd Modem Enabled Stop Bit Mo 415 9600 bps 2 Time constant setting 3 of CPU input JS Time constant setting 4 of CPU input li might eh m 1 i ti n I i Daci fete 1 me 1 E 1 Ll T H Cancel ead PLI Initialize Help No 412 Communication Mode Select the COM1 port operation mode Click on MI and select PC Link Key Point e When using a PC PLC link the communication format and baud rate are fixed No Name Set Value Communication format for COM Data length 8 bits 1port Parity check Odd Stop bit 1 bit Terminator
529. y 1 2 50 1 Duty 1 4 25 B Frequency range 0 1 5 Hz to 9 8 kHz 1 48 Hz to 100 kHz 2 191 Hz to 100 kHz BOutput method 00 No counting CW 01 No counting CCW 10 Incremental counting CW 12 Incremental counting Direction output OFF 13 Incremental counting Direction output ON 21 Decrementa counting CCV 22 Decrementa counting Direction output OFF 23 Decrementa counting Direction output ON 9 38 2 Frequency Hz K constant gt Frequency range 0 1 5Hzto 9 8 kHz K1 to K9800 unit Hz Max error near 9 8 kHz approx 0 9 kHz Set K1 to specify 1 5 Hz 1 48 Hz to 100 kHz R48 to K100000 unit Hz error near 100 kHz approx 3 kHz 2 191 Hz to 100 kHz K191 to K100000 unit Hz Max error near 100 kHz approx 0 8 kHz In case of count mode set the frequency to 30 kHz or less for execuling instructions at the first time However for the medium speed channels CHZ and CH3 of the Tr type it can be set to a maximum of K20000 Hz 3 Target value Absolute value This is used when setting the target value match stop mode Absolute only Designate the target value setting in the range indicated below If an out of range value is designated the number of pulses output will be different than the designated value The target value setting is ignored in the no count mode Output method Range of target values which can be designated
530. y detected communication error The error code is stored in DT90124 R9046 Notusd O R9047 R9048 R9049 R904A R904B COM2 port communication error flag 2 port reception done flag during general purpose communicating 2 port transmission done flag during general purpose communication COM2 port SEND RECV instruction execution flag COM2 port SEND RECV instruction execution end flag Goes on if a transmission error occurs during data communication Goes off when a request is made to send data using the F159 MTRN instruction Turn on when the terminator is received during general purpose serial communication Goes on when transmission has been completed in general purpose serial communication Goes off when transmission is requested in general purpose communication Monitors whether the F145 SEND or F146 RECV instructions can be executed or not for the COM2 port Off None of the above mentioned instructions can be executed During executing the instruction On One of the above mentioned instructions can be executed Monitors if an abnormality has been detected during the execution of the F145 SEND or F146 RECV instructions for the COM2 port as follows Off No abnormality detected On An abnormality detected communication error The error code is stored DT90125 R904C to R904F Note R9040 to R904F can be changed during 1
531. y input is used X2 ON Near hame sensor ON 2000 Hz 200 Hz Hz m E 150 ms 150 ms ensar ON Aegarding the specification of acceleration deceleration specilying acceleration deceleration time No of steps and initial speed the value be calculated by the formula below Specify acceleration decalaration time in the 30 ms unit with 30 steps and in tha 60 ms unit with 60 stens 5 Acceleration decaleratian fime ms 2 Mo of steps x 1T00QyInitial speed 10 Hz 10 33 1 Control code lt H constant gt H D Fixed L B Number of acceleratondeceleralion steps 30 steps 1 60 steps I Duty on width Duty 1 2 50 1 Duty 1 4 2598 Ia Frequency range 0 1 5 Hz to 9 8 kHz 1 48 Hz to 100 kHz ll Optional mode and output type 00000 20 21 e 23 Type home return home ratur Type home return home raturn Type home return gt Type home return Type home return home return home return Il home return Il home ratum Type Il home retum Type Il hama return Type 11 home retum Type 11 home return Cw CEW Direction output OFF Direction output ON CW and deviation counter clear CCW and deviation counter clear Directon output OFF and deviabon counter clear Direction output ON and deviation counter clear Cw
532. y started Pulse execution type Clear Lund LI Resets the specified process multi alli Resets multiple processes specified by 5 ple steps e H n1 and n2 me Epon a fe fetele Subroutine instructions Subroutine When the trigger is on Executes the call CALL subroutine When the trigger is off Not execute the subroutine The output in the subroutine is maintained Output off When the trigger is on Executes the type ni subroutine subroutine When the trigger is off Not execute the call subroutine But the output in the subroutine is cleared Subroutine Indicates the start of the subroutine entry program Subroutine return Iri n Interrupt IRET EET 3 Ends the interrupt program return Interrupt ICTL H Ho Select interrupt enable disable or clear in 5 coniro S1 and S2 and execute Available X Not available Not available partially Available for FP e only 2 In the FP2 FP2SH FP10SH when the number n of a subroutine program has an index modifier the number of steps is the number in parentheses n 17 51 Oo i Special setting instructions Communica tion condi tions setting Password setting Interrupt setting PLC link time setting H Hor srsi M MEWTOCOL COM response control High speed counter operation mode changing System registers No 40
533. ype FPO expansion units can be connected as well as the exclusive expansion unit A maximum of 3 FPO expansion units can be connected using the expansion FPO adapter A personal computer can be directly connected with the USB communication port A personal computer can be directly connected with the USB cable excluding C14 The USB amp RS232C conversion adapter cable is not necessary A tool port RS232C is also equipped ee _ BRS Connected with USB port Commercial USB cables can be used as A RS232C is also equipped 1 2 High dimensional security functions to deal with copying programs The uploading disabling function prohibits uploading reading programs in the PLC main unit and prevent illegal copying It also enables to transfer the programs to the FP X master memory cassette when the uploading disabling function is specified The protection for programs can be selected from 3 security methods e 4 digit password e 8 digit password e Uploading disabling A full range of communication functions Using the Tool port RS232C provided as a standard feature on the main unit communication can be carried out with a display panel or computer Additionally communication cassettes with RS232C 5485 and Ethernet interfaces are available as an option Installing a 2 channel RS232C type communication cassette in the FP X makes it possible

User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents